Category Archives: House

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

The recipe helps you learn how to cook Bown Rice in a pressure cooker method to get the right texture. Brown rice has more fiber than regular white rice and pressure cooking brown rice reduces the cooking time of the brown rice.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Whole Rice grains with only hull removed is called brown rice. The brown rice is unpolished and hence has all the nutrition of the bran and germ intact. Whole rice has a mild nutty flavor and this rice is particularly rich in thiamine, a B vitamin and iron.

Brown Rice needs double the cooking time than the white rice. All the recipes that include any variety of white rice can be prepared with brown rice. Note that the brown rice is marginally beneficial than white rice and makes very slight difference when you are on weight moderation diets.

Rice can be cooked in a variety of ways. Personally I find the pressure cooker method quick and effective that can produce rice grains of different textures – from soft to grainy. There are a number of different types of rice grains available and you might choose the variety that your family has been eating for generations or you might want to try another new variety.

Each type of grain, when cooked produces different texture of the rice. The older the rice, the longer it takes to cook. With practice and the depending on the kind of rice you use, you will be able to arrive at the correct water proportion for cooking rice.

The pressure cooker method and the saucepan method, both yield different textures of rice. If you like soft sticky rice, then pressure cooker accomplishes that very easily. If you are looking at a grainy texture then saucepan method is a better method.

If you like this recipe, here are more recipes where you can use Brown Rice:

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

There are so many sites on the net giving you instructions on how to prepare various dishes but very few out there teaching you how to cook rice. The simplest& fastest method to cook rice is by using the pressure cooker. It is advisable to cook using a vessel inside the cooker.

1 cup of rice is more than enough for an adult.
1 cup normally refers to 200 ml of rice.
Normally 1 cups rice needs 2 & 1/2 – 3 cups of water.
The ratio of rice : water varies with the kind of rice used and the nature of the dish.

1 cup Basmati Rice – 2 cups water

1 cup Raw rice – 3 cups water.

I have used the ponni raw rice variety which requires 3 cups of water.

I have given step by step instructions with pictures for the beginners to understand.

Add water in the cooker ( little less than 1/4 of the cooker capacity). Place the plate given along with the cooker in it .(See Pic)

Wash rice well. Add needed water and keep
the vessel with rice & water inside the cooker. (See Pic)

Fit the rubber gasket properly inside the lid of the cooker as show in the picture.

Close the cooker till it fits properly and locks firmly and place it on the stove to cook.

Wait for sometime. When steam starts escaping through the vent, put the weight given along with the cooker. (See Pic)

Wait for 3 whistles (Steam is released from the vent which is closed with the weight with a sound) and switch off the gas.

Do not open the cooker immediately.Wait for the pressure to go down. ( which takes about 10-15 minutes )

Open the cooker and your rice is ready.
How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

How to cook rice in a pressure pan ? Same as above.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Sharing is caring!

  • Share 32
  • Pin 119
  • Twitter

Sona Masoori Rice in Instant Pot – A guide on how to cook the perfect Indian Sona Masoor rice in your Instant Pot multi-use programmable pressure cooker.

Okay, so first off- there is no perfect way of making rice.Some prefer it soft, some like a little bite to it and some like it super mushy.

Here is a simple table to help you with how YOU want to cook your Sona Masoori Rice in Instant Pot.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

How to make Sona Masoori Rice in Instant Pot

To make perfect soft, fluffy, non sticky Sona Masoori rice follow the steps below.

Step 1: Wash the rice

Step 2:Dump it in the instant pot inner pot along with 2.5 times the water.

Step 3:Close and set the timer for 12 minutes in Manual/Pressure cook mode, on HIGH, with the valve in sealed position.

Step 4: Let the Steam escape Naturally for 10 minutes and then Quick release.

Cooking Sona Masoori rice for Fried rice

If you are making rice for a stir fry, fried rice or variety rice- change the ratio and time as follows

1 cup rice:2 cups water and 8 minutes HIGH 10NPR

Cooking Sona Masoori rice for Curd rice

If you want to make rice that can be mashed to make curd rice or baby food,change the ratio and time as follows

1 cup rice:3 cups water and 15 minutes HIGH 10NPR

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Cooking Sona Masoori rice in Rice Mode

In this mode, instant pot evaluates the amount of rice and water and cooks the rice in low pressure.

This is perfect for newbies.The rice is cooked Al Dente in this case.

1 cup rice:2.5 cups water and Rice Mode 10 NPR

Here are some of my goto Instant Pot Indian Rice Recipes

Also Read my post on Instant Pot for Indian Food

Part 3: Making Indian Food in Instant Pot(with more than 30 recipes)

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Instant Pot Sona Masoori Rice


  • 1 Cup Sona Masoori Rice
  • 2.5 Cups Water





If you liked the recipe, please give it 5 stars and leave a comment below.

Keep in Touch Follow and like my facebook page yellowthyme!

Here are a few quick pointers on the instant pot .

I use the 6 qts DUO Instant Pot and all my recipes are tested on the same.
Here are a few quick need to knows while using an Instant Pot.

Saute & Pressure Cook Setting – These are the most used settings on the instant pot. Pressure Cook setting can also be called Manual on your multicooker.
Minimum liquid – There is a minimum liquid requirement for most instant pots. For a 6 qts IP – 1 cup is the minimum liquid required as per the manufacturer.
Burn Message- If the food starts burning this notice pops up on the instant pot and cuts off any further cooking. This message can also come if you have used the SAUTE setting before and not deglazed the pan.or if you use a bigger 8 qts pot.The minimum requirement of the liquid changes and hence you could potentially get it while using it. To solve this, add about ¼ cup of more water than the recipe calls for.
While using certain sauces like tomato sauce or cheese sauces, you may get burn message because they are more viscous than water and burn easily.To solve this, again add ¼ cup of water to the bottom of the pot first, then add the sauce and proceed with the rest of the recipe. You could also use pot in pot method for these recipes.
Pressure Build Up
Most recipes only mention the time setting you need to use while cooking in the instant pot.In actual, the total time taken to cook is time taken for the pressure build up+ time taken for actual cooking + time taken for the steam to release.
Quick Release(QR) ,Natural Pressure Release(NPR) & 10 minute Natural Pressure Release(10NPR)
Quick release(QR)– when you release the pressure valve, as soon as the cooking time is up.This release hot steam, so make sure you are careful while doing this.
Natural Pressure Release(NPR)– You open the pot only after the pressure in the IP is released on its own. This could vary depending on the Pressure setting, amount of food, size of the pot.
10 Natural Pressure Release(10NPR)
Let the pressure release naturally for 10 minutes after which you Quick Release the pressure.
What not to do in Instant Pot
-Use Instant Pot without any liquid in the pot.
-Open the lid without the releasing the pressure first.
-Keep the Instant pot on the stove- there have been a lot of instances where the instant pot has gotten burnt from the bottom on accident.
-Dump food in the instant pot without the inner pot.
-Fill the pressure cooker up till the brim.

Reader Interactions


I never comment on blogs, but just wanted to say a quick thank you. We love Indian rice, but don’t have it all that often. This type is super light and goes with pretty much anything.

Wife and I went to Costco towards the beginning of the Covid scare and this was the only rice available. Tried your chart for #3 and came out perfect in the Instant Pot.

We both agree that having this type be our only choice was actually a blessing and not a curse. Just wanted to say thank you for posting this for all us non-Indians. I look forward to digging into your blog more to see what else you have!

Hey Dean!
Thankyou for writing in.I am so glad that i could help in anyways!
Hope you find more of our recipes helpfull.

Will it be the same amount of time and NPR no matter the amount of rice (ex. 3 cups of rice)?

yes..The instant pot will just take time to come to pressure depending on the quantity.
Also, dont exceed 2/3 level in the pot.

Published: Jun 22, 2020 · Modified: Jun 21, 2022 by Bhavana Patil ·This post may contain affiliate links. As an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases.

Instant Pot Vegetable Fried Rice recipe is a quick, easy and delicious Indian Chinese style dish that can be prepared in just 15 minutes in an electric pressure cooker and makes a great weeknight or lunchbox meal that everyone will love. Veg fried rice is Vegan, Gluten-free and Kid approved!

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

I grew up eating Indo-Chinese Fried rice in India. The authentic recipe is mainly done using cooked or leftover rice. It used to be one of my commonly prepared lunchboxes when I was working in India, as it’s easy to prepare and loaded with veggies.

I have shared Paneer Fried Rice and Hawaiian Style Pineapple Fried Rice on my blog using leftover rice, and it is a great idea to pack kids lunchboxes.

When I am in a hurry to make dinner or lunch, I have recently made this one-pot Indian Chinese fried rice in Instant Pot DUO60 6 QT Pressure Cooker. They are easy to make in this instant pot and take less than 15 minutes.

DONT HAVE INSTANT POT? You can still make this recipe on the stovetop pan. I have shared a detailed recipe below.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

How to Make Vegetable Fried Rice in Instant Pot

Firstly, press SAUTE on Instant Pot. Next, add oil and once it’s hot, add minced garlic and saute for 30 secs or until aromatic.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Next, add the onions and saute for about 2 minutes till the onions turn soft.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Add the mixed vegetables, rinsed jasmine rice, water, salt, and Mix well. Deglaze the pot by scraping the bits stuck to the bottom to avoid BURN notice

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Furthermore, close the lid on the pot. Set the pot to MANUAL/PRESSURE COOK (High Pressure) and set the timer to 4 minutes.

When the instant pot beeps, let the pressure release naturally for 10 minutes and then quick release the remaining pressure manually.

Remove lid away from you. Add soy sauce, white vinegar, black pepper powder, and salt if needed. Toss everything well.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Sprinkle sliced spring onions just before serving. Instant Pot Pressure Cooker Indian Vegetable Fried Rice is ready to enjoy with Gobi Manchurian.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Stovetop Pot Method

  • In a large pan or wok, heat oil over medium-high heat.
  • Add garlic and sauté for 30 seconds or until aromatic. Then add onion and saute till they get light brown and soft.
  • Add the mixed veggies and stir fry until they are tender but crisp.
  • Then add soy sauce, vinegar, and saute on a high flame stirring regularly without getting burnt.
  • Add the cooked rice, salt, and ground black pepper to this and gently mix it evenly. Let this be in a low flame for 2-3 minutes.
  • Sprinkle sliced spring onions just before serving.

Serving Suggestions

You can generally eat Veg Fried Rice on your own since they are flavorful. But they also taste great with Indo-Chinese side dishes like


  • Rice: You can use either jasmine rice, sona masuri, or basmati in this recipe. Rice to water ratio will vary for each rice type. For example, for Basmati (1 rice:1 ½ water), sona masuri short grain (1:1 ¾), jasmine rice (1:1 ¼).
  • Protein: Add ½ cup of crumbled paneer (cottage cheese), scrambled tofu, or eggs.
  • Greens: Stir in some spinach leaves or kale towards the end of the cooking time.
  • Spicy: Add either crushed red pepper flakes or a few teaspoons of sriracha or schezwan sauce.
  • Oil: You can also use coconut oil or sesame oil for this recipe.
  • Vegetables: You can also add bell peppers and shredded cabbage after the pressure cooking.
  • Some people like adding soy sauce and vinegar after pressure cooking. Both methods work well.
  • Try to use low sodium soy sauce and if you are looking for gluten-free use Tamarior also Coconut Aminos to replace the soy sauce and it’s the best!

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Recipe FAQs

The rice variety is significant. I have used jasmine rice in this recipe. You can also use long grain basmati rice (white or brown), sona masuri for this recipe. I do not recommend using sushi rice, risotto rice, or paella rice.

You can also add the following vegetables after pressure cooking.
– Bell peppers
– Shredded Cabbage
– Broccoli
– Snap peas

Yes, you can, Add these frozen vegetables after pressure cooking and mix well with sauces.

More Indo Chinese Recipes

  • Vegetable Hakka Noodles
  • Garlic Noodles
  • Mushroom Fried Rice
  • Chapati Noodles
  • Pineapple Fried Rice
  • Paneer Fried Rice
  • Cauliflower Fried rice

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker


Table of Contents

Rice cookers have made preparing cooked brown or white rice and your favorite dish/cuisine efficient and fuss-free. You can enjoy eating a warm cup of fluffy white rice with dishes like stews and soups after a long and tiring day. As easy as a rice cooker is to use, however, there are still some guidelines to follow on cooking the perfect rice in a rice cooker.

Ever tried to cook white rice but just can’t seem to get the texture you want? Below is a detailed guide to help you through the cooking process.

Why Use Rice Cookers to Cook Rice?

Although you don’t need a rice cooker for cooking rice, it does provide a simple hands-off cooking experience that yields excellent results compared to the stove-top method.

A rice cooker is a must-have in your kitchen if you consume a lot of rice with your meals or if you’re planning on cooking plenty of rice meals in the future. You can also try out a more complicated recipe with a long cooking time using a rice cooker without worrying about fire risks.

A cooker is all about making your kitchen ventures simpler. Rice cookers are wonderful for cooking a variety of dishes quickly for a single meal or gatherings, almost the same as an instant pot.

Learning how to use this kitchen gadget may be challenging to some, particularly if you’re cooking sushi rice, glutinous/sticky rice, and other dishes like yogurt and rice pudding. There are plenty of cookers that offer multi-functionality, like a Cuckoo, Hamilton Beach, or Zojirushi rice cooker.

How Do You Cook Rice in a Rice Cooker?

Cooking time: Approximately 15 minutes (depends on unit)

  • Using cold water, rinse rice grains using a strainer or a rice washer and put the drained rice in the rice cooker. You can also use the inner pot of the rice cooker to rinse the rice directly.
  • Drain until there’s no excess water. This step is not required, but unrinsed rice tends to have a more sticky texture.
  • Add 1 to 1 ½ cups water for every 1 cup rice to the pot (or a rice and water ratio of 1:1½ ). Swirl the rice slightly to distribute evenly.
  • Begin cooking the rice in the rice cooker. When the rice is done cooking, the rice cooker will automatically switch to the ‘keep warm’ setting. Before serving, let the rice sit for 5 minutes in the pot with the lid closed.
  • Fluff the rice with a rice paddle and serve with another recipe of your choice,

Cooking Tips:

  • After you rinse the rice, you can save a second or third wash. Excess starch can do wonders to your soup or broth recipe. The first wash is usually cloudy water with all the dirt, so better throw it out.
  • Make an easy dinner by adding fat-rice meat and some spices to the rice pot while the rice cooks.
  • You can also try measuring using your index finger. Poke the rice and use your thumb to measure where the rice is on your finger. Move the tip of your finger to the top of the rice and fill water until it reaches the line you’ve measured with your thumb.
  • Wipe the bottom of the rice cooker pot with a dry kitchen towel to avoid “popping” sounds while the unit is cooking. This mostly applies to conventional rice cookers.

How to Cook Brown Rice and Other Type of Rice

Cooking Time: Approximately 15 minutes (depends on unit)

  • Using cold water, rinse rice using a strainer or a rice washer. Wash until the water runs clear.
  • Put inside the pot. Refer to the guide below for the right water to rice ratio (e.g. 1 cup of water to 1 cup of rice)
  • Cook the rice in the cooker. When done, the rice cooker will automatically switch to keep warm. Let the rice sit for 5 minutes with the lid closed.
  • Fluff the rice with a rice paddle and serve with another recipe of your choice.

The secret to cooking great brown rice, whether long grain or short grain, in a rice cooker is to get the dry rice to water ratio right. This is to ensure that your rice comes out fluffy, soft, and tasty.

If you have a brown rice recipe in mind and the procedures call for the stovetop method, why not try to adjust the recipe so that you can cook it in a rice cooker? Not only are you able to enjoy the majority of the long waiting time instead of fretting over the stove, but you also get cooked rice with higher quality.

How Do You Make Rice Not Mushy in a Rice Cooker?

You’ve probably tried cooking white rice on the stovetop but it never seemed to go well for you. Either the rice comes out partially uncooked, mushy, or straight up burnt. While a cooker might be easier to use, it can’t magically make fluffy rice.

The first thing you should always remember when making rice is to never put too much water in the cooker unless you’re making porridge. It’s also important to note that you should cook within your rice cooker yield, e.g. 3 cups for a 3-cup cooker.

It may take a few tries until you finally get the results you want, especially if the type of rice you’re cooking is difficult to cook in the first place.

What is The Ratio of Rice to Water in a Rice Cooker?

Rice texture depends heavily on the water you add to cooking. In a rice cooker, the usual rice and water ratio is 1:1. This equates to 1 cup rice to 1 cup water. You can use the measuring cup to scoop uncooked brown or white rice and add water to the pot if you prefer to be more accurate.

This ratio works best for long-grain white rice; it also appears to work well for other long-grain white rice varieties, such as basmati or jasmine rice.

For a general idea of how many cups water you should put in the cooker for 1 cup of any type of brown or white rice, follow the list below:

  • White, Long grain rice (jasmine or basmati rice) – 1 ¾ cups
  • White, Medium grain rice – 1 ½ cups
  • White, Short grain rice (Japanese rice/sushi rice) – 1 ½ cups
  • Brown, Long grain rice – 2 ¼ cups
  • Brown, Short grain rice – 2 ½ cups
  • Quinoa – 2 cups
  • Parboiled rice – 2 cups

The inner pot of your cooker comes with a measuring guide already etched on the inside, so it’s easier to use if you ever lose your measuring cup.

How Much Water Do I Add to 2 Cups Of Rice in a Rice Cooker?

More rice means more water to add for cooking. You can still use the 1:1 rice and water ratio (which is the same ratio above) for any grain size, though this is not applicable to all the rice varieties. If you’re cooking 3 cups of rice for example, you can add 3 cups of water.

When cooked, this should provide fluffy but somewhat sticky cooked rice grains, and this water to rice ratio works nicely for any number of cups in a rice cooker, though you’ll have to adjust the amount of water depending on the type of rice. Adding slightly less cups of water can leave you with looser grains after you fluff the rice.

Rice is a great staple to have in the kitchen, particularly if your household has a preference for preparing rice dishes. It pairs well with any savory recipe and is a great source of carbohydrates. Since it keeps really well in the pantry, you can have uncooked rice on hand in case of food shortages or cravings.

Whether you eat rice on a daily basis or you’re currently experimenting with different rice recipes, you can’t go wrong with exceptionally cooked rice.

Hui Yin moved from Hong Kong 🇭🇰 to the USA 🇺🇸 when she was just 8 years old. Now in her late 20’s she enjoys writing and taking long walks in the park to burn off the copious amounts of rice she eats for dinner.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

  • Share
  • Sub
  • Pin
  • Email

No more uncooked, burnt, or mushy Indian basmati rice. Make Perfect Instant Pot Basmati Rice in 25 minutes! No soaking, half the cooking time. No need to tend the pot, just set it and forget it. Oh, YES!

After conducting 2 rice experiments with Instant Pot Rice and Instant Pot Brown Rice, readers have been asking us about cooking Basmati Rice in pressure cooker.

What is Basmati Rice?

Basmati rice is a popular long grained rice traditionally from the Indian subcontinent. They’re extremely aromatic with a light nutty flavor.

What we look for in Perfect Basmati Rice?

As we often mentioned, everyone has different preferences over the same dish. For us, we love al dente and fragrant rice. So, our perfect basmati rice has to be:

  • Al dente
  • Long
  • Separate (not sticky or broken)
  • Fluffy (but not soft or mushy)
  • Just enough moisture
  • Aromatic, Fragrant
  • Full of nutty flavors

How to make Perfect Basmati Rice?

There are many discussions around the best way to make perfect Basmati Rice. Besides using a high quality basmati rice, the most important factors for making amazing basmati rice:

  • Soaking
  • Rinsing
  • Water-to-rice ratio
  • Cooking method
  • Cooking time

So time for another little experiment to find the Perfect Instant Pot Basmati Rice!! 😀

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Tools for Instant Pot Basmati Rice

  • Instant Pot Electric Pressure Cooker
  • Pyrex Glass Measuring Cup
  • Smart Weigh Digital Kitchen Scale

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Perfect Instant Pot Basmati Rice Experiment

We conducted 5 tests with Indian basmati rice using different amounts of liquid, cooking time, and pressure release methods in our Instant Pot Electric Pressure Cooker. Find the full experiment details and results below the recipe. 🙂

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Since we’re al dente fans, our perfect Indian basmati rice is Test 3’s results – fully cooked, firm with a bite, yet has a tint of softness. But if you prefer softer basmati rice, follow Test 5’s ratios and pressure cooking methods.

  • Softer Rice: If you enjoy softer rice, increase the liquid amount rather than cooking time.
  • Rinsing the Rice: If you’re rinsing the rice, it’ll throw off the rice-to-water ratio. So, be sure to reduce 3 tablespoons of water from the 1 cup of water stated in the recipe.

Watch: How To Make Instant Pot Basmati Rice Video

Can’t see the cooking video? Watch it here.

**Ratatouille – Anyone can cook**


  • Home
  • About me
  • Recipe index
  • Chutney Recipes
  • Kuzhambu Recipes
  • Biryani-Pulao-Recipes
  • Side dish for roti
  • Bachelors Recipes
  • Paneer Recipes
  • No onion No garlic recipes
  • Millet & Oats Recipes
  • Cakes & Cookies
  • Kids recipes list
  • Cooking Videos
  • Indian Grocery list – South Indian Monthly Grocery Shopping List
  • Ragi Recipes
  • Summer Recipes
  • Mango Recipes
  • Cooking basics
  • Lunch menu & Party ideas
  • Tips Tips
  • Readers voices
  • Search In Chitra’s Food Book
  • Aadi Recipes

Search Chitra’s Food Book

June 8, 2017

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Easy Sambar Sadam – Bacehlors Style Sambar Rice Recipe


How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Related Posts


There is no tamarind used.

No need to use. Tomato is enough.

Really very tasty

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Hi Chitra sambar Sadham looks simple and yummy.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Hi chitra,today made this sambarsadam for my daughter s lunch tasted yummy when I made it.consistency was perfect.hope the lunch box comes empyty today.😀

Thanks for trying Harini. Hope your daughter liked it 🙂

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Hi she likes it very much.when it was hot in the morning the consistency was perfect,but during afternoon,it has thickened and not loose enough.i added 6 cups of water.can i add extra one cup while cooking to make it loose consistency even after hours of making it.

Yes Harini, you are right. It thickens over time. Sure, you can add more water while cooking but adjust the spices accordingly else it may taste bland.Glad your daughter liked it 🙂

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Hi today I tried this recipe it came out very well. Everyone in my family likes this. Thank you for sharing the recipe

Thanks a lot for leaving your feedback. I am glad to know it 🙂

Wanted to try this recipe for kid lunch box. Jus had a query. 2 whistles enough for cooking toor dal??

Yes it’s enough to cook 2 whistles in very low flame.

Excellent recipe , my parents loved it

Thank you so much for your feedback 😊

Superb taste and consistency. I cooked one and half cup rice with one cup Tur dal. Accordingly I increased other ingredients. Drumsticks gets dissolved in it. So next time I shall cook it separately and add it to the cooked sambar rice. Thanks a lot for the yummy dish.

Thank you so much for the feedback. Next time, try keeping drumstick in a small bowl inside the cooker without adding water. It will cook perfectly. You can add at the end, mix n serve.

OK. Thanks. I shall do it next time.

Hi Chitra. Very tasty.. I tried today. Tq so much 💖

Thank you so much for your feedback 🙂

Hi.. I tried this recipe many came out very well & tasty.. thank you for the recipe

Happy to know that. Thank you so much for your feedback 🙂

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Who needs a rice cooker when you can get perfect results from the pressure cooker! Here, we show you two ways to steam rice perfectly: The classic way, right in the pot that usually works for most pressure cookers; and, the Bain Marie way, also called pan in pot, for troublesome pressure cooker/cooktop combinations or to create a one-pot meal (like in our chickpea curry and brown rice one pot).

Grains, and in particular rice, demand precise amounts of time and liquid for perfect pressure cooker results. Too much of either of these will get you soupy gummy rice… really fast. Too little will result in little inedible hard or carbonized rocks.

It’s important to note that some of that cooking time is actually taking place during the natural release. The rice continues to cook in the residual heat, steam, and pressure in the cooker. Don’t be impatient and release all of the pressure right after the cooking time is up! Each rice variety has its own time and liquid requirements which are listed in the table below.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Pressure Cooker Rice Pressure Cooking Times & Liquid Ratios

Rice Type liquid per
1 cup (250ml)
Arborio Rice (risotto) 2 cups (500 ml) 5 5 7 High or Low Slow Normal
Basmati Rice 1 1/2 cups (375 ml) 3 3 3 High or Low 10-Min. Natural
Basmati Rice (rinsed) 1 1/4 cups (315 ml) 1 1 1 High or Low 10-Min. Natural
Basmati Rice (soaked) 1 cup (250 ml) 1 1 1 High or Low 10-Min. Natural
Black Rice
(see Brown Rice)
Brown Rice 1 1/4 cups (315 ml) 22 20 18 High 10-Min. Natural
Cargo Rice
(see Brown Rice)
Carnaroli Rice
(see Arborio Rice)
Forbidden Rice
(see Brown Rice)
Jasmine Rice (rinsed) 1 cup (250 ml) 1 1 1 High or Low 10-Min. Natural
Jasmine Rice (un-rinsed) 1 1/4 cup (312 ml) 1 1 1 High or Low 10-Min. Natural
Parboiled Rice (Uncle Ben’s) 1 1/2 cups (375 ml) 5 5 5 High or Low Slow Normal
Red Rice
(see Brown Rice)
(see Arborio Rice)
Romano Rice 2 1/4 (560 ml) 5 5 5 High or Low 10-Min. Natural
Sushi Rice (rinsed) 1 1/2 (375 ml) 7 7 7 High or Low 5-Min. Natural
White long-grain Rice 1 1/2 cups (375 ml) 3 3 3 High or Low 10-Min. Natural
White short-grain Rice 1 1/2 cups (375 ml) 8 8 8 High or Low Slow Normal
Wild Rice 3 cups (750 ml) 30 25 20 High Natural

Rice cooking times are mainly the same for both stovetop and electric pressure cookers, the only exception is for very dense grains.
NOTE: Although the measurements are in cups (equivalent to 8 oz. or 250ml), the quantities can be measured using any vessel, such as a glass or mug. What is important is that the ratio of grain to liquid stay within the recommendations. Cooking time does not increase with quantity – so 1 cup or 2 cups of rice will require the same pressure cooking time.

Classic Pressure Cooker Steamed Rice

Just add the ingredients directly in the pressure cooker and go.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

My husband loves Kerala Rice. Its also called as the palakkadan matta rice. There is a red hue on the rice which is nothing but the pericarp. Its highly nutritious and rich in fibre. The traditional method can take a long time to cook. The rice is cooked in lots of water. The one basic problem that people face when cooking matta rice in pressure cooker is that the water spews out of the pressure cooker during cooking and the whole place becomes a starchy mess. This can be easily avoided by using a pot inside a pressure cooker.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Video of how to cook kerala matta rice in a pressure cooker.

Here is how to cook kerala matta rice in a pressure cooker.

Wash and soak the rice for 30 minutes minimum. You can soak up-to an hour.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Take the pressure cooker and add in one cup of water to the cooker. Take a bowl and add in the washed and drained rice. I used 1 cup of rice. Add in 7 cups of water to the bowl. Place the bowl inside the pressure cooker filled with water. Cover the cooker and cook for 8-10 whistles on medium flame. We need this many whistles as we are cooking by pot in pot method. I also like my rice to be soft. So I cook for 10 whistles. It takes about 12-15 minutes. After the said whistles, switch off the flame and let the cooker rest for 30 minutes. Do not open the lid until that time. The rice will absorb and get swollen during the resting time.

Note: I cook the rice using pot in pot method. If the water is directly added, the water spews out during cooking creating a big mess on the stove. This can be easily avoided by using pot in pot method.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

After 30 minutes, open the cooker. There will be lots of water in the bowl along with the cooked rice. Drain the rice on a colander.

Note: I do not cook the matta rice by absorption method as I find the rice to be gummy. So I always add lots of water and drain it later on. If you are worried about losing nutrition, please use the water in making chapati dough, etc…

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Perfectly cooked kerala matta rice is ready!

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

  • Share
  • Sub
  • Pin
  • Email

Learn how to cook this Perfect Instant Pot Rice (Pressure Cooker Rice) with this easy Foolproof method. Fragrant and fluffy white rice ready in just 15 minutes. Set it and forget it, no need to tend the pot. No more uncooked, burnt, or mushy rice!

Rice is such an important food in Asian cultures that it has really become a part of our cultural identity.

My dad often jokes that his life is not complete if he goes a whole day without rice. Ha! That’s why you’ll probably find at least one rice cooker in every Chinese home.

When we first got married, we bought a decent Japanese rice cooker for

$150. We’re quite satisfied with how consistent it is in making fragrant and great tasting rice.

So, we were quite skeptical if the quality of the Instant Pot Rice (Pressure Cooker Rice) can match those from our rice cooker.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Well, the answer is YES!

The best thing about cooking rice with a pressure cooker is that it’s FAST! The Instant Pot Rice is done in 15 minutes,

30 minutes faster than our rice cooker.

If you’re going to use an Instant Pot or electric pressure cooker, you’ll love how you don’t need to wait for the water to boil, tend the pot, or stir the rice like you would cooking it in a regular pot. Just set it and come back to perfect pressure cooked rice.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Rice usually Fails to Cook in a Few Ways:

  • Too watery: this means your rice is under-cooked.
  • Hard, chewy, or burnt: this means you didn’t add enough water or it’s overcooked.
  • Too mushy and sticky: this means you added way too much water.

So, the water-to-rice ratios and the cooking times are the utmost important factors for making perfectly cooked rice. Every grain is different though.

Golden Rules for Cooking Perfect Instant Pot Rice (Jasmine Rice):

  • Cooking Time (Instant Pot or other similar Electric Pressure Cookers): High Pressure for 3 minutes and 10 minutes Natural Release.
  • Water-to-Rice Ratio: 1 cup (250 ml) of cold water for 1 cup (250 ml) of white rice
    • Instant Pot users: take note that the rice measuring cup that comes with the Instant Pot is only 180 ml

These golden rules must be followed strictly for the best results.

Time for cooking rice in Instant Pot!

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Perfect Instant Pot Rice

Total Time 15 mins


  • ▢ 1 cup (230g) Jasmine rice
  • ▢ 1 cup (250ml) cold water
  • ▢ ¼ – ½ teaspoon fine sea salt or table salt optional


Share this Recipe so We can create more yummy recipes for you. Thank you 🙂

  • Share
  • Pin



Calories: 209 kcal

Course: Breakfast, Dinner, Lunch, Side Dish

Keyword: instant pot jasmine rice, instant pot rice, instant pot white rice, pressure cooker rice


Step-by-Step Guide: Instant Pot Rice

Prepare Ingredients for cooking rice in Instant Pot:

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Tools for Instant Pot Rice

  • Instant Pot Electric Pressure Cooker (10.15

Rinse Rice

First, rinse the rice under cold water by gently scrubbing the rice with your fingertips in a circling motion.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Then, pour out the milky water, and continue to rinse until the water is clear. Ensure to drain really well to ensure the water-to-rice ratio is accurate.

*Pro Tip: Don’t skip this step as it helps get rid of excess starches on the surface and prevents the rice in becoming gluey.

Pressure Cook Rice

Now, add 1 cup (230g) rice and 1 cup (250ml) cold water in Instant Pot Pressure Cooker.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Close the lid, then turn Venting Knob to Sealing Position.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

  • Pressure Cooking Method: Pressure Cook at High Pressure for 3 minutes, then Natural Release for 10 minutes.

Quickly turn Venting Knob to Venting position to release the remaining pressure. Open the lid quickly.

*Pro Tip: Be sure to cook the rice immediately after you pour the water in the Instant Pot – this prevents throwing off the water:rice ratio.

Fluff & Serve Rice

Finally, fluff perfectly cooked rice with a rice paddle or fork. Then, serve rice warm.

*Pro Tip: If the rice is a bit wet, let it rest a bit for the moisture to escape before serving.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Enjoy a wonderful meal with your perfectly cooked pressure cooker rice! 🙂

Tips for Cooking Rice in Instant Pot

1. Double the Rice Recipe: If you want to cook more rice, double/triple the amount using the 1:1 rice:water ratio with the same cooking time.

2. Rice Storage: store white rice in a sealed container in a dry and dark place.

3. Rinse the Rice: It’s important to rinse the white rice under cold water until the water is clear. This will get rid of excess starches on the surface and prevent the rice in becoming gluey.

4. Cook the Rice Immediately: Cook the rice as soon as you pour the water into the pressure cooker. If you let the rice sit in the water, the rice will continue to absorb the water, which will throw off the ratio.

5. If the rice turns out a bit wet when you open the lid, first fluff the rice with a fork to let the moisture escape through the steam. Then let it rest a bit before serving it.

How Do You Make Basmati Rice Like They do in Indian Restaurants? It is Very Simple to Make and the Rice Cooks in Less than 30 Minutes.

I am a basmati rice snob and connoisseur. Everything about basmati rice makes me happy and the perfectly cooked rice is not very hard to do.

One of the best things about Indian restaurants is free rice

I haven’t been to an Indian restaurant in the US that doesn’t serve free rice with your main course meals

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Navigate This Post

Indian Restaurant-Style Rice

What is Basmati rice?

Basmati Rice is a variety of long-grained rice that is traditionally served with Indian food. It has pointy ends and a nuttier flavor than traditional white rice.

Ever wonder why they serve free rice? I was given 2 reasons for it:

The first reason is that they are made in bulk, so, it costs them about $1 per day to make the rice. For this reason, they can give it away for free.

The second reason is probably a better reason.. Restaurants think that if they give you free rice, you will eat more entrees. Since entrees are where they make the most of their profit, it is a fruitful tactic.

So, the next time you are looking to make easy dinner recipes, try this basmati rice technique. Also, if you have a rice pudding recipe, use this method of cooking rice. Your pudding will turn out nice and soft.

After seeing these steps you will never have to wonder, “How to make basmati rice?”

How To Make Basmati Rice Without Cooker

Here are step-by-step instructions on how to cook basmati rice Indian style.

1) For this recipe, I am going to use 1 cup of basmati rice. It usually serves 2-3 people

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

2) First, we need to wash/rinse the rice. In a medium saucepan, add 1 cup of Basmati rice. Place the pan under your kitchen tap and fill it with water. There is no measurement for this because we are rinsing the rice. I like to fill it about halfway through.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

3) Using your fingers, gently stir the rice and water. You will notice that the water will get cloudy. That is a good thing. It means that the rice was packaged right after harvesting. Tilt the pan and remove as much of the water as you can. It’s ok to leave some water in it.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

4) Repeat steps 2 and 3 again. Personally, I like to rinse it the rice three times, but, two times is sufficient

5) Once rinsed, we now add water that will be used for cooking the rice. The general ratio rule is 1:5. For every cup of rice, add 5 cups of water.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

6) Place the pan on high heat. Add the cloves, cardamom, cinnamon and ghee or oil.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

7) Stir frequently so that the rice doesn’t stick to the bottom. I like to use a fork to stir because it fluffs the rice.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

8) When the rice grains have doubled in size (about 15-20 min), your rice is ready to be taken off the heat.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

9) Next comes the removal of excess water. I like to use a nylon strainer because it catches all the rice. If you don’t have it, use a colander or any strainer with holes that are tiny.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

10) Transfer to a serving bowl and enjoy with curry or other meals

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

So, this is how to make basmati rice. It’s a very quick, easy and fluffy way to make it for dinner

If you are using (affiliate link) Saffron, check out how I made my Saffron Rice Recipe using this basmati rice.

Learn more about Basmati Rice on Wikipedia.

PUBLISHED August 21, 2020 · MODIFIED February 28, 2022 · BY [Urvashi Pitre] · 1020 words. · About 6 minutes to read this article.· This post may contain affiliate links · As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases· 53 Comments

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Pressure Cooker Rice and Dal is Indian comfort food made easy. Once you learn how to make rice and dal at the same time in your Instant Pot, putting together a nutritious dinner will be easy as—well as rice and dal!

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

What Makes This Rice and Toor Dal Recipe So Great?

  • Fast. Ready in under 30 minutes.
  • Easy. A one-pot Instant Pot recipe.
  • Authentic. All of the flavors you would expect from Indian food.
  • Vegetarian. A great choice for Meatless Monday, or any other day of the week.
  • Delicious. The epitome of comfort food.

Ever wondered how to make rice and dal in a pressure cooker at the same time? Well, I’m about to show you.

Unlike American meals where every day is something different, Indian meals have certain elements in common every day.

They traditionally have rice, dal, chappati, a vegetable, usually a salad/cold vegetable, a chutney of sorts, and plain yogurt.

In this recipe, the toor dal is already made when done, with no extra steps required. Even more efficient! It also tastes different from a day fry so it’s a nice way to mix it up a bit. For this recipe, I used Toor Dal.

How Long Does It Take To Cook Dal In A Pressure Cooker?

Unlike when you try to cook dal on your stovetop, it cooks quite quickly in the Instant Pot. Believe it or not, it only takes 20 minutes to cook your Instant Pot Rice and Dal.

How To Make Rice And Dal Recipe In Your Pressure Cooker

Okay, I am going to show you each of the steps here so we know how to do this.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

  1. First, you heat the Instant Pot. When it’s hot, add oil. When the oil is hot, add mustard and cumin seeds, ginger, garlic, and serrano.
  2. Then, you’re going to add the onions and tomatoes, and all the spices. You just want to let the spices bloom a little. You put them on top of the veggies so they don’t burn.
  3. Add the dal, and the water. I’m using split yellow pigeon peas here, or Toor dal, but you can do this with any type of split lentils.
  4. On top of that trivet, you’re going to put your rinsed rice, water to cook the rice, ghee, and salt. Notice I don’t cover the rice. You don’t need to. If you’re making some kind of cake or something that needs to be kept dry, that’s different. But for rice, I rarely cover it.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

5. On top of that trivet, you’re going to put your rinsed rice, water to cook the rice, ghee, and salt. Notice I don’t cover the rice. You don’t need to. If you’re making some kind of cake or something that needs to be kept dry, that’s different. But for rice, I rarely cover it.

6. Cook at high pressure for 10 minutes, and allow it to release pressure naturally for 10 minutes. Then release all remaining pressure.

7. Using little silicone mitts, carefully remove the rice, as well as the steamer rack.

8. Check the consistency of the dal. You want a thick mixture akin to porridge. Serve each bowl with rice and dal, and pass around some extra ghee or whatever you’re using as a substitute to pour over your piping hot and lovely rice and dal.

Love how easy it was to make this toor dal in your Instant Pot? Here’s a complete guide to making Instant Pot Beans and Lentils.


  • Instant Pot Butter Chicken is an easy 30-minute dinner and you can make rice on top of it, as the video shows.
  • Pressure Cooker Rice and Dal is a great vegetarian rice dinner.
  • This Lebanese Lentil and Rice dish is another great Vegetarian Instant Pot recipe.
  • Instant Pot Indian Khichadiis comfort food in a bowl!
  • Instant Pot Risotto with Shrimp is another one-pot comfort meal.
  • Buffalo chicken casserole for the days you want low carb recipes
  • You might also like low carb Chicken Biryanithat uses riced cauliflower.
  • Chicken and Mushrooms are a great combo.
  • My kids love Instant Pot Pork Chops with Rice and Vegetables
  • Zucchini Lasagna– You won’t even miss the pasta.
  • Haluski Recipe – A wonderful cabbage and noodles recipe.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

If you love a great comfort meal, an easy dinner, or the traditional Indian flavors in this Instant Pot Rice and Dal, make sure you share this recipe with your friends on Facebook and Pinterest so they can try it too.

Published: Aug 2, 2016 · Last Modified: Apr 14, 2020 by Kanan Patel / 4 Comments

Veg pulao recipe made in pressure cooker – Yes the QUICKEST version of pulao that can be made if you are in short of time.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

For the mixed vegetables, use whatever you have handy in the fridge. You can keep the frozen vegetable mix in your freezer and use that. This will reduce the prep time and pulao can be ready in 15 minutes only.

There are many different kinds of pulao recipes, but mixed veg pulao is one of the healthiest because we are adding good amount of veggies.

I prefer to add lots of veggies in my pualo. But many prefers fewer veggies, it is up to you. You can increase or decrease the quantity.

I make this very often in the mornings for hubby’s lunch. Whenever I am lazy to cook roti-sabzi for lunch, I make this quick fix. And pack raita/yogurt in separate container. We are good to go.

How to make veg pulao recipe in pressure cooker (Step by Step Photos):

1) Wash the rice under running cold water till water runs clear.

2) Take that in a large bowl and add enough water. Soak them for 15-20 minutes. After the soaking time discard the water and keep it aside.
How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

3) While the rice is soaking, prep all the ingredients. Chop the veggies and keep them ready.

4) Also prep the whole spices needed for pulav.
How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

5) Heat the oil in a pressure cooker on medium heat. Once hot add cumin seeds and let them sizzle.

6) Then add whole spices (bay leaf, cinnamon stick, cloves, black peppercorns, green cardamoms, black cardamom and mace). Saute for a minute or till you have nice aroma of the spices.
How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

7) Now add chopped onions, ginger paste, garlic paste and slit green chilies.

8) Mix and saute till the onions get translucent or light pink in color.
How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

9) Then add all the veggies. I have used tomato, green beans, carrot, potato, corn and capsicum.

10) Mix well and cook for 2 minutes.
How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

11) Add salt, black pepper powder, kasoori methi and garam masala.

12) Mix well.
How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

13) Now add drained rice.

14) Mix and cook for 2 minutes.
How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

16) Squeeze the lemon juice.
How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

17) Cover the cooker with lid, put the weight on. Cook on medium-high heat for 2 whistles. Then turn off the stove. Let the pressure go down by itself and then open the lid.

18) Discard the whole spices whatever you see on top. Then fluff up the rice using fork.
How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Veg pulao is ready to serve.

For the variation or for spicier taste, you can add 1 teaspoon of red chili powder, ¼ teaspoon of turmeric powder and 1 teaspoon of coriander powder along with garam masala.

Serving suggestions: Since this veg pulao has mild flavors, this can be served with dal fry or dal tadka. It can be served with raita like onion tomato raita, mint raita, boondi raita. Also serve roasted urad papad on side. This is the perfect dish to pack into the lunch box for kids or adults.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Step by Step Photos Above Want to make it perfect first time? Don’t forget to check out Step-by-Step photo instructions and helpful Tips & Tricks !!

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

As induction cooking has become popular, it has also changed the way we cook simple everyday dishes.

Cooking rice is very common and so far these were usually cooked on a gas stove.

But if you have an induction stove, don’t worry! You can cook rice with ease and comfort with an induction cooktop.

If you’re not sure how to cook rice with an induction cooktop, don’t worry. At the end of the article, you will be a pro at it.

Cooking anything on induction is similar to cooking on gas.

The only part where you have to take care is known at what power/temperature food starts boiling and at what temperature/power it slows down to a sim and at what power it keeps warm without burning.

Basically, this is where I come in with his article.

Before giving you a step by step guide to cooking rice with an induction cooktop, let me brief you a bit about how the inductions work and how are they different from gas or electric stovetops

Table of Contents

How is the Induction Cooktop Different?

Gas cooktops or electric cooktops have a flame or heating element burner which generates heat and that heat is transferred through contact from the burner to the base of the cooking vessel.

The heat transferred is only about 47-50 %

Induction cooktops do not generate heat.

And the cooking vessel also has to be ferromagnetic for the induction to work. The cooktop has a copper element that generates an oscillating magnetic field.

This magnetic field induces the electrons in the magnetic cookware to move around. It results in a resistive electric current being generated inside the cooking vessel.

This current generates heat and cooks food. The induction cooktop transfers 90 % of its energy into the vessel.

We did a detailed comparison of induction cooktops with gas cooktops and electric cooktops.

Types of Rice

Coming back to cooking rice, it’s a favorite staple diet in areas where it is grown abundantly.

Many Asian and Japanese cuisine have rice as an important part of their meal. There are hundreds of varieties of rice available.

Long-grained rice like basmati needs to be presoaked at least an hour before. So does brown rice. A minimum of 30 mins to an hour.

Short-grained rice does not need to be presoaked at all.

Rice Styles in Cuisines

Different people like their rice cooked differently. Some like it moist while others prefer dry, some like it with butter or oil or seed topping while others like soft and fluffy.

Some like it sticky and some like it firm.

If you are in a mood to experiment with the different styles just increase or decrease the water and rice ratio. The correct ratio of water to rice is 2:1 for soft fluffy rice.

Two parts water to one part rice. This is because the rice needs double water to cook.

It is grown in fields saturated in water remember? If you are presoaking the rice then the ratio becomes 1 ½ water to 1 part rice.

If you increase the water it will become wet and, if you decrease the water it will come out dry and firm.

Let us move on to a step-by-step guide to cooking rice on induction.

Cooking Rice with an Induction Cooktop

There are three methods with the help of which you can cook rice easily on induction:

  1. Cooking rice in a pressure cooker on an induction
  2. Cooking rice in a thick bottom vessel on induction
  3. Cooking rice in an induction friendly rice cooker.

Before you start cooking, rinse the rice thoroughly with water a couple of times to remove the impurities used to store the rice grain.

Washing a couple of times will also help remove excess starch. Wash until the water is not cloudy or milky but clear over the uncooked grains.

Cooking in A Pressure Cooker

To cook rice in a pressure cooker on induction, there are a few things you need to take care of.

Never preheat the pressure cooker. This is because the cooker will get heated up within seconds. Keep all ingredients like vegetables (in case of risotto) peeled and ready to drop into the cooker within a few seconds of heating oil.

For plain rice, just drop in rice with a double quantity of water.

In case of presoaked use 11/2 cup water to 1 cup rice. Always measure the water and rice by volume and never by weight.

It will give an exact measure of how much water is needed by the grain to absorb.

Another method is to put your finger inside the cooker. The water level should be one inch (corresponding to the first line on the inside of the finger) higher than the rice layer.

Add salt according to taste. If you want sticky and softer rice increase the water content.

If you are making a rice salad and want it firm, decrease the water content.

Put the lid on. Bring the cooker to pressure using medium settings. Never put the pressure cooker on the highest setting as that can burn the rice.

Once a whistle comes, lower the setting to a minimum of 4 minutes.

Better to set the induction timer so that the induction shuts down automatically after the set time. Leave the rice untouched for 10 mins. Open and enjoy!

Cooking in a Thick Bottomed Vessel

When cooking rice in a vessel in induction, make sure to use a thick bottom. That way rice will not stick. Make sure not to stir rice while cooking. That can break the rice.

For rice to water ratio, again measure by volume. Take three parts water and one part rice for cooking rice in a vessel. For presoaked rice add a 2:1 ratio of water to rice. Add salt according to taste.

Another method is to dip your finger and place it on top of the rice level. The water level should be two inches above the rice level.

Place it on medium heat for 30 -40 seconds and then tune in to the minimum setting you have of induction and leave it for 15-20 minutes.

You can fine-tune the induction timer as well to 15-20 minutes.

After 15 minutes check. If the water has vapourised good. If it’s still there increase the heat setting one number up.

Also, check the grain. If tender press the induction off. Keep the lid back on the vessel and leave the rice untouched for 10-15 minutes.

If the rice is firm and not tender and you want it soft add little water (sparingly please about 4 teaspoons worth) and cover the lid and simmer for 3-4 more minutes.

Leave for 10-15 minutes.

Cooking in Induction Friendly Rice Cooker

If you have an induction-friendly rice cooker just follow the user guide manual.

Remember to wash and drain the rice properly before placing the rice. Use the 2:1 ratio of water to rice.

Most of the rice cookers cook in around 10-12 minutes.

Refer to the manual which comes along with the induction-friendly rice cooker to adjust the temperature if needed.

After cooking

After leaving the rice untouched for 10-15 minutes. Open lid.

Fluff the rice with the help of a wooden spoon or chopsticks and serve.

Following the above instructions, you will be able to cook rice perfectly without them burning, breaking, or sticking.

Remember to always measure by volume and increase the water content if you want wetter and softer rice and decrease the water content if you want firm and hard like in rice salads.

On a personal note, I would recommend cooking rice in a pressure cooker. It comes out wonderful without the need to check the grain or water.

One whistle, sim for 4 minutes, and hot rice are ready!

You may also like the following articles:

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

A wonderful fragrant chicken biryani which is cooked in pressure cooker saving all the time consuming steps of layering and waiting for the biryani to cook in dum. Though biryani gets ready in less than 30 mins yet the flavor is not compromised at all. So next time you want to relish biryani do not procastinate head straight to the kitchen and dish out this aromatic chicken biryani.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Chicken Biryani In Pressure Cooker | How To Make Chicken Biryani In Pressure Cooker At Home


Main Ingredients

  • Basmati Rice
  • Chicken
  • Fried Onions
  • Green Chillies
  • Mint
  • Coriander
  • Whole Spices (Cinnamom, Cloves, Green Cardamom, Brown Cardamom, Nutmeg)


  • 2 cup Basmati Rice
  • 500 gms Chicken
  • 5 Green Chillies sliced in length
  • 1/2 cup Fried Onions
  • 1/2 cup Coriander Leaves
  • 1/2 cup Mint Leaves
  • 2 – 3 tblsp Ghee
  • 2 tblsp Oil
  • Salt to taste

For Marination

  • 1/4 cup Curd (Dahi)
  • 2 tsp Ginger Garlic Paste
  • 1 1/2 tsp Red Chilli Powder
  • 1 1/2 tsp Coriander Powder
  • 1/4 tsp Turmeric Powder
  • 1 tsp Garam Masala
  • 1 1/2 tsp Salt
  • Juice of 1/2 Lemon
  • 1/2 cup finely chopped Mint Leaves
  • 1/2 cup Fried Onions (Barista)
  • 1/2 cup finely Coriander Leaves

For Biryani Masala Powder

  • 3 tblsp Whole Coriander Seeds (Sabut Dhania)
  • 3 Cloves (Laung) 3
  • 1″ inch Cinnamon 1
  • 1 tsp Cumin Seeds (Jeera)
  • 1 whole Brown Cardamom (Moti Elacihi)
  • 2 – 3 blades Mace (Jiavitri) 1
  • 1 Star Anise (Chakri Phool)
  • 4 Green Cardamom (Chotti Elacihi)
  • 2 tsp Fennel Seeds (Saunf)
  • 1/4 tsp Nutmeg Powder (jaiphal)
  • 4 – 5 Black Stone Flower

Spiced Water

  • 3 Cups Water
  • 2 Bay leaves
  • 1 Brown Cardamom (Moti Elaichi)
  • 1 tsp Cumin Seeds (Jeera)
  • 2 Green Cardamom (Choti Elacihi)
  • 2 Cloves (Laung)

How to Make Chicken Biryani In Pressure Cooker :

Soaking Rice

  1. Wash and rinse the basmati rice in water 3 – 4 times till the water becomes clear. Soak for 20 minutes. It is Important to soak only and only for 20 mins. As the water quantity used to make this biryani in pressure cooker has to be precise. Any extra soaking would make the rice mushy and soft. So just after 20 mins drain out the water and keep the rice aside. You should soak the rice only when you begin to prepare the chicken. This should take roughly 20 mins and by then the rice will be soaked enough.

Marinating the chicken:

In a bowl add chicken pieces and add all the ingredients given under “for marination”. Mix well and keep it aside for minimum for 30 mins and maximum 2 hours.

Making Biryani Masala:

Meanwhile, dry roast on low flame all the masalas under the “Biryani Masala Powder” and keep it aside. Once cool grind to a fine paste. It is possible to use readymade Biryani Masala too. There are many popular brands like Tata Sampam and Shan Biryani Masala. You can use any. But a freshly gounded biryani takes it to the next level.


  • In a pressure cooker, add the ghee and oil and when hot, add the marinated chicken pieces. Let the chicken cook and simmer on medium flame in the ghee for 7 – 10 mins. Keep flipping often so that the masala does not get burnt. Incase the masala begins to stick at the bottom add some1/4 cup of water and continue cooking the chicken. Soon the chicken will be 90% done.
  • Mean while in a pan boil 3 cups of water with all the whole spices under the spiced water section. You can skip this step and add all the whole spices in the beginning before you add the marinated chicken. But do add HOT water only and not room temperature. This makes a lot of difference.
  • Once the chicken is ready, add the hot boiling water and the soaked rice. Add 2 tblsp of biryani masala and salt at this stage and with a very light hand give the rice a stir. Do not apply pressure or the rice will break.
  • Let the rice cook till the water begins to boil.
  • Once the water begins to bubble add some chopped mint leaves, coriander leaves, barista (fried onions) and put the lid.
  • Cook the rice for just 1 whistle and then switch off the flame and let the steam release naturally. In case you soaked the rice longer than 20 mins in that case after 1 whistle immediately release the pressure from the cooker. This will ensure that the rice does not get mushy or over cooked.
  • Once the steam is out fluff up the rice with a fork with a gentle hand and serve with raita and salan.
  • Your chicken biryani in pressure cooker is ready.

Side dish Options – What To Serve With Chicken Biryani :

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

  • Curd: Serve with Pineapple Raita, Onion-Tomato Raita.
  • Salad: Sirke Wale Pyaaz.
  • Side Dish: Chicken 65, Salan, Chicken Gravy.

Storage Tips :

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

  • Cool the dish quickly after cooking, ideally within an hour, and keep in airtight containers in the fridge. Do not let it be lying around for hours as it may invite bacteria.
  • Do not overload the container
  • You can store chicken biryani for 2 days in refrigerator.

Reheating Tips :

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Dish is generally best reheated at the place it was cooked.

Microwave: Dish out the biryani in a microwave proof dish, sprinkle some water on the biryani and then microwave it for 4 – 5 mins. After 2 mins take it out and flip the rice. This will ensure all the chicken pieces are also heated equally.

Stovetop: To reheat on a gas stove, put some ghee / butter in a pan and then dish out the biryani on it. Next sprinkle some water the rice and then put a lid and let it cook for next 10 mins. Do check after regularly to make sure that the rice doesn’t begin to burn. After half way round flip the rice and cook for 5 more minutes.

Steamed Rice Recipe, is a classic carbohydrate eaten across the country. Here is a simple ways to make this comfort food that goes with absolutely anything be it dal, rasam or sambar.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Rice can be cooked in a variety of ways. Personally I find the pressure cooker method quick and effective, that can produce rice grains of different textures – from soft to grainy. There are a number of different types of rice grains available and you might choose the variety that your family has been eating for generations or you might want to try another new variety.

Each type of grain, when cooked produces different texture of the rice. The older the rice, the longer it takes to cook. The more polished the rice is, it tends to get cooked faster and also mushy if there is excess water. With practice and depending on the kind of rice you use, you will be able to arrive at the correct water proportion for cooking rice.

The pressure cooker method and the saucepan method, both yield different textures of rice. If you like soft sticky rice, then pressure cooker accomplishes that very easily. If you are looking at a grainy texture then saucepan method is a better method.

Serve Steamed Rice with your choice of Dal, Curries or a Mixed Vegetable Raita.

Note: As a general rule, use about 2 cups of water per cup of long-grain white rice, but you may need to experiment a little to find the amount you like best. Brown rice requires more water, while short grain rice requires less. Keep in mind that more water gives you softer, stickier rice that is great for lentils and curries whereas less water results in firmer rice.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

This instant pot fried rice is quick and easy pressure cooker recipe. Simple ingredients, easy preparation and great flavors!

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Have you ever made pressure cooker fried rice? If not, here is your chance! Cooking rice in Instant Pot is easy and hassle-free which is exactly what I am after.

What about you guys? Do you have a pressure cooker? If you do, do you use it often? When I made Instant Pot Chicken Curry for the first time I was over the moon with the results.

This Instant Pot fried rice dinner was no different. Full of flavors and hassle-free. Yay!

If you don’t have a pressure cooker but like meals with rice, check out these easy rice dinners instead: Chicken Broccoli Fried Rice, Tomato Shrimp and Rice or Sweet and Sour Chicken.

How to make pressure cooker fried rice:

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Rinse the rice and add it to the inner pot of your pressure cooker. Pour in vegetable stock and stir it around. Just make sure the rice is evenly distributed. Now add diced carrots and close the lid.

Turn the vent to “SEALING” position and turn it on. Press “manual” and adjust the timer to 3 minutes.

When the pot finishes cooking, I wait 10 minutes and only then I turn the vent to “VENTING” position. There is a lot of steam coming out when you do the quick release and I personally don’t like it. Safety first! So use the 10-minute natural pressure release.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Now press the “SAUTE” function and stir the rice around. At this stage it will be sticky but this should change after adding the rest of the ingredients.

So I move the rice to one side and add oil and peas to the empty space. Saute this for a minute before mixing everything together. Now make a space in the middle and add beaten eggs. Stir them into the rice and fry for 2-3 minutes.

Turn off the pot, season and serve.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Good to know before making fried rice in Instant Pot:

  1. The rice will be sticky at first but after sautéing it and adding peas and egg it will change its texture.
  2. If you prefer some crunch to your carrots, don’t cook them with rice but add them before you add peas. However, bear in mind that you will need longer time to cook them.
  3. Frozen peas needs only about 2 minutes in the pot before you add the egg.
  4. Eggs tend to stick to the bottom of the pan so keep stirring so you won’t end up with all of it stuck to your pot.
  5. I made this using rice program as well. I did not see any difference in the quality of the rice. That is why I prefer the quicker option. Rice program will set your Instant Pot to 12 minutes which I find way too long.
  6. For this recipe I used long grain rice. Bear in mind that there are different rice varieties and each of them might need a different cooking time. If you need a help with this, check this how to cook rice in Instant Pot post for more information.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

So guys, if you are looking for Easy Instant Pot Recipes, this is definitely one of them! And it tastes so amazing!

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Why emphasize the perfectness of this recipe? Because pressure cooking these two ingredients together and getting them both right is impossible!

Pressure cooking rice is an exacting task – too much liquid or time and the grains burst at the seams or turn into an unappetizing runny, starchy, gummy, gluey slosh. Too little liquid and the rice carbonizes and bonds to the base of the pressure cooker to be chiseled off. Rice needs just 3 minutes at high pressure (with natural release).

Instead, pressure cooking chicken is more of a gamble – there are great variations in the liquid that is released during cooking based on the meat’s age and preservation. Most American supermarket chickens, for example, are already brined in (and sometimes injected with) salt water to make them last longer and weigh more. The liquid released between a supermarket chicken and a free-range, locally-raised freshly butchered one can vary by a cup of liquid or more. Yes, I measured it so you don’t have to.

If trying to wing it with liquid ratios doesn’t result in gummy rice, bone-in chicken’s 10 minute pressure cooking time will! This seven-minute difference is almost an additional half hour of conventional cooking time.

This method guarantees PERFECT results regardless of your meat’s origins and processing.

The solution to getting both of these ingredients perfectly cooked is to cook them sequentially, one after the other, and not together. This method guarantees PERFECT results regardless of your meat’s origins and processing. First the chicken is boiled, then the cooking liquid is measured to the rice’s exacting needs and cooked in the chicken’s tasty broth. Don’t worry – the chicken won’t get cold. It’s wrapped-up tight and then beautifully caramelized under the broiler (or on the grill) while the rice is cooking.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Manual pressure cookers have been responsible for hearty, home-cooked comfort food like soups, stews, and casseroles for as long as time.

Before the electric pressure cooker arrived to make things as easy as a button-press to cook up a flavor-filled meal, people used the old fashioned pressure cooking to do the same thing.

Using a manual pressure cooker takes some time to get used to and definite know-how.

We’ll be taking you through a look at how to use an old fashioned pressure cooker. It’s a timeless piece of equipment that’ll never lose its place in the kitchen.

Once you’ve discovered how to use one properly, you’ll be armed with a must-know insight that every dedicated chef is armed with.

How to use an Old Fashioned Pressure Cooker?

Here are the exact steps to follow to use a stovetop pressure cooker safely.

1. Inspect your pressure cooker, observing basic construction and safe operation

A pressure cooker will come with a valve and a rubber seal . Ensure that the rubber seal is securely fitted to the inside of the pressure cooker’s lid. Verify that the valve is seated securely in place.

Add clean water to the pot and close the lid, locking it in place to confirm that a secure seal is made. Test for leaks and discard rinsing water.

2. Add your food and the liquid for cooking

Once you’ve confirmed that your pressure cooker is clean and working, add the food and liquid you want to cook.

It is best to consult your recipe for the quantity of liquid, but as a general rule of thumb, whatever you’re cooking should at least be covered in liquid.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

3. Lock on the lid and set your valve (if needed)

Close and lock the lid of your pressure cooker. Not every pressure cooker will have a removable valve, but if yours does, make sure that it is correctly set in place.

Ensure a total seal to prevent steam or liquid leakage.

4. Bring your pot to a boil and adjust the heat accordingly

Your pressure cooker recipe will give you the temperature and appropriate cooking time. However, most recipes call for your pressure cooker to start high heat , allowing it to build up pressure rapidly.

Once the valve has built enough pressure, turn the stovetop heat down to a low to medium setting to conclude pressure cooking .

5. Monitor your pressure cooking, adjusting the heat as is necessary

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

A pressure cooker must never be left unattended. Pay attention to the valve and the amount of steam being emitted . If steam starts to billow out, turn the temperature of your stove down.

Once adequate pressure is reached, you rarely need more than a very low heat setting; the lowest your stove will often go.

6. Release amassed pressure

Once the desired cooking time has been reached or your recipe calls for the pot to be opened to add another ingredient or complete another step, you first need to release the pressure.

The safest way to release the pressure of an old fashioned pressure cooker is to leave it to cool down . We’ll take you through a few faster but more dangerous ways soon.

7. Open the lid and serve

With all of the pressure released, the lid should be able to open without force or resistance. If there’s pressure – wait . As soon as it opens, your food is piping hot and ready to serve.

How to release the pressure of an old-fashioned pressure cooker

As mentioned before, the safest but least practical way of releasing the pressure of an old-fashioned pressure cooker is to wait it out and let the pressure come down naturally.

This takes about 15 to 20 minutes for most pots. Here are a few other ways that you can bring the pressure down quickly.

  • 10-Minute Release

Wait ten minutes and then begin to release the valve carefully . Steam will begin to emit out, but if it’s still rushing out in dangerous clouds, close and wait a few more minutes before trying again.

  • Slow Release

Wait five minutes and then begin to release the pressure by opening and closing the valve in bursts . Open and release steam for ten-second bursts until all the pressure has dissipated.

  • Normal Release

You’ll have your pressure cooker ready to open in under three minutes if you nail opening the valve just right.

Use a fork, knife, or another tool to gently lift the valve from when your pot is off the stove and done cooking.

At just the right angle and with a great deal of care taken to avoid the steam, the pressure will be down in no time.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

We don’t recommend that you try quick release, but it does make it far faster to open your pressure cooker.

Submerge the base of your pot in cold water , using perhaps your sink as the pressure begins to come down, open, and release the steam in bursts to hasten the process.

  • Cold Water Immersion

The fastest way to bring the temperature down and the most dangerous if you fiddle with the valve too early is cold-water immersion.

The daring can submerge their pressure cooker in a basin of cold water, running water from a faucet over the lid until it cools down.

Steam will need to dissipate quickly and will pour out your valve. Help it along by opening in bursts but take extreme care.

The temperature drop will create a lot of high-pressure steam that needs to be released.

Rules for Using A Stovetop Pressure Cooker

Keep these rules in mind, and you’ll be using your stovetop pressure cooker safely time and time again:

  • Never fill beyond ⅔ full.
  • Never open while cooking.
  • Never force open, never open with any pressure present.
  • Never cook foods from frozen.
  • Never allow pets or children near an in-operation pressure cooker.

Old-Fashioned Pressure Cooker Precautions

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Cooling down your pressure cooker is a matter of personal preference. Either wait it out or use the method you trust most.

If you’re new to operating an old-fashioned pressure cooker, then pay attention to just how hot the valve and steam can get. Keep out of reach of each jet when venting out the pressure.

We advise that you adjust the valve using a thick washcloth or while wearing oven mitts. Some even prefer using a utensil like a kitchen knife to leverage it open instead of risking getting burned.

This easy, homemade Indian Mutton Curry will become your go to recipe every time you want to cook with lamb. Tender, succulent pieces of meat are cooked in a spicy gravy that makes it the perfect bowl of comfort food with basmati rice.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Let’s welcome the easiest Indian Mutton Curry for pullover and pyjama weather. This one’s purely for the beginners who want a bowl of curry and rice now and then. Because you guys are my people. The ones that I really write this food blog for, and I feel your love for comfort food.

Google mutton curry and you’ll get all kinds of Andhra, Hyderabadi and Kerala variations. But this ones quite basic guys. It’s one of those back pocket mutton curry recipes that we all need in life. And that’ll make everyone in the house go totally nuts. They’ll never guess how easy it is. I promise.

It’s basic but amazing. Spicy, flavorful, warming with all the right reasons to be a glutton on Sunday which is when mutton curry makes the most sense. Because after a bowl of this Indian mutton curry and rice, all you’ll want to do is Netflix and nap.

How to make Indian Mutton Curry

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

We first made this recipe for a couple of friends. Actually Denver did. I was out on a Sunday afternoon, and Denver decided to make lunch. The most amount of work went into chopping the onions and tomatoes, which we had our food processor for, so basically it was a stir and cook game. Which he is awesome at.

We all came home hungry to the house smelling fantastic, made some parathas and rice and dug in!

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

I knew right there that I needed to share this on the blog because you guys will love it! So we’ve made it again and again, and everytime we ended up polishing it before I could take any pictures. But we are finally here with the best, easiest Indian mutton curry for all you comfort food seekers and curry lovers. Sunday lunches can’t get better than this.

Which cut of mutton (lamb) is best for stewing/ curries?

Almost any cut of lamb can be used for lamb stews and curries, but the shoulder is best. As it becomes really tender and flavorful during the stewing and braising process. Shanks also work really well in a mutton curry or stew because the marrow soaks up all the flavors and is amazing to suck on.

I highly recommend using a ‘meat masala’ which really takes the guesswork out of this, and I used Lala’s Mutton Curry masala for this one. You can go ahead and try Shaan as well, a brand which make fantastic masalas.

Watch Indian Mutton Curry Recipe Video

Published: Feb 3, 2018 · Modified: Jun 9, 2022 by Bhavana Patil ·This post may contain affiliate links. As an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases.

Looking for Vegetarian/Vegan Rice recipes to make in your Instant Pot? Here is my collection of 30+ Best Instant Pot Pressure Cooker Indian Rice Recipes from my blog. You can also find a variety of other Indian vegetarian curries, beans, lentils, and dessert recipes.

Rice is one of the staple cereal in India. There are hundreds of recipes made regionally.

I have prepared all these dishes in my electric pressure cooker, Instant Pot DUO60 6 QT

Also, check out Indian Party Menu Ideas if you are planning to host an event at your home.

Other Recipe Collections to Try from my blog

  • 60+ Kids Lunch Box Recipes
  • 20+ Indian Air Fryer Recipes
  • 12+ Instant Pot Indian Dessert Recipes
  • 10+ best Veg Sandwich Recipes Indian Style
  • 12+ Phool Makhana(Lotus Seeds) Recipes
  • 10+ Paratha Recipes|Indian FlatBread Recipes

Here are 30+ Instant Pot Pressure Cooker Indian Rice Recipes

Let’s look at the 30+ Instant Pot Vegetarian & Vegan Indian Rice Recipes, which will offer you various options. They also include vegan, gluten-free recipes.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Veg Biryani in pressure cooker is a one pot dish, but surprisingly every way as tasty and flavorful as the one cooked in traditional way.

One-pot meals have a special place and are a favorite among families and singles alike as they cook up quite fast and need less effort. Further like many other Indian one pot meals this dish is tasty and healthy too.

Veg Biryani is a mixed rice dish popular in entire Indian subcontinent and among the Indian, Pakistani and Bangladeshi people around the globe. Vegetable Biryani is made with rice, a variety of spices, lentils and vegetables. Compared to other mixed rice dishes like pulaos, Biryani has a stronger taste of curried rice due to a higher amount of spices.

The traditional style of making biryani calls for slow cooking of rice with vegetables and spices for many hours, thus infusing their flavors in the rice. However, it is not feasible to cook this dish at home very frequently due to the large amount of time it takes.

Though the Non-veg versions of Biryani are more famous, Vegetable Biryani also has its own place and represents the ultimate of Indian Cuisine. It’s a unique cooking style of rice which deliciously blends the flavors of vegetables and spices and is accompanied by a unique aroma.

Biryani is a dish which is loved by most Indian people. You can make this delicious dish very easily with this recipe, since cooking the vegetables and rice together significantly reduces the amount of time it takes for cooking.

Veg Biryani tastes best when enjoyed along with Mint Raita or Onion Tomato Raita.

To make Quick Veg Biryani in Pressure Cooker at home follow the detailed step by step recipe with photos posted below.

Published January 5, 2021 Last updated January 5, 2021 By Recipe Garden Leave a Comment | This post may contain affiliate links. As an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases.

Instant pot ponni rice is perfectly cooked fluffy white rice which can be enjoyed in few minutes time. Ponni rice cooked in instant pot do not need soaking in advance prior to cooking. The ponni rice I used is ponni raw rice which is a popular South Indian white rice in raw form (ponni brand of rice comes as raw rice or par boiled rice). The rice cooked is perfect, fluffy and you can enjoy it with any side dishes or curry as you like. When I try the ponni boiled rice in instant pot, I will update the recipe accordingly.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

You can also make other popular rices like brown basmati rice, white basmati rice, brown sona masoori rice etc in the instant pot very easily.

What Is Ponni Rice?

Ponni rice is a popular white rice used for cooking which is popular in South India, especially in Tamil Nadu region. Ponni rice is very fluffy, soft and delicious and its perfect for rice bowls, thali (Indian style luch or dinner served with rice and curries) etc.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

There are two different varieties of ponni rice which are very popular – ponni raw rice and ponni boiled (par boiled) rice.

Par boiled rice usually required more cooking time but its considered more healthy as well.

The ponni par boiled rice is short grain rice but the ponni raw rice fairly long grain rice and you can even use them to cook pulao/pilaf rice.

See this sweet corn pulao recipe using leftover cooked ponni raw rice.

In this instant pot ponni rice recipe, I used ponni raw rice but as I mentioned earlier, if I try ponni boiled rice ever, I will update the recipe accordingly.

So here is how you can prepare ponni raw rice in the instant pot following this easy, perfect recipe for instant pot ponni rice.

I have more rice recipes in the instant pot, which you may like to see!

How To Make Instant Pot Ponni Rice (Ponni Raw Rice)

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

We use just 2 ingredients to cook the perfect ponni rice in the instant pot. They are as follows:

ponni raw rice


You may also add additional ingredients like one tablespoon of oil (or butter) or one teaspoon of lemon juice to make the texture and flavor of the rice even better.

Steps To Cook Ponni Raw Rice In Instant Pot (The Process)

Rinse the rice very well, transfer the rinsed rice to the inner pot of instant pot (discard the water used for rinsing the rice).

Add enough water (as the amount mentioned in recipe card, here 4 cups of water for 2 cups of ponni rice) and mix well, make sure there is water at the bottom of the pot.

Close the instant pot with lid in sealing position, press the ‘rice’ button and cook for 10 minutes (if its not set for 10 minutes adjust the time to 10 minutes). In many models, you can’t adjust the time for rice button and if it’s automatically set for 12 minutes, you can use that too.

Once the cooking is done and the pot beeps, press the ‘keep warm/cancel’ button and wait for a natural pressure release of 10 to 12 minutes (if the rice button was set for 12 minutes cooking, you may just go for 10 minutes natural pressure release).

After a natural pressure release of 10 to 12 minutes, carefully do a manual release by turning the lid to venting position slowly, releasing the pressure manually very carefully and gradually.

Once the pressure is all released, carefully open the instant pot and fluff the rice with a fork or use a spoon or spatula and gently mix the rice.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Sides To Go With Cooked Ponni Rice

To enjoy a simple and delicious meal with cooked ponni rice, you may serve the rice with any South Indian style gravy and dry side dish or you can also go for North Indian style sides whichever you like.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Here you can see some ideas for sides you can choose for the cooked ponni rice.

I will recommend one gravy and at least one dry side dish to go with it. Also you can add chutneys, pickles, papads (or papadam which is Indian style lentil crackers usually served with rice) etc.

Where To Buy Ponni Rice

Ponni rice (both raw rice and boiled rice) are both usually available in Indian grocery stores among the rice section or among the South Indian products.

So here is the detailed recipe for preparing ponni rice in instant pot.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

This is a very easy recipe for making mutton biryani in a pressure cooker. The mutton is cooked first and then added to the rice and aromatics along with the liquid used for cooking mutton. Here is how to do mutton biryani in the pressure cooker.

Gently wash the basmati rice in running water and let the rice soak in the water. Soaking the rice in water is one of the key steps in making biryani in pressure cooker. It helps in keeping the rice intact while cooking without becoming mushy. Soak the rice in water before starting to cook. Set aside.

Take a pressure cooker and add in the mutton pieces, salt, turmeric powder, coriander powder and red chilli powder. Add 1.5 cups of water. Cover and cook for 20 minutes on medium flame. Expect 15-18 whistles. Remove from heat and set aside. Let the pressure release on its own. Remove the pieces and keep it seperately and save the liquid. The liquid has got a lot of flavour. We will use it later.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Make a paste of ginger and garlic in a blender. Add up to 1/4 cup of water and grind it into a very smooth paste. Set aside.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Heat Oil in a pressure pan and add in the spices. Cinnamon, Cloves and Cardamom. Add in the onions and saute until the onions are soft. Once the onions are soft, add in the tomatoes and the ginger garlic paste, yogurt and green chillies. Saute the mixture until streaks of oil appear on the top.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Drain the rice and add it to the pan. Add in the mutton pieces. Add in the coriander leaves, mint leaves and juice of a lemon. I have used 1 cup of rice today (250 ml). We use 1.5 cups of liquid for each cup of rice. The mutton liquid I had was about half a cup. So I added a cup of water and the mutton liquid.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Close the pan and cook on medium flame for first whistle and on low flame for the next whistle (about 3-4 minutes). After the two whistles, switch off the flame and wait for pressure in the cooker to release naturally. Open the pan and fluff up the rice gently. Serve Pressure Cooker Mutton Biryani hot.

Welcome rain with a 20 minute,made-from-scratch, gluten free, one pot Chicken Rice Soup Dinner!

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Lemon Chicken Rice Soup, a healthy made from scratch chicken and rice soup with lots of fresh herbs, lemon and carrot noodles. Friends, this gluten free soup will fly from kitchen to dinner table because it is all done in pressure cooker in just 20 minutes!

Will you believe it’s raining, in our part of world, past two days?! Gosh, it feel so good and such a relief from heat. it feels like winter here (for a change) which calls for a soup, for sure!

So I thought why not share a simple and healthy soup, made with all fresh ingredient that is my favorite to serve in rainy season.

This is not just a simple chicken soup. it actually is great way to stay healthy in rapid changing weather and pollen allergies of early Spring. So if you are craving a Chicken Soup or need a healing bowl of bone-warming nutrient rich broth.. this chicken soup serve both purpose very effectively.

I love love one pot soups which are filling, healthy and above all can be served at moment’s notice and need less cleanup. A pressure cooker soup is always my first choice in such situations. Especially a soup with all fresh ingredients is amazingly fast and easy in pressure cooker.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Easy to cook, filling with rice, protein of fresh chicken(no stock or canned food needed), has healthy touch of veggies and flavor of fresh herbs! Plus prepared in just 20 minutes, in one pot of pressure cooker this chicken soup really fly from kit to dinner table.

Also naturally gluten free and without preservatives if you please. 🙂

Chicken And rice are two ingredients which have long history of being served together. In one pot of pressure cooker, not only these make a delicious flavor combo but also make cleaning super easy. Even rice and veggies go in same pot. starch of rice also helps in thickening the soup a bit. giving some depth and lite thickness.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Other simple yet flavor-boosting ingredient of this chicken and rice soup is fresh lemon juice.

Trust me, just 2 tbsp of this mighty fresh ingredient adds ton of flavor, zing, and healthy touch of vitamin C to chicken soup.

Actually, lemon-chicken or lemon-rice are few of the most loved flavors on earth.. almost like lemon, chicken and rice are made for each other. I know seriously. even on my blog, there are various recipes that pair lemon with rice or chicken together. always a mouthwatering combination.

PS: That just be me. or we all are crazy for these flavors! 🙂

If you are lemon (including cousin lime) fan, let me list for you a bunch of my favorite recipes:

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

I hope you having great week?! See you soon with new delicious treat from my kitchen.

This recipe makes the perfect jeera rice and is the only one you’ll need when you want fluffy, perfectly cooked rice which is full of flavor, but super simple to make. You won’t believe it but this takes under 10 minutes to cook!

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Before you call me out for sharing recipes that are ‘too simple’, lets pause and take a look at this picture 👆

Do you see how every grain of rice is separate? It’s not overly greasy or undercooked or gluggy. We are talking about the perfect jeera rice, that is steamed and takes about 10 minutes to make. Yes, only 10 minutes! And I’m going to teach you how to make jeera rice just like this.

It’s a really simple process, but I knew it needed to be written down. Because I have screwed this up many many times, and have been left with rice thats stuck to the bottom; undercooked or too mushy. But if you’ve ever eaten at an Indian restaurant or ordered jeera rice outside, you’ll know that its none of those things. And its the perfect side to dals and curries. I can literally eat this plain, because good quality basmati rice has so much flavor on its own.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

What do you need for Jeera Rice?

Jeera rice only needs a few simple ingredients. It only needs six ingredients, which you probably already have in your pantry. So making this is actually easier than you thought!

  • Ghee or Butter
  • Whole spices – bay leaf, cinnamon, cloves
  • Jeera (or cumin seeds)
  • Green chillies
  • Basmati rice
  • Freshly chopped coriander.

Pro tip: Don’t forget to keep an eye on the jeera while sautéing it – it tends to burn exactly when you look away 😂 😂 But on a serious note, jeera goes from toasted just right to burnt in a jiffy. Making sure this doesn’t happen is the only hassle you’ll face!

Rice to Water Ratio for Jeera Rice

The perfect rice to water ratio for jeera rice is 1:2. Which means for every cup of rice, you need two cups of water. The rice is steamed in the liquid in a pan which is covered so that the steam does not escape. This rice to water ratio ensures that the rice is cooked just right – where every grain is fluffy and separate from each other.

However, if you are cooking this in a traditional pressure cooker, decrease the rice to water ratio to 1:1.5. In the Instant Pot, use a ratio of 1: 1.25. The method to cook it remains the same, the only change occurs in the water ratio and time! Refer to the recipe notes below for clear instructions.

Because the number of ingredients in this recipe are so few, I recommend using really good quality basmati rice. I used Daawat’s extra long Basmati Rice which is aged for two years, and smells amazing!

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Are you seriously tempted? Did I manage to push you over the edge? Are you running to the grocery store to pick up some basmati rice?

Pair this recipe with

  • dal fry
  • chana masala
  • mughlai chicken
  • paneer butter masala

Watch the Video

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Bengali khichuri is an explosion of taste, aromas and flavours. Made with Gobindobhog rice, roasted moong ki daal, vegetables, whole spices and desi ghee. Durga Puja in Bengal is incomplete without this special bhog khichuri or Bengali Moong Dal Khichdi.

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

Bengali Khichuri In Pressure Cooker | Bhoger Khichdi | Khichdi Bengali Style


Main Ingredients

  • Gobindbhog Rice
  • Moong Dal (Yellow Split Lentil)
  • Cauliflower
  • Potatoes
  • Whole Spices
  • Ghee (Clarified Butter)


1 cup Gobindo Bhog or Basmati Rice
1 cup Moong Dal
2 tsp Vegetable Oil
4 Potato (cut into half)
8 – 10 Gobhi Florets (Cauliflower)
1/2 Green Peas
1 tblsp Ginger- Green Chilly coarse paste
1/2 tsp Turmeric Powder (Haldi Powder)
1 tsp Red chili Powder (Lal Mirch Powder)
1 tsp Sugar
Salt as per taste
2 tblsp Ghee
Whole garam masala

  • 1″ cinnamon stick
  • 4 to 5 Green cardamoms
  • 4 cloves
  • 2 Whole Dry red chili
  • 1 Bay leaves
  • 1 tsp Cumin Seeds (Jeera)

Bengali Garam Masala Powder

  • 3 – 4 Green Cardamom
  • 5 – 6 Cloves (Laung)
  • 1 ” Cinnamon Stick

How to Make Bengali Khichuri In Pressure Cooker :

  1. Dry roast all the whole spices and grind to a fine powder with a mortar pestle.
  2. Dry roast moong dal on medium low flame until fragrant and some dal start to turn brown. Let it cool completely. Now wash under running cold water and soak for 15-20 minutes.
  3. Wash rice and set aside.
  4. Heat ghee in a presure cooker. You can use a big pan also if you do not have pressure cooker.
  5. Add 1 tsp sugar and caramelise slightly and add the bay leaves, dry red chilli, cumin seeds and the whole garam masalas.
  6. While a nice aroma is releasing add the moong daal. Saute for a few seconds.
  7. Next add the ginger-green chilly paste. Stir fry for 30 – 60 secs till the raw smell disappears.
  8. Then add all the chopped vegetables. Stir fry for 1 min.
  9. Add the turmeric powder, salt and red chilli powder.
  10. Stir once and then add 6 cups of water.
  11. Add soaked rice.
  12. Close the lid and give 5 – 6 whistles.
  13. Let the pressure release naturally from the cooker.
  14. If on opening you find that the khichuri is too thick then add warm water and give a nice stir and let it cook for 2 – 3 mins.
  15. When the right consistency is achieved add ghee. Mix well.
  16. Serve hot with any fried stuff or simply with papad.

Side dish Options – What To Serve With Bengali Khichuri :

How to cook rice in an indian style pressure cooker

There are lots of side dishes that can be served with the Bengali khichdi.

How to not be boring with your boyfriend

EFL Teacher, Lifehack Writer, English/Spanish Translator, MPA Read full profile

How to not be boring with your boyfriend

  • Share
  • Pin it
  • Tweet
  • Share
  • Email

You’ve finally reached that comfortable spot in your relationship. You finish each other’s sentences and know before they order what the other one will have for lunch at your favorite restaurant. But, it’s starting to feel like boredom to you.

Video Summary

Security Can Lead to Boredom

It is normal to reach this level of security in a relationship. The longer you’re with somebody, the more you get to know them and what to expect from them. This level of familiarity is the cause of relationship boredom.

Although security is definitely something you want with your significant other, what you don’t want is the boredom. One of the biggest mistakes a couple can make is believing that their predictability makes up for the loss of intimacy or excitement they used to feel together. [1] Why? Because this boredom increases your chances of losing the love between you.

When a couple starts to settle for feeling safe and secure, they believe nothing in the world can tear them apart. And this sense of confidence means they often stop putting effort into their relationship. Instead, their shared life becomes automatic, occurring without too much thought or investment and becoming indifferent. The last thing you want is to be in an indifferent romantic relationship. With indifference comes a whole slew of other feelings like annoyance and irritation, which in turn, prompts arguments. [2]

Don’t allow this to happen to you and your significant other.

How to Prevent Boredom in Your Relationship

So, what can you do to avoid boredom in your relationship? Here are some great ideas to spark the passion and excitement:

Try Something New Together

There’s nothing better for breaking up monotony than doing something new together. Do you two love taking pictures? Take a photography class together. Do you usually go hiking on the weekends? Throw a zipline or paragliding session into the mix. Research indicates that trying new activities is a great way to beat boredom.

Make a Plan for the Future

No, you don’t have to plan where you’ll buy your house or how many kids you’ll have if you’re not ready for that sort of conversation. You can, however, plan a weekend getaway or a vacation for a few months down the road. Making a plan gives you something to look forward to, which helps fight boredom. According to life coach Kelly Rogers, making plans for the future gives your relationship a little adrenaline rush, making you feel a sense of appreciation for each other. [3]

Establish a Date Night

In your everyday, mundane life together, it can be easy to forget to make the two of you a priority. Establishing a mandatory date night is a wonderful way to bring you and your significant other together for some quality time. Melanie Schilling, a relationship psychologist, claims that date nights are actually critical to relationship health. [4] Set something specific to do together as often as your schedule allows. It doesn’t have to be dinner at an expensive restaurant either. You can plan a “no cell phone” night, a walk at the park, or even try to recreate one of your first dates together.

Remember to Say “I Love You”

Don’t forget to remind your partner why you are together, especially when boredom creeps its head between you two. Simple things like saying, “I love you” or letting them know how much you appreciate them can help you keep the romance alive in your relationship. Try to think about the happy memories the two of you have shared; it can be far too easy to dwell on the problems. Remembering why and how much you love your significant other is a great way to forget about any boredom you thought you were feeling.

How to not be boring with your boyfriend

For representational purpose

Are you sick and troubled because you feel your partner is a pessimist and boring individual, hence you prefer to spend more and more time by yourself? . This is not the case only with you, you partner might share the same feeling about you

Are you sick and troubled because you feel your partner is a pessimist and boring individual, hence you prefer to spend more and more time by yourself? . This is not the case only with you, you partner might share the same feeling about you. Monotony is the ultimate bore and it is time, you need to add little oomph to your relationship. Relationship dynamics, can change from negative to positive with open dialogue and sincere effort.

Make date nights a regular routine

Once you get married, one strategy is to maintain your romance is to keep going on dates with your spouse. By having regular date nights, it is good for a relationship, but if things are getting monotonous and uninteresting, they ought to be needed. Dinner and a movie are a tradition for a reason, but without the occasional mix-up, it might get boring. You both, can enroll in a class, like painting or culinary, that both of would enjoy.

Talk to each other about your need with no filter

In relationships, communication is crucial. We must communicate honestly and also listen intently without any filter and also without hesitation. How content you are with the relationship and also with yourself might be affected by carrying grudges and resentments inside. But in order to do this, you must be empathetic towards your spouse and also comprehend as to why he or she is acting in the way that they are. You should make your partner aware, when your partner does not live up to your expectations or the relationship is not going the way, you would like it to.

Spend some additional time apart

You would grow tired of each other, if you live together and/or hang out all the time. Hence try spending time apart before you begin to blame your dissatisfaction on a lack of affection or connection. It should come as no surprise that being around happy, people make you happy. Do not depend on relationship to improve your life, instead, regardless of the person you are dating, aim to create a satisfying and pleasant life for yourself.

Seek for help outside

The persistent negativity of your partner might harm your relationship. You can consider working with a close friend, a member of your family or a licensed therapist who specializes in relationships, if you have been feeling the same about your partner consistently. These people might offer you advices as to how to heal and deal with boring and uninteresting partner. Behind the closed doors, it very simple for couples to fall into old argument routines, hence, you must find a trustworthy individual to assist you in ending that pattern..

During the first few months of a relationship, maybe you don’t face any problem at all. Everything seems going smooth.But after you’ve been together with your partner quite a while, small problems start to occur.

One of the prolems is boredom. And to tackle this, there are some recommendation on things to say to your boyfriend to keep the conversation going.

1. Sport

The first topic that you can being to keep your conversation going with your boyfriend is about boys interest. It will be either games or sport. But, let’s just focus on sport while knowing more things on what to do when your husband is obsessed with video games.

There are a lot of questions about sport that you can ask to him. For example: what is your favourite sport, what you usually do to keep your body health, since when you do a certain type of sport?

2. Similarities

How to not be boring with your boyfriend

Based on some physiological research, we will have the tendency to get closer easily with someone who has the same interest with us. In other words, we will prefer someone with more similarities like ourselves.

So, when the conversation gets boring, you can start to talk more things to say to your boyfriend when the conversation gets boring by talking about your similarities with him. As an example, you and your boyfriend are a bookworm. Then, you can start ask: what books that he likes, favourite genre of books, and etc.

3. Deep Talk

If you don’t go deep then you will not knowing more things about your boyfriend. And if you and him are wanting to get more serious in a relationship then you will need to have the deep talks topic to talk to.

Since you want to be serious with your boyfriend then start to set aside the how to start a conversation with your crush for the first time conversation. Start to get to know more deep talks topics to talk too such as: the economy, the world, and more things.

4. Family

As someone who cares about your boyfriend, you surely care about his family too. Family topic will always be an interesting topic to talk to while you learn to get to know his family better.

By having this kind of conversation, later on you will also be able to notice the signs your boyfriend family doesn’t like you and knowing how to react. Some basic question about family that you can ask will be: how any siblings he has, what kind of family routines that he loves to do together with his family, and etc.

5. Friends

Knowing more about his friends is as important as knowing things about him. By getting closer to his friends you will know more information about him through his friends.

There are some simple question you can ask about his friends such as: who are your closest friends, do you usually go out regularly with your friends, and many more.

Things To Do With Your Boyfriend When Bored

Isn’t it better to do more things aside from only knowing things to say to your boyfriend to keep the conversation going? Sometimes it is hard to be insipred and knowing what kind of things that we can do within the relationship so it won’t go bored.

To inspire you, here are some recommendation on things to do with your boyfriend when bored.

1. Start Exercising Together

Alright, let’s set aside the negativity that might comes up to your head when you read the characteristic of a healthy and an unhealthy relationship. There is no need to worry about it as long as you try your best to maintain the relationship.

And it is better for you and your boyfriend to be physically healthy. Why don’t you try to start exercising together?

2. Movie Date

How to not be boring with your boyfriend

Movie date is one of the ideas that you can do in order to make your relationship more fun. You don’t have to see the movie in the cinema. You can simply watch movies at home.

3. Cook Something Together

Who doesn’t love food? I guess, none. Moreover, nowdays many men can cook. So, why don’t you ask your boyfriend to cook something together with you. During the cooking process must be a lot of fun going on.

Aside from the things to say to your boyfriend to keep the conversation going, you still can do a lot of things together with your boyfriend. Do not giving up on things, but try to figure out more things that you can do together with him.

This will help you to enrich the relationship that you have.

Finally Solve Your Relationship Problems

If you’re like me you have probably spent endless nights worrying about your relationship and trying to find an easy way that will help you fix it.

I’d endlessly spent hours browsing the internet to find that one golden answer that would finally fix my relationship and allow me to go back to my happy old self.

As I discovered the hard way, there is no ‘one-size fits all’answer that will help everyone. Everyone’s relationship is different.

That’s when I decided it was time for me to talk to someone knowledgeable about the specific issues I was facing, and I found Relationship Hero.

Within 1 minute, I was able to chat directly to a relationship consultant to whom I could explain the specific issues that I was facing in my relationship.

She gave me suggestions that I could immediately start implementing and we agreed to set a follow up meeting to see how it went.

As soon as I started implementing her suggestions I immediately noticed a big improvement in my relationship. This felt like a huge sigh of relief.

Want him to chase, love and obsess over you?
Well, you’ll need to have a much deeper understanding of a thing called the ‘hero instinct’ which is one of the fundamental drivers behind the behaviour of all men. Once you use that to your advantage, you’ll finaly become the most important priority in his life. My friend James Bauer prepared this Quick Free Video that’ll teach you to utilize this to your advantage.

Of course, it still took hard work, but at least with my relationship counselor’s suggestions I now had a plan of action.

If you’re in a similar situation, I would therefore highly recommend that you do the same.

I’m sure you can get your relationship back on track as well!

Table of Contents

Many couples experience boredom in their long-distance relationship from time to time.

Knowing what to do when a long-distance relationship gets boring may be the one thing that saves it. First, you need to understand the reason your relationship is getting boring. Usually, the one thing to blame is excessive communication that takes the time you and your partner could spend on doing something exciting. To then, share with each other.

A boring relationship can show that your conversations are boring, or it can also be a sign that your relationship is no working so great.

In this article, we’ll talk about things that make your long-distance relationship boring, how to prevent it from getting boring and ways to fix it.

What Makes a Long-Distance Relationship Boring?

If you feel that your long-distance relationship is getting boring, it means that you are feeling bored in this relationship.

A relationship itself is what you make of it. For example, you may feel bored in your long-distance relationship, while your partner might feel okay with it.

So the real question is, why are you feeling bored with your long-distance relationship? In other words, what makes it boring for you?

There are several reasons why couples feel bored in a long-distance relationship. Excessive communication is one reason. If you talk too much, soon you will run out of things to say, and your conversations will get boring.

Another reason you might feel bored in the long-distance relationship is that your feelings have changed for your partner. Another possibility is that behind the boredom, is sadness and frustration of the fact that you cannot be physically together with your long-distance partner.

A lack of emotional and physical intimacy in a long-distance relationship can lead to sexual frustration and overall loss of interest in a relationship. To help long-distance couple maintain intimacy while they are apart, we have created this step by step guide.

How to turn off your ipod classic

If your iPod isn’t responding, try forcing it to restart.

Force restart your iPod touch

Follow the instructions for your model:

iPod touch (7th generation)

Press and hold both the Top button and the Volume Down button for at least 10 seconds, until you see the Apple logo.

Force restart your iPod touch (6th generation) and earlier

Press and hold both the Top button and the Home button for at least 10 seconds, until you see the Apple logo.

How to turn off your ipod classic

Force restart your iPod nano

Follow the instructions for your model:

iPod nano (7th generation)

Press and hold both the Sleep/Wake and Home button until the screen turns off. Then wait a few seconds for your device to restart. Still need help? Plug your iPod into power, then try again.

iPod nano (6th generation)

Press and hold both the Sleep/Wake and Volume Down button for at least 8 seconds, or until you see the Apple logo. Still need help? Plug your iPod into power, then try again.

iPod nano (5th generation) and earlier

Put the Hold switch firmly in the unlocked position. Then press and hold the Menu and Centre (or Select) buttons for 8 seconds, or until you see the Apple logo.

  • Not sure which model you have?
  • Learn how to charge your iPod nano or get help with other issues on your iPod nano.
  • If you can’t force restart your iPod (5th generation), place your device on a table and try again. This time, when you press the Centre button, don’t touch the Click Wheel. And, when you press Menu, press near the outside of the Click Wheel instead of near the centre.

How to turn off your ipod classic

Force restart your iPod shuffle

How to turn off your ipod classic

Force restart your iPod classic

  1. Put the Hold switch firmly in the unlocked position.
  2. Press and hold the Menu and Centre (or Select) buttons for 8 seconds, or until you see the Apple logo.

Still need help?

  • Place your iPod on a desk or table and try again. This time, when you press the Centre button, don’t touch the Click Wheel. And, when you press the Menu button, press it near the outside of the Click Wheel instead of near the centre.
  • You can also find out how to charge your iPod classic.
  • Not sure which model you have?

Hard reboot an unresponsive iPod to fix many problems

How to turn off your ipod classic

  • Tweet
  • Share
  • Email
  • Tweet
  • Share
  • Email

In This Article

Jump to a Section

If you’ve used a computer or other tech device and seen it freeze up, you know that restarting it usually fixes the problem. The same is true for an iPod, too.

How to turn off your ipod classic

Information in this article applies to iPod touch, iPod shuffle, iPod nano, iPod mini, iPod classic, iPod with video, iPod photo, and 1st through 4th generation iPods.

If your iPod has a Hold switch, before anything else, make sure the switch is in the off position. If the Hold switch is on, your iPod may appear frozen when it’s not.

How to Restart an iPod touch

To restart an iPod touch, do a hard reboot. To hard reboot the iPod, press and hold the Sleep/Wake button and the Home button (the power off slider briefly appears while holding the buttons) until you see the Apple logo. This may take at least 10 seconds.

How to Restart an iPod nano

Forcing a hard reboot on an iPod nano differs depending on the generation of the device.

  • iPod nano 7th generation: Press and hold the Sleep/Wake and Home buttons until the iPod restarts.
  • iPod nano 6th generation: Press and hold the Sleep/Wake and Volume Down buttons until the Apple logo displays. This process may take at least 8 seconds.
  • iPod nano 5th generation or older: Set the Hold switch to the Off position. Press and hold the Menu and Center buttons until the Apple logo appears. This process may take at least 8 seconds.

If the first attempt does not work, plug in the iPod nano to the power and try another hard reboot.

How to Restart an iPod Shuffle

To force restart an iPod shuffle, disconnect it from the power outlet or from your computer. Slide the power switch to Off. Wait 10 seconds, then switch the power to On.

How to Restart an iPod Classic

If your iPod classic isn’t responding, try restarting it following these steps.

Press and hold the Menu and Center buttons at the same time for 6 to 8 seconds. The Apple logo appears on the screen.

Release the buttons while the iPod classic restarts.

When the iPod has started again, check to see if it is responsive. If it’s still frozen, repeat the first two steps.

If that doesn’t work, make sure the iPod’s battery has a charge. Connect the iPod to a power source or computer. After the battery has charged for a while, try steps 1 and 2 again.

If you’re still unable to restart the iPod, there may be a hardware problem that needs a repair person to fix. Consider making an appointment at the Apple Store.

As of 2015, click wheel models of the iPod are not eligible for hardware repair by Apple.

How to Restart an iPod Mini, iPod with Video, iPod photo, or 4th Generation iPod (Click Wheel)

If your iPod with video, iPod Photo, or iPod (click wheel) isn’t working, restart it by following these steps.

Move the Hold switch to the On position, then to the Off position.

Press and hold the Menu button and the Center button at the same time for 6 to 10 seconds.

The iPod restarts and the screen displays the Apple logo. When it’s finished restarting, check to see if the iPod is responsive.

If the iPod is still frozen after the first restart attempt, repeat steps 1 through 3. If repeating these steps doesn’t work, plug the iPod into a power source to charge. Once charged, repeat the steps.

How to Restart a 3rd Generation iPod (Dock Connector), 2nd Generation iPod (Touch Wheel) and 1st Generation iPod (Scroll Wheel)

A restart of a frozen first- or second-generation iPod is done by following these steps.

Move the Hold switch to the On position, then move it to Off.

Press and hold the Play/Pause and Menu buttons on the iPod at the same time for 6 to 10 seconds. The iPod is restarting when the screen displays the Apple logo.

If this doesn’t work, plug the iPod into a power source and charge it fully. Repeat these steps.

If the instructions for your model of iPod do not work after a few attempts, there may be a more serious problem and you should contact Apple.​

Table of Contents

How do you turn on an iPod classic 120GB?

Press any button to turn on iPod classic. The first time you turn on iPod classic, the language menu appears. Use the Click Wheel to scroll to your language, and then press the Center button to choose it.

What generation is iPod A1238 120GB?

How to turn off your ipod classic

iPod Classic (6th Gen)
MB562LL/A / A1238 The iPod Classic (6th Gen) – MB562LL/A was released in 2008 and features a 2.5″ QVGA LCD display, a Silver housing, and 120GB of storage. The device was released on September 9th 2008 with a MSRP of $249.

How do I reset my iPod A1238?

Press and hold the Menu and Center buttons at the same time for 6 to 8 seconds. The Apple logo appears on the screen. Release the buttons while the iPod classic restarts. When the iPod has started again, check to see if it is responsive.

How do you turn on an old iPod classic?

How to turn off your ipod classic

  1. Move the Hold switch firmly to the off position so that you don’t see orange by the switch.
  2. Press and hold the Menu button and Center (or Select) button for 8 seconds, or until you see the Apple logo.

What generation is my iPod model A1238?

A1238 — iPod with video (5th Generation). This has the same model number as the iPod classic line. The 5th Generation’s serial number ends with: V9K, V9P, V9M, V9R, V9L, V9N, V9Q, V9S, WU9, WUA, WUB, WUC, or X3N.

How do you make an old iPod work?

Use this article for help with your iPod classic, iPod nano, and iPod shuffle….iPod nano (7th generation)

  1. Press and hold both the Sleep/Wake button and Home button until the screen turns off.
  2. Wait for your device to restart.
  3. Still need help? Plug into power, then try again.

What is the difference between the A1238 and the Classic iPod?

According to iFixit, Model A1238 corresponds only to “iPod Classic”, this may be because there has only been one generation or because all the generations use the same parts. Was this answer helpful? Was this answer helpful?

When did the iPod Classic 160 GB come out?

Model number and date introduced: A1238: September 2009. The iPod classic 160 GB (Late 2009) is a hard drive-based iPod featuring a large, widescreen color display, a Click Wheel, and the capability of displaying photos and videos. It uses USB for syncing.

What is the model number for an iPod Classic?

Unfortunately, all iPod Classics use the Model Number A1238. Luckily, all of the repairs on these devices are the same and can be found on the iPod Classic Repair Page. The original Classics featured an 80 GB thin verion, and a 160 GB thick version.

How many GB is the iPod Touch Loop?

The iPod touch loop is included with the 32 GB and 64 GB models. iPod touch (5th generation) is available in five colors. This model is available in silver and has a FaceTime HD camera.

The right procedure to reset an iPod classic is provided in this Techspirited article. Read to know how it’s exactly done.

Like it? Share it!

  • Share
  • Tweet
  • LinkedIn
  • Pin
  • Email

How to turn off your ipod classic

The right procedure to reset an iPod classic is provided in this Techspirited article. Read to know how it’s exactly done.

Are you an iPod classic user? Does it tend to freeze, now and then? If yes, there is no need to worry. We will help you with a few handy solutions to fix it effectively. The iPod is a mechanical device, that needs gentle handling. If your iPod freezes or tends to slow down, all you need to do is reset it. In the following lines, we show you how to go about it.

Procedure to Hard Reset the Device

  • Toggle the Hold switch on and off, and return it to the off position.
  • Then you need to hold down the Center and Menu Buttonsimultaneously. You can use two fingers to hold these buttons down together.
  • Hold down the buttons till you observe the Apple logo on the iPod screen. This will take about 6 to 8 seconds.
  • If you cannot locate a Center button on your older iPod version, you need to press the Play/Pause button, along with menu button. This applies to iPod versions with touch wheel, scroll wheel, and dock connectors.
  • Suppose the hard reset does not work for your device in your first attempt. Then try again. Sometimes, it takes 2 to 3 attempts.

Procedure to Reset an iPod with a Click Wheel

It is rather easy to reset an iPod classic that sports a clickwheel. All you need to do is toggle the Hold Switch on and off. Then return it to off position. Then press the Menu and Center button simultaneously. Press and hold the buttons for about 6 seconds. You will observe the Apple logo appear. If the device fails to reset in your first attempt, you can try a couple of more times.

If your iPod does not reset using these methods, you can plug it to a power adapter. May be the battery is drained out. Or else, plug it to a computer and see if it starts up. In the plugged in position, again try the reset procedure. That should do the trick.

How to turn off your ipod classicIT Jobs

iOS 12/13/14 – Apple Music shuffle is stuck on, but the shuffle or play button does not light up anymore. Whether i cluck shuffle or not it still shuffles. i cannot deactivate shuffle. i have spent days figuring out, but nothing happens.

That is the problem from an iPhone users running in iOS 12/13/14 from Apple Discussion.

Shuffle mode is set by default on iOS 10. After iOS 10, the shuffle mode in Music app is disabled or enabled, is following what mode the songs are played in the last time.

Generally speaking, the shuffle mode is very easy to turn off. However, for one reason or another, still some users complain he/she is suffering from the shuffle mode, and cannot find where the shuffle mode is, let alone turning off it.

Here, this article mainly focuses on getting iPhone out of shuffle mode in 5 ways with step-by-step guide.

How to turn off your ipod classic

iPhone iPod Stuck on Shuffle Mode

  • Solution 1. Turn off Music Shuffle Mode on iPhone via Playing a Certain Song
  • Solution 2. Take iPhone/iPod off Shuffle Mode by Turning Shuffle Mode Button
  • Solution 3. Get iPhone/iPod out of Shuffle Mode by Restarting iPhone/App
  • Solution 4. Disable iPhone/iPod Shuffle Mode through Reinstalling App
  • Solution 5. Universal iOS System Problem Repair to Turn off Shuffle Mode

Solution 1. Turn off Music Shuffle Mode on iPhone/iPod via Playing a Certain Song

The easiest way to turn off shuffle mode is to play songs in order.

For playing songs in order on iPhone, you have 2 ways.

How to turn off your ipod classic

1. Open Music app, tap “Library” > Select one song category from the playlists, artist, albums, songs or downloaded music that you want to stop shuffle mode > Tap any song in the music list.

2. Alternatively, you could tap “Library” > Select one song category from the playlists, artist, albums, songs or downloaded music that you want to stop shuffle mode > Hit the “Play” button at the top-left.

Then you could try the “Play Next” button to fix shuffle mode and play the songs in order from iTunes Music or local songs or playlists.

Solution 2. Take iPhone/iPod off Shuffle Mode by Turning Shuffle Mode Button

The second solution to stop shuffle mode playing on Music from iPhone is turning off shuffle mode directly.

How to turn off your ipod classic

1. For turning on shuffle mode, you could also follow the way to enable it.

2. The solution also works when you want to turn off shuffle mode playing from playlist, albums, artists, etc., in in Apple Music, iTunes Music, etc.

Generally speaking, shuffle mode stuck in your iPhone will be fixed. However, if the shuffle button and play button does not light up and change colors anymore, just try the next solution.

Solution 3. Get iPhone/iPod out of Shuffle Mode by Restarting iPhone/App

If the above settings do nothing to fix the problem, you could try to exit the Music app and then restart it.

Still does not help? Get an iPhone reboot now.

How to turn off your ipod classic

More details about restarting iPhone XS or other models, just check here.

After restarting your iPhone, you can check if the shuffle mode has been removed.

Solution 4. Disable iPhone/iPod Shuffle Mode through Reinstalling App

With iOS 10, you can remove some built-in apps from the Home screen on iPhone. That is another solution when your iPhone is still in shuffle mode after trying the solutions above.

For removing Music app, you just need to press the icon of Music app until it jiggles. Tap the small cross on the upper-left corner of Music app to delete it.

It only disappears from your Home screen, and will not free up storage space or erase the songs of Music app.

For reinstalling it, you just need to go to App Store to search the app and reinstall it.

Solution 5. Universal iOS System Problem Repair to Turn off Shuffle Mode

However, if all the attempts you did as simmer did from Apple Discussion, close app, delete app and download again, select random song in album, restart iPhone, but shuffle mode still exists on iPhone, it may be the iOS system problem, and you need the iOS system repair tool to help you.

Apeaksoft iOS System Recovery is the powerful iOS system repair software, which can help you fix any issues caused by iOS system error, like Apple logo, white screen, headphone mode, shuffle mode, DFU mode, zoom mode etc.

How to turn off your ipod classic

  • Drag iPhone in shuffle mode to normal.
  • Fix iPhone frozen, disabled, glitch, etc.
  • Downgrade and upgrade iPhone to the supported iOS version.
  • Work for iPhone 12, 11, XS, XR, X, 8, 7, etc.

How to turn off your ipod classic

How to turn off your ipod classic

How to turn off your ipod classic

The repair process will take minutes and you need to pay some patience.

After that, you could open Music app to play the songs and just follow the first and the second solution to turn off shuffle mode on iPhone.


Shuffle mode on iPhone is a feature to refresh your ears in disorder. However, once your iPhone or iPod gets stuck in shuffle mode, it will be a little troublesome. For turning off shuffle mode, the first and second solutions work. However, once the general settings do not work, you just need to follow other solutions followed to kick it out.

Which solution is workable for you?

Do you have any better solutions? Let me know by leaving your comments below.

What do you think of this post?

  • 1
  • 2
  • 3
  • 4
  • 5

Rating: 4.8 / 5 (based on 102 votes) Follow Us on

How to bypass locked screen on iPhone (12 included)? 4 easy ways here to help you bypass iPhone passcode to use it as a normal one.

How to remove safe mode if your iPhone is stuck in it? Read this article to exit safe mode on iPhone and learn more about iPhone safe mode effectively.

iPhone gets trapped in glitches like iPhone frozen, iPhone network not working, iPhone password forgotten, FaceTime bug on iPhone, etc.? Here are troubleshooting tips to fix it in minutes.

iPhone Stuck Issue

Fix your iOS system to normal in various issues like being stuck in DFU mode, recovery mode, headphone mode, Apple logo, etc. to normal without any data loss.

Most people would ask how to put iPod into Recovery mode when they are not able to update or have trouble in restoring iOS devices. In this article, we will show you how to get iPod touch in or out of Recovery mode step by step. In addition, we also offers a useful tips in case your iPod touch is stuck in Recovery mode.

How to turn off your ipod classic

  • What is iPod Recovery mode
  • How to put iPod in Recovery mode
  • how to Get iPod out of Recovery mode
  • How to fix iPod stuck in DFU mode

What is iPod Recovery mode?

iPod Recovery mode is a state of iBoot which is used to refresh the device with a new operating system. This method is usually for the old iOS is somehow damaged or the device is undergoing an upgrade with iTunes.

When do you need iPod Recovery mode?

If you want to change the device’s firmware, or update iOS, or your iPhone, iPod touch, iPad won’t even show up in iTunes, or your iPhone, iPad, iPod doesn’t response, you can downgrade your iOS. Then you need to put iPhone/iPad/iPod in recovery mode. Once your device is in recovery mode, you can proceed to the restoration process.

When you need to update iOS, change the iPod firmware, or iPod does not show up in iTunes, etc., you can choose to downgrade the iOS for iPod. Then you have to put iPod into Recovery mode. But pay attention, once you iPod enters the Recovery mode, you have to proceed to the restoring process. That’s to say, the current data and information from iPod would be totally gone. You’d better back up your iPod touch at first.

How to put iPod in Recovery mode

Step 1 Turn off your iPod touch. Press and hold down the “Sleep/Wake” button (Also referred to Side button) for about 3-4 seconds until the slider shows on screen. Then slide to power off your iPod touch.

Notes: If you are not able turn off iPod touch using the above way, press and hold the “Sleep/Wake” and “Home” buttons simultaneously. When the device has been turned off, release the both buttons.

Step 2 Don’t connect the lightning USB cable with the iPod touch, but connect the other end of the cable to your computer’s USB port.

Step 3 While holding the Home button for about 10 seconds or more, and connect the lightning USB cable to your iPod until you see the “Connect to iTunes” screen. When you see this, you can let go of the Home button.

How to turn off your ipod classic

Step 4 Launch the latest iTunes on computer. You should see a pop-up iTunes message saying that there is an iPod which is into Recovery Mode and that first needs to be restored in order to use it. Choose to restore iPhone or update iPhone.

Step 5 Your iPod touch has been into Recovery mode. Use iTunes to restore the device. If you don’t see the “Connect to iTunes” screen, start over again.

How to get iPod out of Recovery mode

Exiting iPod touch Recovery mode is simple t but please pay attention that Recovery mode will let you lose all data, such as contacts, messages, photos, videos. All files will be erased. If you ever backed up iPod to iTunes or iCloud, that is not a question.

Step 1 Unplug the iPod from your computer while it is in Recovery mode. Now, turn off iPod device. Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button. Then slide to power it off. If you fails, press and hold the Sleep/Wake and Home buttons at the same time to turn off iPod touch.

Step 2 Connect the iPod with the USB cable while continuing to hold the ‘Home’ button down. Do not release the button till you see the iTunes logo and a graphic of the USB cable.

What to do when iPod is stuck in Recovery mode

Why is my iPod is stuck in Recovery mode? There are many reasons:

  • 1. Recovery Mode may happen by accident.
  • 2. Sometimes you have activated Recovery Mode deliberately, but your iPhone becomes stuck in a zombie state.
  • 3. You may be deliberate to enter iPod Recovery Mode if you attempt to jailbreak the iPod touch.
  • 4. Unfortunately, iPod Recovery mode also sometimes occurs when you are simply trying to upgrade to the new iOS version.

Don’t worry. When your iPod is stuck in the Recovery mode, you can use FoneLab – iOS System Recovery program to help you.

Step 1 Launch iOS System Recovery

Download and install FoneLab. Connect your iPod to computer with USB cable. Choose the “iOS System Recovery” option in the interface.

How to turn off your ipod classic

Step 2 Detect iPad recovery mode

Hit “Start” button. Then iOS System Recovery will detect your iPod is stuck in Recovery mode.

How to turn off your ipod classic

Step 3 Download iOS firmware

The program will soon detect your iPod model. Then click “Repair” button to download the appropriate iPod firmware.

How to turn off your ipod classic

Then the firmware will be quickly downloaded.

How to turn off your ipod classic

Step 4 Fix iPod stuck in recovery mode

When the firmware download is complete, iOS System Recovery can automatically fix iPad trapped in Recovery mode and get iPad out of Recovery mode quickly.

How to turn off your ipod classic

For more details about how to solve iPod stuck in Recovery mode, you can watch the video:

How to turn off your ipod classic

In this article, we mainly show you everything about iPod Recovery mode. We describe how to put iPod in Recovery mdoe and get iPod out of Recovery mode as well. If your iPod is stuck in Recovery mode, you can use FoneLab – iOS System Recovery.

What do you think of this post?

  • 1
  • 2
  • 3
  • 4
  • 5

Rating: 4.8 / 5 (based on 266 ratings)

How to turn off your ipod classic

December 15, 2020 17:20 / Updated by Iris Walker to iOS Recovery Mode

What to do when iPod is frozen? This article gives you the simple tutorials to fix a frozen iPod.

Want to find an iPod to Mac Transfer tool? iPod to Mac Transfer enables users to transfer music, videos, contacts, etc.

Read this article and learn how to restore your iPod/iPod touch/iPod nano to factory settings.

How to backup iPhone X/8/7/6/5/4 securely? This article introduces three methods for you to backup iPhone.

There are 7 easiest methods to help you fix iPhone does not ring problem with detail explanations, and all iOS versions are supported.

Potential solutions are provided here to the most common iOS Update problems on iPhone, iPad and iPod touch.

Sponsored Links

How to turn off your ipod classic

B/aD0wO3c9MDthcHBpZD15dGFjaHlvbg–/” /> HOW-TO: Get music OFF your iPod image

Never did we think we’d need to do a How-To on something which should be part of the basic functionality of a portable music player, but once you put your tunes on an iPod unfortunately it’s a one-way sync unless you know the tricks for getting them off. There are already a lot of different ways to copy music off of an iPod, Apple is just choosing to spend a lot of time and resources to make it hard to do. In this How-To we show you several different ways of getting the music off of your iPod and onto both Macs and PCs, all with free tools.

Update: Since this version is rather behind the times, we’ve got a brand new, totally up-to-date guide for getting stuff off your iPod and iPhone!

Why do we need to get our files off our iPod?

It would be a wonderful thing to know we’ll never have a hard drive failure, a system crash with data loss or our computer stolen, but that’s not reality. In our world, those things happen and once you’ve spent the time, money and effort to put music on your iPod, there isn’t any reason it should be locked away. We’ve needed to do a fresh install of the operating system for every computer we have ever owned (yes, including Macs), and sooner or later plenty of users will need to do the same, either because of a physical defect which requires new hardware, or to eliminate any of the spyware, viruses, and other exploits which are part of the computing experience these days. Back-ups are great, but we can’t always back-up our entire library of music. And besides, why should we, it’s our music on our iPod?

Last week we posted our observation that the new new version of iTunes 4.7 disabled a popular and useful utility called “iPod Download” which lets you drag and drop files from the iPod to anywhere you choose. Apple added some blocking code to stop the plug-in from working, and later in this How-To we’ll show you how to enable “iPod Download” with a HexEditor in the Mac section.

All that said, Cory Doctorow from BoingBoing made a couple posts about the current vibe he’s getting from Apple, and we echo the same thoughts (check out his thoughts here and here). Cory also suggested a tool for Macs to get files off, we’ll have that in the Mac section of this How-To as well.

We wanted to explain all of this, since we received more than than a few emails and a lot of instant messages from people discovering they couldn’t just get their stuff off their iPod.

We’re also hopeful Apple might consider not spending engineering time and lawyer fees on chasing after applications and developers who just want to give folks an obvious feature that’s being left out only to appease the RIAA. At the end of the day, Apple needs to know that we’re their customers, too.

On with the How-To. We picked a couple of free tools that help you get your music off your iPod, there might be better ones that we missed, so feel free to post them up in the comments.

Get the tunes off with a PC
On the PC side we picked like the full-featured (and free) ephPod. ephPod can download news, get Outlook contacts, edit your calendar, add songs and few dozen other useful things-but for us, the best feature is a simple file export to get your songs off your iPod. The PC does not need to be the authorized machine for your iPod.

Open the application, Start > Programs > ephPod.

Make sure your iPod is plugged in and select the drive in the pull down list that your iPod appears as.

Once the application has seen your iPod, double click “songs”-this will bring up a list of all the songs on your iPod.

When you see the song(s) you wish to copy off your iPod, select and “right click” and choose “Copy Songs to Directory” on the song or press Ctril+Alt+C. For our example we’re taking our Engadget Podcast off of our iPod and putting it on another computer.

ephPod will ask where to save the file, we choose our desktop.

ephPod will then create a new folder along with the file you selected.

Click OK and that’s it!

Get the tunes off with a Mac
Our favorite was to get our files off our iPod on our Mac “was” iPod Download, but since iTunes 4.7 came out, Apple disabled it (we’ll show you how to fix that at the end of the How-To). iPod Download was also pulled after Apple’s legal team went after the site hosting the application, so here’s another application that does the same thing and is free. The Mac does not need to be the authorized machine for your iPod.

We like iLinkPod, simple quick and released under the terms of the GNU General Public License. After installing, iLinkPod checks your iPod, displays the results and when complete, a new folder with pop up and you can then see all the hidden goodness, which is your stuff. From there you can drag-and-drop the files off your iPod to your Mac.

After installing double click the application.

Click “Choose” to select your iPod.

Choose the volume or iPod name. Click “Choose”.

iLinkPod will detect if you selected your iPod, then click “Link!”.

iLinkPod will now scan your iPod and you’ll see a new finder window with folders called f00, f01, f02, etc..You’ll also have a folder called “iLinkPodFolder” on your desktop.

From here you can download all your songs or just browse through the folders to find the songs you want to copy to your Mac. In our example again we move the Engadget Podcast over to our other Mac. If you just select the song, you can also play the song directly off the iPod.

That’s it! You songs are now back where you want them!

“iPod Download” fix

Once we realized that Apple killed our favorite app iPod Download, we started to poke around with a HexEdit tool to see what they changed. HexEdit can be downloaded here for free at SourceForge.

Now HexEditing a file can really mess things up, so only do this if you’re comfortable with these types of tools.

As we were looking through the latest iTunes, the French site HardMac uncovered exactly what we were looking for. It’s simple, Apple looks for the name “iPod Download” all you need to do is change it to something with the same number of characters.

The following assumes you had “iPod Download” already installed and then iTunes killed it.

Download and install HexEdit from SourceForge.

It might be a good idea to make a copy of iTunes and putting in another folder, just in case (File > Duplicate).

Run HexEdit and browse to iTunes (File > Open).

Keep browsing to Contents > MacOS > iTunes. Which is an Executable. Click Open.

Once open, you’ll see a ton of numbers and random characters. Choose Find > Find and Replace. Type iPod Download. Click Find Next.

Here’s what it will find.

Now, change the name from iPod Download to something else, just make sure to keep the same number of characters. For example, we typed in “iown thisipod” without the quotes. bite mesteveb also works.

Exit the application, HexEdit > Quit HexEdit, you’ll then be prompted to save, click Save.

Now Open up iTunes and iPod download is back!

From here, we’re back to where we were and will enjoy getting our files off our iPod, until the next Apple update or cease and desist letter comes your way.

Your turn
There are lots of way to liberate your files from your iPod, we just picked a couple free and simple tools. Please feel free to post up your favorites in the comments.

Lastly, if you’re still thirsty for more iPod hacking, check out our new iPod Hacks section over on Hack a Day!

The iPod message “Disk Mode Ok to Disconnect” appeared suddenly on my iPod Nano without me knowingly turning this mode on. I tried to use the buttons or the wheel to turn it off but nothing seemed to work. I was getting desperate and decided to Google for a solution. Many people are using the iPod and it was highly unlikely that I was the only one experiencing this strange disk mode.

I learned that the only way to get out disk mode would be an reset of the iPod. Did I say that I hate it that the iPod can’t be turned off completely, there is no off switch. Well, to reset a newer iPod model I had to follow these steps:

To turn iPod Disk mode off:

  1. Toggle the hold switch on and off.
  2. Press and Hold the Select and the Menu button for more than ten seconds. If you have different buttons, try the Play/Pause and Menu buttons instead until the Apple logo appears.
  3. The normal selection screen should appear, your iPod is out of Disk mode.

To turn iPod Disk mode on:

  1. Toggle the hold switch on and off
  2. Press and Hold the Select and the Menu button for six+ seconds
  3. Release both buttons when the Apple logo appears
  4. Press and Hold the Select and Play button until the Disk Mode text appears

How to turn off your ipod classic

The method may differ for you, depending on the iPod model you are using. Apple has detailed information about how to get in and out of disk mode for all iPod models. It is best that you pay the support page over at Apple’s website a visit if the method above does not work for you, for instance if you have different buttons on your iPod.

You may need to hold down the Sleep and Hold buttons down on newer devices until the screen turns black to turn off disk mode on them.

How to turn off your ipod classic

Daisy Raines

Apr 27, 2022 • Filed to: iPhone Data Transfer Solutions • Proven solutions

How to turn off your ipod classic

“Old computer died. Have a new one. How can I transfer all the music files on my iPod classic to iTunes on the new computer?”

Got a new PC and now want to transfer music from iPod classic to iTunes to build your iTunes library? With all songs on your iPod classic, if you attempt to sync it with iTunes, iTunes will remove everything on your iPod classic.

Transferring music from iDevice to iTunes is not an easy task for the users who want to back up their music files or transfer to other devices to listen to songs. iTunes allows users to sync music files with the computer by sync it with iTunes but they can listen in iTunes itself. If you are looking to transfer music from iPod classic to iTunes by using iTunes, this only for the purchased music. For that non-purchased music, there is some third party software available to transfer music to iTunes.Today we are going to introduce some easy ways to transfer music from iPod classic to iTunes.

Part 1. Transfer Music from iPod Classic to iTunes Automatically

As we all know that iTunes saves files in the iTunes library only for security purpose of your music. So just think if sometimes your system got crashed then your music files will also be lost. You can’t recover them. To overcome this problem Dr.Fone – Phone Manager (iOS) is available for you to transfer music files from iPod Shuffle, iPod Nano, iPod Classic, and iPod Touch to iTunes directly. Dr.Fone – Phone Manager (iOS) allows you to transfer any file from your iPod, iPad, iPhone to iTunes, or PC to take a backup. It is able to back up your music, videos, podcasts to manage music freely without any hassle. You can get it for windows or Mac both OS and transfer your music to any iDevice or computer without any problem.

How to turn off your ipod classic

Dr.Fone – Phone Manager (iOS)

Transfer MP3 From iPhone/iPad/iPod to PC without iTunes

  • Transfer, manage, export/import your music, photos, videos, contacts, SMS, Apps, etc.
  • Backup your music, photos, videos, contacts, SMS, Apps, etc. to computer and restore them easily.
  • Transfer music, photos, videos, contacts, messages, etc from one smartphone to another.
  • Transfer media files between iOS devices and iTunes.
  • Support all iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch models with any iOS versions.

How to turn off your ipod classic

Introduction: How to Get Your Music Back Off Your Ipod.. FREE!

How to turn off your ipod classic

How to turn off your ipod classic

How to turn off your ipod classic

Basically, Ipods Don’t let you re import the music off of it, they only let you delete it.

For example, If you where to put you’re favorite songs on your Ipod, but then, accidentally delete them all off of your computer. So you sat there in a bad mood and it hit you, My Ipod still has all my music! I can just re-import in from my ipod! Thats when you would go into iTunes and see if you could drag them out of your Ipods library into your iTunes library, but no Apple didn’t want to make it this easy for some obvious reasons.

But here is how you can do it Free without any software.

Step 1: First

First you want to go to your desktop an locate your “Start” Button, click on it, and click on My Computer

Step 2: Secent

After opening the folder, My Computer, you want to find the folder that is for your iPod. In my case its “MR” Once you have completed this, Open it.

Step 3: Thirdly

Once the folder is open, Find the “Tools” and select “Folder Options”

Step 4: Fourthly

Once the Folder Options are opened, Select the View Tab, then find the sup folder “Hidden Files and Folders” and select “Show hidden Files and Folders” once completed click “OK”

Step 5: Fifthly

Now that you can see the Hidden folders, locate the folder named “iPod_Control” and open it.

Step 6: Sixthly

Now locate Music and open it.

Step 7: Seventhly

There are whole bunch of sub folders to select from so I just picked any random one which just so happened to be F31.

After opening a folder you will see the odd names of songs, and hopefully the Artists as well. To tell what it is drag it some where and open it with iTunes. There it will give you the full name of the song, and the artist.

If you are here to import all the songs, Create a folder on the desktop and copy all of the sub folders into it. You then want to go to iTunes, go under “Files” then select “Add Folder to Library” and add, in my case, “F00,” “F01,” “F02” extra till you do all of the sub folders.

Quick suggestion; After you get the files into iTunes, I would suggest that you Consolidate your library. So you can move and or delete the music files and not worry about them no longer playing.

Be the First to Share

Did you make this project? Share it with us!

Did you buy an add-on display, dock, speaker system, car accessory or cable with video-out for your color 4G or 5G iPod? Were you expecting it to work with the iPod classic or new iPod nano? Think again.

How to turn off your ipod classic

Without disclosing the change to customers, Apple has locked the TV Out feature of the iPod classic and video-capable iPod nano, preventing users from outputting iPod content to their TV sets as has been done in years past. Going to the Videos > Settings menu brings up a TV Out option that is now unresponsive when clicked, showing only the word “off.” When locked, video content will display on the iPod’s screen, but not on your TV or portable display accessory.*

How to turn off your ipod classic

Presently, the only apparent way to turn this feature on is if you connect your iPod to a device with an Apple authentication chip built in. Authentication chips are only available in Apple products, and in a handful of products made by Apple-licensed third-party developers. The chips are not available to unlicensed developers, and add additional costs to the prices of iPod accessories. Upcoming Apple video cables that will work with the new iPods will sell for a staggering $49.

How to turn off your ipod classic

Testing results with old accessories have been mixed, but largely negative. iLounge has tested the new iPods with Apple’s Universal Dock and iPod Hi-Fi, both of which unlock the TV Out option—even though the Hi-Fi has no video out feature. We have also confirmed that the new iPods do not work in popular portable video displays such as the Memorex iFlip and Sonic Impact Video-55, or most speakers with video output capabilities. One notable third-party exception is Bowers and Wilkins’ recent $600 speaker system Zeppelin, which appears to contain an authentication chip and have been assisted during development by Apple, unlike its lower-priced peers.

It is unclear whether Apple will also require new accessory purchases in order to unlock video output in its upcoming iPod touch. We will have more on this story as it develops.

[Updated: Starting in subsequent versions of the iPod nano and iPod classic firmware, Apple changed the Videos > Settings > TV Out menu option in a small and relatively unimportant way: you can now select “On” or “Ask” regardless of whether any accessory is connected, but neither of these settings will work to actually output video from these iPods to an external display unless you have connected a new accessory with an authentication chip. Similarly, the iPod touch and iPhone will only output video to authentication chip-equipped accessories, bringing up a Display on TV dialog box whenever you start video playback with such an accessory attached, and refusing to bring up that option otherwise. Pre-authentication chip video accessories remain unable to perform video from the iPod nano, iPod classic, iPod touch, and iPhone.]

How to turn off your ipod classic

Introduction: How to Mod Your IPod (5/5.5 Gen)

I’ll teach you how to put rockbox, custom firmware [like the new ipods], a bootloader and 20 games onto your ipod.

Step 1: Getting the Custom Firmware

First, we need to find out if you have a 5th gen or 5.5 gen.
NOTE: this does not work on any other ipod than the ipod video. [That means shuffle, touch, nano [all], classic, chromatic and mini!]
To find this out, go to music [the menu with playlists, artists, etc.] and scroll to the very bottom.


After this file has downloaded, extract the files and then download this program:

When that finishes downloading, extract the contents of that .zip
After extraction, navigate to the folder you extracted them to and run ipodwizard.
When ipodwizard starts, change the edit mode to firmware file and then click open firmware. navigate to where you extracted the first zip and select the .bin file. after you did this, click write to ipod. click ok on the next box, wait for it to write the firmware. when it’s done, eject your ipod. it will restart itself. leave it plugged in and wait for it to finish booting. when it reconnects with the computer, eject it again and then unplug it. enjoy your new firmware!

IMPORTANT: If your iPod is missing songs and videos after you write the new firmware, put a new song in itunes and sync your ipod.

Step 2: Getting the Games

First of all, open iTunes. It will tell you a new version of the firmware is available for your ipod. Don’t update. Never update. You’ll lose your custom firmware and the games after we put them on.

The following step will put these games on your ipod:
Mini Golf
Texas Hold Em
Sims Pool
Sims Bowling
Ms Pacman
SAT Preps (2)

But anyways, once you opened iTunes, go to your iPod and go to the games tab. uncheck the option to sync games. it will tell you it will erase games already there, click ok and then apply [underneath sync]

enable your ipod for disk use and then click apply again.

so the next step is to download the games.
click here:
when that has finished downloading, extract the files.
navigate to where you extracted them and open the folder. inside that folder there should be “Games_RO”. If you see lots of folders with numbers and letters, you’re too far in; go back a folder and then right click -> copy “games_ro”

open internet explorer and type this in the address bar: letter:\ipod_control
make sure to replace “letter” with the letter your ipod is mounted at. [go to my computer and see what the letter is after your ipod.]

when you’re in ipod_control, right click -> paste. it will ask you if you want to overwrite. click yes to all.

when that finishes copying, eject your ipod and enjoy your new games.

Step 3: Getting Rockbox

This part will be pretty straightforward, since rockbox has its own installer.

extract the zip and run the file. it will guide you through the rest. make sure to do a complete installation.

after that’s done, go to the uninstallation tab and remove the bootloader. [nothing else!]

Step 4: IPL Bootloader

We’ll be installing a bootloader. Don’t worry, it’s not too hard.

please note, you’ll need either 7zip or winrar for this part.
extract the contents of ipodloader2-2.6.tar.gz to c:\documents and settings\youruser
replace youruser with the account you’re on now. after that, go to where you extract the files and put ipodpatcher inside the new folder

press the windows key and r until you get a popup box. now type cmd in the box and press enter.

when the black box pops up
type: cd ipodloader2-2.6
type: ipodpatcher -ab loader.bin

wait for it to do whatever and then exit the window.

eject your ipod and hold the menu+center button until it restarts.
this is like a “power off” for the apple firmware, so remember it, you’ll need it again.

please note: the picture shows ipodlinux in the startup options. i won’t be covering that because it takes a long time and is pretty much just a pain in the ass.

Step 5: You’re Done!

that’s it.
remember: have fun with your ipod and mod it the way you like!

also, i’m not responsible if you manage to screw up your ipod doing this, but throw me a message and i’ll do my best to help.

Step 6: Credits

20 games – tk09 from
rockbox – fellas over at
iPL loader – it’s a part of ipodlinux, and a tutorial can be found at their wiki
ipod custom firmware – the firmware is called ipod neue classic and credit goes to ebsy and ihackr from

Be the First to Share

Did you make this project? Share it with us!

12 replies

  • Report
  • Report
  • Report
  • Report
  • Report
  • Report
  • Report
  • Report
  • Report
  • Report
  • Report
  • Report
  • Report
  • Report
  • Report

i dropped mine in the toilet.
dried it in rice for a few days& did this

seems to be working!

  • Report
  • Report
  • Report
  • Report
  • Report
  • Report
  • Report
  • Report
  • Report
  • Report
  • Report
  • Report
  • Report

My Ipod doesnt even show up in Itunes How do I get it done in DFU mode?

  • Report
  • Report
  • Report

Didn’t find the answer you are looking for?

  • Report

try this.
1. turn your ipod into disk mode through
2. connect to your pc
3. format ur ipod or restore settings in itunes.

haven’t tried the restore but the format worked for me. 😀

  • Report
  • Report
  • Report


Sponsored Links

How to turn off your ipod classic

B/aD0wO3c9MDthcHBpZD15dGFjaHlvbg–/” /> HOW-TO use an iPod as a bootable drive image

This week’s HOW-TO is a handy one for the Mac folks out there who want to run multiple operating systems, but not install them to their hard drive, all using an iPod as a bootable FireWire drive. This HOW-TO is also helpful for trying out new software (on another OS), running developer versions of Mac OS (like Mac OS X Server or Tiger) as well as having a way to repair your Mac if for some reason it cannot boot on its own. At the end of this article, we also point to a way to simply back up your home directory (or anything else to your iPod) which can be handy too, and even used in conjunction with this HOW-TO).

Ingredients for this HOW-TO.

  • iPod (most iPods should work, but the mini will not)
  • Mac OS X 10.3.5 is what we’re using for the target machine
  • Operating System to install to iPod (we used Tiger and Mac OS X)


Before we get started, we should warn you that doing this can and will use your iPod in a way it was not intended and may severely shorten the life of your iPod. The reason is that the little iPod hard drive wasn’t meant to be a full-time operating system drive. It’s okay to boot from it from time to time, but the little drives are rated to about 20,000 hours while desktop drives are usually rated to 750,000 hours or more. But, even with that said— the biggest reason thus will eventually kill your iPod is—the heat that will be generated inside the iPod from this much use isn’t what the iPod was designed for, so at some point you can and will fry your iPod.

Preparing the iPod.
Also, to do this we’re going to completely erase the iPod, making it useless for anything else beside booting in to another operating system (until you restore it using the iPod update utility).>

You may not need to erase the iPod completely, in our tests we found that it worked better (in most cases) and if you’re going to use a PC iPod then you need to format it to a Mac File system any way.

Now that’s out of the way, let’s get started.

For our example, we’re going to use a 3G, 30GB iPod. The first thing we’re going to need to do is erase the drive, formatting it— in preparation to install the new OS to it.

Our OS is Mac OS 10.3.5

Plug the iPod into your Mac (for our example, an iMac).

Open Disk Utility, it’s usually located in the Utilities folder.

In the left pane, click the iPod and select “erase” in menu to the right. Choose “Mac OS Extended (Journaled) and name the drive (we named ours booter).

Click erase. It will ask to confirm, click Erase.

The drive will be erased and partitioned. Quit Disk Utility.

Installing the new Operating System.
Pop the DVD/CD/or disc image in and start the install, choose the drive we just created on the iPod.

You may need to reboot prior to the install, just make sure you leave the iPod plugged in.

When you start the install, choose the drive “booter” or whatever you named it, this will install the operating system to the iPod.

If for any reason the install hangs, reboot the Mac and start again. To reboot the iPod, press and hold the menu + play buttons for 10 seconds. For the 4G iPod (click wheel) flip the hold switch, flip it back, then press and hold the center button for 10 seconds.

It’ll take about 40 minutes to install Mac OS X to the iPod, once it’s finished— unplug the iPod and reboot the Mac.

Without the iPod plugged in to the Mac, reboot in to your regular operating.

After you reboot and you’ve logged in, plug the iPod in. Feel free to inspect its contents as well as add any other files you wish to use once you boot to it.

Booting up.
Open up System Preferences and click “Startup Disk”.

In the list of disks, choose “booter” or whatever you called it.

Confirm, click restart.

After rebooting you’ll be in the new operating system, running directly off your iPod! You might need to set up the new system and transfer files from your other drive if you need them, but that’s pretty much it.

Here we are in Mac OS X “Tiger” (10.4).

Search, Gadgets, RSS in Safari.

Keep in mind it’ll be a bit slower than running off your regular hard drive and don’t do this all the time as we mentioned at the start of this article as it will shorten the iPod’s life span quite a bit.

A couple last things.

Another easy way to do all this is to use “Carbon Copy Cloner” with this utility you can make an exact copy of your system to the iPod, very handy for when you need to boot up in case of emergencies.

The Future of iPod booting.
We’re big fans of the bootable Linux CD we always carry around which has KNOPPIX-STD — a collection of GNU/Linux software, automatic hardware detection, utils and more— it doesn’t install anything to the hard drive, very handy for lots of good things. We’re thinking of doing an OS X flavor (for our own use) with all our favorite tools, utils and more and have that in our bag for when we want to boot in to a totally different system.

And with that said, we might try and see if we can install and boot from a Linux distro on the iPod, we’ll let you know if it works out (it seems possible).

Backing up to the iPod.
iPodBackup v1.1b3. is a Mac OS X utility based on a shell script that allows you to backup your OS X “home” directory to your iPod. You’ll need to follow the instructions on this page, but it’s pretty simple. If you extra space on your iPod this is really worth it, and you don’t need to erase/format like our HOW-TO. That said, you could make your iPod bootable like we showed here, then use iPodBackup to backup to the bootable iPod with a fresh copy of your home directory, you’d always have a bootable version of your Mac wherever you go.

Awhile back, there was a rumor of “Home on iPod” built in to Mac OS X, from Apple, but so far it hasn’t presented itself more than once, then it was pulled off the Apple site.

Here’s the text before it was pulled from Apple’s site.

Home away from home
Ever thought you could carry your home in the palm of your hands or in your pocket? You can. Panther’s Home on iPod feature lets you store your home directory files, folders, apps on your iPod (or any FireWire hard drive) and take it with you wherever you go. When you find yourself near a Panther-equipped Mac, just plug in the iPod, log in, and you’re home, no matter where you happen to be. And when you return to your home computer, you can synchronize any changes you’ve made to your files by using File Sync, which automatically updates offline changes to your home directory.

But, last week “YouPod” was released. (Shareware, not Apple) so who knows what’s going to happen; it might show up in the next version of the OS, or maybe it’ll only be a 3rd party app.

Justin Garrison is a Linux enthusiast and cloud infrastructure engineer for one of the world’s biggest companies. He’s also the co-author of Cloud Native Infrastructure by O’Reilly. Read more.

If you are tired of trying to keep up with Apple’s new iPod releases, upgrade your old iPod for free with Rockbox. Rockbox allows you to upgrade your aging iPod with new themes, fonts, games, and more.

Rockbox is a replacement firmware for the iPod, iriver, Cowon, and many other devices. What the firmware does is extends the functionality and features of your current digital music player.

How to turn off your ipod classic

Installing Rockbox

The first thing to do is download the Rockbox utility from their website.

How to turn off your ipod classic

Rockbox provides prebuilt binaries for Windows, OS X, and Linux so just download the one you need and run the program. The first time the software loads you will need to plug in your iPod and autodetect the model. If you know the model you can also browse to a mounted drive and then just select your model from the provided list.

Note: You may need administrative rights on the computer you are running the utility from to write to USB devices.

How to turn off your ipod classic

Installation is a one click affair. Simply click the complete installation button and the latest files will be downloaded and installed onto your iPod.

Note: The installation will not erase all of the music and pictures you have on your device. If everything works the way it should, it will simply replace the bootloader and add its own OS files where needed.

How to turn off your ipod classic

How to turn off your ipod classic

Once Rockbox is installed you can install any optional playback themes from the built in theme installer.

How to turn off your ipod classic

Or you can also install fonts or games from the Rockbox utility.

How to turn off your ipod classic

Using Rockbox

Once everything is installed, disconnect your iPod and reboot it. It should automatically load Rockbox. Usability of the iPod should be fairly the same with one of the big differences is now you will have some more utilities and menus. You can browse for pictures and music from the files browser or if you have your music tagged you can also use the database browser.

How to turn off your ipod classic

You can change the theme to one of the ones you installed by going to system -> themes and selecting the theme you want. The menu should change automatically and you will also notice the new theme during playback.

How to turn off your ipod classic

Some of the extra utilites are found under the plugins menu. If you go into that menu you will find any additional software and games you installed.

How to turn off your ipod classic

Of course, the option to play Doom is there if you installed the games option in Rockbox utility, and have a supported device. You will have to figure out how to actually control playing on your own.

How to turn off your ipod classic

Uninstalling Rockbox

If you want to switch back to the default OS that came with your iPod you can hold the menu+select button (menu+play on some devices) to hard reset the iPod. Once the iPod starts to boot again turn on the hold switch and the original OS will load.

How to turn off your ipod classic

If you actually want to remove Rockbox completely then you can go back to the Rockbox utility and just click uninstall.

How to turn off your ipod classic

So next time you are tempted to throw out your perfectly working old iPod because Apple told you it would be a good idea, try out Rockbox. It may have the missing apps you were looking for.

Some users may experience the problem that iPod nano won’t sync with iTunes after updating their iTunes or Windows to the latest version. When you encounter this problem, don’t worry, you can try the following simple solutions to fix it. If these are not helpful, then you can try an iTunes alternative to sync iPad nano to a computer.

8 Solutions to Fix iPod Nano Won’t Sync with iTunes

Many reasons might be responsible for the “iPod nano won’t sync with iTunes” issue. Whatever they might be, you can try the following troubleshooting tips to solve this problem. If you also are interested in iPhone won’t sync to iTunes, just go to the relevant page to check details.

1. Check your USB cable

If your USB cable is broken or not an Apple-certified iPod USB cable, this problem will occur. To know whether it is the problem with your USB cable, you can connect your device to another USB port. If it works, that means the problem is the first port. In that case, you can try a different USB cable. If your device still can’t be undetected, then your device might go wrong. In such a case, you might need some different solutions as listed below.

2. Restart iTunes and iPod

Restarting iTunes and iPods can fix some common issues and make your iTunes and iPod nano working better. When you restart your iPod, the RAM will be cleaned out. All currently run apps are closed. Once the restart completes, you can reboot your device with a fresh slate. But note that restarting isn’t a fix-all solution. If the problem persists after restarting, you can try other solutions to address it.

Since restarting iTunes and iPod is easy, we won’t list the steps here. All you need is to power off them and then power on them.

3. Make sure correct and stable Wi-Fi connection

The third thing is to make sure your device is connected to stable internet. If you connect to an unstable internet, try a different connection.

4. Turn off “iCloud Music Library” and “Show Apple Music”

Disable “iCloud Music Library”

  • On iPod: Go the Settings > Music > Disable iCloud Music Library.
  • On iTunes: Select Edit > Preference > General > Disable iCloud Music Library > OK.

Disable “Show Apple Music”

  • On iPod: Go to the Settings > Music > Show Apple Music > Turn it off.
  • On iTunes: Choose Edit > Perference > General > Disable Show Apple Music > OK.

How to turn off your ipod classic

5. Update your iTunes and iPod to the latest version

  • On iPod: Go to the Settings > General > Software Update. If there is an update available, update the system.
  • On iTunes: Open iTunes > Help > Check for Updates. Likewise, update the system if there is an update available.

6. Re-Authorize iTunes & computer

  • Connect your iPod to iTunes via a USB cable and launch iTunes.
  • Click on “Account” > “Authorizations” > “Deauthorize This Computer.”
  • Repeat the above step to Authorize This Computer again.
  • Enter your Apple ID and passcode and select “Authorize” to reauthorize your computer.

How to turn off your ipod classic

7. Run iTunes in the Administrative Mode in Windows

  • Right-click the shortcut of iTunes on your computer.
  • Choose Properties > Compatibility.
  • Check Run this program as an administration > Apply.

8. Sync iPod to computer with an iTunes alternative

If none of the above-mentioned solutions help you out, then you can use this free iTunes alternative – EaseUS MobiMover to sync iPod music to the computer. Compared with iTunes, this program is easy to control and offers more options. Apart from syncing data from an iPhone to a computer, it is also capable of backing up data, managing WhatsApp, or downloading videos from websites, etc.

It currently supports 20+ types of data, including photos, pictures, videos, contacts, messages, and more. If you want to try this tool, you can download it on your computer and give it a try.

Step 1. Connect your iPhone to your computer running Windows or Mac OS systems with a USB cable > Start EaseUS MobiMover > Click “Phone to PC” > Click “Next.”

How to turn off your ipod classic

Step 2. Choose the type of files you wish to export > Customize the destination for exported iPhone data > Click “Transfer” to copy iPhone files to the computer at a fast speed.

How to turn off your ipod classic

Step 3. When the transferring finished, you can view, edit, keep or delete the content as you like.

How to turn off your ipod classic

The Bottom Line

That’s all about our guide on fixing the iPod nano not syncing with the iTunes issue. With these solutions, we hope you can get out of the trouble with ease. If the above solutions are useless, you can take your device to a nearby Apple Store to ask the technician to help you out.

How to turn off your ipod classic

4.5 out of 5 stars, based on 10 votes

What’s also important is that our own analyses, as well as numerous customer reviews of EaseUS MobiMover, show that this software is reliable, user-friendly, and an efficient option for managing your data between devices.

How to turn off your ipod classic

EaseUs MobiMover solves this problem as it allows you to transfer data from an iPhone to a Mac, Mac to an iPhone, or from one iPhone to another iPhone fast.

How to turn off your ipod classic

EaseUS MobiMover is a program that allows you to share files between your iOS device and your PC in an easy manner. This is very useful, since both operative systems are not compatible.

How to turn off your ipod classic

EaseUS MobiMover for Mac and PC is a powerful tool for transferring data from your Apple mobile device to your computer, managing the variety of files that you create, and moving those huge videos quickly.

How to turn off your ipod classic

Related Articles – ALSO ON EaseUS SOFTWARE

If you own a Apple iPod, iPhone or iTouch you may encounter the rare but irritating device freeze, there could be several reasons for such freeze, the very first step you should take is to try and reset/restart the device and see if it works, use the following method to reset your apple devices:

    Reset iPhone & iTouch – Press and hold Sleep/Wake button and Home button at the same time (see image below) for at least ten seconds, until the Apple logo appears on the screen.

How to turn off your ipod classic
More Information About iPhone Troubleshooting >>

  • Reset iPod – follow instructions here according to your iPod version.
    • Add new comment
    • 298369 reads



    my itouch doesnt work anymore after i tried to downgrade my itouch so i could use jailbreak but i cant get the recoverypackage because it says that there is something wrong with my internetconnection but there is nothing wrong with it and now is my itouch useless because i cant do anything with it now. HELP ME!!

    omg that sucks 4 u

    omg that sucks 4 u

    thank you. my iphone hangs a

    thank you. my iphone hangs a lot

    Thanks for this tip

    Thanks for this tip. My iphone hangs a lot too. I wonder if theres a permanent solution to that.

    How to turn off your ipod classic

    Hack #41 from iPod & iTunes Hacks by Hadley Stern (O’Reilly Media).

    Apple keeps the music files on your iPod hidden, but with a little hackery, all your music will be revealed, allowing you to copy the files (legally, of course) from one machine to another.

    If you have ever activated your iPod’s Disk mode [Hack #32] and taken a peek at the disk in either the Macintosh Finder or the Windows File Manager, you might have found something missing–your music, that is. Sure, it shows up in iTunes, but where is it on your iPod? Hidden, that’s where. In order to put some muscle behind the label that is slapped on every iPod (in multiple languages) — “don’t steal music” — Apple hides the iPod’s tracks in disk view.

    Sneaky. But not quite as sneaky as us iPod/iTunes hackers. Of course, we are not doing this to steal music! We are doing this because we want to be able to copy our music from our iPods to our other machines, so we can listen to it in iTunes on those days when we accidentally leave our iPods at home, at the office, or at a friend’s.

    Since the music files are invisible, all we need to do is make them visible. Computers actually use invisible files quite a bit to store, for example, system-related information that you should never see or open. However, both Mac OS and Windows make it easy to view and search invisible items.

    On a Mac
    Launch the Terminal.application and type:

    find /Volumes/[iPod’sNAME]/iPod_Control/Music -print | awk ‘¬ < gsub(/ /, “\ “); print >’

    Substitute the name of your iPod for [iPod’sNAME]. Any spaces should be replaced with underscores (_). This will print a list of all the songs inside the Music folder with \ in place of spaces. Then, simply copy the location to the song you want and type open followed by that location to begin playing that song. You can then use a standard copy command such as cp to copy any file you select to its new location. This is tedious though. To copy your entire iPod’s entire Music folder to your local computer, simply open the Terminal and write:

    Again, substitute your iPod’s name for [iPod’sNAME], using an underscore for any spaces in the name. This will copy the entire contents of your iPod’s Music folder into a new folder inside your home directory’s Music folder called iPodTunes.

    On Windows
    On the Windows side, you can also easily access your iPod’s hidden files. First, right-click your iPod. Then, select Tools → Folder Options. This takes you to Control Panel → Folder Options. Select the View tab, as shown in Figure 3-17.

    How to turn off your ipod classic
    Figure 3-17. Showing your hidden files

    Under “Hidden files and folders,” change “Do not show hidden files and folders” to “Show hidden files and folders.” Click Apply to All Folders, and now all the invisible files on your iPod will be visible, as shown in Figure 3-18.

    To get to your music files, navigate to iPod_Control\Music. There you will find a series of folders starting with a letter and ending with a number. Congratulations! You are now looking at your iPod database, where all your music files are kept. As with any other file, you can now copy your music to anywhere on your computer.

    How to turn off your ipod classic
    Figure 3-18. The iPod’s music files exposed

    You might also have come across several shareware or freeware utilities that allow you to automagically select songs on your iPod. They work by viewing the invisible files on your iPod and giving you an interface for copying the files. Because of the popularity of bringing this function to life, there are a plethora of options, especially on the Mac side.

    One of the best applications for the Mac is PodWorks ($8; limited trial version available). Using PodWorks, you can not only copy songs from your iPod to another computer, but you can also copy them directly to iTunes. Once you’ve downloaded the application and opened it up, you’ll be greeted by the main interface shown in Figure 3-19. The trial version has a 30-day time limit and a 250-song limit, will let you copy only one song at a time, and won’t let you copy playlists. Once you open up the application and give it a try, you’ll probably decide the $8 it’ll cost you to buy it is well worth it.

    To copy your songs from your iPod to iTunes, simply select all the songs and go to Pod → Send All Songs to iTunes. If you think you might have some duplicate songs on your iPod and in iTunes, make sure to go to Preferences iTunes Export and select Actively Prevent Duplicates. It will slow down the copying process, but at least you’ll end up with no duplicates. Once the songs have finished copying, select the iPod’s playlists in PodWorks and select Pod → Recreate Selected Playlists in iTunes. PodWorks will now copy over your iPod playlists to iTunes. Easy, eh?
    How to turn off your ipod classic
    PodWorks is one of many options for Mac users; for other options, check out iPodLounge’s download section.

    Windows users can use PodUtil 2.0 (free). It won’t copy songs directly into iTunes, but it will allow you to copy songs from your iPod to your PC.

    How to turn off your ipod classic

    iPod and iTunes Hacks is brimming with undocumented tips, tricks, and trade secrets for getting the very most from your iPod. This guide takes curious and clever iPod owners beyond the obvious with 100 ingenious hacks that will delight, entertain, and add astonishing power to the iPod and iTunes experience.

    How to turn off your ipod classic

    If you have just dedicated a large part of your life customizing your iPod music collection you will know the pain that a iPod data loss can cause. However, because of the way iPod drives are built, there’s not much of a chance that the data on the drives could be physically destroyed. Recover My Files data recovery software gives you the opportunity to attempt risk free iPod data recovery and recover your deleted iPod files.

    GetData have 2 separate products which can be used for iPod Data recovery:

    1. Recover My Files is a complete data recovery tool for computers and external devices including iPods. You can download Recover My Files from this website and follow the instructions below.

    2. Recover My iPod is specifically designed to scan and recover data from iPods.

    Common iPod Data Loss Scenarios

    iPod Volume Format ‘Unknown’ or iPod reports an incorrect capacity; iPod becomes frozen. Reset or removal of battery results in lost contents; Restored the iPod to its original factory state, meaning that all the data on it is removed; iPod files are deleted using iTunes.

    If you cannot access your iPod because the screen is frozen you will need to reset it. Try the following:

    To reset iPod, iPod (Scroll Wheel), and iPod (Touch Wheel):

    1. Connect your iPod to the iPod Power Adapter and plug the power adapter into an electrical outlet, or connect your iPod to your USB port on your computer
    2. Toggle the Hold switch on and off (slide it to Hold and then turn it off again)
    3. Press and hold the Play/Pause and Menu buttons until the Apple/iPod logo appears (about 6 to 10 seconds). You may need to repeat this step.

    To reset iPod mini and iPod (Click Wheel):

    1. Connect your iPod to the iPod Power Adapter and plug the power adapter into an electrical outlet;
    2. Toggle the Hold switch on and off (slide it to Hold and then turn it off again);
    3. Press and hold the Menu and Select buttons until the Apple logo appears (about 6 to 10 seconds). You may need to repeat this step

    If you are still unable to reset your iPod, use only one finger from one hand to press the Select button, and one finger from the other hand to press the Menu button.

    Steps to iPod data recovery using Recover My Files

    1. Download the latest version of Recover My Files using the download link at the bottom of this page and install the program on your Windows computer (Recover My Files does not currently support MAC). Once you have installed Recover My Files, close the program down (you need to restart Recover My Files once you iPod has been connected to the computer).

    2. Connect your iPod to your computer. If possible, try and use a USB2 connection on your computer as USB1 is very slow. If your iPod does not appear as a drive letter on your computer you must do the following: In the iTunes program, right click on your iPod and select “iPod Options”. Under the “iPod” tab, place a tick in the box for “Enable Disk Use”. Click OK. Disconnect your iPod, then reconnect. Check to see now that your iPod is displayed as a drive letter.

    3. Run Recover My Files. The first search to try is a “Complete File Search”. In the drive selection window you should see your drive as a drive letter. Select this drive letter (in the screen shot below the iPod is called “GetData Vid”):

    How to turn off your ipod classic

    4. In the File Type selection list select the relevant file types that you wish to recover, including .mov, iTunes .m4a, .mp3 etc.

    5. Run the search. It is a relatively slow connection speed to the iPod, so please give the application at least 3 minutes to commence iPod data recovery.

    6. Once you have completed the search, preview your search results

    IMPORTANT: If your iPod is connected to your USB you may need to let the iPod sit and recharge its battery before continuing to save your files. You will need to purchase a product activation key in order to save your recovered iPod files.

    7. You may also like to try a “Complete Format Recover” as this may give better iPod data recovery results. Search the physical iPod drive, use the pre-selected files types, but also add iTunes and MP3 file types to the search.

    Where Can I Download Free Music for My iPod?

    Want thousands of wonderful songs on your iPod without paying hundreds of bucks? You are on the right track here. In this article, you will learn top 4 ways for free music downloading for iPod touch.

    Part 1: Music Download for iPod touch/Classic/Shuffle/Nano

    The methods introduced below about free iPods music downloads are compatible with iOS 14, iOS 13, iOS 12, iOS 11, iOS 10 adn all available iPod, including

    iPod touch 6 iPod touch 5 iPod touch 4 iPod touch 3 iPod classic 6
    iPod classic 5 iPod classic 4 iPod classic 3 iPod classic 2
    iPod classic 1 iPod shuffle 4 iPod shuffle 3 iPod shuffle 2
    iPod shuffle 1 iPod nano 7 iPod nano 6 iPod nano 5
    iPod nano 4 iPod nano 3 iPod nano 2 iPod nano
    • Top 1. Get Free iPod Music from iTunes
    • Top 2. Get a Free iPod Music Download App
    • Top 3. Go to Free iPod Music Download Sites
    • Top 4. Download free Musics for iPod from Other Sources without Charge

    Top 1. Get Free iPod Music from iTunes

    Every week, iTunes offers 3 free songs from artists as a single of the week, discovery download, and latin single of the week. You can hit that section of the iTunes Store every week and get 3 free songs each week.

    Alternatively, if you get a promo code from someone or are the recipient of an iTunes gift card, you can also get free iPod music from iTunes.

    Top 2. Get a Free iPod Music Download App

    If you have free iPod music download apps on your device, you can enjoy thousands of songs you’ve never heard before. Some free iPod music download apps like Deezer, 8Tracks, Free Music, Spotify, and Rdio are worth considering.

    Top 3. Go to Free iPod Music Download Sites

    There is a mass of free music on the Internet that is produced by artists just waiting to be discovered. Through those free music websites, you can listen, copy, share and even eurn the tracks to CD/DVD. Here is an essential selection that you can get iPod tracks for free.

    • Jamendo. It hosts over 7,000 albems for you to download for free. You can review, share and make a donation to the artist if you like.
    • SoundClick. It has more than 2 million full-length tracks available, including the free ones to download.
    • PureVolume. It contains songs of over 400,000 artists to listen to and download for iPod without charge.
    • BeSonic. You will be able to download more than 12,000 songs once you have registered for free. And there is a search tool which you can use to find the songs you love.

    Top 4. Download free Musics for iPod from Other Sources without Charge

    There are also lots of other great sources of music online. You can use the free online tool – to download them. Just go to, copy and paste the music source link to its search box, click the “download” button to choose audio format you need, right-click and “save link as” to download the music successfully.

    Part 2: How to Transfer iPod Music without iTunes

    iTunes is the tranditional method for transferring iPod songs to PC or Mac, now lots of people are seeking for an iTunes alternative to do this, as iTunes is tedious and causing lots of trouble. iOS Data Manager is the perfect iTunes alternative to manage and transfer iPod songs to/from computer.

    Oustanding Features of using UltFone iOS Data Manager to Transfer iPod Music

    • 1.Transfer iPod music to iTunes by one click.
    • 2. Tranfer iTunes media to iPod with one click.
    • 3. Add music to iPod from PC/Mac without iTunes.
    • 4. Export iPod songs to computer without iTunes.
    • 5. Manage other types of data in iPod without iTunes.
    • 6. Selective backup and restore iPod data.
    • 7. Fix iPod stuck on recovery mode, apple logo, etc. without data loss.

    1. Steps of Transferring Music from Computer to iPod without iTunes

    Step 1. Download and launch UltFone iOS Data Manager on computer, connect your device to computer with a USB cable.

    Step 2. On the main interface, select “Manage” option from the top menu bar. This software will load all current data on your iPod. Choose Music > Music from the sidebar, and click Import button from the right menu otpions.

    Step 3. Locate the audio/music/songs from computer and click Open button, all the file(s) will be imported to your iPod.

    2. How to Transfer iPod Music to iTunes

    Step 1. Launch iOS Data Manager and select Transfer Device Media to iTunes. And select file types that you want ot sync to iTunes.

  • Step 2. Click Transfer button and the media files will be synced to iTunes.
  • 3. Oen Click to Sync iTunes Music to iPod

    Step 1. Launch iOS Data Manager and select Transfer iTunes Media Files to Device. And select file types that you want ot sync to iTunes.

  • Step 2. Click Transfer button and iTunes songs has been synced to iPod successfully .
  • Last Words

    No matter your iPod is on iOS 13/12/11/10 or below, you can pick out one or try some of those top ways to download iPod music for free. Then you can start to enjoy your loved songs from your device. If you want to sync iPod songs to iTunes, or add music to iPod, then you can use iOS Data Manager is an all-inclusive tool to do these jobs in a more straightforward way.

    This group of pages has my contributions to the Internet community.

    NOTE: I didn’t write this, but adapted it from Mac 911 at

    Resetting an iPod

    Regular (white) iPods are reset by:

    • turn the Hold switch on,
    • turn the Hold switch off,
    • press and hold the Play/Pause and Menu buttons until the Apple iPod logo appears.

    Ideally, the iPod should be plugged into power at this time.

    Resetting a Mini

    iPods Minis are reset by:

    • turn the Hold switch on,
    • turn the Hold switch off,
    • press and hold the Menu and Select buttons until the Apple iPod logo appears (about 6 seconds).

    Ideally, the mini should be plugged into power at this time.

    This technique has been found to work on nanos as well.

    Diagnostic Mode

    You access the diagnostic mode by first resetting the iPod. When you see the Apple logo, press and hold Previous and the Select button until you see a reversed Apple logo. Let go and you’ll see the following entries.

    5 In 1 Performs a series of tests including checking the backlight, memory, and USB ports.
    RESET resets the iPod. This is one way to exit the Diagnostic screen.
    KEY you press the keys, it tells you if they work.
    CHGRCUR I’m guessing on this one. Seems to allow you to turn on and off charging methods.
    REMOTE Allows you to test the buttons on the remote control.
    HP STAT Indicates if something is plugged into the headphone jack and the state of the hold switch.
    SLEEP Puts the iPod to sleep.
    BATT A2D Checks the iPod’s power supply and (maybe?) indicates the amount of charge in the battery.
    A2D STAT Battery and power supply related.
    FIREWIRE Checks FireWire chip.
    HARD R/W Read and write hard drive test. Reads HDD pass if all goes well.
    SMRT DAT Another hard drive test. Reads RETRACTS 4 REALLOCS 0 PENDING 0.
    SMRT SCAN Appears to be akin to a regular iPod’s Disk Scan test. This takes several minutes so don’t perform this test unless the iPod is plugged into a power source.
    DRV TEMP Displays drive temperature.
    DISKMODE Throws the iPod into Disk Mode.
    WHEEL Run your thumb around the wheel and watch the values change.
    CONTRAST Runs contrast test. My Diagnostic screen was really light. Running this test made it much darker and more legible. Proceed through the screens by pressing the Play button.
    AUDIO Displays audio gain. Can move up as high as 127 by pressing Forward button. Default is 120.
    STATUS tells you what’s plugged into your iPod — whether it’s being charged via FireWire and has something plugged into the headphone port, for example.
    IRAM3 unknown
    CLEAR BLKS unknown
    ALLSDRAM unknown
    HDD DROP unknown

    To move from test to test, use the Previous and Forward buttons. To initiate a test, press the Select button. To exit tests when they’re completed, press the Play button.

    May 13,2020 • Filed to: Fix iPhone System • Proven solutions

    One common issue that a lot of iOS users experienced at present is the BSOD also known as the blue screen of death. Unlike the typical application crash which does not interfere with the operating system, this happens due to some serious issues with the hardware of your device. When it happens to your gadget, even the simple act of troubleshooting may not work. Worse, it can cause data loss.

    But don’t fret. You can do something about it. With the number of reports or concern pertaining to this matter, various people who focus on resolving technical glitch in devices have created some mechanism that can help you fix it. What’s even better, you can just follow this guide to learn how to fix blue screen of death on your iOS device.

    • Part 1. Best Solution to Fix a Blue Screen without Data Loss
    • Part 2. Common Solutions to Fix the Blue Screen of Death

    Part 1. Best Solution to Fix a Blue Screen of Death without Data Loss

    How to turn off your ipod classic

    A great software that can help you fix the bluescreen error and other issues on your iPhone X/8/8 Plus/7/7 plus/SE/6s(Plus)/6(Plus)/5s/5c/5/4s/4/3GS while maintaining your data is dr.fone – System Repair (iOS). What makes the software even better is that it avoids data loss during the whole process. Its interfaces can guide users through easily in performing recovery and repair processes.

    All of these features and more will be available for your usage as soon as you have the software installed. Ready? Download the software and follow these steps:

    How to turn off your ipod classic

    Step 1: Run dr.fone – iOS Toolkit on your computer. Click the “System Recovery” tab which you can see at the top of the interface. Get the USB cable and use it to connect your phone to your computer. After your device is recognized, you can then click “Start” to continue.

    How to turn off your ipod classic

    Step 2: The software will detect your iOS device model and offers you the last firmware for it. You need to confirm whether the information for your iOS device is right or not. Next, click “Download” to download the firmware for your iOS device. It is a must to fix your iOS (iOS 11 supported) device problem.

    How to turn off your ipod classic

    Step 3: It will start downloading the firmware and fixing your device system afterwards. When it finishes the whole process, you can get the window like this! Congratulations!

    Part 2. Common Solutions to Stop Blue Screen of Death on iOS

    NOTE: These common steps, while considered by others as effective can cause data loss. Be sure to back up everything you need ahead of time.

    Method 1. Manual Restarting of Mobile

    How to turn off your ipod classic

    There are times when the blue screen appears on the least expected time. One thing that can help you get out of the issue is to do a manual restart by holding the Home and Power button together of your device. Keep holding the buttons until the screen turns off. It should turn on back again, displaying the Apple logo.

    Method 2. Restore Your iOS Device

    How to turn off your ipod classic

    • Turn off your iPhone, iPad or iPod. Launch iTunes and use the USB cable that comes with the iOS device to connect it to your computer.
    • Hold the Home button as you connect it with your PC. Keep pressing the Home button until the iTunes logo appears.
    • A window displaying a step by step procedure on how to restore your software should appear. All you have to do is to follow those steps. Then, confirm the Restore.

    While these steps have proven to be effective to some, there remain a significant number of cases that are not resolved using these solutions. Plus, there are instances when it did fix the blue screen problem but ended up deleting all the files on the device with no means of recovery. Whether those files are for personal or business reasons, getting it all deleted is a very big NO-NO. It’s better if you identify first the specific files that you will need from those that can be deleted. Then, be sure to back them up.

    Stop waking Siri.

    How to turn off your ipod classic

    Posted on Feb 3, 2018 Updated on May 22, 2021, 2:13 am CDT

    If you recently threw down $1,000 for the iPhone X, then you’ve come to the realization that it’s unlike any Apple smartphone before it. Gone is the beloved home button and with it, all the gestures you’ve grown accustomed to over the years. You might night even know how to turn the iPhone X off.

    So what should you do when you don’t need to use your device and want to save battery? Pressing the side button, like before, will idle the screen, but your iPhone X’s battery will continue to drain as it runs applications in the background. The only way is to turn the device off completely.

    Unlike iPhones before it, turning off the iPhone X requires a bit of know-how. Here’s a guide on how to turn off the iPhone X so you can stop accidentally waking Siri.

    How to turn off iPhone X

    1. Press and hold the side button and either volume button (up or down). Don’t be deterred if it doesn’t turn off immediately. You’ll need to hold down both buttons for about 1.5 seconds. Also, avoid a short press, which could trigger a screengrab.

    How to turn off your ipod classicPhillip Tracy

    2. Swipe the “slide to power off” slider to the right. Note: To turn the iPhone X back on, you only need to hold the side button, not the volume rocker.


    That’s it! Super simple once you’ve got it remember. Now you can turn off your iPhone X when you don’t need it and extend the life of its battery so Apple doesn’t slow it down with a software update.

    Phillip Tracy

    Phillip Tracy is a former technology staff writer at the Daily Dot. He’s an expert on smartphones, social media trends, and gadgets. He previously reported on IoT and telecom for RCR Wireless News and contributed to NewBay Media magazine. He now writes for Laptop magazine.

    How to turn off your ipod classic

      How to turn off your ipod classic

    After 2 million views, TikTok bans new far-right Groyper page

    How to turn off your ipod classic

    Newsletter: Server calls out her ‘worst table ever’

    How to turn off your ipod classic

    ‘Ron Watkins locked real Q out’: QAnon world is in disarray over whether leader has really returned

    How to turn off your ipod classic

    FCC commissioner wants TikTok banned from app stores for harvesting ‘swaths of sensitive data’

    How to turn off your ipod classic

    A while back, Apple decided to discontinue producing all iPod models except for iPod touch, but the role that it ever played cannot be ignored. During the last 15 years since the first-generation iPod was released, iPod models have been used by over 390 million people as the best music player. However, recently if you try to sync Spotify to iPod, things might be different, just like the following user:

    “I have an iPod nano but I can’t sync it with Spotify anymore. I connect iPod to Spotify desktop version, but the app doesn’t recognize the iPod nano and doesn’t pop up the bar ‘devices’ or the option ‘erase your iPod and sync to Spotify’. Can someone help?” – Henya from Spotify Community

    How to turn off your ipod classic

    Most Spotify users might encounter such error when they want to transfer Spotify playlist to iPod shuffle, nano, and classic. In fact, only the iPod touch 5th or higher generations are able to sync with Spotify well. If you’re using other iPod models, take it easy. In this post, you’ll find the best solution to download and sync Spotify to iPod shuffle, nano, or classic. So, you are able to listen to Spotify on iPod shuffle, nano, or classic offline easily and effectively.

    Can I Download Music from Spotify to My iPod?

    Spotify is the best way to search for any track, artist or album and listen for free. With its great feature, it has attracted lots of users from around the world. You can listen to Spotify on many devices, including iPhone, iPad, Apple Watch, Android phone, and more. Some users would ask: can I download songs from Spotify to my iPod? Sure! You can download and install Spotify on iPod touch. But if you have an old iPod device like iPod shuffle, you need to make use of a third-party tool to help you download Spotify songs to iPod for playing.

    Ultimate Method to Sync Spotify to iPod Shuffle/Nano/Classic

    To make Spotify playable on iPod nano, classic or shuffle, something calledВ Spotify music downloaderВ comes to help. With it, you can easily download Spotify songs offline and listen to them on all iPod models, including iPod nano, shuffle, and classic. Here we’d like to share you with the most-rated solution, that is,В ViWizard Spotify Music Converter.

    2.1 What You’ll Need: ViWizard Spotify to iPod Converter

    As you may know, Spotify tracks are protected by Digital Rights Management, which restricts you from playing Spotify songs on iPod nano, shuffle, or classic, as well as, other non-approved devices. Now with ViWizard, you can completelyВ remove DRM from SpotifyВ and download Spotify songs to iPod-compatible MP3 or AAC format. Before getting started for the tutorial of converting Spotify to iPod, make sure you have ViWizard Spotify Music Converter installed on your computer.

    How to turn off your ipod classic

    How to turn off your ipod classic

    Rockbox is a free replacement firmware for digital music players. It runs on a wide range of players:

    Stable ports

    Rockbox runs well on these players, has installation instructions, and is supported by the installer:

    • Apple: iPod 1g through 6g (Classic), iPod Mini, iPod Nano 1g, iPod Nano 2g
    • Archos: Jukebox 5000, 6000, Studio, Recorder, FM Recorder, Recorder V2 and Ondio
    • Cowon: iAudio X5, X5V, X5L, M5, M5L, M3 and M3L
    • Creative: Zen Mozaic, Zen X-Fi, Zen X-Fi 3 and Zen X-Fi Style
    • iriver: iHP100 series, H100 series, H300 series and H10 series
    • MPIO: HD300
    • Olympus: M:Robe 100
    • Packard Bell: Vibe 500
    • Philips: GoGear SA9200, GoGear HDD16x0 and HDD63x0
    • Samsung: YH-820, YH-920 and YH-925
    • SanDisk: Sansa c200, e200 and e200R series, Fuze and Fuze+, Clip, Clip+ and Clip Zip
    • Toshiba: Gigabeat X and F series
    • xDuoo: X3

    Unstable ports

    Rockbox runs on these players, but is incomplete, less usable or has problems that limit it to advanced users:

    • Agptek: Rocker (aka Benjie T6)
    • AIGO: Eros Q / K (aka HIFI WALKER H2, AGPTek H3, and Surfans F20)
    • Creative: Zen and Zen X-Fi 2
    • Cowon: D2
    • FiiO: M3K
    • HiFi E.T: MA9, MA8
    • HiFiMAN: HM-601, HM-602, HM-603, HM-801
    • iBasso: DX50, DX90
    • MPIO: HD200
    • Olympus: M:Robe 500
    • Samsung: YP-R0, YP-R1
    • SanDisk: Sansa Connect
    • Shanling: Shanling Q1
    • Sony: NWZ-E350, NWZ-E360, NWZ-E370, NWZ-E380, NWZ-E450, NWZ-E460, NWZ-E470, NWZ-E580, NWZ-A860, NWZ-A10, and NW-A20 series.
    • Toshiba: Gigabeat S
    • xDuoo: X3ii, and X20

    Unusable ports

    Work has begun on porting Rockbox to these players, but much remains before they are usable:

    • Onda: VX747, VX767 and VX777
    • iHIFI 760, 770, 770C, 800, and 960
    • Google Android
    • Rockchip rk27xx

    How to turn off your ipod classic

    • How to turn off your ipod classicMac
    • How to turn off your ipod classicWindows
    • Device Missing?

    Although smartphones have replaced the need for a separate mp3/mp4 player, the iPods are simply something else. Even the iPod Classic can still be found among the users, as Apple sold a ton of iPods in the United States back when we had no problem paying for each download. It also helps that iPods in general offer longer battery life and fantastic audio quality that has yet to be exceeded.

    How to turn off your ipod classic

    Of course, all good things often come with a catch. Much like the iPhone, you need iTunes to store music on any iPod. Or do you not?

    Why Not iTunes?

    There are ways to add music to iPods without iTunes, which this guide will cover soon enough. But why would you not want to use iTunes in the first place? It is intuitive (the essence of every Apple product) and the iOS and macOS interaction is seamless.

    But there’s the rub. It’s not as optimized for use with PC devices. It can be clunky and slow here and there. Plus, an Android user only has to drag and drop to load their device full of music. You’ll be happy to know that you can do this with your iPod, too!

    Items that You’ll Need

    Fortunately, you won’t need any extra items to add music to your iPod without iTunes, unless you need to transfer the music from somewhere else to your PC first.

    You’ll only need:

    1. Your iPod
    2. An iPod USB charging cable

    Adding Music to iPod without iTunes

    All it takes is a one-off session of tweaking. Here we go.

    1. Plug it In

    As you might have guessed, the first step would be to plug your iPod into your PC. One end of the cable goes to your iPod and the other to one of the free USB ports on your PC. Your computer will automatically install a driver for your Apple device. Once installed, a notification will pop up in the bottom right corner.

    2. Disable Disk Use

    If you’ve been using iTunes to transfer music to your iPod, you might’ve enabled disk use. Before proceeding to the other steps, make sure to open iTunes and uncheck “Enable disk use.”

    How to turn off your ipod classic

    3. Hidden Files, Folders, and Drives

    Go to Start, type Control Panel, and enter Control Panel. Find (you can search the Control Panel) File Explorer Options and once you’re there, select the View tab and scroll down until you see the “Show hidden files, folders and drives” option. Now click it, hit Apply and close the window.

    How to turn off your ipod classic

    4. This PC

    Find the “This PC” (or “Computer,” or “My Computer” on pre-Windows 10 versions). Once you’ve entered This PC, double click on a drive titled “iPod” to enter.

    5. Music

    In the iPod folder, you’ll find another one titled “Music.” This is your iPod’s central music folder. If your iPod is empty, you won’t see anything in it, but if you’ve already transferred music with iTunes, you’ll see a bunch of random numbers and letters. Don’t worry, iTunes renames these songs during the transfer process.

    6. Drag-n-Drop

    All you need to do now is go to the folder where you store your music, choose what you want to transfer, and do a simple drag-n-drop to your iPod’s Music folder from the previous step. Make sure that all music that you want to transfer to your iPod is transferred directly to the Music folder, and not as a folder itself or into a new subfolder.

    You Only Need to Do It Once

    Once you’ve followed all these steps successfully, you should be able to seamlessly drag-n-drop music to your iPod device. The best part about this is that when you’ve set everything up like this, you don’t have to go through it again.

    Other ways of doing this do exist, however. Do you know of another way to add music to your iPod without iTunes? If you do, remember to share it with the community down below, in the comments section!

    You’re halfway through a 5-mile (8.05 kilometer) jog, and you’ve reached that perfect rhythm between a steady run and a full-on sprint. You spy an upcoming incline and mentally prep for the challenge. To pump yourself up, you select the perfect soundtrack from your iPod playlist: the theme song from “Rocky.” As the horns and bass pipe through your ear buds, you feel a slight adrenaline rush as you start the ascent. No longer are you running up a cement suburban road — you’re transported to the steps of the Philadelphia Museum of Art, bounding alongside Sly Stallone.

    Suddenly, the music stops. No more pounding beats to help you up the road. Your iPod’s battery has run out, leaving you with only the thump of your pounding heart and the rumble of passing cars to cheer you onward.

    One good thing about the iPod’s lithium-ion battery is that it’s rechargeable. Once you get home from that run, your device can be operational in the time it takes to shower and eat a post-jog snack.

    ­Generally, a new iPod can play continuously for between eight and 12 hours before dying [source: Apple]. Then, in about two hours, an iPod can recharge back to 80 percent capacity in a process called the fast charge. If you have a little more time on your hands, you can leave it plugged in to trickle charge for two more hours and reach 100 percent capacity. Allowing your iPod battery to drain completely and refresh comprises a full charge cycle. According to Apple, that translates to a few weeks of listening power for the average user. Also, lithium-ion batteries can recharge at any point in the cycle without degrading the battery’s quality. In other words, recharging your iPod when the battery is only run down halfway won’t harm its charging capacity in the long run.­

    But as the old saying goes, all good things must come to an end. After about 400 charging cycles, the lithium-ion battery may need replacing. But this isn’t as simple as popping in a few D-cells into an old school cassette player. It requires a little more time and money to make the beat go on.

    Changing iPod Batteries: Apple’s Way

    When the first generation iPod hit stores in 2001, everything was hunky-dory between Apple and its growing legion of ear-bud-sporting fans. Two years and three model generations later, some consumers’ love affair with their favorite mp3 device screeched to an abrupt halt. The lithium-ion batteries inside the iPod failed to hold a charge. To make matters worse, the iPod isn’t designed to allow users to replace the battery.

    The media credited brothers Casey and Van Neistat for publicizing the iPod battery problem in 2003 [source: Musgrove]. Casey bought an iPod in 2002, and its battery gave out the following September. Much to his chagrin, Apple refused to replace the battery in accordance with company policy. He even attempted to reach Apple CEO Steve Jobs about the problem, to no avail [source: Neistat]. Deciding to take to the streets, the Neistat brothers spray painted Apple advertisements with the tagline “iPod’s unreplaceable battery lasts only 18 months” [source: Popular Science].

    Though not directly because of the guerilla campaign, Apple instituted a battery replacement program in November 2003. Meanwhile, a group of iPod owners filed a class action lawsuit claiming that Apple had misrepresented the gadget’s battery life. In 2005, Apple settled and agreed to replace iPods with faulty batteries purchased prior to May 2004 and extend warranties on batteries.

    Today, when you buy an iPod, Apple has you covered for the first year. Barring owner-induced damage (i.e. ruining your iPod by dropping it in the toilet), Apple will replace a failing battery free of charge for the first 12 months. After that, you must shell out the cash for a new one.

    For about $59 plus shipping and handling (prices vary, depending on model), Apple will replace your iPod battery. You can also take it to an Apple retail store for repair. But the iPod you get back won’t be what you had before. Basically, you get a brand new iPod. Why is that important to know? The replacement device includes a new hard drive; anything not backed up on iTunes, such as documents or photos, will be good as gone.

    When the initial battery bonanza was in full swing, some clever iPod users decided to chance it. Why not replace the battery on their own and save a few bucks? With mixed results, standard operating procedures now exist for DIY iPod battery replacement.

    All audio files stored on an Apple iPod, iPhone, or iPad may be erased when the device is connected to a new or recently reformatted computer or hard drive. This is because the contents of the iPod, iPhone, or iPad correspond to audio files added to the iTunes music library on the first computer it is ever connected to. When the device is connected to a different computer running iTunes, all stored audio files may be changed to match the computer’s music library. This happens if you set the music synchronization to update automatically, or reset iTunes to its default settings; iTunes is set to synchronize automatically by default.

    To disable automatic synchronization and prevent the deletion of all music on your iPod, iPhone, or iPad:

    Mac OS X

    1. From the menubar, choose iTunes , then Preferences , and then Devices .
    2. Check Prevent iPods, iPhones, and iPads from syncing automatically .

    Note: To preserve the audio files on your device, make sure this box is checked before you plug in an iPod, iPhone, or iPad.


    1. From the menubar, choose Edit , and then Preferences .
    2. Select the Devices tab.
    3. Check Prevent iPods, iPhones, and iPads from syncing automatically .

    Note: To preserve the audio files on your device, make sure this box is checked before you plug in an iPod or iPhone.

    Backing up audio files

    To back up the audio files stored on your iPod or iPhone and restore them to a new or recently reformatted computer or hard drive, see Apple Support’s How to use your iPod to move your music to a new computer.

    Note: To back up audio files in the iTunes music library and the library itself, the Apple article instructs you to save the entire iTunes folder to the iPod. However, this will not work if the iPod is more than half full.

    Two files in the iTunes folder store various attributes about the music files not stored in ID3 tags:

    • iTunes Music Library.xml
    • iTunes Music Library.itl

    In Mac OS X , both files are located in /Users/ /Music/iTunes .

    In Windows Vista , both files are located in :\Users\ \Music\iTunes .

    In Windows XP , both files are located in :\Documents and Settings\ \My Documents\My Music\iTunes .

    Audio files are stored inside of the iTunes folder, located in the iTunes Music folder.

    Copy the iTunes folder that contains the two files and folder from a host computer or hard drive, and copy it back to the same location on a new or re-formatted computer or hard drive. This folder is created the first time iTunes is run on a computer. Be sure to overwrite the default version of this folder with the backup you made.

    Note: Music is generally stored in the iTunes folder, but can actually be located anywhere on the computer. Make sure the music you want to save or move is actually in that directory before proceeding.

    This is document aril in the Knowledge Base.
    Last modified on 2018-01-18 14:32:31 .

    How to survive being a single mother

    Last Updated on December 13, 2018

    Being both a mom and dad to your little one can be daunting at first. But, with the right attitude and a few survival tips, a single mom can don both hats with equal ease. A support group comprising friends and family will also help make the transition easier.

    It’s natural for every young woman to dream of starting a family with her partner. However, there are a few who have to deal with a newborn all alone. While being a single parent can be quite challenging considering the responsibilities and loneliness that accompanies, being one isn’t all that bad. With the right approach and a handful of useful survival tips, single mothers can juggle being a mom and dad to their bundle of joy easily.

    How to Survive as a Single Mom

    1. Try to get Along with the Ex

    If you went through a bitter divorce with your husband, it is only natural to not want to stay in contact. However, for the sake of your child’s healthy and positive upbringing make sure you bury the hatchet with your ex. Be courteous and practical with your ex, so your child doesn’t grow up scarred and torn between both the parents. You could even ask your husband to manage the children for the weekend that will give you some time to focus on yourself, while letting your child unravel the relationship with his dad too.

    2. Focus on Important Matters

    Being a single mother could beget financial trouble and emotional upheaval. However, this shouldn’t get in the way of nurturing your children in a positive manner. Remember negativity breeds more sorrow, which will impact you as a parent. Rid yourself of the hurt in the past and stay positive. Keep your humour intact to lighten things up at work and home. Concentrate on what is more important than trivial issues like “what will people say/think.” Make the best of what you have in hand and give it your best shot. As a single parent taking care of your children should be your priority. Instil good values in your child and teach him to be a good person. You will feel rewarded for your effort later in life.

    3. Ask for Help, when Required!

    Single parenthood is a tough job, which doesn’t even pay. So, if you ever find yourself struggling between kids and work, do not shy away from asking for help. You can ask your trusted friends or your parents to babysit once a week that’ll give you some free time to run errands or just go do your own thing. Don’t feel guilty. You can’t be so hard on yourself. Being a single mom in no way means sacrificing all that you are. There are a lot of nice and supportive people in this world who would be more than happy to extend you a helping hand.

    4. Find a Flexible Work Schedule

    If your current work schedule conflicts with the time devoted to your kids, be honest and talk to your boss about it. Do not be scared to speak your mind. You never know your boss might be considerate to your needs. A flexible work shift will not just lessen your mad juggle between home and work, but will give you quality time with your children too. For single parents, a flexible work life would also ensure that a set routine is in place, so the child then knows what to expect.

    5. Give Yourself a Pat on the Back

    Being a single mother is not an easy feat. So, all single moms should give themselves a pat on the back when they achieve small, but significant victories where their babies are concerned. It could be anything from successfully potty training your kid, teaching him how to wash his hands, to making him learn his first poem. Every success needs a victory yelp! Unwind and have a glass of wine to celebrate these small instances of happiness.

    As a single mom, try to be loving, respectful, and truthful with your child. An open attitude towards life and parenting will go a long way in benefiting the personality of your child. Keep these survival tips in mind, and we’re sure as a single mom you’ll be able to tackle the most important job in the world with ease. Although, there could be days when things might get a bit overwhelming, the right attitude and patience will lessen the stress and make you positive.

    Women of any age can become single parents through death of a spouse, divorce, abandonment or choice. Here are a few suggestions to maintain mental health, thrive as an individual and nurture your children in the best possible manner.

    1. Remember that your health and well being is vital. Take steps to ensure that you are taking care of yourself, if you are struggling and feeling depressed don’t be afraid to seek help from friends, family or a health care professional.
    2. Maintain a blameless mindset. Make time for yourself to create and clarify your values.
    3. Remember society has many outlets of good, kind, loving people who are compassionate and supportive.
    4. Consider the skills that you already possess. Are you a good reader? Are you a good communicator?, Do you know more than one language?
    5. Look to close family, Universities and social agencies for assistance with food, clothing, medical needs, shelter and future education for yourself.
    6. Take responsibility. Be selective. Do not think that constraints with limited funds allow anyone to take advantage or force us into a decision. Remember, WE are the mothers. As long as we have love for our child, our morals are intact and we behave in a legally responsible manner, all should work out for the best.
    7. Check the phone books for hospitals that can refer you to child crisis centers, social workers or other social agencies.

    How to survive being a single mother

    Did you know that 23% of household family arrangements are children living with a single mother?

    No wonder that new single moms are trying to figure out how to make it through on their own.

    Single parents and their kids can still flourish. There are plenty of examples of other parents to prove it.

    Keep reading to learn the top 5 survival tips on how to survive as a single mom.

    How to Survive as a Single Mom: The Top 5 Survival Tips

    Being a single parent comes with its challenges but it’s not impossible. The truth is that you won’t be the first or the last single mom on earth. What’s important is to make it through the circumstances in a positive light for your sake and your children’s sake.

    You might be a single mom for different reasons either the father of your child left, you’re a widow, recent divorce, etc. If your child has been wondering why they’re fatherless you can view more here to help them not feel guilty. How to survive as a single mom doesn’t have to be scary or a lonely road.

    1. Find Your Tribe

    If you are single because of a recent divorce you might’ve been used to not really searching for a tribe because your little family was its own little world. When you become a single parent you eventually need to find other people that you have things in common with that you can talk to, and lean on if you need help. Make an effort to make friends and get to know your neighbors or other parents from your children’s school.

    2. No Need to Dwell on the Negative

    When it’s just you at home and you don’t have dad there to help with dirty dishes or piles of laundry don’t dwell on this. Instead, choose to make you and your child or teenager happy. Whatever is happening in your household that might seem negative don’t dwell on it and get down on yourself.

    There is no such thing as perfect parenting.

    3. Get Along with Your Ex

    You might be hurt or angry with your ex but at the end of the day, he is the father of your child or children. Fighting with him will only make it harder on your kids. Stay civil with your ex for your children’s sake.

    You don’t have to be best friends but stop the fighting especially not in front of your child.

    4. It’s Ok to Cry

    Sometimes you might find yourself crying about the situation it’s ok, go ahead and cry. It’s ok to let it out and release those emotions instead of bottling them up and exploding later. Crying and then moving on is perfectly normal and healthy.

    5. Make Time for You

    Schedule some time to be by yourself. This doesn’t mean you have to go on a date if you’re not ready or go out with friends. This means to take time to be by yourself doing something you enjoy.

    Whether it’s watching your favorite show, reading, exercising, etc. It’s ok to have someone watch the kids while you indulge in some time by yourself.

    Happy Parenting!

    Parenting isn’t easy whether you’re single or not. After reading the list above on how to survive as a single mom you can totally do it and enjoy it. Never forget you’re not alone on this journey.

    Are you looking for unique bonding activities to do with your children? Check out our blog post with some awesome ideas!

    How to survive being a single mother

    First came the divorce when my kids were in high school. Honestly, their lives and needs kept me too busy to notice the transitions and how our lives changed. Like most mothers in the middle of a divorce, my focus was on my children so I never (or very rarely) thought about me or how the divorce affected me. I had to be okay for my kids.

    At the time, it worked really well but a year and a half later, when my kids were off in the military and in college, I didn’t have anyone to be “fine” for. I was a single mom with an empty nest. The silence in my house was deafening and almost scary at times. I could feel anxiety following me around. My inner voice started asking me questions like, “Is this what it is going to be like for the rest of my life?”

    I have struggled with anxiety for as long as I can remember. So when I started to have these oh so familiar feelings, I knew where I was headed and it was a place I didn’t wanna go.

    One night while laying in bed, it came to me. The only way I was going to beat my anxiety demons, and thrive in this “single mom with an empty nest” life, was to attack it head on instead of pushing it down deep inside of myself and hoping the nervousness would go away eventually. I was 40 something years old. I didn’t have 2 or 3 years to waste anymore.

    So I made up my mind that I was going to be in charge of my new living circumstances, not my fears. I spent the next few days making a plan. My plan is a work in progress. I still tweak it from time to time to deal with the situation at hand. The list below is a few suggestions I took from my plan. I hope someone reads this and tells their anxiety to go to hell and makes a plan of their own to conquer their new single empty nest life.

    7 Things I Did To Survive Being a Single Mom With An Empty Nest

    1. Redecorate!

    I realized that my surroundings were adding to my anxiety because my house reminded me of everything and everyone in the past. So I started by redecorating my home office. I spend a lot of time in there, and it needed to be a place of calm and focus without anxiety. I filled it with things I loved that would inspire me to write.

    If you are on a budget, move some furniture around or buy one nice new piece that you love and then slowly add things to it. I am not suggesting that you take down family pictures (unless your ex is in them!) or totally revamp your whole house. However, this is an opportunity to turn your living space into YOUR sanctuary not a constant reminder of the past.

    2. Start a bucket list.

    In the beginning, it may seem overwhelming to think about what you want to do with the rest of your life, but it can be fun to think about all the things you can do now that you don’t have to worry about taking care of anyone else!! Think about before you were married and had children, were you passionate about something? Was there somewhere you always wanted to go? Everybody has something they wish they could do or see.
    After you make your list, pick one thing– and DO IT!

    3. Join a dating site!

    Yes. I know. If you are over 40 and newly divorced, the last thing you want to do is throw yourself back out into the sea of dating! But you don’t have to actually accept dates– at first. Take your time. Look around. My girlfriends forced me to join a dating site after I lost a bet with them. We had great fun for weeks just looking at the men online! It was like online shopping for dates. When I was ready, I did go out on a few dates and met some very nice people.

    4. Plan an ongoing weekly or biweekly girls night!

    When you have a husband and young kids it is almost impossible to meet your friends out for a drink or have them over on a consistent basis. However, it is easier to plan and execute now that you are a single mom with an empty nest! Nothing makes me feel better than a night with my girlfriends whether it is an evening out or watching a movie at their house or mine.

    5. Get a pet!

    If you are really missing your role as caretaker, you can adopt a pet from a shelter! Animals are known to lower blood pressure, reduce stress and help with depression. I don’t know what I would have done without my dog. He kept me going for walks when I didn’t feel like it at all and made my nest feel a lot less empty. My dog doesn’t expect me to do his laundry or ask me for money either!

    6. Redo your resume!

    If your job is less rewarding than you would like or you aren’t as passionate about it as you used to be, take out your resume and revamp it! A new exciting job is an excellent distraction, will keep you busy, and may lead to meeting new people.

    7. It’s all about Comedy

    Steer clear of sappy love songs, Lifetime movies, and books about lost romance. I can’t emphasize this enough. It is okay to only rent comedies on Netflix for a while or only read the comics! While in the midst of my divorce, I only listened to the heavy metal radio station while in my car! Love stories are nice, but during specific times in your life, they can ruin a perfectly good mood in a snap!

    Those are just a few of the very first things I did to help me cope with my new found (and not necessarily wanted) freedom. But I have to exit with the best tip I have ever heard about what to do when you are in crisis. My grandmother told me that when you are at your worst and need help, go help someone else. She said it was a sure fire way to make two people feel better!

    About the Author

    How to survive being a single mother

    I am a middle school teacher, freelance writer, professionalish photographer, & mother to two amazing grown-ups (where does the time go?).

    I hold teaching certifications in 3 states (IN,KY,CO) in Secondary English and Special Education. I can usually be spotted running (ok, ok walking quickly) to a teacher professional development session I TOTALLY forgot about, or with a camera attached to my hand trying to get “the. Read More

    Leave a Reply Cancel reply

    Trending Articles

    How to survive being a single mother

    Can’t Get Your Ex Out Of Your Head? Help Is Here!

    How to survive being a single mother

    5 Tips to Help Deal With Post-Divorce Conflict With Your Ex

    How to survive being a single mother

    Divorcing: What Happens Now?

    How to survive being a single mother

    Write for DivorcedMoms!

    To become part of the DivorcedMoms writing team, click submit below for our guidelines.

    How to survive being a single mother

    How to survive being a single mother

    In This Article

    Being a single mom is hard is an understatement and choosing to be a single mom is no easy feat.

    Single motherhood throws curveballs and you can’t ever expect everything to go the way you planned.

    That’s why some useful advice on how to be a good single mom can help reduce the stress that accompanies the challenges of single mothers.

    One can be a single mother in a variety of different scenarios.

    • You may be divorced or widowed
    • Co-parenting with an ex
    • Never married and have chosen the single mother’s life

    Your single mother status is bound to change your life!

    Being a single mom with no help is a tiresome task, but it has its own joys.

    There are sure to be bumps along the way of a single-parent family, but there are also going to be bright spots.

    At one point you may be exhausted and stressed out due to the hectic ‘single mom life,’ but you will definitely come across times that you will be thrilled.

    These may be small things such as your baby’s first steps or your kid’s first day at school.

    No matter how hard it is, at the end of the day, no single mother would want to exchange it for anything in the world.

    If you are a newly single mother – by choice or due to circumstances – the following pieces of single mom advice may prove helpful to you as a single parent.

    Listed below are the truths you need to know about being a single mother

    1. You have increased responsibilities

    How to survive being a single mother

    After becoming a single mom, you may be working so hard, but it seems as if there aren’t enough hours in the day.

    You have work, dropping your kids to daycare or school, picking them up, grocery shopping, doing the household chores and so much more to do all by yourself. T hen not to forget the correct upbringing of your child which is one of the most important things single mothers strive for.

    Therefore, you are going to be faced with a never-ending to-do list that no matter how hard you try to complete would simply go on stretching on and on.

    2. You will have to work hard for a social life

    Being a single parent means you have to present at home, both mentally and physically.

    This also means you have to place all your social outings such as going to movies with friends, attending parties, pampering yourself at the spa on the backseat.

    Being a single mom also means limited time for dating, once you are ready to date that is.

    However, it is important that you schedule your plans and be sure to act upon them. Get yourself a babysitter and step out for the leisure time for yourself.

    3. Your kids are the center of your world

    How to survive being a single mother

    Your world may revolve around your kids, and you may consider it your responsibility to care and look after your children.

    However, your children need to care for and value you and other members of the family equally as much.

    Ensure that your children help you with the chores around the house and are capable of taking charge if you are ill or unavailable at the moment.

    This is a great way to ensure that they do not take you for granted and also help them grow into responsible, compassionate adults of society.

    Also, watch this video on single parenting tips:

    4. You will need help

    There is no shame in asking for and accepting help while doing your mom duties.

    Many single moms may believe that everything is solely their responsibility. However, this is not true nor a rational approach.

    You need to surround yourself with friends and family that are ready to help you out when in need as well as make sure never to turn down when someone offers help.

    It is extremely comforting to know that help is only one phone call away.

    You need to take care of yourself first to be in a prime condition to look after your beloved children.

    5. Budgeting will be one of your best friends

    One thing that we all know for sure is that child upbringing is expensive. You may make too much or too little money.

    Nevertheless, you are always trying to save up and live with constant fear wondering what will happen if you lose your job.

    You will eventually end up making a budget.

    A household budget can be turn out as an effective way of handling all your money.

    As a single working mom, you will begin finding ways to maximize your money and make use of coupons, meal plans, shopping tricks, sales, etc.

    6. You need to remind yourself to make room for fun

    You may be too caught up parenting solo, but you also have to realize that you can have fun with your kids whenever you want.

    It can be anything such as going for ice cream or going to the movies or maybe even something as small as playing a board game. It is said that the best memories are made when you least expect it.

    So be easy on yourself and make room for some fun!

    Final take away

    Life as a single mother may get hard but a strong single mom loves it all.

    These pointers may be helpful to give you an idea of what to expect when being a single mom. Just go easy on yourself and do not let bad days get the best of you.

    Be both, a friend and a parent to your children and be proud of who you are and whatever you do!

    Remember, surviving and thriving as a single mother is the hardest and yet the most empowering experience. You can build an amazing life, raising your children, being an awesome mother and yet not give up on your own life completely.

    Being a single mom is not easy. Juggling work, parenting, and household responsibilities can be overwhelming. And on top of it all, you have to worry about money – how you’re going to make ends meet, put food on the table, and pay the bills. If you’re finding it tough to make ends meet, don’t worry – you’re not alone. Millions of single moms are struggling financially. But there are things you can do to survive financially as a single mom.

    Being a single mom is no easy feat. Not only do you have to contend with the everyday challenges of parenting, but you also have to manage the financial burden of being the sole breadwinner. According to a recent study, the average single mother spends nearly 30% of her income on child care, leaving little room for other expenses. This can put a lot of stress on already stretched budgets. One way to ease the financial burden is to look for ways to make extra money.

    There are a number of ways to do this, from taking on part-time work to selling items online. One way to ease the burden is to consider how to do cash advance on credit card . But keep in mind that cash advances typically have higher interest rates than regular credit card purchases, so it’s important to only borrow what you need, and be sure to repay the loan as soon as possible to avoid accruing additional interest charges.

    With a little careful planning, you may avoid getting into debt, so let’s first consider some helpful ways to manage your finances as a single mother.

    Start by Evaluating Your Financial Situation

    Take a close look at your income and expenses to see where you can cut back. Make a budget and stick to it. As a single mom, it’s important to take a close look at your financial situation and make a budget that works for you. Start by evaluating your income and expenses to see where you can cut back. Maybe you can cut back on eating out or entertainment expenses.

    Once you have a good idea of your monthly budget, stick to it as closely as possible. It’s also important to create an emergency fund for unexpected expenses. Having a plan in place will help you stay on track financially and provide peace of mind for you and your family.

    Create a Support Network

    Every mother knows that raising a child is a full-time job. Between working, cooking, cleaning, and shuttling kids to and from activities, it’s easy to feel overwhelmed. That’s why it’s so important to have a support network in place. Whether it’s family, friends, or a support group for single moms, leaning on loved ones for help can make all the difference.

    When you have someone to share the workload with, you can spend more quality time with your children and less time worrying about everything that needs to be done. In addition, having a strong support system can help you weather the tough times, like when your child is sick or going through a difficult behavior phase. So if you’re feeling overwhelmed, don’t be afraid to ask for help from those who love you.

    Look for Ways to Make Extra Money

    Can you pick up a few extra hours at work? Start a side hustle? Sell some of your belongings that you no longer need or use? From freelancing to starting a side hustle, there are many options available. The key is to find something that fits your skill set and schedule.

    For instance, if you’re a whiz with numbers, you could start doing taxes for other people. Or if you’re good at writing, you could start a blog or become a freelance writer. There are also many opportunities for making money online. With a little creativity and effort, you can find the perfect way to bring in some extra cash flow.

    Get Help With Childcare

    According to a report from the National Association of Child Care Resource & Referral Agencies, the average cost of full-time child care for an infant in the United States is $7,500 per year. For a working single parent, child care can be a major financial burden. There are a few ways to get help with childcare costs.

    First, see if family members or friends can pitch in. If that’s not possible, there may be affordable child care options available through your state’s child care assistance program. You can also look into hiring a nanny or au pair, which can be more expensive but may provide your child with more individualized attention.

    Ultimately, there’s no one-size-fits-all solution when it comes to childcare, but there are a number of options available to help ease the financial burden.

    Take Advantage Of Government Assistance Programs

    If you’re struggling to make ends meet, government assistance programs can help, including food stamps, housing assistance, and energy assistance.

    According to the U.S. Census Bureau , there are over 10 million single mothers in the United States. Many of these women are struggling to make ends meet, and government assistance programs can help. The Supplemental Nutrition Assistance Program (SNAP), also known as food stamps, provides assistance with food costs for low-income families.

    How to survive being a single mother

    Housing assistance programs can help with rent or mortgage payments, and energy assistance programs can help with heating and cooling costs. In addition, the Women, Infants, and Children (WIC) program provides nutritious food, counseling, and other services for pregnant women and young children. These programs can make a significant difference in the lives of single mothers and their families.

    Cut Your Costs

    Take a close look at your expenses and see where you can cut back. For example, you may be able to save money on your groceries by couponing or by switching to a cheaper cell phone plan.

    Build Up an Emergency Fund

    An emergency fund can help you cover unexpected costs, like a car repair or a medical bill. Try to save up at least $500 so you have a cushion to fall back on.

    Pay Down Your Debt

    If you’re carrying credit card debt or other high-interest debt, focus on paying it off as quickly as possible. The less debt you have, the easier it will be to make ends meet.

    Make a Plan

    A financial plan can help you stay on track and progress toward your financial goals. Write down your income, expenses, and goals, and review it regularly to see how you’re doing.

    The Bottom Line

    If you’re a single mom struggling to make ends meet, know that you’re not alone. There are millions of other single moms in the same situation. But there are things you can do to survive financially. Follow these tips and you’ll be on your way to financial stability. Good luck!’s

    Related posts:

    1. Tubby Table keeping Bathtime fun!
    2. Do You Stuggle Giving Your Kids Medicine? Try MediMixer!
    3. EZPlay Jungle Gym: Kids Indoor Playground For All Seasons
    4. Parenting & Pregnancy: 6 Things to Expect As a Surrogate

    About Author

    LaDonna Dennis is the founder and creator of Mom Blog Society. She wears many hats. She is a Homemaker*Blogger*Crafter*Reader*Pinner*Friend*Animal Lover* Former writer of Frost Illustrated and, Cancer. SURVIVOR! LaDonna is happily married to the love of her life, the mother of 3 grown children and “Grams” to 3 grandchildren. She adores animals and has four furbabies: Makia ( a German Shepherd, whose mission in life is to be her attached to her hip) and Hachie, (an OCD Alaskan Malamute, and Akia (An Alaskan Malamute) who is just sweet as can be. And Sassy, a four-month-old German Shepherd who has quickly stolen her heart and become the most precious fur baby of all times. Aside from the humans in her life, LaDonna’s fur babies are her world.

    As schools are closed in the wake of coronavirus, a reminder to all single parents that you are warriors

    How to survive being a single mother

    The idea of emotional labour or the ‘mental workload,’ and the revelation that women are still carrying the bulk of it in families – despite often also holding down a full-time job – is depressingly unsurprising. As we mark 100 years since the first women gained the right to vote in the UK, we still have a long way to go before achieving equality in the workplace, and further still when it comes to equality at home.

    But one of the only places this battle for equality over the family mental workload isn’t being fought is in single parent households. The fact that the sole parent is filling all adult roles in the house (bread-winner, home-maker, child-raiser) is fairly obvious; there is nobody else to fill them (I’ve tried asking Jack, 3, to put the laundry on and renew the car insurance – the results have been mixed). And, while there is some comfort in knowing you’re steering your little family ship all by yourself, keeping it afloat can be tricky.

    The strain of this emotional labour on single parent households is something not often acknowledged, less often still addressed. In my most recent blog (Forgive My Rudeness, I’m Trying Not to Have a Breakdown), I spoke about the consequences of this mental workload on single parents and received dozens of ‘I hear you’ messages from fellow single parents and still more ‘I don’t know how you do it’ notes from parents and friends. Such a kind response wasn’t the aim when I sat down to write the piece at the end of a busy Monday, but I have to admit, it’s nice to hear.

    When you go for hours, days, or sometimes weeks where the only person you spend any decent amount of time with is a three-year-old, you can start to feel like you’ve gone a bit mad. So, I wanted to return the favour. To tell all the single mums (and dads) out there that they’ve got this. To remind them, when that mental workload gets just that little bit too heavy, that being a single parent is actually pretty great, too.

    “When you forget the bake sale because you were up late working, forgive yourself”

    Single parents, you are all warriors. This is my letter to you.

    The next time you feel like the weight of the world is too heavy, and you’re not coping with all it asks of you, put a little down. Give yourself a break. Remember that the important things in your world are yourself and your children – anything else can be set aside until you’re strong enough to pick it up again.

    How to survive being a single mother

    When you forget the birthday party or the bake sale or the non-uniform day because you were up late working on a deadline, or you had an unexpected bill to pay, forgive yourself. Be kind to yourself. You’re doing the best you can.

    When you feel shame at the label ‘single mum’ and its long-held (and media-enforced) connotations, teach yourself to feel pride. That you’re strong enough to survive this, the hardest of jobs, alone.

    When you falter navigating the rocky terrain of negotiating co-parenting, shared custody and frayed tempers, be patient. Try to see your child in your co-parent. Remember that it’s hard for them too.

    When you find yourself without your child because they’re with their dad, and feel utterly and completely lost, be selfish. Learn to see those times for what they are – a chance to have a whole other persona, a life lived for yourself. Go to the spa. Go shopping. Sleep for 10 hours straight. And remember that this person is allowed to drink wine. Lots of wine.

    How to survive being a single mother

    Who wants to be a single mother?

    I never wanted to be a single mother. No one dreams of being a single mother, or says “when I grow up I want to be a single mother” (#lifegoals)! But what is it about being a single mother that makes people so terrified? And more importantly, why does the term “single mother” seem to be synonymous with “terrible mother”? Why the single mother stigma?

    There was a video in The Guardian last week which brought it all up again for me, and it’s been on my mind ever since.

    The Single Mother Stigma

    So, let’s talk about the social stigma of being a single mum. I never thought much about single mothers before becoming one, but when I did become one I didn’t think negatively of single mums at all.

    I thought they were brave, brave women. But I did still think there was a social stigma and I did not want to be put in the single mum category. I thought that instantly people would think that I was stupid, uneducated, and a drain on the economy. I thought they would think that I should never have had a child, that my daughter would grow up disadvantaged and that I was scraping by, and barely keeping it together.

    All I could think about was that beef TV ad… “I’m a single mum with a daaughhta” where, pretty much, the implication is that single mothers are run down and tired. Was this how I was going to be thought of forever going forward? Shit!

    Why does society look down on mothers who are single, and not fathers? Single mothers are often thought of as run down, unkempt, dole bludging, irresponsible, exhausted, possibly drug addicted, irresponsible, selfish, young people who cannot get their shit together. The implications is that it’s our fault we are single. Meanwhile, single fathers are looked at as being heroes. Wow, how does he do it? He does it all on his own; amazing! WHAT A CHAMPION!

    Why can’t single mothers and single fathers just be treated equally? And for that matter just equally as parents? I am a mother, who happens to be single. That’s it.

    Aren’t we all the same? Just mothers? Single or not? What does our relationship status have to do with our quality of life? Our ability to raise a child? Our intelligence?

    It really makes me mad when I see society being so judgmental. New single mothers feel bad enough as it is, without the judgement and ignorance of society thrown in too. Most single mothers didn’t ask to be one. Some are single mothers because their husbands or partners have passed away suddenly, and some were cheated on. Some are single because they have fled a domestic violent relationship, or a partner with addiction.

    In my eyes that makes someone strong, brave, capable, independent, fierce and protective of her children. It doesn’t make them a bad mother. Sometimes relationships just run their course and there is disharmony, toxicity and sadness in the home. Is it not better for children to be raised in a happy and mentally healthy home?

    I know that my daughter and I wouldn’t be as happy as we are today, if her father and I were still together. My daughter has two parents that love her more than anything. We are no longer together, and that is OK.

    The trouble is that so many people worldwide in the government and media have a terrible opinion of single mothers. As mentioned in The Guardian video , in 2011, after the riots in England, Prime Minister David Cameron said “I don’t doubt that many of the rioters out last week had no dad at home”. Seriously?

    In 1998, Margaret Thatcher said that the children of lone mothers were better off in the care of a very good religious organisation, so that they could grow up with family values. WTF?

    More recently in 2013, Richard Land, US Southern Baptist leader, called on single mothers to put up their kids for adoption so that Christian households with two parents could raise them. I can’t tell you how much this upset me when I heard that statement at the time. It really got to me, and I cried about it for days. I had never felt so judged and looked down upon IN MY LIFE. I was a new single mother, and I was devastated. Now I just think he’s an idiot.

    Luckily we also have many amazing people in the media and government who are representing single mothers really well. Barrack Obama for example was raised by a single mother. And what an amazing man he turned out to be!

    When people say “I feel like a single mother” (which let me tell you, frustrates us single mothers to no end), what they are really saying is “I do everything on my own. Poor me. I’m exhausted and hard done by”. It’s downright offensive.

    Letting go of the single mother stigma

    We need to let go of the single mother stigma! Most single mothers I know are strong, independent, hardworking, educated, motivated, happy, and fun women. Yes, at first it can be challenging. It’s certainly an adjustment emotionally, physically, mentally and logistically. But most single mothers who have got through 2-3 years of being a single parent are absolutely loving life, extremely happy, getting shit done and f***king owning their life. Our children are our number one priority, just like any other mother. And life is bloody amazing.

    I have met hundreds of single mothers over the last 4 years (#notkidding) and they are all kicking bloody ass.

    I have grown to love the term “single mum”. To me, it represents strength, courage, and resourcefulness. I have surrounded myself with single mums, and they are all intelligent, educated, loving, confident, independent women, who would do anything for their child.

    I am a single mum, that is a fact, and I am also a strong, smart, and independent woman, and a loving mum who would do anything for her child. We are not failures at all, we are a success for getting ourselves out of a toxic relationship and doing what’s best for our children.

    Do you want to go from SURVIVING TO THRIVING in just 8 weeks?

    The next round of the DON’T JUST SURVIVE THRIVE online program (for single mums to get empowered) kicks off on the 16TH April 2018 – LEARN MORE HERE.


    You can book in for one-on-one mentoring with Julia Hasche from wherever you are in the world!

    • Have you just parted ways with your partner, and feeling lost?
    • Have you been single for a little while now and need assistance with getting your life back on track and feeling empowered?

    Click HERE to read all about the mentoring programs currently available, and book in here for your 30 minute complimentary Clarity Call.

    The purpose of the Clarity Call is:

    1. For me to get to know you and understand an overview of your current situation and where you are at.
    2. For us to establish what you need assistance with to move forward.
    3. To see if we are a good fit to work together.

    How to survive being a single mother

    Know someone who needs to read this? Share it with them via the links below.

    By Tara Nolan — Written on Jun 27, 2017

    How to survive being a single mother

    Taking care of another human and supporting your family at the same time, it can send any stable woman to a place of emotional struggle.

    How can one keep it together, enjoy life, and relishing in this sacred time of raising a child through each moment, each stage, each age? How to be happy as a single mom lies in these 9 practices. They will help empower you to love your life of single motherhood and celebrate the journey:

    1. Stay true to yourself.

    This may take some quiet time, some “you” time. Meditation would be amazing, but I know what you may be thinking, “Yeah, right, who has a moment for that when you’re raising a baby?!”

    It may be giving yourself just a few minutes to lie still in bed before you sleep and consciously trying to quiet your overactive, yet exhausted mind. It may be when you can get out for a walk with the stroller.

    Instead of grabbing for your iPhone, just be with your own thoughts for a while. Whenever and however you can, maintain a dedicated time to tap into your own heart.

    2. Don’t listen to your family and friends.

    Everyone seems to have an opinion or (often worse) a judgment about your life and what you need to do. You already know more than you think you do. No one else can possibly know what’s right for you and your baby more than a mother.

    Listen when it is helpful, but when something doesn’t resonate, take it in and then let it go. Trust yourself. You have a mother’s intuition and it applies to more aspects of your life right now than just knowing when your child needs a diaper change.

    3. Set your priorities.

    Take some time to write out what is important to you and in what order. Keep this in a safe place and consider it a self-made “bible” to aide you in making the decisions that support what’s in your own heart.

    This exercise greatly helped me clarify and hone my focus. My first priority was time with my baby. The second was living happy, so I could be an example. The third was supporting us with a stable foundation.

    These 3 goals were almost equally important. I knew I had to do all 3, but I wasn’t willing to sacrifice a certain amount time with my baby. When I did, I suffered inside and I believe she did too.

    It took some learning and making mistakes, but with my personal guidelines, I was able to lessen these pains and celebrate my decisions, even when outsiders may not understand.

    (An outsider is defined as anyone other than you and your baby!)

    4. Accept help.

    There will be angels along the way. You may worry you are taking advantage of them or you shouldn’t ask for help even when others encourage you to do so.

    It is important to be open to help because you need it right now. This help could be in the form of free child care, housing, financial help, or anything at all that you normally wouldn’t accept. But let’s face it, normally you wouldn’t need it the way you do now.

    Believe that each person who is there for you is there for a reason and helping you gives them an opportunity to receive the gift of giving. Let them, but always acknowledge their kindness, be grateful and don’t forget it when the times change or there is some way you can give in return.

    You may be able to offer something completely different that you don’t even see as equivalent, but they may see it as extraordinary. It could be just giving them an ear to listen or teaching them something they have wanted to learn. The point is that it isn’t an eye for an eye.

    I personally needed child care help whenever possible, but couldn’t afford to pay it every time based on the income I would make teaching yoga and the cost of child care. I couldn’t often return the gift of child care, but I could share coaching knowledge, information on reducing anxiety, and better ways to eat, juice or detox.

    I could be there as a supportive friend or to spread some sunshine and optimism. Those were my gifts to share. In addition, I am confident my daughter gave so much more to anyone who welcomed her in. She gave love and smiles.

    In this world filled with depression and anxiety, there isn’t much more powerful than sharing some sunshine or even a new outlook on another’s day.

    5. Recognize your options.

    We can get “stuck” in thinking that things have to be a certain way and even talking ourselves into believing this is the only scenario. This is a mistake!

    Don’t stand in your own way, create obstacles, or make excuses as to why change is not possible. Even if some options don’t sound good or perfect, consider them. It may open you up to something else that you never imagined.

    Write out your options, even the ones that don’t seem possible. If you choose to see the impossibilities, write out why they are impossible. Then, empower yourself to let go of these limitations and reasons.

    Consider what would be absolutely amazing, even if it seems way out of reach. Then each day, tell yourself “the amazing” can happen. You will start to make decisions and choices that support this outcome. You will work your way towards making the impossible possible.

    6. Get out of the house.

    We all need some time to get out of the house. It may not always be easy to coordinate but the rewards of some “me time” are worth it.

    Go for a run, take a yoga class, go to dinner, grab a drink, get a pedicure, or browse a bookstore.

    You also can go and do any of these things with your baby! That’s right, you can treat yourself to dinner, live music, or a drink with your baby. Why not? No one else’s judgment matters but your own.

    No one else has walked in your shoes. And let me tell you, I believe anyone that has been in the shoes of a single mama will support you! Of course, you may have to modify a bit, but only to a certain extent.

    As for yoga classes, maybe it’s time you explore the baby/mama classes, even though they aren’t the hot power classes you once did. You may find a new community you never imagined you would love so much!

    As for dinner, no you don’t have to choose a family diner. You can go just about any restaurant. I found that my baby behaved better because she was so mesmerized by all the action.

    I remember one particular Sunday evening, I felt I needed a wonderful dinner, so I took a risk and drove to a nearby French restaurant. We sat at the bar, her in her car seat and me on my bar stool. I had a great glass of red and it was heaven being waited on while enjoying the decadent cuisine.

    It turned out the bartender was also the father of a young baby and we shared parenting sleep strategies.

    Another time, I took a risk and went to a movie. It was great. She slept or woke up and I nursed her back to her own state of bliss. The movie was so loud that no one could even hear when she squawked. I knew if it was a problem in either scenario, I could always leave, but I didn’t have to.

    7. Don’t let the “father” minimize you.

    As Single mom, you always need to balance your work life and personal life, Utilize the power of cloud and work remotely from anywhere on any device with Citrix Xendesktop VDI and Cloud QuickBooks Hosting with top-notch support from Apps4Rent.

    As a single mom, not only are you responsible for maintaining employment and balancing your budget even when things are tight, but you’re also tasked with the monumental job of parenting. It’s often tough for two parents to manage, and it’s even harder to be a solo act. How to balance it all? Read on for 10 tips on how to be successful as a single mother.

    Create a Support Network for Yourself

    You need time to yourself, and as you probably know, it’s essential to spend time with other adults. Partnered parents typically have an easy time cultivating friendships with other couples who have kids in the same age range; it’s often harder for singles. Don’t be shy about mixing and mingling with other moms – even if your children don’t share interests.

    Let Go of Baggage

    It can be tough to stay positive, but you and your child will benefit when you do. Reminders of your old life can be painful, and they can prevent you from focusing on the great things that are happening now. Consider selling wedding and engagement jewelry, donate or discard items of lesser value, and you’ll find that it’s easier to keep your eyes on the road ahead.

    Make Your Health a Priority

    Stay active and eat well, even if it’s easier to eat pizza on the couch. Kids can join in, enjoying neighborhood walks and bike rides, and you can even teach older children basic kitchen skills and have fun prepping healthy meals together. Take time to yourself every so often, too, relaxing or enjoying girls’ days out. If you feel as if the concept of self-care seems extravagant, it may help to remind yourself that good physical, mental, and emotional health are vital to your success as a parent. Kratom and other herbal supplements can help you improve your overall well-being.

    Be a Money Mentor

    As a single mom, it’s up to you to teach your child how to manage money. Teaching even simple concepts such as tracking spending and saving can help ensure that your children develop good financial habits that will serve them for life.

    Enjoy Electronics-Free Time Together

    Your smartphone connects you to your network – and your friends, acquaintances, and coworkers really are important. But too much time spent focusing on technology can have a negative impact on your child’s self-esteem. Make “together time” a priority. After you’ve handled essential tasks, take time to be fully present with your child. Not only will you enjoy the in-person connection, you’ll also be a great model of healthy online behavior.

    Take Your Child on Outings

    As a single mom, you’re more than a parent – you’re also a teacher, guide, mentor, and more. Trips – even short ones to local venues – help you create a stronger bond with your child and expose him or her to new experiences. Most communities offer at least a few free recreational opportunities. Take advantage of them!

    Expose Your Child to Good Male Role Models

    Male mentors such as grandfathers, uncles, scout leaders, coaches, and others are essential for boys and girls alike. Be extremely selective when choosing potential candidates, ensuring that they share your values. Male role models should be trustworthy and willing to spend time with your child.

    Create a Routine and Stick to It

    With the exception of holidays and vacations, it’s important to ensure that your child sticks to a predictable routine. Try to create consistency with scheduling wake-up time, bedtime, and mealtimes, and set aside special family time and play time, too. Try making chore times consistent as well, for example, have your child brush the husky once a week every Friday. Daily, weekly, monthly, and yearly routines create stability.

    Be Consistent With Discipline

    Most kids get into trouble. It’s a normal part of childhood! At the same time, it’s important to note that children need to understand what’s expected, and they need to know what to anticipate in terms of consequences when those expectations aren’t met or when set boundaries are pushed. Avoid empty threats, keep your temper under control, and don’t be a pushover. Discipline should foster learning, not create distance between you and your child.

    Date When and How it is Good for you!

    Dating can be an adventure for you and a good opportunity to show your kids the healthy side of relationships. Many single moms can feel apprehensive about dating again, especially when considering their kids. However, there is a way to strike balance with dating that allows for a happier you, and ultimately a happier mom.

    Related posts:

    1. Reasons Kids Need to be Taught Code
    2. How to Help Your Kids Deal with Dad’s New Girlfriend
    3. Using Films as Educational Tools for Your Children
    4. Celebrating Your Childs Graduation

    About Author

    Wife, mother, grandma, blogger, all wrapped into one person. Lover of coffee, crime shows as well as humor. Loyalty, honesty and positivity is what attracts me to a person as that is what I try to project to others. Hard working and driven to a fault helps me help others and in turn helps myself in my daily work and life.

    Being a single mother can be hard, especially when it comes to finding affordable housing for you and your children. Help is out there; however, you need to know where to look and how to apply.

    Housing assistance from the government is available in most states, as well as help from private organizations.

    Here are some ways you can find housing as a single mother.

    1. Emergency Housing

    How to survive being a single mother

    Emergency housing is for those who find themselves with no place to live. This is temporary housing, but it is worth to take note of in case of an emergency situation.

    Emergencies can include such incidents as a fire or a case of domestic violence. Emergency housing includes shelters, group homes, boarding homes and sometimes, hotel rooms.

    Where do I look?

    If you need emergency housing, social services along with private, non-profit organizations such as the Salvation Army and Goodwill, can help. Doing a quick Google search of “I need emergency housing” will bring up results for safe places closest to your current location.

    2. Affordable Housing

    Affordable housing is housing with low monthly payments, being rent or mortgage. This type of housing is granted with Section 8 vouchers or can be found in neighborhood, low-income apartment units.

    How do I apply?

    The first step to applying is finding the right organization for you. Here are several to start off with.

    The Family Unification Assistance Program

    This program assists with housing vouchers for low-income families and single mothers. The amount you will have to pay will be based on your income. You can find more information here.


    The CoAbod program helps single mothers to find suitable housing and help with child care. It entails sharing a home with another mother and splitting all the expenses.

    For more information, look at their website.

    Social Serve

    This service is a non-profit organization which aids single mothers in finding affordable housing. Their website is updated daily and lists accommodation opportunities in every state.

    Habitat Humanity

    This worldwide organization builds and repairing houses for individuals in need. To apply for this benefit, go to their website

    3. Low-Income Housing

    This kind of housing is only for people who have a low income. There is usually a maximum amount of money that you can earn to qualify for these programs.

    How do I apply?

    Several organizations provide low-income housing:

    Public Housing

    Each state has HUD, or a PHA (the Public Housing Administration). With this program, low-income housing is available in a wide range of areas for low-income families, people with disabilities and the elderly.

    Income allowance is determined according to each state and goes by your gross, annual income. To apply, go to their website:

    (Section 8) House Voucher Program

    This program offers low-income individuals and families a safe and sanitary place to live at a reduced price based on their earnings. The home that a person desires to live in has to be included in the program. It must also meet the Section 8 guidelines.

    To qualify, you must meet the annual income restrictions. You can learn more and apply here.

    The Vision-House

    This non-profit organization provides in-between accommodations to single mothers and their dependents who don’t have anywhere else to live.

    It is a 2-year program. Vision-House requires single mothers’ income to be thirty percent below the overall income of the community in which they want to live. They must be considered homeless at the time of enrollment. To learn more, go to their website

    The Nurturing Network

    This 501(c)(3) non-profit, charity organization helps women who are challenged with an unexpected pregnancy. They provide provisions during the pregnancy, and well after the child is born.

    Services can include medical services, counseling, housing, legal assistance and help with locating employment. To learn more, visit their website

    Low-Income House Coalition

    A national agency that seeks to expand housing accessibility for people across the U.S. To find out more and to let your voice be heard click here.

    (LIHTC) Low-income House Tax Credit Assistance Program

    This agency gives property renters a tax credit if he or she offers affordable housing. With this program, the property owner reduces his tax liability. To learn more about qualifying as a property owner or as a low-income individual looking for housing, visit here.

    4. Rental Assistance

    Rental assistance programs are intended to help people with their rent. They either give people an allowance to use towards their rent or give money directly to the landlord to assist with rent.

    How to survive being a single mother

    Several agencies help single mothers with rental assistance:

    The Salvation Army

    The Salvation Army aids people in a lot of ways by using the money that they make in their stores. They help with housing for single mothers. They also provide food, rehabilitation and disaster relief. To learn more and see if you qualify, visit their website.

    The Catholic Charities

    The programs that this charity offers include providing info on food aid, support for finding affordable housing and reintegration to allow people to qualify for higher-paying jobs. You don’t have to be a Catholic to be eligible for their services. To learn more, visit here.

    The YWCA

    The YWCA advocates for women’s rights. They believe in justice, peace, dignity, and freedom for all women.

    They offer programs and aid in housing, domestic violence cases, women’s health plans, job training, primary childcare programs, literacy programs, veteran’s programs and women’s scholarship awards. To learn more about how the YWCA can assist you, go to their website.

    We hope you found this listing of housing assistance for low-income mothers helpful. You might also like our page “Help & Assistance for Single Mothers“

    You can find a complete list of our articles on Family Parenting.

    There was a wedding procession going on somewhere in the outskirts of Tamil Nadu, a simple one. The bride was sitting nervously, a bit curious, all set for her new life.

    Her name was Selvi, a teenage girl waiting for the procession to get over. Selvi was the third daughter of Nagpal. Selvi’s mother had passed away when she was seven years. She had five sisters and three brothers, they were all raised by a single father. It was tough for Nagpal, but he was determined to raise his children without getting married again. Due to a financial crisis, Selvi had to discontinue her studies. She managed to study till the eighth grade from south Tamil Nadu university. Selvi shifted to Mumbai after her wedding.

    Her marriage was running smoothly, with life’s ups and downs, but she was happy. Her husband supported her in every way, but due to language problems (she knew no other language except Telugu), she couldn’t find a job. The couple was blessed with one daughter and one son. soon, Selvi was expecting a third one.

    That year was a blessed year as Selvi’s husband had a promotion too. It was Diwali, Selvi’s husband had to stay late at the office for some work. “Don’t go to work, dear, leaving me alone. I might have to rush to the hospital any moment,” said Selvi. “It’s just a day’s work, I will return in the evening,” said her husband. Selvi said goodbye, unwillingly. She was worried and nervous too. “What if the delivery date is today, what will I do?” This thought was troubling her mind continuously. The evening passed, and Selvi’s husband didn’t return.

    The time passed from dawn to noon to night, without any information about her husband Karunanidhi’s whereabouts. “There might be some additional work at the office which might have held him back,” Selvis’s conscience reassured, but she was a little worried. Then the phone rang enquiring, “Are you Mrs Karunidhi?” “Yes”, said Selvi. “Please, come to the civil hospital immediately,” said the caller. “Why? Is everything fine? What happened?” “He is fine; he wants to talk to you; I am his boss,” was his reply.

    At the hospital, Selvi was guided to a room, followed by Karunanidhi’s boss. Karunanidhi was in the ICU. He had suffered a sudden respiratory tract infection, a blockage of the respiratory tract as he was an asthmatic patient. He didn’t want Selvi to be informed, but because his condition was critical, his boss did not have any other option. Karunanidhi died in the evening.

    Selvi, who was ninth months pregnant at the time, stood still beside his dead body. No complaints, she just stood straight. She fell unconscious and was shifted to the labour room. She was blessed with a second daughter. In the ward, she looked towards her children, “Why me? I lost my mother when I was young, and now I’ve lost my husband.” “God gives troubles to his strong angels, now be strong and think about your kids,” replied Selvi’s brother who stayed with her in the adjacent room.

    Being a single mom is difficult, but being a homemaker when your hubby dies is the toughest. She could not find any job due to her language problem but had to search for one to feed her children. Karunanidhi’s boss bought a sewing machine for Selvi, and she started stitching suitcase covers. She used to earn very little, which was not sufficient to raise three kids. Selvi’s brother bought her a grinder so that she could make idli batter at home and she could sell that on the weekends.

    Days were tough, but she had to work hard for her kids. She was determined to raise her children with courage and confidence. She was advised by many to remarry because she was pretty young, but she refused reluctantly. She said that her three kids are her life. The struggle at that time was beyond imagination, and she was inconsolable. Selvi’s brother turned into a father figure for the kids and supported them financially at that time. Her children were interested in studies, but due to the circumstances, they had to quit their studies and start working when they were very young. The age when youngsters enjoy at college, they had to work to support their mother.

    Finally, Selvi’s hard work and determination paid off; her three children had grown into three mature adults and are well-settled now. Everything is good now, but Karunanidhi is missed by his family.

    Hats off to all the single mothers, and kudos to their determination towards raising their children on their own. They don’t remarry for their kids and face struggles of life alone just to see their children happy. Their love is so selfless.

    Selvi’s children value the pains and struggle their mother went through while raising them. Her responsibility was over, and now it was their turn to pay back. This was Selvi’s story, A single mom, everyone called her Amma, but her children called her their “IRON LADY.”

    Disclaimer: The views, opinions and positions (including content in any form) expressed within this post are those of the author alone. The accuracy, completeness and validity of any statements made within this article are not guaranteed. We accept no liability for any errors, omissions or representations. The responsibility for intellectual property rights of this content rests with the author and any liability with regards to infringement of intellectual property rights remains with him/her.

    First of all, to be single in the 21st century is completely and utterly ordinary. In fact, in the U.S. there are nearly as many adults who are not married as are married. And of those who are unmarried, close to two thirds have never been married. Furthermore, a Pew Research Centre study estimated that by the time today’s young people reach their 50s, about one quarter of them will have been single all of their lives.

    Fewer women than ever before are financially dependent on a spouse. Not only is being single no longer as stigmatised as it once was, but it may actually bring value to your life. More than a dozen studies have shown that when people marry, they become no happier than they were when they were single – aside from a short honeymoon period (Luhmann et al., 2012).

    Not only are married people no happier than single people, those who remain single may actually derive other benefits from their singlehood. A study of over 10,000 Australian women in their 70’s discovered that lifelong single women who had no kids were more optimistic and less stressed than married women (with or without kids). They were also the most highly educated and volunteered more, had the healthiest body mass index, and were the least likely to be smokers or to be diagnosed with a major illness.

    Feeling Left Behind

    Many people are now choosing to remain single, no longer put off by the possible stigmatisation, judgement, and unwarranted pity of others. Many people are now actively deciding that they want to live a different life, focus on their career, focus on their interests, rather than searching for ‘the one’ and raising children.

    But what about those that are not single by choice. Spending your teens and your twenties with your friends can be a great time with lots of fun and adventures, but what happens when your friends find their own partners and, one by one, they start to cancel on you in favour of focusing on their blossoming relationship.

    It’s hard not to feel left out when everyone else is paired off. Suddenly there is a feeling of loneliness or even jealousy. There might be a sense that if you don’t make all the plans to see your friends, you’ll never see them at all – especially once they start to have children and build a family of their own.

    Research shows that when couples move in together or get married, they become more insular, and this includes spending less time with their friends. Some couples even forget that the word ‘I’ exists and favour using ‘we’ instead, as in; ‘we’re fine’ as a response to ‘How are you?’

    Being single with a group of friends can be a fun time; swapping stories of bad dates, awkward encounters, and near-misses. But when you are the only single friend left, you might suddenly feel like you don’t want to continue sharing these once-funny stories. There can be a dread that your former ally will go home and snigger about these stories with their perfect partner and pity their single friend. This most likely isn’t the case, but it can be easy to imagine after a long period of unchosen singlehood.

    Embrace Singlehood

    As mentioned, many people are now choosing the single life over spending their time searching for ‘the one’. As Sasha Cagen, author of Quirkyalone, puts it, you need to “inhabit singledom as your natural resting state… there is no patience for dating just for the sake of not being alone.”

    But how do you live the single life, happily, if you are not actively choosing to be single?

    1. Immerse yourself in meaningful activities, and live in the now. Happiness in general is more about your mindset and how you spend your time than about your relationship status.
    2. Recognise that not all of your thoughts are facts. Very often, negative thoughts pop into our heads without us even realising it. Eventually, we can start to believe these thoughts as gospel. But it is important to question these thoughts, look at the patterns, when do these thoughts tend to pop up? What is the opposite of this negative thought? For example if your negative thought is ‘I’m not good enough for that guy’ try thinking something along the lines of ‘I’m not going to settle for a relationship with someone who doesn’t appreciate me’.
    3. Don’t wait to be in a relationship to pursue your goals. A lot of the time we can be guilty of thinking that our life will begin once we are married or living with our spouse – like we are in some kind of limbo until then. Ask yourself, how would your life change once you are in a relationship? Maybe you would travel more, maybe you would start looking to buy a flat, or maybe you would start thinking about having children. These are all things (with the magic of modern science) that we can start working on without a partner.
    4. Use your past to inform your future, but not to sabotage it. Bad relationships can stick with us for a long time, causing you to perhaps lose trust in people or to expect the worst in others or yourself. We can also be guilty of looking at the past through rose tinted glasses – we remember the good and forget the bad. It is important not to compare your ex to your current partner or date – they may have different qualities or looks but that doesn’t make one worse than the other. We can, however, use our past to inform our future – think about the qualities in previous partners that you appreciate and those that were red flags for you and adjust your search accordingly.
    5. Don’t put your date on a pedestal. Thinking that the next date could be ‘the one’ puts a lot of pressure on the date and can make you feel a little crazy. Furthermore, if you desperately want and hope that your next date will turn into a relationship, you can be blinded to some serious red flags.
    6. Do put yourself on a pedestal.Don’t think that you have to change yourself in order to be dateable. The more that you change yourself, the harder it is to keep up the facade, the more exhausting the relationship becomes, and the more unhappy you will become.
    7. Tell your friends how you feel. If you are feeling left behind by your friends, it is perfectly okay to express this to them. They may not be able to keep up with your original social routine, especially if they have their own children, but they may empathise with you more.

    In many western countries, we are led to believe in a world of meritocracy – that good things come to those who deserve them. So, if we are not in a relationship, we may come to believe that we don’t deserve love, happiness, or companionship. However, it is important to remember that dating is all about compatibility and timing, and waiting for these to be aligned can be exhausting. Furthermore, as discussed in our blog on the impact of dating apps, the overwhelming amount of choice in partner is causing daters to be less tolerant of imperfect dates.

    Those of you who are currently single should revel in the fact that you have been selective up until now. There are plenty of unhappy couples in the world who perhaps started their relationship too young, before they knew who they really were and what they wanted in life. You should be proud of not settling for any old relationship just for the sake of being in a relationship. Get to know who you are, what you want in life, and what you want in a partner.

    If you’d like to process your feelings about relationships or dating with an experienced therapist – and perhaps explore your relationship patterns – then get in touch. We have sessions available seven days a week at our Clapham and Tooting centres. Contact our team by calling 020 8673 4545 or emailing [email protected]



    Hi, I just signed up for the Express Entry. I included my son on my application so I could bring him with me. My concern is, what will be the arrangement for me and my son if all goes well? Of course I am new to this country, what do you guys think is going to happen? I see, it is illegal to leave my kid home alone while I am working. Can anyone share their insights with me on how my situation can work out well for me and my kid? He is 6 years old by the way. I just don’t want to be away from my kid.

    How to survive being a single mother


    Hero Member

    Hi, I just signed up for the Express Entry. I included my son on my application so I could bring him with me. My concern is, what will be the arrangement for me and my son if all goes well? Of course I am new to this country, what do you guys think is going to happen? I see, it is illegal to leave my kid home alone while I am working. Can anyone share their insights with me on how my situation can work out well for me and my kid? He is 6 years old by the way. I just don’t want to be away from my kid.

    There are a few hurdles that single parents need to overcome even before getting to Canada. Things that CIC will be requiring include: (assuming the reason you’re a single parent is divorce from the child’s other parent)

    1. divorce papers/custody plan specifically allowing the child to be removed from his home state/country to immigrate to Canada.
    2. IMM5604 form signed by the non-accompanying parent.
    3. The child will require a passport (which may involve getting the other parent’s cooperation)

    But yes, in Canada, children are generally not allowed to be home by themselves at a young age, and as certainly as young as 6. You may need to find a daycare or after school program if you don’t have another responsible adult you know you can trust your child with.

    As a PR, both you and the child do need to be able to be reside inside Canada at least 730 days in a 5 year span.

    How to survive being a single mother

    How to survive being a single mother

    Millions of single parents navigate work-life balance every day—without a co-pilot. It can be a challenging way of life from both perspectives: as a parent and also as an employee.

    How can you balance your need to be a good, involved parent with your work? Get tips for how to thrive in the workplace as a single parent.

    Seek Out Family-Friendly Companies

    When it comes to accommodating employees with kids, not all companies have the same policies and attitudes. Search online for lists of family-friendly companies. During your interview, look for signs that the company is accommodating to parents.

    Either before or after the interview, check on LinkedIn for connections you might have at the company. If any are parents, ask for their take on the company’s attitude and policies toward working parents. You might also be able to get insight through reviews on sites like Glassdoor.

    If you find that your current field doesn’t work for you as a single parent and you want to shift to a new role, explore our list of best jobs for working parents.

    Be Open with Your Manager

    If you are currently employed and become a single parent, it’s worth it to be open with your manager—even if you’re a private person. Sharing your situation will increase your manager’s sympathy and help him or her understand why you’re turning down opportunities or unexpectedly need to work from home due to child-related circumstances.

    It’s possible that sharing your situation with others, from your manager to HR, will reveal options at work that you weren’t aware of, such as a reduced-rate childcare perk offered by the company or the ability to work a flexible schedule (more on that below!).

    Figure Our Your Schedule

    When you’re a single parent, juggling your schedule is a constant challenge. You have the hours when you need to be working and the hours when you need to be parenting—sometimes, these two categories might overlap.

    Consider looking for jobs at companies where working a flexible schedule is an option.

    You can also explore this option at your current workplace, talking to your human resources representative and your manager about the possibilities. A part-time job might be the answer or a day each week when you can work from home.

    Find out more information on flexible schedules, along with tips on how to ask your employer for this schedule.

    Merge Your Work and Home Calendars

    To avoid moments where the much-anticipated dance recital and that essential Q3 meeting fall on the same day and time, combine your personal and work calendars. That way, it’ll be easier to see scheduling conflicts in advance and avoid them.

    Delegate, and Accept Help

    Even as a single parent, you probably can’t handle everything solo. If you have friends and family who are available to help out, accept their offers.

    And at work, try to abandon any go-it-alone attitude. If you have a team, be part of it, and not a solo operator. If you supervise staffers, give them responsibilities. An intern can tackle an expense report, with you reviewing at the end. A staffer can write the first draft of office-wide correspondence and then eventually take on the task completely.

    Delegating responsibilities is ultimately helpful to the people you supervise—by letting people handle additional tasks, you’re letting them know you trust them, and you’re also helping them build skills and add bullet points to their resumes.

    Set Expectations

    Either at your current job, or during your job interview and early days at a new company, strive to set expectations. If you can travel for work, but only if you have three weeks’ advance notice, make that clear.

    If you are eager to lead projects, but need to be able to work from home to get an hour back in transportation time, say so.

    If you’ll need to miss a few hours of work every few months for parent-teacher conferences or school performances, talk to your manager about the best way for you to make up those hours.

    Setting expectations in advance will reduce surprises for both you and your managers and set you up on a path where you can succeed as an employee (and have your needs as a parent accommodated).

    Be a Good Worker

    Even if you land at a company that’s accommodating to your needs as a single parent, you still need to be a good employee. When you’re at work, so long as there isn’t a crisis with your kids, doing your job should be your primary focus. Even the most understanding employer and company still has a bottom line that’s related to the company’s success, and work getting done.

    Think Through Your Boundaries

    Some experts may recommend that you make the boundaries between home and work firm—when you’re at work, focus only on working, and at home, focus solely on your kid. That’s one option, and may work for you.

    But you may also find that it’s helpful to leave work early and answer emails at home while your child does homework.

    When it comes to being a single, working parent, there’s probably no one right strategy, so do your best to find the option that makes sense for you, your kids, and your workplace.

    How to survive being a single mother

    How to survive being a single mother

    In This Article

    Being a single parent is not always a choice. In most cases, it is always fate. It comes with its own share of fun and challenges.

    Difficulties of single parenting can plague an individual , sapping them of their energy, confidence, and happiness.

    What is a single-parent family ? A family consisting of children headed by a single parent.

    Single parent’s problems include having to adapt to a drop in income, a compromised lifestyle, and even a change in house or neighborhood.

    Challenges of single parenting, especially being a single mother, are overwhelming. It requires a single parent to combine the roles of two people with raising the children and running the house.

    The parenting problems surpass the rewards, making it the most challenging situation for any parent. The single parenting challenges differ from both males and females, worsened by the inclusion of children in the mix.

    Death, divorce , and separation rob parents of the joys of companionship and sharing of responsibilities.

    Here are a few single parenting issues and single parent’s struggles, along with some single parenting tips and solutions to single parenting.

    1. Loneliness

    You have to deal with the loss of a partner and the gap they left in your life.

    One of the challenges of single parenthood is that there is no one to offer a shoulder to lean on. There is a part that your partner solely played in your life – Emotional fulfillment.

    The grass isn’t greener on the other side, either. It is also emotionally challenging when your partner has to live with the kids. And you have to come back to an empty house; this drains you emotionally.

    Who will run to you after work?

    The reality of all the memories of the good moments you shared with your spouse and the children dawns on you.

    Replace negative thoughts in your mind with positive thinking to give you room to find yourself for the benefit of the children.

    Redirect your energy to more productive activities. If you are in the custody of the children , then spend time with them. Remember, they look up to you for their emotional needs.

    Similarly, the partner with no children must go the extra mile to socialize and engage in community activities to pass the time rather than wallow in pity.

    How to survive being a single mother

    2. Instilling discipline in children

    Single parenting is full of challenges. A partner with children may find it difficult to instill discipline.

    Because of the emotional stress, some of the children engage in truant activities as a gesture to get the attention of both the parents .

    Being a single mother can leave you wondering how to navigate the unknown avenues of single parenting . One of the problems faced by single mothers is a lack of discipline.

    Such struggles of being a single parent often deplete the parent of all energy to pursue their own interests.

    Children may also give a solo parent an emotionally tough time, especially when they realize that you do not communicate with your partner.

    They give you parallel information for their own selfish interests. You need to brace yourself for these single-parent issues and not let single parent stress crush your spirit.

    Moreover, another downside of single parenting is financial responsibility.

    The extra financial burden may also limit your time with them; children left on their own with no proper guidance may develop defiant behavior, which inhibits disciplinary measures from a single parent.

    Prior to the divorce, set your boundaries and agree on the best way to handle discipline and co-parenting . Regularly communicate to your partner to teach discipline to the children before you fail to instill the right morals.

    Being a single parent due to your spouse’s death can come with additional responsibilities. But don’t let the challenges of being a single parent exhaust you.

    After the death of a spouse, a single parent can engage their extended family to act as an authority figure to counter the absence of the other parent. This is only effective when there is a close tie over time.

    Relationship counselors and psychologists also come in hand y to deal with emotional instability in the children that brew indiscipline as an after-effect of single parenting.

    3. Low self-esteem

    One of the problems faced by single parents in society is bearing the brunt of harsh societal judgment. Sometimes, society judges separated spouses instead of giving them the right support at this time.

    Negative family members and friends give them a hard time coping with the situation, making them have self-doubt and low confidence as single parents.

    One of the solutions to single parenting is not to let single parenting erode your self-confidence . Engage in activities that will help you regain your lost sense of self-worth.

    Surround yourself with people who believe in you and understand your predicament without any judgment. Single parenting can be daunting. Engage in activities that build your confidence and get rid of self-doubt.

    How to survive being a single mother

    4. A sense of guilt

    It is common for single parents to go on a guilt trip after a bitter divorce. Single parenting poses several questions in the mind of an estranged spouse.

    What if I could have been patient with my spouse? How will the children judge me when they grow old? How come I have lost friends after the separation?

    These unanswered questions of single parenting rob your innocence and only add to the difficulties of single parenting.

    Trying to look at your fault and self-blame is not healthy for single parents . Accept the situation and be confident you made the right decision so as to look at the positive angle of the situation to forge ahead.

    5. Financial burden

    In a close family unit, each partner had a financial role in meeting monetary obligations. You may be in agreement on how to manage your finances , but the fact that you have to run two houses with the same finances is an uphill task.

    Overbearing financial responsibilities is the most frustrating challenge for single parents.

    You are now on your own; you have to spend more hours at work to meet all your financial needs.

    If you have children, sit down with them, and agree on how to cut back on some of the luxuries so that you do not strain too much on trying to maintain the lifestyle at the expense of spending time with them-they need your presence at this trying time.

    The faster you accept your situation as a single parent and adjust , the better it is for you and the children. You will heal faster if you allow a new partner in your life.

    Becoming a single parent comes with its trials and triumphs. Single parenting doesn’t need to be a tumultuous experience. With persistent efforts and steely resolve, you can surely turn single parenting into a positive life experience.

    How to survive being a single mother

    “Am I the only single mom feeling lonely out there?” asks Kelly B. Her words underscore a common plight for Circle of Moms members who are single parents. Danielle explains the feelings: “It is not getting any easier,” she says, adding that she has been alone with her daughter since the one-year-old was six months old. “I have two best friends who help by coming to see us, and we get together with my Dad every week. It’s just at night time when Arianna falls asleep I get extremely sad, lonely and emotional. Please help.”

    Loneliness is one of the most common emotions shared by single moms, especially following a divorce, as we struggle to rebuild a social life. It’s hard not to feel isolated when you sense that your coupled friends are busy. You even start blaming yourself for your circumstances. But there’s reason to be hopeful. Here, Circle of Moms members share several ways to help alleviate the feelings of isolation and start building new relationships.

    1. Remember, You are Not Alone

    Understanding that you are not alone helps single moms recover from the feeling that something is wrong with them or that they are not normal, say Circle of Moms members. It’s a first step to rebuilding your confidence and knowing that it’s not just happening to you, says Sol A. She explains: “Raising a kid alone is really hard, but probably the best thing you can do is make yourself better. We single moms should not dwell on sadness or depression at times and the feeling that we are alone in this world. We are not. In fact, we have friends and families. You can study more, or open up a business that you are really interested in. Or take the time to teach your baby and show her the world. . . . take each day as it comes but do not forget to make plans for you and your baby. That’s the most important thing.”

    2. Lean on Your Support Network

    Finding yourself suddenly alone as a single mom is when it is most important to take your friends and family up on offers for support, say Circle of Moms members like Cheryl H. “After a while I kind of got used to being lonely but then I started to make a few friends around my house and it got less lonely,” she shares. “I also called some of my friends, both [some] who are parents and [some] who are not, and [got] together with them a few times a week. Make sure to make time with friends and family when you can, and just go day by day.”

    Candice C. has taken the edge off the loneliness by spending time with family. “I know the feeling,” she says. “It comes and goes for me. Some days are lonelier than others. I also spend a lot of time with my parents, just visiting, because they are close.”

    3. Stay Busy

    When your normal life routine is interrupted by divorce, keeping yourself busy can ease the initial sting of being and feeling alone, Circle of Moms members agree. “The only way I keep my sanity is by never sitting still,” says Sue S. “I go to play groups four days a week, swimming, [the] park, long walks, anything so I don’t have time to sit and think. Then bedtime for the children arrives and if there is nothing good on TV, I clean the house, iron clothes, and do crosswords. Again, anything to stop me thinking. Then, when I know I am that tired that I will fall straight asleep, I go to bed.”

    Mandi C. also finds that staying busy staves off the loneliness. “At night I try and do things that keep my mind off of not having a boyfriend by reading, watching a movie or [doing] chores around the house,” she says.

    4. Focus on the Positive

    While she says it’s easy to get overwhelmed by the loneliness that comes from being a single mom, Candice C. has tried to overcome these feelings by focusing on what is going on that is positive in her life and imagining what lies ahead. And, if all else fails, she heads to the mall to ease the isolation. “I live at the mall just to get out of being in the house alone,” she says about the weekends her children are at their father’s.

    “Having no one to share the joys and sorrows with can be a lonely feeling. But, I try to think of the positive things and that is that I am providing a safe place for my children to fall. I know they will always reach out to me and they rely on [me] as the most special person in their world. In the end, I know I will be stronger for having survived all of this. It doesn’t change the loneliness but it helps [me] cope.”

    5. Put Your Energy into Your Kids

    One strategy to block the pain of loneliness is to focus in on your children’s lives. “[Immerse] yourself in your kids,” says Maranda B. She suggests finding things to do with them, to let them know that they are the most important things in your life, and that this will help the loneliness pass. “When it is just you guys you will realize that. . . they need you and you need them.”

    Rhiannon agrees, with a caveat: “I am recently separated from my husband and really miss being a couple,” she says. “Throw yourself into being a mommy, but don’t forget that you are a woman too, with your own needs. Sunday nights are ‘me’ nights. I do the whole beauty thing – bath, scrub moisturizing, things to make me feel good about myself.”

    6. Reach Out

    Don’t wait for friends – new or old – to come looking for you, recommend several Circle of Moms members. Being a single mom is about being courageous on a number of fronts, explains Terri J.

    Some specific suggestions include joining support groups for single moms, churches, book clubs and other activities you might be interested in. Terri, who has found joining single parent support groups to be a salve for loneliness, shares that, “It helps a lot when you become friends with single parents [who] are going through the same thing you are going through because you know that you are not the only one [who] is having a rough life.”

    Donna P. reaches out to online single parent support groups she finds on Facebook. “I tend to go on Facebook and talk to people and join single parent groups and make new Facebook friends and talk to them,” she shares. “I am looking for a hobby to do at night when my son sleeps, but I just don’t know what to do.”

    7. Allow Yourself to Grow

    Dealing with loneliness, and overcoming it can be a life-changing event that shows your children you have a lot of courage. To start, you have to learn how to take care of yourself and manage feelings that would otherwise drag you down, says Michelle F:

    “My son is 17 months and I’ve been (basically) single since he was born,” she says. “It is super lonely, especially if you don’t have friends. I moved to this tiny town after my ex and I separated because I had to live with my mom since I had no job/money/support. We rarely do stuff, it’s super hard to fit in a small town, my son freaks out with babysitters and I’ve no spare time after work and school. But I have learned to take it one day at a time. That’s how I do it. You can’t ignore your sadness but you can’t let it drag you down too often. Every so often let your self have a good cry, but then brush it off and push on. Remember, nothing lasts forever. I have realized that this time alone has changed me: I am stronger and more self-sufficient than I ever was before. I know I can do most anything on my own (whether or not I wanted to). Maybe look at this time as a chance to really get to know yourself without the influence of a partner.”

    How do you help fight off the loneliness?

    The views expressed in this article are those of the author and do not necessarily represent the views of, and should not be attributed to, POPSUGAR.

    Mothers are arguably some of the best multi-taskers in the world today. The sheer amount of responsibilities they need to juggle makes them a combination of nurturer, caregiver, teacher, nurse, cheerleader, disciplinarian and more. I would know—I’m a mother, myself. If there is something even more challenging than being a mother, though, it is being a single mother with no parents to help you out.

    My situation is a little different from other single mothers, however. Aside from the aforementioned roles, I also took on the additional roles of full-time student and part-time worker. Thankfully, I’ve learned enough from the University of Hard Knocks with respect to balancing school and family life. Most of my time is devoted to caring for my children. My studies take second place, with work coming in third and the remaining fraction of my time left for the rest.

    Unfortunately, juggling all of the things I’ve mentioned above does not necessarily translate into calmness and ease all the time. In fact, it often leads to role strain. There are times when I actually wish I had help in the form of a helpmate—someone who could look after the kids while I sought that much-needed break. My children are precious to me, yet there are admittedly days when they seem semi-precious. This most often happens when their needs prevent me from keeping up with my homework. Sometimes, my assignments have to take a backseat to more pressing needs like feeding them, cleaning them or helping them with their own assignments. My social life is almost non-existent as a result of this (Szakaly, “Role Strain in Caregiving”).

    The good news is that my part-time job doesn’t really feel like work. In fact, it feels more like an interesting diversion—a chance to go out and meet new people and help someone out. The benefits work both ways: the people I reach out get their needs met and I get the chance to forget my own problems for a while (Howe, “Meeting the Challenge of Being a Single Mom”). It is also a great opportunity for me to connect with someone other than my kids and it helps me grow in a fun way.

    Then there are the rough days when the frustration sets in. During these dark times, I continuously remind myself of my reason for doing this precarious balancing act: to provide a better life for my kids. When they are sleeping, I take the time to ground myself, to pray and to ask God for the strength to do what is right (Szakaly, “Role Strain in Caregiving”).
    At first glance, it would seem as if I am the sum of these statuses and nothing more. Most people look at me and see a struggling mother, a part-time worker and a student, and rightly so, for these things are part of my current life. However, I am working hard to be more than just them. I know that God put me on Earth for a reason. Part of my life’s meaning comes from discovering that reason and living it out to the best of my ability. One day, I will not only live out my potential—I will transcend it as well.

    In closing, I see my status as a single mother as a supreme challenge. It tests my conviction and my courage on a daily basis to the point where I question and doubt myself. Nevertheless, all it takes is a prayer and one look at my sleeping children to get me back on track. As God has showed me time and time again, it is in dying to myself daily and in trusting Him completely that I discover the person that I really am and the life that I am truly meant to live.

    Reader Starting Over writes,

    My husband cheated on me while we were engaged (with a married woman at his work), then he cheated again while I was pregnant with my son last year. I’m still living under the same roof as him mainly because I don’t have a place to go. He is a good dad but I’m not sure how to start a new life for myself. Can you help?

    How to survive being a single mother

    Good for you for deciding to get out of this relationship. While cheating doesn’t necessarily mean a marriage has to be over, cheating multiple times (and starting even before marriage) usually does. There are many things you’ll need to do in order to start your new life, including getting your finances in order, finding a place to live, and working with a mediator or lawyer to make sure that your children receive adequate emotional and financial support from each parent. Also, you’re going to need to create an identity for yourself as a single mom, which is the part that I’ll discuss here.

    It is pretty challenging to start anew as a single parent, and I highly recommend the following:

    • Make friends
    • Lean on existing friends/family
    • Prioritize your health
    • Stop doing extra stuff that doesn’t matter and only serves to stress you out.

    It is essential that you find some others single moms to hang out with. Although you can certainly make friends with partnered moms too, it is easiest to confide in another single mom who may understand you more easily. is a great source of groups, and you may find lots of single parent groups online too. You are going to need people to have fun with, and to trade babysitting with, and to complain about your kids with.

    Don’t forget that you likely already have at least a few people who can support you already. People will vary in how much time and what resources they have, like your sister may be able to babysit but your best friend may be great for calling or texting every day. You want to spend time with people who knew you before your marriage, who know you for a long time, and who know that you will get through this and come out on the other side.

    You need to focus on your physical and emotional health, so you can stay strong for your kids, and for yourself. A therapist can be very useful during divorce, and I see many clients for the first time during their separations or divorces. If you can exercise a few times a week, this can help keep your mood and self-esteem up. And it is more important to get enough sleep than just about anything.

    And, since you need to focus on the big picture now, you need to not sweat the small stuff. Moms try so hard to be perfect, but they really just have to be what psychologists call “good enough.” This means that you may stop making crafts or keeping a spotless house or baking, or conversely, if you enjoy those things, do them more. You are going to be in survival mode for a while, until you get into the routine of your new life on your own, so you need to streamline, as I advised this woman in a very different situation that still has many similarities. You can also read the book The Divorce Recovery Workbook, which can be helpful for working through pain and building a new life.

    Good luck to you, and keep me updated. Till we meet again, I remain, The Blogapist Who Says, Also Find Some Support Groups For Divorcing People In Your Area.

    This blog is not intended as medical advice or diagnosis and should in no way replace consultation with a medical professional. If you try this advice and it does not work for you, you cannot sue me. This is only my opinion, based on my background, training, and experience as a therapist and person.

    By Sarah Kowalski — Written on Jan 23, 2018

    How to survive being a single mother

    Pregnancy is an exciting time to celebrate a new life growing within. But it can also produce a lot of anxiety.

    It’s daunting to manage the normal physical discomforts of pregnancy, get proper nutrition, attend prenatal checkups, communicate with the insurance company, choose a birth plan and care provider, and prepare for the arrival of a newborn. Even with a partner to help share the tasks, the list of things to attend to is vast and overwhelming.

    But many women do not have a partner to help them through pregnancy. Many women find themselves blindsided by being single and pregnant because of a recent divorce or separation, widowhood, or other unplanned circumstance.

    For others who consciously decided to have a baby on their own — usually because of waning fertility in the face of no partner — it can be a relief to be pregnant after putting so much effort and money into trying to conceive. But that doesn’t make solo pregnancy any easier.

    No matter what your circumstances, solo pregnancy and the prospect of single motherhood can be worrisome.

    Imagine you suffer from morning sickness or get put on bed rest — how do you get groceries, prepare food, take out the trash and complete other day-to-day chores? Add another child to the mix and many women find themselves completely overwhelmed.

    I’m a planner and usually very prepared. When I was pregnant alone, I had a long list of friends I could call upon. But I learned quickly that there is no way you can plan for every contingency.

    Completely unforeseen emergencies arose that I could not have anticipated, which required me to be flexible, resourceful and downright courageous. For example, when I was six months pregnant, I found myself lifting my very sick 70-pound dog down a flight of stairs and into the car to rush her to the hospital.

    And, when at 37 weeks pregnant, I suddenly experienced symptoms of high blood pressure and needed to be admitted to the hospital immediately for fear of pre-eclampsia. I drove myself to the hospital in the early dawn when none of the people I had lined up to accompany me at my birth were awake or could arrive to my house in time to drive me there.

    What should you do if you find yourself expecting a baby alone?

    Follow these 6 steps to survive a solo pregnancy:

    1. Get support.

    The most important thing for a single mom is the ability to ask for support. You will not be able to do this alone — so drop your hang-ups about asking and receiving help NOW.

    Figure out as many aspects of support as you can ahead of time. Do you need to move in with family, allow others to stay with you, cook food for you or set up a Mealtrain for you after you give birth or if you get put onto bed rest? (I recommend MealTrainPlus or other services that will allow you to schedule rides, pet or garden care, as well as meals.)

    Ask friends to come to doctor’s appointments with you. Figure out who can be present at your birth, with you when you first go into labor at home and drive you to and from the hospital. (P.S. I’ve created a planning sheet you can download to help you brainstorm and plan as much help as possible).

    2. Get acquainted with service providers.

    It’s also important to gather a list of service providers you can call on to get the help you need. When I was pregnant alone, my parents were far away and too old to provide any help with much of what I needed. I got familiar with the various ways I could hire trustworthy people to help me using Nextdoor to ask neighbors for recommendations or other services like TaskRabbit or Thumbtack. I discovered all the ways I could order groceries and food easily. I knew who I could call to help me put together a crib, and install shelves.

    3. Hire a doula.

    Although I had an elaborate birth plan and a team of friends to help, I hired a birth doula to be present at my birth so that I was not dependent on favors from friends. I knew I was going to need help from my friends for years to come, and I did not want to tax them unnecessarily during what ended up being a very long and protracted process. Unlike a partner, who would likely have the dedication and stamina to be by my side for all of labor, birth and delivery, my friends had commitments of their own they needed to attend to. Having a doula present at all times relieved the pressure on my friends and provided me a much needed continuity of support. My friends were able to be there for key moments but didn’t feel the pressure of needing to stay continuously for hours and hours.

    4. Find support networks.

    I also tapped into the network of fellow solo moms by choice in my area to get info about resources and support while I was pregnant.

    Since my son’s birth, I have befriended other moms in my son’s preschool who are willing to lend me a hand. Early on I joined a co-working space for mom’s that provided cheap childcare and a cadre of women trying to work with little ones around. I also found that my local YMCA provided affordable childcare and amazing community.

    In old age, lifelong singles who chose single life have no regrets

    Posted January 26, 2015

    When people who have been single all their lives get to their later years, some are leading happy lives with no big regrets and others are much less contented with how their lives have unfolded. What predicts who will end up joyful about their lives lived single, even in old age, and who ends up regretful?

    The two main approaches to answering such questions are (1) studies based on large numbers of participants, sometimes representative national samples, who answer brief survey questions; and (2) studies based on small numbers of people (not representative samples), who are usually interviewed in person and in depth.

    A recently published study is based on the latter approach. Irish men and women who had been single for life were interviewed in 2012, when they were between 65 and 86 years old. The 26 participants included singles who were middle class and working class, urban and rural. None had ever cohabited.

    For the cohort in question, to be a young and single in Ireland had been challenging. As authors Virpi Timonen and Martha Doyle noted, “As young adults in the late 1950s, 1960s and in the 1970s, all participants had been socialized in a patriarchal society in which divorce and contraception were prohibited, and non-marital co-habitation and sexual relations were taboo.”

    In wide-ranging interviews, the many topics participants discussed included their backgrounds, work life, social life, family life, and their thoughts about living single from early adulthood up to the present. One factor was clearly the most significant in predicting whether they were, as 65+ year-olds, happy with their lifelong singlehood: whether they had chosen to be single.

    Lifelong singles who did not choose to stay single (“single by constraint”)

    Two main structural constraints stood in the way of marriage for singles who did not choose to stay single for life. First, some had cared extensively and intensively for other family members who needed a great deal of help. Sometimes they cared for one needy person after another, and never did have a chance to pursue their own social lives. The second constraint came from demanding employment, usually working-class jobs with long hours.

    When those who were single-by-constraint did pursue romantic relationships, they did not find satisfactory partners. The authors noted that Irish husbands and wives were often expected to adhere to strict gender roles, and single women who were resistant to such roles may have had an especially difficult time finding an egalitarian mate.

    Reflecting on their current lives as seniors, those who were single by constraint (14 of the 26 participants) were likely to express regrets about their single status. Some were currently seeking romantic relationships. For working-class men, the economic barriers were not as formidable as they had been in their early adult years. As seniors, they had a state pension and subsidized housing.

    Working-class women felt differently. Their regrets were more about not having daughters to care for them. They were not looking to marry.

    Lifelong single people who chose to live single (“single by choice”)

    The single men and women who chose to be single said that they wanted to be single as young adults and they still wanted to be single now. The authors described them as “freedom-focused.” They wanted to make their own choices about how to live, what they would and would not spend money on, how often to socialize, and with whom. They valued autonomy and often viewed married life as constraining.

    Single people in Ireland who chose to be single often had the same experiences as the constrained singles in providing extensive care to relatives who needed help. But they did not view that caring as constraining. They said they chose to reciprocate the love and attention they received themselves as children.

    The people who were single by choice told the interviewers that they enjoyed their own company, and appreciated the opportunity to pursue interests such as writing.

    As one of the single-by-choice women said:

    “I’m very glad I never married, yes, because I think I’ve had a chance to do much more….[Her married sister has the companionship of her husband, but…] you can’t have too much bloody companionship, I’d like more peace on my own…my money I can fiddle around and nobody telling me I can’t buy new curtains…so the independence…is priceless, in fact I can’t see any advantage to being married.”

    In the conclusion of their paper, the authors begin by underscoring a point that they seem to realize is not obvious to many of their fellow academic colleagues, even though it should be:

    “It is important to highlight the fact that singlehood was a conscious choice for many older people in their youth, and continues to be their unequivocal preference in later life.”

    Reference: Timonen, V., & Doyle, M. (2014). Life-long singlehood: intersections of the past and the present. Ageing & Society, 34, 1749-1770.

    [Note. Sorry to have taken a bit longer between posts than usual. As you may have noticed, the PT site has been redesigned, and I have been holding out for that to be (nearly) finished. During the process, I have not been notified when comments were posted, and that is still continuing, but I can still access them – I just need to remember to go to look for them. Anyway, I’m sorry for any inconvenience to readers.]

    [Photo is from Google images, available for reuse]

    Celebrate her strength and let her know how proud you are with these messages.

    How to survive being a single mother

    How to survive being a single mother

    Let’s pay tribute to the hard-working women of the world who do the heavy lifting of raising kids with strength and courage on their own. Whether by choice or happenstance, these women are a village all unto themselves, and these quotes about single moms and sayings about single motherhood capture all the hard work and emotions of the experience. As best-selling author Barbara Kingsolver said, “Sometimes the strength of motherhood is greater than natural laws.”

    These inspiring words from writers, musicians, activists, politicians, and more will remind solo moms that they aren’t alone—and that they are, by definition, more or less superhuman. Whether you need a Mother’s Day quote or otherwise motivational motherhood quote for a sweet card or simply are hoping to inspire yourself (in which case, we’d say to look to Diane Keaton: “The loves of my life are my children and my mother. I don’t feel as if I need a man”), there’s something here for everyone. We’ve even got a few mother-daughter quotes and mother-son quotes. The most important thing to remind yourself or your mother is that she may be single, but she’s not alone. After all, as Kate Winslet put it, “You always have to carry on. And you can, because you have to.”

    How to survive being a single mother

    How to survive being a single mother

    By Laura Lifshitz | May 27th, 2019

    Being a working single parent is tough.

    Trying to find a job as a single parent is tougher—especially if you’re an unemployed single parent.

    Been there. Done that. Got the t-shirt, wrinkles, and stress-inducing memories to boot.

    Even if you’re working already, hunting for a new role and going through the interview process is nerve-wracking.

    As a writer, interviewers could look up my work and know I was a single parent. If the company doesn’t know that you’re a parent and in particular, a single parent, I would recommend to not share that information unless someone asks you if you have children. Legally, they shouldn’t at all—and you don’t have to answer. It’s up to you.

    While I’d like to tell all of you that your single parent status won’t come up during interviews thanks to proper HR protocol, that’s not the case. I’ve had many interviews where hiring managers, potential coworkers and other staff have asked me either pointed questions or direct questions. In some cases, I had great responses prepared because I had been “down that road” before but in other cases, I either balked or got frustrated.

    So, if this is you single parent about to go out into the world on an interview, take my advice and learn from my successes and failures, so you can find the job you need and want.

    Here are a few questions that may be thrown your way, along with my advice on how to deal with these curveballs.

    1. With your lifestyle, will you be able to get to the office each day?

    I’ve had many people ask me this during an interview. Incredibly inappropriate, yes, but it happened.

    What the person means is “Since you’re a single parent, are you reliable?”

    Even if you haven’t figured out how your childcare situation, don’t tell the person this and don’t reveal that it could be hard in any way.

    The proper response to this is either, “Absolutely, I can be in the office each day” or “There is nothing stopping me from being a successful and available employee onsite each day.”

    If the person pushes (which he or she shouldn’t) to ask about childcare, don’t reveal any potential issues you might have. Just say either “Yes, I have childcare” or “Yes, there is nothing that will prevent me from coming into the office.”

    If perhaps your child getting sick may bring up an issue, you can say:

    “I will be in the office each day. If my child is sick, I may need to tend to him or her while working from home (if this is an option). If he’s/she’s sick an extended period, I will have help.”

    Typically, you will know if your role has telecommuting options or not as most jobs are open about their point of view either way. If you aren’t sure, you can ask your recruiter (if you’re using one) or if you know someone employed by the same company, just ask.

    2. That’s a long commute—can you make it in with your child?

    I will never forget the rather nasty hiring manager who told me, “You live really far from here. How would you even get here with your kid?”

    It was so off-putting and her tone was even worse if you could believe it.

    How do you even manage to handle that direct question? Like this:

    1. Say, “I’ve commuted this distance before and it’s not a problem.”
    2. Try, “I have childcare arrangements and am expecting to commute this distance with any role I decide to take.”
    3. State, “I’m an experienced professional and certainly won’t have any issues getting to work.”

    3. This job requires travel—will your family life get in the way of meeting the expectations of this role?

    I got this doozy thrown at me when I wasn’t expecting it. I didn’t realize travel would be even involved in the position, but it looked like the role was asking me to travel 4-5 times a year. I had no idea how I would do it, but I winged it.

    • Don’t say: I really don’t know. I’ll have to figure it out and get back to you.
    • Do say: No. I will have childcare arrangements during my travel times.
    • Don’t say: Is travel really necessary for this role?
    • Do say: I look forward to traveling with the company and meet all expectations of the role, regardless of my home roles.

    If you’re feeling particularly anxious and know that travel will be a real hardship, you can ask: Will travel dates be made ahead of time if possible? Either way—I will be available for any travel requests.

    4. Are you able to work late, or will childcare prevent you from fulfilling your job role?

    I can’t even tell you how many times I was asked this. There is only one good answer to that question:

    “Yes, I will be able to work late.”

    Period. End of sentence. If you think the hours are going to be grueling, you can ask what the daily schedule is like and if it’s too hard, you can pass on the job. Only you know if it’s realistic for you to work a certain schedule or travel based on your childcare situation, income and career goals.

    No matter what, remember: you don’t have to answer direct questions about your family life in an interview. It’s not right for people to ask but most likely, they will ask and it’s better for you to be prepared ahead of time how to handle this, rather than balking and wracking your mind for an answer during the interview.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Do you refrigerate apple cider vinegar, or store it in your cupboard? Wondering if the bottle in your hand is still good? As it turns out, apple cider vinegar can last forever and doesn’t need to be refrigerated.

    Video of the Day

    Apple cider vinegar should be stored in a cool place, away from heat and sunlight. If stored properly, it can last many years.

    Apple Cider Vinegar Expiry Date

    This popular food ingredient has been used for its flavor and healing power since ancient times. It’s made from fermented apple cider and boasts a mild taste that complements salads, meat dishes, barbecue, sauces and dressings. You can even add a few drops to lemon water, smoothies or fruit juices to prevent blood sugar spikes.

    But how long does apple cider vinegar (ACV) last? Does it ever go bad or can it last forever? Unlike most foods, this product can be used past its expiration date. In fact, it might even become safer over time because of the fermentation process, which kills harmful bacteria, said Donald W. Schaffner, Ph. D. in a July 2018 interview for Good Housekeeping.

    According to the Vinegar Institute, ACV and vinegar products are self-preserving and can last forever. Lactic acid bacteria (LAB) produce a type of fiber known as the “mother” when converting apple cider into cider vinegar. This natural substance is harmless and indicates that the best part of the apple has remained intact, as Bragg points out.

    Apple cider vinegar with the “mother” may have a strange appearance, but that doesn’t mean it has gone bad. You may notice golden brown, string-like fibers, tiny particles or cloudy sediments at the bottom of the bottle. Most manufacturers eliminate the “mother” during processing. The downside is that vinegar products lacking this substance also tend to be lower in enzymes and minerals, according to Bragg.

    How to Store Vinegar

    Most types of vinegar may experience changes in color and texture as time goes by. However, this doesn’t affect their nutritional value and shelf life. You can even shake the bottle to disperse “the mother.” This substance is nutritious and may benefit your overall health. Although the Food and Drug Administration requires that manufacturers put an expiration date on the label, ACV can be safely used past this date.

    There’s a catch, though. You need it to store it properly, away from direct sunlight, advises Bragg. However, it’s not necessary to refrigerate apple cider vinegar. Due to its high acidity, it’s unlikely to become contaminated with fungi, bacteria and other pathogens.

    Fermented beverages, including ACV, are safer than unfermented products, as reported in a July 2017 review published in the journal Microorganisms. Their safety is due to the lactic acid bacteria responsible for fermentation.

    Apple cider vinegar, for instance, is rich in bacteria from the Acetobacter, Gluconobacter and Komagataeibacter species, reports Microorganisms. Although apple juice may be contaminated with Salmonella, E.Coli and other pathogens, LAB suppress their growth and metabolism.

    In general, it’s recommended to store apple cider vinegar in a cool place, away from heat and sunlight. Seal the bottle cap tightly after each use. You may keep it in the refrigerator if desired, but it’s not necessary.

    How to Cook With ACV

    Apple cider vinegar isn’t just for salads. It goes well with most dishes, from pickled eggs and coleslaw to marinades. The Academy of Culinary Nutrition recommends using ACV for pickling vegetables. Braised meat and vegetables will taste a lot better if you add two tablespoons of vinegar to the pan during cooking. Poached eggs will firm up in less time if you add a few drops of ACV to the hot water.

    Culinary scientist Jessica Gavin recommends adding apple cider vinegar to baked beans, BBQ sauce, meatloaf, pulled chicken sandwiches and baked chicken. Taste of Home reports that that ACV helps tenderize beef, pork and other tough meats. On top of that, it can replace white vinegar in meat recipes.

    If you’re trying to cut calories, use apple cider vinegar in salad dressings, sauces and gravies. For example, mix it with extra virgin olive oil, salt, pepper and chili for a delicious, healthy dressing. One tablespoon of ACV has only 3 calories and 0.1 grams of carbs, so it’s ideal for low-fat and low-carb diets. It’s also rich in citrate and acetate, two compounds that may help prevent kidney stones.

    In this Article

    • What Is Apple Cider Vinegar?
    • How Long Is the Shelf Life of Apple Cider Vinegar?

    Apple cider vinegar is a versatile food ingredient and it has health benefits, too. But a little bit goes a long way. So you could end up with a partly-used bottle sitting in your pantry for a long while. Once you buy apple cider vinegar, how long is it good for?

    What Is Apple Cider Vinegar?

    You make apple cider vinegar from crushed, fermented apples. The fermentation process has two steps. First, the apples are crushed and yeast is added to speed up the fermentation process, so the sugar converts into alcohol. Then the alcohol is processed and becomes vinegar.

    Apple cider vinegar differs from other kinds of vinegar because it contains acetic acid, which contributes to its slightly sweet, tangy taste.

    If the label says “raw” or “unprocessed,” this means the vinegar isn’t filtered or heat-treated. In this type of vinegar, you may see a murky, stringy substance floating at the bottom. That doesn’t mean itr has gone bad. This is called “mother” and it’s just a byproduct of fermentation. It contains “good” bacteria and healthy enzymes.

    How Long Is the Shelf Life of Apple Cider Vinegar?

    The shelf life of apple cider vinegar is two years unopened, and one year once you’ve broken the seal on the bottle. You don’t have to refrigerate apple cider vinegar once it’s opened. Instead, store it in a pantry or cabinet, away from direct sunlight.

    Apple cider vinegar is highly acidic. Because of this, it’s unlikely to be contaminated with pathogens. But store it properly to extend the shelf life.

    What about products made with apple cider vinegar? Things like salad dressing or marinade may have a shorter shelf life. That’s because they’re likely to contain ingredients that don’t stay fresh without refrigeration.

    Apple cider vinegar that remains unpasteurized carries a risk of bacteria like E. coli or salmonella. Before you use apple cider vinegar, check that it’s pasteurized properly. Most store-bought apple cider vinegar is pasteurized, but check the label to make sure.

    Show Sources

    Harvard Medical School: “Apple cider vinegar diet: Does it really work?”


    University of Illinois Urbana-Champaign: “Are there health benefits to apple cider vinegar?”

    Do you love the tart taste of apple cider vinegar?

    This special type of vinegar is known for boasting a wide range of health benefits. It can be used as a salad dressing and in a wide range of sweet and savory dishes.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    However, apple cider vinegar usually comes in a very large bottle. A little of this special vinegar goes a long way, and you are unlikely to use it all in one sitting, unless you are experimenting with your pickling ingredients.

    So, does apple cider vinegar go bad?

    Or will it be safe to use virtually forever?

    How to Store Apple Cider Vinegar?

    Apart from the fact that it is made from apples, apple cider vinegar boasts the same properties as regular vinegar. You should store apple cider vinegar in a cool and dark place away from direct sunlight. The pantry is the perfect place to keep an unopened bottle of apple cider vinegar.

    Once you have opened the bottle, it may be more convenient to keep it in your kitchen cabinet. Make sure that the bottle is tightly sealed when it is not in use.

    Can You Freeze Apple Cider Vinegar?

    Technically, it is possible to freeze this type of vinegar, just like any other liquid. However, there is no need to freeze it. Your apple cider vinegar will remain ready to use for a long time without being frozen.

    How Long Does Apple Cider Vinegar Last?

    If it is stored in a cool, dark place, apple cider vinegar can last almost forever. This is because apple cider vinegar is very acidic. Like honey and whiskey, fungi and bacteria cannot live and grow in this environment.

    Still, you are likely to find that your bottle of apple cider vinegar boasts a best before date on the label. This is added due to consumer expectations rather than because the product will actually expire. Most manufacturers clearly state that apple cider vinegar is safe to use many years after the expiration date has passed.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    But be Careful

    Still, exposure to direct sunlight and high temperatures can cause the vinegar to deteriorate slightly. As long as you keep the bottle in a cool, dark location, it should always be ready to use.

    How to Tell If Apple Cider Vinegar is Bad?

    If you have chosen raw and organic apple cider vinegar, it may have been bottled with the mother. This is a dark and cloudy substance that tends to lurk close to the bottom of the bottle. The mother naturally occurs in apple cider vinegar due to the production of vinegar bacteria.

    If you notice the mother in your apple cider vinegar, there is no need to throw it away. The mother is made of cellulose and is completely harmless. In fact, the mother is the most nutritious part of the apple cider vinegar, and many people like to eat it.

    What About Filtered Apple Cider Vinegar?

    Even if you have chosen filtered apple cider vinegar, the mother can grow over time. However, you can easily remove the mother by running the vinegar through a coffee filter.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Vinegar Spoilage

    Although very rare, apple cider vinegar spoilage can occur in certain circumstances. You may notice that there is sediment at the bottom of the bottle that is not the mother. In certain circumstances, the color of the apple cider vinegar may have changed.

    Before using apple cider vinegar that has been sitting around for a while, it is best to inspect it closely. Give the vinegar a smell and perhaps taste a few drops just to be on the safe side. While bad-smelling or tasting vinegar is unlikely to make you sick, it will ruin anything you add it to.

    Cloudy Apple Cider Vinegar

    As vinegar ages, it may become cloudy or start to separate. This is mainly caused by exposure to oxygen, which happens when you remove the lid. This will happen much more quickly if you accidentally leave the lid off the bottle for a while.

    If your apple cider vinegar has started to spoil, it is likely to have a rather strong and unpleasant smell. You are unlikely to want to add this vinegar to your salad dressing or baked goods. Still, you could dilute it, mix it with a few drops of essential oils, and use it to clean your home.

    Which Apple Cider Vinegar is The Best?

    To find out, check out my reviews of the Best Apple Cider Vinegars you can buy. You may also be interested in my reviews of the Best Balsamic Vinegars on the market in 2022.

    Final Thoughts

    One of the great things about apple cider vinegar is that it can be used in a wide range of different ways. It is often used in cooking and baking as well as to make marinades, salad dressings, and even beverages. The acid in apple cider vinegar also makes it a powerful and natural cleaning product.

    If you have a large batch of apples close to hand, you can also make your own apple cider vinegar. Simply chop the apples, cover them with water, and leave them to ferment until they form ethanol. The natural bacteria in the apples will convert the ethanol to acetic acid, which is the main element in vinegar.

    Apple cider vinaigrette is light, tangy, and extremely versatile – it’s delicious on virtually any salad. Simply whisk together a few ingredients and drizzle it over a bed of greens.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    What Is Apple Cider Vinegar?

    You’ve probably seen apple cider vinegar being used in cooking or for home remedies. But what is it made of exactly? It’s an acidic liquid that’s produced from fermented apple cider. Lucky for us, fermentation produces a healthy dose of good bacteria and probiotics. On the other hand, it gives a fruity and zesty flavor that makes it great for soups, sauces, and various beverages.

    How To Make Apple Cider Vinegar Dressing

    This vinaigrette couldn’t be any easier to make! Just mix together these few ingredients and you’ll have this dressing made in minutes. Here’s what you need:

    • Olive oil – I like to use extra virgin olive oil for that crisp, clean flavor.
    • Apple Cider Vinegar – Use organic apple cider vinegar with the “Mother.” This is sold in most supermarkets, but you can also buy it on Amazon.
    • Honey – Any type of honey will work, just make sure it’s in liquid form so that it mixes well with the rest of the ingredients.
    • Dijon Mustard – Dijon mustard (rather than yellow mustard) has a bolder, more distinctive flavor profile.
    • Garlic – One minced garlic clove is all you need.
    • Salt & Pepper – Sprinkle a little of each to taste.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    How To Store Apple Cider Vinaigrette

    This apple cider vinaigrette can last up to 7 days if stored properly in the fridge. Just make sure to seal it in an airtight jar. And when you want to use it, give it a shake to blend the ingredients if they’ve separated.

    More Homemade Salad Dressings

    Need more ideas on how to give your salad a boost in flavor? Take a look at my other dressings.

    Did you also know that it is incredibly easy to make homemade apple cider vinegar your own at home? You can use whole bruised apples that no one wants to eat or cores and peels left from canning apples or whipping up apples to make these Apple Pie Wontons.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    If you already have a bottle of raw Apple Cider Vinegar in your pantry, undoubtedly, you know some of the amazing uses and benefits it is -great for a sore throat, makes a wonderful natural hair conditioner, a tasty salad dressing base, an effective flea shampoo ingredient, and countless other things.

    While there is nothing at all wrong with a good quality store bought apple cider vinegar that is raw, unfiltered, and unrefined this one is free and remarkably tastes 10x better than the bottle that comes with a label from your local grocery store. It’s a good idea to always have 1 jar in the process of fermenting so that you always have some on hand.

    What do you need to make homemade Apple Cider Vinegar

    How to make your own Homemade Apple Cider Vinegar

    Use the peels, cores, and apple scraps left over after making apple pie filling to help fill your jar.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    If you are starting from whole apples wash them well, cut into ⅛’s.

    Stuff clean quart jar with apple quarters or peels and cores.

    Pour distilled water over the top to completely cover your peels.

    Add sugar and give it a gentle stir.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Place a piece of cheesecloth over the top of jar opening, put ring in place.

    Put your jar in a cool dark place like a cupboard and ignore it for 2 weeks.

    When do you strain homemade apple cider vinegar

    After about 2 weeks, strain out the large pieces, recover with cheesecloth and put back in cupboard.

    Stir the mixture every day for 4 weeks (if you miss a day or two it’s not going to ruin it). Your apple cider vinegar is ready when it has a strong smell and tangy flavor.

    Things are floating in my apple cider vinegar

    You will notice some brown sediment and perhaps a jelly-like blob on top, this is the mother and is perfectly normal. It makes for excellent quality apple cider vinegar.

    Do you refrigerate apple cider vinegar

    No, apple cider vinegar does not need to be in the refrigerator. Store homemade apple cider vinegar in a cool dark place, like a cabinet.

    While you can use your homemade apple cider vinegar for many things I would avoid using it for canning, as canning requires an acidity of 5% and you just can’t tell with homemade.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Video on how to make apple cider vinegar with mother

    Does apple cider vinegar go bad? That’s the question many people come up with while cleaning the pantry. And fortunately for you, your vinegar is probably perfectly fine to use.

    It’s scientifically proven that as time goes by, the number of vinegar bottles in your pantry increases.

    It starts with a single bottle, then you buy another one for different purposes, and you end up with 5 bottles, 3 of them half-open.

    If that’s you and you’d like to learn more about storage, shelf life, and going bad of apple cider vinegar, read on.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    How to Store Apple Cider Vinegar

    Storing apple cider vinegar is no different than storing balsamic vinegar, or any other vinegar for that matter.

    You should keep it in a cool and dark place, away from sunlight and sources of heat. Bragg Live Foods recommends exactly that for their apple cider vinegar.

    Most people store it in the pantry, but a cabinet in the kitchen works too, especially if you use it often.

    Once you open the bottle, make sure it’s always sealed tightly when not in use.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Apple cider vinegar and apples in the background

    How Long Does Apple Cider Vinegar Last

    Vinegar is one of the few condiments that stays safe to consume indefinitely. Similar to sweeteners like honey, or hard liquors like whiskey, vinegar isn’t a liquid where bacteria or fungi can live and grow.

    Vinegar is acidic. PH (Hydrogen Ion Concentration) of undiluted cider vinegar is between 4.25 to 5.0. This PH inhibits bacterial or microbial growth.

    The presence of malic acid and acetic acid also makes vinegar a powerful disinfectant with antibacterial qualities.

    Because of that, apple cider vinegar can last for years without deteriorating.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Expiration date on apple cider vinegar

    Of course, in many cases, the manufacturer puts the good old best-by date on the label. Often, it’s there because people trust the food more if it comes with a date.

    That date merely informs how long the apple cider vinegar should retain the best quality. And because of the reasons outlined earlier, the liquid should easily keep for years past that date.

    Once you open the bottle, not much really changes in terms of the shelf life of this condiment.

    Apple cider vinegar (unopened or opened) Stays fine indefinitely

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Bottle of apple cider vinegar

    How to Tell if Apple Cider Vinegar Is Bad

    Let’s start with something called vinegar mother.

    It’s a dark and cloudy (some prefer to call it slimy) substance (or sediment) that is usually found near the bottom of the bottle.

    The mother is a result of vinegar bacteria and occurs in vinegar naturally. It’s actually cellulose and it’s harmless, plus it’s the most nutritious part of the vinegar.

    If the label of your apple cider vinegar says it’s pasteurized or filtered, the liquid won’t contain the mother. If it says “raw,” the mother should be there.

    Once you open the bottle, even if it’s the filtered variety, the mother can form over time. To get rid of it, you can run the vinegar through a coffee filter.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Apple cider vinegar bottom: no sediment or vinegar mother yet

    Now to the going bad of apple cider vinegar.

    Vinegar spoilage is something that almost never happens. But, if you noticed that it changed color, there’s some sediment in the bottle (that’s not the mother), or it smells off, get rid of it. Same thing if its taste has changed.

    Generally, if you think something is wrong with the liquid, it’s better to cut your losses and throw it out. Again, it’s a sporadic occurrence that vinegar spoils.

    In this Article

    • What Is Apple Cider Vinegar?
    • Apple Cider Vinegar Uses and Dosage
    • Apple Cider Vinegar Benefits
    • Apple Cider Vinegar Risks and Side Effects

    What Is Apple Cider Vinegar?

    Apple cider vinegar is mostly apple juice, but adding yeast turns the sugar in the juice into alcohol. This is a process called fermentation. Bacteria turn the alcohol into acetic acid. That’s what gives vinegar its sour taste and strong smell.

    Apple cider vinegar has a long history as a home remedy, used to treat things like sore throat and varicose veins. There isn’t much science to support the claims. But in recent years, some researchers have been taking a closer look at apple cider vinegar and its possible benefits.

    Some people say the “mother,” the cloud of yeast and bacteria you might see in a bottle of apple cider vinegar, is what makes it healthy. These things are probiotic, meaning they might give your digestive system a boost, but there isn’t enough research to back up the other claims.

    Apple Cider Vinegar Uses and Dosage

    Vinegar is used in cooking, baking, and salad dressings and as a preservative. There’s a lot of acid in it, so drinking vinegar straight isn’t recommended. It can cause problems, like eroding the enamel of your teeth, if you get too much.

    If you’re looking to use it for health reasons, most people say to add 1 to 2 tablespoons to water or tea.

    Apple Cider Vinegar Benefits

    Vinegar has been used as a remedy for centuries. The ancient Greeks treated wounds with it. In recent years, people have explored apple cider vinegar as a way to lose weight, improve heart health, and even treat dandruff.

    Research doesn’t back most of these claims. But some studies have found that the acetic acid may help with a variety of conditions:

    • Japanese scientists found that drinking vinegar might help fight obesity.
    • One small study found that vinegar improved blood sugar and insulin levels in a group of people with type 2 diabetes.

    Vinegar also has chemicals known as polyphenols. They help stop the cell damage that can lead to other diseases, like cancer. But studies on whether vinegar actually lowers your chances of having cancer are mixed.

    Apple Cider Vinegar Risks and Side Effects

    Because of its high acidity, drinking a lot of apple cider vinegar can damage your teeth, hurt your throat, and upset your stomach. Also:

    • Though some studies have been promising, there’s still little to prove that drinking apple cider vinegar helps you lose weight.
    • It may also cause your potassium levels to drop too low. Your muscles and nerves need that nutrient to work the way they should.
    • Another study of people with type 1 diabetes found that apple cider vinegar slows the rate food and liquids move out of your stomach to your intestines. Slower digestion makes it harder to control your blood sugar level.
    • It might cause some medications to not work as well. These include diabetes and heart disease drugs as well as diureticsВ (medicines that help your body get rid of water and salt) and laxatives.
    • And of course, its strong taste might not be for everyone.

    In short, apple cider vinegar probably won’t hurt you. You can try it because it’s calorie-free, adds lots of flavor to food, and has health benefits. But it isn’t a miracle cure.

    Show Sources

    University of Washington, The Whole U: “Beyond the Hype: Apple Cider Vinegar as an Alternative Therapy.”

    Medscape General Medicine: “Vinegar: Medicinal Uses and Antiglycemic Effect.”

    AOL Lifestyle: “15 ways apple cider vinegar can benefit your health and home.”

    The Ohio State University Extension: “Making Cider Vinegar at Home.”

    Bioscience, Biotechnology and Biochemistry: “Vinegar intake reduces body weight, body fat mass, and serum triglyceride levels in obese Japanese subjects.”

    Journal of Diabetes Research: “Vinegar Consumption Increases Insulin-Stimulated Glucose Uptake by the Forearm Muscle in Humans with Type 2 Diabetes.”

    Annals of Cardiology and Angiology: “Anti-obesogenic effect of apple cider vinegar in rats subjected to a high fat diet.”

    Mayo Clinic: “Drinking apple cider vinegar for weight loss seems far-fetched. Does it work?”

    Dutch Journal of Dentistry: “Unhealthy weight loss. Erosion by apple cider vinegar.”

    BMC Gastroenterology: “Effect of apple cider vinegar on delayed gastric emptying in patients with type 1 diabetes mellitus: a pilot study.”

    Cleveland Clinic: “Probiotics.”

    University of Chicago Medicine: “Debunking the health benefits of apple cider vinegar.”

    I make vats of the stuff – it’s cheap, easy and delicious

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    ‘I use all the apples that won’t store well.’ Photograph: Getty Images

    ‘I use all the apples that won’t store well.’ Photograph: Getty Images

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    M aking vinegar is easy: you take fruit, add water and wait. Three or four months later, you’ll have vinegar. Of course there are subtleties to this process, but the basic method is simple. Fill a Kilner jar, fermenting crock or plastic bucket (depending on the volume you want to make) three-quarters full with chopped fruit, top up with water, and use some sort of weight to keep the floaters down, otherwise they will rot. Cover, to keep fruit flies out, and leave well alone. The vinegar mother (the wobbly gelatinous thing that forms on top and introduces the bacteria necessary for fermentation) doesn’t like to be messed with, so don’t move the vessel about while the magic happens.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    ‘Take fruit, add water and wait.’ Photograph: Alamy

    Wait until it smells like vinegar, and voilà, it is! Or, to be a little more scientific, dip a pH strip below the mother: you want a pH of between four and five. To preserve anything – vinegar pickles, for instance – make sure it is acidic enough not to cause botulism or other nasties. This isn’t so complicated, but it would take up the rest of this article and I have other things to say about vinegar, particularly the apple cider kind.

    I make vats of apple cider vinegar: it’s cheap, delicious and, as any ACV fan knows, has many applications around the home. I use all the apples that won’t store well, cutting out bruises or rot (never use rotting apples). Once the vinegar has fermented to a flavour I like, I strain it into bottles. The fermented apples go on to the compost.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    ‘Once the vinegar has fermented to a flavour you like, strain it into bottles.’ Photograph: Getty Images

    This year, inspired by Nigel Palmer’s excellent book The Regenerative Grower’s Guide To Garden Amendments, I branched out and used it to make mineral plant food with baked eggshells and a leftover chicken carcass. Bones and shells are rich in calcium and magnesium, both common deficiencies in tomatoes, for instance. You can also use cow bones (try your butcher), oyster, clam or snail shells. Add 15% shells/bones to 85% ACV by volume, leave a bit of space for it to fizz in the jar and after a few weeks you’ve got an extract; dilute 1:500 parts water and use it as a foliar spray to fertilise the leaves directly.

    Where to Buy Apple Cider Vinegar

    Where to Buy Apple Cider Vinegar might be something you are worrying about since it is getting a lot of press lately. Apple cider vinegar has a wealth of uses. It is called for in some recipes and even has medicinal purposes. Did you know apple cider vinegar helps control dandruff and washes away the build up of hair products that can occur on scalps? It is also known to help curb heartburn, strengthen bones, boost the immune system, and disinfect wounds. Regardless of how you plan to use apple cider vinegar, it’s imperative you know where to buy it. One of the following stores will no doubt work perfectly for you.

    Can I buy Apple Cider Vinegar at a Grocery Store?

    Most grocery stores sell apple cider vinegar. Unless you want organic apple cider vinegar, you’ll no doubt find just what you need at your local market.

    Can I buy Apple Cider Vinegar at my local pharmacy?

    While most pharmacies sell white vinegar, it would be highly unusual for one to sell Apple Cider Vinegar. The exception would be a naturopathic pharmacy. They would most likely sell Apple Cider Vinegar.

    Can I buy Apple Cider Vinegar at Walmart?

    Most Walmart stores carry apple cider vinegar. In fact, some carry extra-large sized containers. If you plan on using a lot of apple cider vinegar, or using it for a variety of purposes, you might prefer to purchase it this way.

    Where to Buy Apple Cider Vineger Online

    Apple Cider Vinegar is Available at sells apple cider vinegar. In fact, they feature gallon jugs, quart-sized bottles, and they even sell organic apple cider vinegar. Since Amazon offers special pantry discounts for those who have Amazon Prime, you might even save money by ordering the product here. also sells Apple Cider Vinegar.

    Apple Cider Vinegar is also sold online at The Vitamin Shoppe—once again in organic form only.

    Now that you know some of the many benefits of Apple Cider Vinegar—as well as several places where you can buy it—you’ll likely be putting the product to good use in your home very soon. You and your family will no doubt enjoy the many ways it can be utilized.

    We hope you have enjoyed this article on Where to Buy Apple Cider Vinegar and can find the size and type of vinegar you are looking for.

    For thousands of years raw garlic has been recognized and utilized not only for its wonderful, savory taste, but for its purported health benefits as well. However, eating raw garlic can also provide social difficulties from breath odor, and side effects such a burning sensation in the mouth or stomach, heartburn, body odor, or digestive upsets.

    Fermenting or pickling garlic in apple cider vinegar not only preserves but is said to help eliminate most of the complications from eating the garlic raw. It also opens up a whole new world of delicious ways to eat garlic. Apple cider vinegar is a prebiotic and naturally fermented food that supports and feeds the probiotics existing in the gut, contributing to a healthier environment in the body.


    Preserving garlic in apple cider vinegar is extremely easy, requiring very few steps.

    1. Purchase or take from your garden 5 or 6 garlic bulbs, which will fill approximately 1-pint jar with garlic cloves.
    2. Separate all the cloves from the bulbs and peel. In order to retain the full health benefits of garlic you should leave them whole and not cut or crush them when preparing for preservation. There is a component in garlic called allicin that provides its health benefits, and the allicin is released when the clove is crushed or cut open. Leave the clove whole until eaten if possible.
    3. Place the peeled, whole cloves in pint or quart canning jars. (Or you can use any glass jar with a closeable lid, such as a mayonnaise or peanut butter jar.) Leave 1-inch space from the top.
    4. Pour apple cider vinegar to cover the cloves. Raw, organic apple cider vinegar is ideal; however, a less expensive, generic apple cider vinegar will work well also. You may prefer to experiment by adding a little honey or other herbs and spices to customize the flavor.
    5. Close the lid and leave the garlic at room temperature for 1 to 2 weeks, then move it to a cellar or other cold storage. You may need to “burp” the lids a few times over the first couple of days to release any built-up pressure in the jars.

    There is a process of interaction between the garlic and vinegar that will turn the cloves a green color over the course of the first several days. This is a normal part of the process. Eventually, the cloves will turn back towards their original color.


    The longer the garlic is left to pickle, the more mellow the taste will be. You can wait at least 2 to 3 weeks before eating, or you can experiment with time and ingredients in order to discover your personal preferred taste. The length of the process may vary depending upon the climate and season.

    The taste of garlic preserved in apple cider vinegar is tangy, yet mellow and delicious. You might like to eat it raw by itself, or you can add it to a multitude of hot and cold dishes.

    Here’s how it can potentially make your heartburn better (if done right).

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Making homemade apple cider vinegar, preparation process. Woman pouring water in jar

    TARIK KIZILKAYA/Getty Images

    Apple cider vinegar is continuing to trend like crazy these days, and it’s not hard to find all kinds of items on store shelves touting its purported benefits, from shampoos promising to revive damaged hair, to gummies and pills that can potentially help with bloating and gut health, to DIY recipes allowing you to take or apply ACV in its natural state.

    While most experts would agree there isn’t enough research out there to support this claim, some people have claimed that taking apple cider vinegar has helped to relieve symptoms of heartburn. As with most natural remedies, though, there’s an art to this, and if you do not measure the dosing properly, you may see less desirable effects than what you’re hoping for.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Here, a registered dietitian breaks down what you need to know about taking ACV for heartburn.

    Apple cider vinegar for heartburn

    According to Taylor Stolt, RDN, a functional medicine dietitian who specializes in gut health, apple cider vinegar can make acid reflux worse in certain instances, though it may help in others.

    Can apple cider vinegar make your acid reflux worse?

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    “In cases where the acid reflux is caused by low stomach acid, apple cider vinegar can help because its acidity can help assist in the digestion of food in the stomach,” she explains. “If food is better digested in the stomach, it is able to empty into the small intestine at the appropriate rate, thus reducing reflux.”

    However, if the acid reflux is the result of too much stomach acid, apple cider vinegar is like throwing fuel onto the fire and it can make acid reflux worse, she warns. That’s because if you have irritation or damage in the esophagus or stomach from acid reflux, the apple cider vinegar can be irritating and worsen tissue damage. Additionally, if you have ulcers, taking apple cider vinegar can be incredibly irritating, painful, and dangerous.

    So what can you do to reap the benefits and avoid having the ACV wreak havoc on your digestive system?

    “Always, always dilute apple cider vinegar,” Stolt says. “If you don’t dilute apple cider vinegar, the extreme acidity will irritate the esophagus and it can also cause irreversible tooth enamel damage.”

    1. Anchovies are reportedly raining from the sky across San Francisco
    2. Report: East Oakland native Juan Toscano-Anderson likely to leave Warriors
    3. San Francisco named second-worst-run city in US by WalletHub. Here’s why.
    4. 3 low-pressure weather systems to impact California. Here’s what that means.
    5. San Francisco’s Cha Cha Cha restaurant on Mission set to close after 25 years
    6. Do mask mandates work? Bay Area COVID data from June says no.
    7. How the Bay Area housing market is reacting to recent interest rate hikes

    Can you take apple cider vinegar pills for heartburn?

    According to Stolt, while some people have claimed to have seen positive effects when taking ACV for heartburn, there currently isn’t sufficient research to back up such claims, whether they be related to ACV in its natural state, or in pill form.

    “One small study showed improvements in heartburn for some participants, but the improvements only appeared to last 60 to 75 minutes,” she says. “If you are experiencing acid reflux, the best thing to do first is see a gastroenterologist who can do a thorough examination and perform an upper endoscopy to rule out high acid production and make sure you don’t have any ulcers.”

    If your workup is clear, Stolt recommends working with a gut specialist to identify the root causes of your reflux/heartburn and address those root causes, as well as help you determine if it’s possible to treat your condition without acid-blocking medications.

    “Gut specialists can evaluate your need for digestive enzymes that contain HCl and pepsin, which your stomach naturally produces, to safely boost digestion in a more controlled way than with apple cider vinegar,” she explains. “They can also assess for gut bacteria imbalances, bacteria/yeast overgrowth, compromised gallbladder function, increased intestinal permeability (AKA “leaky gut”), and gut inflammation.”

    The bottom line: Talk to your doctor before trying to treat acid reflux (or really any health condition) with a natural remedy like apple cider vinegar.

    Apple cider vinegar is produced from crushed, aged apples. Acetic acid is the key substance present in apple cider vinegar which is the result of a conversion process from the fruit’s sugar, to alcohol, and finally to acetic acid. It is responsible for giving vinegar its distinct smell and taste. (1)

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Apple cider vinegar is believed to have many health benefits. It may also contain the B-vitamins B1, B2, and B6, as well as vitamin C, folic acid, biotin and niacin. It also contains trace minerals such as iron, calcium, sodium, magnesium, potassium and phosphorous.

    The health benefits you expect from apple cider vinegar will be influenced by the quality of the vinegar you are using. It is therefore imperative to ensure that you are using a top-quality organic, unfiltered apple cider vinegar that comes with ‘the Mother‘.

    What Is the Mother?

    Simply put, the Mother is a cobweb-like substance in apple cider vinegar that gives it a cloudy look.

    When the vinegar appears clear, this is a sign that it has been pasteurized. When the vinegar is pasteurized, the Mother culture has been removed and so have a lot of the nutritional benefits. The Mother culture consists of good bacteria, enzymes, pectin, proteins and minerals. (2)

    How to Choose Apple Cider Vinegar

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    1. Do not shop at the supermarket for your vinegar.

    When you are at the supermarket, you are likely only going to find vinegars that are pasteurized, because they are clear and more visually-appealing to customers. You may wish to check out a health food store in your area for a selection of vinegars that are not refined.

    2. Always choose apple cider vinegar that is both organic and raw.

    By selecting vinegar that is both organic and raw, you are avoiding any genetically-modified organism (aka GMO) being in your food and ensuring that the vinegar has not gone through any filtration or chemical processing.

    3. Choose an apple cider vinegar that is unpasteurized and contains the Mother.

    The presence of the Mother will mean a murky vinegar mixture in the bottle, but do not be alarmed. A cloudy mixture assures you that the Mother is doing its job to keep the nutrients intact.

    Pasteurized vinegar, which is heated to a high temperature, would appear clear and have killed off much of the good bacteria and most of its health benefits.

    6 of the Best Apple Cider Vinegar Brands

    There are a number of good quality options for apple cider vinegar. It is best to buy them in glass bottles rather than in plastic as the acid may cause a chemical reaction in plastic ones.

    1. BRAGG Organic Raw Apple Cider Vinegar

    How to store apple cider vinegarOne of the most widely known apple cider vinegars is BRAGG Apple Cider Vinegar. Bragg Organic Raw Apple Cider Vinegar is made from organically grown apples. The product is certified organic by the Organic Certifiers and Oregon Tilth. In addition, it is Kosher Certified and Non-GMO Certified. It is produced in compliance with USDA guidelines. (3)

    BRAGG Apple Cider Vinegar is the oldest brand available and is family-owned, which explains why it is one of the most trusted brands on the market for an organic, raw, and unfiltered apple cider vinegar that comes with the Mother. It comes in 16 0z, 32 oz. and 128 oz. bottles. (4)

    2. Vitacost Organic Apple Cider Vinegar with Mother

    Another popular brand is Vitacost Organic Apple Cider Vinegar with Mother. While Vitacost is more well-known for making general health products, their apple cider vinegar has a lot to offer. It is made from organic apples and is both kosher and vegan approved.

    Vitacost does not pasteurize their apple cider vinegar nor add any sugar or flavorings. One advantage that Vitacost offers over BRAGG is that their apple cider vinegar is a little bit cheaper in price. It comes in 32 oz. and 16 oz. bottles. (4)

    3. EDEN Organic Apple Cider Vinegar

    How to store apple cider vinegarAnother excellent choice for apple cider vinegar is Eden Foods Organic Apple Cider Vinegar. Eden Foods makes their apple cider vinegar from naturally fermented apple juice that is gently aged with the use of vinegar in a wood barrel.

    This option is both raw and unpasteurized, and of course, comes with the Mother. EDEN Vinegar uses amber glass as a way to protect its flavor and nutrients. It comes in a 16 oz. bottle. (5)

    4. Dynamic Health Apple Cider Vinegar

    If you are someone who cannot stand the harsh taste of apple cider vinegar, then Dynamic Health Apple Cider Vinegar is probably the brand for you. Dynamic Health offers a vinegar that is kosher and halal-certified. It is also unpasteurized, organic, and unfiltered.

    As a bonus, Dynamic Health offers their apple cider vinegar in both liquid form. and a capsule. (6) The capsule is equal to one tablespoon of apple cider vinegar. It is distributed in bottles with 90 capsules.

    5. Viva Naturals Organic Apple Cider Vinegar

    How to store apple cider vinegarAnother healthy choice is Viva Naturals Organic Apple Cider Vinegar. The product is made from organic apples and fermented naturally. The natural fermentation makes for a distinct flavor. The vinegar is raw, unfiltered, raw and unpasteurized, with the Mother in very bottle. It has no preservatives and is Kosher-certified and non GMO.. It is available in a 32 oz. bottle.(7)

    If you wish to try other products other than the above, you may opt for other excellent vinegar products such as the Vermont Village Organic Raw and Unfiltered Apple Cider Vinegar, which is fermented in small batches in an artisan’s cannery. The vinegar is unfiltered and raw, is non-GMO and USDA organic. It is also BPA-free and gluten-free.

    6. Fleischmann’s Organic Unfiltered Apple Cider Vinegar

    Another option is Fleischmann’s Organic Unfiltered Apple Cider Vinegar which is made from organic apples. Fleischmann’s has been making vinegar for the past 100 years.

    Fleischmann’s vinegars are unfiltered, raw and unpasteurized preserving their unique flavor and are bottled with the Mother ensuring healthy and nutritious benefits. (8)

    Deciding Which Apple Cider Vinegar to Buy

    How to store apple cider vinegarWhen you are narrowing down your choices of apple cider vinegars, it is easy to make a good choice.

    Try to choose raw, unfiltered, organic products that have their nutrients and enzymes intact. These are usually with the Mother. With so many brands to choose from, it will be up to you to choose the best product suited to your needs and your aspirations for good health.

    How to use

    Apple Cider Vinegar is a household staple.

    It’s versatile in the kitchen and self care certified. From a salad dressing to a skin toner, it’s easy to incorporate wellness into your day.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    How to store apple cider vinegar


    Apple Cider Vinegar

    The acetic acid content of apple cider vinegar has been shown to elicit several beneficial health effects.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Helps control appetite and manage weight gain

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Help maintain healthy blood sugar levels

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Help maintain healthy cholesterol levels

    Ingredients (2)

    The ultimate wellness elixir.

    Our raw, unfiltered vinegar is full of zesty natural goodness.

    Amy Jeanroy is an herbalist and professional gardener with several years of experience.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    William Reavell/Getty Images

    Herbal tinctures are filtered liquid extractions that allow you to consume condensed amounts of herbal nutrients by mouth. They are created by soaking large quantities of herbs in a liquid for a relatively long time to absorb the herbal ingredients. The concoction is then strained to remove the solid herbs, leaving the tincture liquid for consumption.

    A tincture can be thought of as a more potent infusion, in which the ratio of herbal ingredients is higher than in a traditional tea or infusion. The herbs for tinctures are normally selected for their nutritional or healing properties, and the liquid used to create the tincture is usually some kind of alcoholic spirit.

    But many people would like to avoid alcohol, either because the tincture may be consumed by children, or for other personal reasons. Perhaps the taste of alcohol is unpleasant to you, or perhaps consumption of alcohol is against your principles. Or perhaps alcoholic spirits are not available legally in your community.

    Fortunately, not all tinctures need to be made with alcoholic spirits. It is quite possible to make tinctures with apple cider vinegar instead, avoiding any problems that arise from using an alcohol base.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Pros and Cons of Vinegar Tinctures

    As a method for delivering the medicinal value of herbs into your body, vinegar tinctures offer exactly the same value as alcohol-based tinctures. The speed with which the herbal ingredients reach your bloodstream is exactly the same as when the same herbs are ingested through an alcohol-based tincture.

    There are even a few advantages to vinegar tinctures. For example, a vinegar tincture can be safely given to children who should not consume alcohol. Nor is there any conflict for individuals who choose not to consume alcohol because of chemical dependency or moral issues. Herbal tinctures with a vinegar base also have a broader range of use than alcohol-based tinctures—you can use them as a dressing over cooked greens or salads, for example. A vinegar tincture mixed with honey or maple syrup, then heated in a pan until slightly thickened, can be poured over roasted vegetables to add immunity-boosting micronutrients to this delightful winter dish.

    A vinegar tincture can also work well as a base for a hot drink for children or grownups battling ordinary colds. Combine one tablespoon of your favorite vinegar tincture (such as goldenrod and vinegar) and a tablespoon of raw honey into a mug. Fill it with steaming hot (but not boiling) water. Stir and consume by slowly sipping. This is a wonderfully tasty way to help your loved one feel better.

    There are also a few disadvantages of vinegar as a base for herbal tinctures. Vinegar tinctures have a much shorter shelf life than alcohol tinctures. While an alcohol tincture can be stored for several years without spoiling, a vinegar tincture has a much shorter shelf life—about one year, at most. Vinegar tinctures are also typically less potent than alcohol tinctures, meaning that you’ll need to consume more to get the same amount of herbal ingredients into your body.

    Making a Vinegar Tincture

    It is quite easy to make an herbal tincture using vinegar as a base, though it will take some time. The mixture will need to be stored for about two weeks while the vinegar absorbs the nutrients from the herbs and is ready to be strained and stored.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Apple cider vinegar is a healthy and tasty addition to any meal. To celebrate, I’ve collected more than 60 apple cider vinegar recipes!

    I love this time of year!

    With Fall being apple season, I’ve collected a list of apple cider recipes you can make at home!

    From these recipes, you can save the cores and skins and Make Your Own Apple Cider Vinegar at home!

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Health Benefits of Apple Cider Vinegar

    A lot of people will swear by the benefits of drinking apple cider vinegar.

    Even the Amish would use it in their energy-boosting Switchel recipe. (An apple cider vinegar drink recipe)

    However, most of the proposed health benefits, haven’t been tested by the scientific community.

    There have been a few studies, however, like this one that showed the a daily dose of ACV helped to reduce the metabolic and oxidative stress in obese rats.

    There are also a number of studies that show regular consumption of ACV can help in weight loss and blood sugar regulation.

    Another study showed that Apple Cider Vinegar was effective at treating E. coli, Staphylococcus aureus and Candida albicans.

    That same study also showed that ACV reduced inflammatory cytokines.

    Because of this, vinegar has long been used for preserving foods.

    Pickling is the art of preserving food in vinegar, like my bread and butter pickles, pickled eggs, and pickled radishes!

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    In fact Hippocrates used ACV to cleanse wounds and surgeries.

    For instructions on How to Make Your Own Apple Cider Vinegar at home, check out my post.

    It’s incredibly simple and is a great way uses scraps that you would normally throw away!

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    How to Make ACV

    Whether you make it yourself at home, or buy it with the mother from a store, apple cider vinegar is made in a similar fashion.

    Crushed apples, or apple scraps (apple peels and apple cores) combine with water and yeast – either artificially or the yeast naturally occurring on the apple’s skin.

    If you make it at home, be sure to cover the top of the jar with a coffee filter and rubber band to allow the gases to escape, but as keep flies out.

    Store in a dark place at room temperature to let the fermentation process do it’s work!

    The natural sugars in the apples feed the yeast which ferments into alcohol.

    If you stop here, this is how hard apple cider is made.

    After this stage, if you let the fermentation continue, the alcohol continue to ferment, turning it into acetic acid.

    Acetic acids gives vinegar is sour smell and flavor.

    Researches believe that it is acetic acid that gives apple cider vinegar its health benefits.

    For the best online fermentation course, with video instructions on how to make your own herbal ciders, beers, kombucha, and more, check out The Craft of Herbal Fermentation Course.

    Does vinegar go bad? The shelf life of vinegar depends on the type and how it is stored. Because of it’s high acidic properties, it is used as a preservative to keep other foods fresh. It is often used in canning, as in turning fresh cucumbers into pickles so that they can keep for years to come.

    Most people wonder does vinegar go bad? That depends on the type of product and what was added. There are many types of vinegar, with the most common for eating being apple cider vinegar. It should be noted that some vinegars go bad before others, but all of them last a very long time. White vinegar lasts the longest and basically never expires when stored under the proper conditions. The distilled white variety is made from only sun ripened corn and water while the apple cider variety is made from only apples and water [1].

    It is the fermentation process that produces the extended shelf life of both products. When properly stored, the shelf life of vinegar past its best before date is .

    Our Favorite Food Storage Set!

    With oven-safe glass and water-tight lids, these food storage containers are ready for action! Not a Prime Member? Try a 30-day free trial today!

    Vinegar Expiration Date

    (Unopened/Opened) Pantry
    White Vinegar lasts for Indefinite
    Apple Cider Vinegar lasts for Indefinite
    Balsamic Vinegar lasts for Indedinite
    Raspberry Vinegar lasts for Indefinite
    Rice Wine Vinegar lasts for Indedinite
    Red Wine Vinegar lasts for Indefinite

    Like a lot of other condiments, it may have a best before date but not a use by date or expiration date. Because of this distinction, you may safely use vinegar for your salads, baking, canning or even cleaning needs (white vinegar) after the best before date has lapsed according to the above table.

    How to tell if Vinegar is bad, rotten or spoiled?

    Practicing proper hygiene and food safety techniques will help prevent foodborne illness.

    Through numerous studies, the Vinegar Institute confirmed that vinegars shelf life is almost indefinite. Which means that white vinegar does not go bad! This is because it is acidic by nature, thus it is self-preserving and does not require refrigeration. White distilled vinegar will remain basically unchanged over an extended period of time. This white variety can still safely be used for all purposes beyond any date.

    While in all other types, some changes may be observed such as a development of a haze, sediment, cloudiness or altered color. These are usually aesthetic only changes. Flavored varieties, depending on what ingredients have been added to the bottle, you may want to replace after 5-10 years instead of consuming.

    It should be noted that while vinegar does extend the shelf life of other foods, these other foods are never extended forever. [1]

    Has your vinegar gone bad? Old product may begin to have a dusty type settlement in the bottom of the jar or a cloudy appearance. Although it will not be harmful to consume, the flavor may be slightly compromised after 5-10 years because of the added ingredients.

    If your vinegar has gone bad (whether it be raspberry, champagne, cider or another type) then search our vinegar substitute table to find the proper substitute for your purpose.

    There are, of course, certain health risks associated with spoiled foods so always remember to practice food safety and enjoy your foods before their shelf life has expired!

    How to store Vinegar to extend its shelf life?

    The best way to store it is in its original air tight container in a cool dark place like the pantry, away from heat sources. A constant temperature is also best for any food or drink product, so store it away from the stove or dishwasher where it may become constantly heated and then cooled back down again.

    Some benefits of proper food storage include eating healthier, cutting food costs and helping the environment by avoiding waste.

    How long is Vinegar good for when prepared in a dish?

    How long does vinegar last? That depends. How long do eggs last? In general, it will be the longest lasting ingredient in any dish, soaking into the other ingredients.

    Now you have your fermented apple cider you need to bottle it and store it.
    How to store apple cider vinegarThe main principle for longer lasting cider is to keep it in a cool place. There are many bottling options to choose from when you come to store your cider.

    1. Use any old swing top hombrew bottles (Grolsch style) bottle. You can at times buy these at Ikea or try homebrew suppliers.

    2. Strong beer bottles. You can use your own or purchase from a homebrew supplier. For bottles without tops you will need to obtain caps and a bottle capper. Note of caution if you damage a bottle whilst fitting a cap, throw it away! Bottle cappers don’t need to be expensive you can get them for around £20-£30.

    3. Try using some bottles and maybe putting some in a pressure barrel. However, the cider may not stay fresh for as long as being stored in air tight bottles.

    4. Another good option is to use screw cap bottles.

    5. An alternative option is to use a manucube (bag in a box) similar to a 5L wine dispenser box.

    6. You could always use a 5L plastic screw top container. Note cider can have a tendancy to explode when stored in these types of containers. So you may need to drink it within 1-3weeks.

    7. And for those who like to entertain you could always be ready for your social gathering and use a beer dispenser.

    8. Whilst you in the process of bottling why not pour some into a jug ready to drink later.

    Ensure that any equipment used is clean and try to keep your cider in a cool place.

    Last updated on October 12, 2021 . Originally posted on February 26, 2019 By Tania Sheff

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    This Apple Cider Vinegar Salad Dressing is my favorite homemade salad dressing, and it’s very easy to make. Simple ingredients – incredible taste!

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Homemade salad dressings are so much better than store-bought! SO. MUCH. BETTER. This Apple Cider Vinegar Salad Dressing is not only simple and tasty, it is actually good for you. Once you try this goodness, there is no going back!



    • It’s healthy.All of the dressing ingredients are wholesome and nutritious.
    • It’s versatile.This dressing pairs well with all kinds of salads.
    • It’s easy to make.Just throw the ingredients in the jar and shake.
    • It’s tasty.Yes. This dressing is very tasty.

    How to store apple cider vinegar


    Olive Oil. Use extra virgin olive oil for extra health benefits and extra flavor. California Olive Ranch is my favorite and I always use it.

    Apple Cider Vinegar. Use Organic Apple Cider Vinegar with the “Mother.” It is sold in almost all large supermarkets and health food stores, so it won’t be difficult to find. Of course, you can also buy it from

    Honey. Any honey variety will work here. Just make sure it’s in liquid form, so you can mix it well with the rest of the ingredients.

    Mustard. Yellow, Dijon, Spicy, or Honey Mustard could be used.

    Garlic. Garlic is optional. I personally prefer adding it, but it’s totally OK to skip it, if you are not a fan.


    Just place all of the ingredients into a mason jar and shake for a good 30-60 seconds, until combined (or whisk all the ingredients in a bowl).

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Does Apple Cider Vinegar Dressing need to be refrigerated?

    Yes, store in the fridge in a tightly-covered jar.

    How long is the dressing good for?

    If you used garlic to make it, it is best to use it within 7 days. If no garlic was used, it can stay up to 14 days.

    Is Apple Cider Vinegar Dressing healthy?

    Yes. Especially if you use Extra Virgin Olive Oil and Organic Apple Cider Vinegar with the “Mother.” This recipe is Whole30 compliant, low carb, keto-friendly, vegan, gluten-free, and dairy-free. It’s suitable for pretty much every eating style out there.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Lipoma is a fat lump or nodule that made of adipose (fatty) tissues which are located beneath the skin. Actually, it appears like a big pimple that can reach to several centimeters. It is a benign tumor (non – cancerous) which is harmless, painless, non – itchy or not as red on the skin and it is soft to touch and can be moved under the skin.

    Lipoma is not a dangerous health problem but grows in size without spreading throughout the body or not forming metastases. These fatty nodes occur inside the body like torso, upper thighs, neck, upper arms and armpits that was caused due to some irregularity on your body (a sign of something went wrong).

    Even most of the doctors considered this lipoma as a common small problem but in certain cases when you’re having more lipomas then you have to know what the underlying problem is. There is no exact cause for the occurrence of these lipomas inside the skin. It occurs in people of all ages, most commonly in middle age.

    It is also considered as a beauty problem and can be removed from the treatment procedures like surgery, liposuction, and steroid injections. However, all these treatments can shrink Lipoma but won’t destroy it completely. So, it’s best to use some natural ways for treating Lipomas. Apple cider vinegar (ACV) stands best in treating Lipoma without any side effects and cost effective.

    Can Apple Cider Vinegar get rid of Lipoma?

    • It perfectly balances the pH (acid – alkaline) levels in the body that in turn helps to clear the lipoma along with preventing its recurrence.
    • It softens the lipoma and reduces slowly the size and thereby its appearance under the skin.
    • It acts as a best remedy for losing weight that results in the decrease of fat deposits in your body.
    • It has essential organic acids, nutrients, pectin, potash and enzymes that raise the metabolism and burns the fat faster.
    • It hydrates and refreshes the body to remove the water retention. It also suppresses your appetite to make you eat less and feel lighter.
    • It helps you with proper digestion, flush out the toxins and other impurities to remove the stored waste from the colon and intestines which in turn helps for not forming any fat deposits.

    How to use Apple Cider Vinegar for Lipoma:

    Here are the best apple cider vinegar methods that make you understand how to get rid of lipomas without surgery.

    Method – 1: (Apple Cider Vinegar)

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    This is a simple method that effectively relieves you from lipomas.

    Steps to be followed…

    • Take 1 teaspoon of apple cider vinegar and consume it at night before going to bed.
    • Increase the quantity of ACV slowly from 1 teaspoon to 2 – 3 tablespoons.
    • Be sure to drink it every night before going to bed and continue for 3 – 5 months to get relief from lipoma.


    • Or if you’re suffering from any irritation while taking ACV directly then add 1 – 2 teaspoons of apple cider vinegar in 1 glass of water and drink it for 2 – 3 times daily to get rid of the lipoma.
    • Alternatively, drink 1/4 to 1 teaspoon of ACV before consuming meals or heavy snacks for better digestion and thereby to prevent the fat deposits on the skin.

    Method – 2: (Apple Cider Vinegar with Honey)

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Drinking ACV mixed with honey mix will definitely help you in reducing the size slowly and thus remove this lipoma or fat deposits.

    Steps to be followed…

    • Add 1 teaspoon of raw honey in 1 – 2 tablespoons of organic apple cider vinegar in 1 cup of cold distilled water.
    • Stir well and drink it to get relief from the lipomas.
    • Regular intake of this mix for thrice daily will help to reduce the lipoma quickly.

    Method – 3: (Apple Cider Vinegar Ointment with Beeswax and Cedar)

    Beeswax and cedar help to soften the lipoma and this combination is very effective in treating lipoma along with providing overall health.

    Steps to be followed…

    • Add some beeswax in a pan and melt it properly.
    • Then add dried cedar in this pan and stir occasionally.
    • After few minutes, turn off the heat and let it reach the room temperature.
    • Now add organic apple cider vinegar to it and stir well.
    • Pour this mix in a container and place its lid.
    • Leave it on for few minutes and use it as a lipoma ointment regularly until you get complete cure from the problem.

    Note: Or simply mix melted beeswax and ACV in a bowl and use it as an ointment for reducing the size of lipoma and thereby removing it completely.

    Tips and Precautions:

    1. Dietary changes will help to shrink this fat deposit or lipoma. So, avoid soy or foods containing MSG and artificial sweeteners.
    2. Always use raw, organic, unfiltered and unpasteurized apple cider vinegar that has the mother for treating any health or beauty problems, including lipomas.
    3. Some users have reported certain side effects like lowering the blood sugar levels, dizziness, heart palpitations and anxiety. So, if you feel any side effects after drinking ACV then stop taking it and consult your doctor immediately.
    4. Drink plenty of water, consume food which is enriched with vitamins and fiber content, avoid sugary foods, do regular exercises, etc. will help you to prevent lipoma now and in future.
    5. It might react with certain medications, so it’s best to consult your doctor before using ACV for lipoma treatment.
    6. ACV might cause tooth erosion and damage teeth enamel, so use a straw to drink apple cider vinegar that helps you not to get any irritation or tooth damage.
    7. The thing to remember that being overweight will not cause these lipomas but it’s best to maintain a healthy weight to get rid of many health problems.

    Try this ACV treatment for shrinking lipomas and share your experience with us.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Katherine Martinko is an expert in sustainable living. She holds a degree in English Literature and History from the University of Toronto.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Treehugger / Sanja Kostic

    • Share
    • Twitter
    • Pinterest
    • Email

    Apple cider vinegar is an amazingly versatile ingredient. From cleaning and disinfecting to cooking and beautifying, it seems there are few household problems that apple cider vinegar can’t help solve. Ever since I discovered its countless uses, the big jug that used to sit mostly abandoned in my pantry now sees daily action, its usefulness extended beyond the occasional salad dressing. Check out the following list and, soon, you too will find yourself incorporating apple cider vinegar (ACV) into your life!

    1. Natural toner

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    Treehugger / Sanja Kostic

    Apple cider vinegar is a great natural (and cheap!) toner for your skin, since it neutralizes pH and leaves your skin feeling smooth and soft. If the smell is too strong, dilute 50/50 with water and wipe over your face.

    2. Hair conditioner

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    Treehugger / Sanja Kostic

    Use ACV to condition your hair. This is necessary after a baking soda wash to neutralize the overly basic soda, but it can add extra conditioning even after using regular shampoo. It will also make your hair shiny.

    3. Tub time

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    Treehugger / Sanja Kostic

    Add a cup of ACV to the bathtub for a relaxing soak. It can calm itchy skin and relieve sunburn.

    4. Soothing aftershave

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    Treehugger / Sanja Kostic

    Apple cider vinegar can be a natural soothing aftershave. Dilute 50/50 with water, shake well, and apply to face.

    5. Tummy calmer

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    Treehugger / Sanja Kostic

    Aid digestion, gas, and bloating by drinking 1 tbsp ACV mixed into a cup of water before meals. ACV contains pectin, which calms intestinal spasms, and it can fight bacteria that cause diarrhea.

    6. Fungus fighter

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    Treehugger / Sanja Kostic

    Get rid of toe fungus and warts by applying undiluted apple cider vinegar. For warts, you can tape on an ACV-soaked cotton ball and leave overnight for as long as it takes.

    7. Halt hiccups

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    Treehugger / Sanja Kostic

    Stop hiccups with a spoonful of pure ACV. The idea is it over-stimulates the nerves in the throat that are responsible for spasms.

    8. Soothe a sore throat

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    Treehugger / Sanja Kostic

    Cure your sore throat by gargling with a 50/50 mix of water and ACV. It will kill off germs that can’t survive in an acidic environment.

    9. Nasal cleanser

    Clear your nasal passages by adding 1 tsp ACV to a glass of water. The acetic acid kills off bacteria, and the potassium in ACV thins the mucus.

    10. Bye bye, dandruff

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    Treehugger / Sanja Kostic

    Eliminate dandruff by spraying a 50/50 mix of water and ACV onto your scalp. Let it soak for 15 minutes, then rinse out. The smell will disappear once your hair dries.

    11. Reduce swelling

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    Treehugger / Sanja Kostic

    ACV can reduce swelling when massaged into swollen parts of the body.

    12. Energy boost

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    Treehugger / Sanja Kostic

    Boost your energy by adding a tablespoon of ACV to a glass of water. It contains potassium and enzymes that can help prevent a sense of exhaustion.

    13. Stop stinky breath

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    Treehugger / Sanja Kostic

    Get rid of bad breath by gargling with water and ACV for 10 minutes.

    14. DIY facial

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    Treehugger / Sanja Kostic

    Use ACV to make a homemade facial mask. Mix with bentonite clay and honey, apply to skin, and leave for 15 minutes before rinsing off.

    15. Lighten liver spots

    Treat liver spots on your skin with undiluted ACV. Dab it on, leave overnight, then rinse off.

    16. Neutralize B.O.

    ACV is a natural deodorant. Apply to your armpits and it will neutralize odours.

    17. Chemical-free cleaning

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    Treehugger / Sanja Kostic

    Use ACV to clean your house. Mix with water in a spray bottle and wipe off with a clean cloth.

    18. Acne fighter

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    Treehugger / Sanja Kostic

    Treat acne by applying a 1:4 ratio of ACV and water to the face. Severe acne can be treated with undiluted ACV.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Don’t we always try to prevent problems before they start? When we start to feel a tickle in our throat we immediately start taking medicine and drinking tons of water. So, we don’t like getting sick. Chickens don’t either. They are keen experts at hiding signs of illness and injury since they are prey animals. They can’t tell us when they have a tickle in their throat or when they otherwise feel bad. So, as their owners and caretakers, it’s our duty to prevent illness before it starts.

    Apple cider vinegar and garlic are natural remedies to help prevent illnesses. They are both filled with vitamins and nutrients. Let’s take a look at each one and how it will keep your flock healthy.

    Apple Cider Vinegar

    Apple cider vinegar (ACV) is useful in many ways. It is a good source of potassium and is quickly absorbed. Potassium is important to build strength and fight bacteria by flushing out toxins. It boosts a chicken’s respiratory, immune and digestive systems and helps with calcium absorption. Also, it helps fight and prevent cancer, infections, diseases and illnesses. ACV is high in vitamins, electrolytes, probiotics and minerals. It also is thought to be a mild antibiotic. If you are going to be moving your chickens to new housing, introducing to the flock or if your birds are molting make sure to use ACV as it helps reduce stress levels.

    Apple cider vinegar is used in many ways in chicken health. It’s most commonly used in the water. (1 tablespoon per gallon.) This vinegar will fight off bacteria growth in the waterer itself. Note: Never use ACV in metal water containers as it will break it down and leach harmful chemicals into the chickens’ drinking water. Some people even claim that their chickens prefer the taste of water with ACV instead of plain water! ACV can also be used in a bath for your chickens. ACV will kill and rid your chickens of any external parasites. Plus it conditions the skin. You can use ACV for cleaning nest boxes, feeders, waterers and incubators too.

    I also like to make a salad for my chickens using ACV as a dressing. I use lettuce, carrots, berries, fruits, etc and then drizzle ACV on top. They LOVE it!
    Note: Only use organic, bragg ACV with your chickens as this is free from chemicals and all natural.

    Garlic also has many health benefits. Garlic, believe it or not, can help prevent worms in your chickens. It boosts the chicken’s respiratory and immune systems. It is also thought that if chickens eat garlic on a regular basis they will have a less likelihood of getting mites and ticks since their blood tastes like garlic! You may have heard that garlic effects the taste of eggs but I and other garlic users have never found this to be true.

    You can use garlic by floating the cloves in the chicken waterer. You can add a powder to their feed (2-3 % ratio) or just throw out plain garlic to them free choice.

    ACV and garlic are two helpful and important necessities of every chicken keeper. They will prevent illnesses and parasites and keep your flock looking and acting their very best! These two things will not prevent illnesses and diseases entirely but will defiantly help. Plus they also help when the chicken is actually sick.

    Have questions? Feel free to PM me.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Shop TODAY is editorially independent. Our editors selected these deals and items because we think you will enjoy them at these prices. If you purchase something through our links, we may earn a commission. Pricing and availability are accurate as of publish time. Learn more about Shop TODAY.

    If you’re only using apple cider vinegar for your salad dressings, you’re missing out. The pantry staple really can do it all. Clogged drain? Try pouring a little down the sink with baking soda. Breaking out? Make a DIY face mask using ACV and bentonite clay.

    And in case you haven’t heard, it can also make a good addition to your hair care routine. Experts say that apple cider vinegar has a host of benefits for your hair and scalp, ranging from relieving itchiness to improving the look of your locks. Below, we asked two top dermatologists to break down everything you need to know about the ingredient.

    The benefits of apple cider vinegar for your hair

    “If you have an oily scalp, you’re prone to dandruff or you’re using hair products that accumulate in the hair, all of those things will make apple cider vinegar a potentially good option for you,” said Dr. Hadley King, a board-certified dermatologist and clinical instructor of dermatology at Cornell University.

    It has both antibacterial and antifungal properties so it can help with common scalp conditions caused by those factors, like dandruff, acne or folliculitis, King said. “It also has anti-inflammatory and antioxidant properties, so those can be beneficial,” she added. “And because of the acidic pH, it can help to remove product buildup by gentle exfoliation.”

    For the same reason, the ingredient can help restore the pH balance of your scalp, said Dr. Debra Jaliman, a board-certified dermatologist in New York City. The natural pH of your scalp is around five, but things like sun exposure, dyeing your hair and certain chemicals can throw that number off. And when that happens, it can make your hair dry and porous and lead to itchiness, which is why maintaining a proper balance is important.

    On top of all that, the ingredient can also help make your hair smoother and shinier, Jaliman said.

    I have 25 ways to benefit from using apple cider vinegar to share with you today. Were you aware there is a difference between some versions of apple cider vinegar? You need to use raw or organic apple cider vinegar to get the most desired benefits. Not all Apple Cider Vinegar varieties are equal.

    You want the “Mother” of the vinegar because it has raw enzymes that promote healing. Regular/clear cider vinegar might not have all of the health benefits you hope for. I suggest avoiding the filtered vinegar as well. I call Apple Cider Vinegar a natural Elixir, one of my medicinal solutions.

    The great thing about apple cider vinegar is that it’s pretty cheap to buy and stores for at least 5 years (the brand Braggs does anyway). Check the expiration dates for other brands. Sometimes the apple cider vinegar can last past the expiration date, just like you experience with other products. I always say “when in doubt, throw it out” if you are questioning the dates.

    Using Apple Cider Vinegar:


    1. Apple cider vinegar can help lower blood pressure, studies have shown.

    2. Diarrhea: try mixing a little in water-the pectin content helps treat diarrhea-sip on it.

    3. It helps with hiccups: eases the diaphragm spasms that cause them.

    4. Soothes sore throats: mix equal amounts of ACV with water and gargle every hour or so.

    5. Helps prompt sinus drainage if you have a sinus headache or infection:1 teaspoon of ACV in a glass of water relieves a stuffy nose.

    6. Indigestion: helps settle the stomach since sometimes we eat too much or we eat the wrong types of food. Also helps with heartburn.

    7. Rub the Apple Cider Vinegar on swollen joints, feet, etc. Dilute if your skin is sensitive. I use it on my arthritis, it feels great while cooling my joints.

    8. Yeast infections: add 1-1/2 cups ACV in your bathtub of warm water. Do this once a day for at least 30 minutes for at least three days.

    9. Natural aftershave: mix equal parts of water and ACV before applying to your face.

    10. Great for toenail, foot fungus: soak in water/ACV diluted mixture or apply directly to the fungus.

    Soothe A Sunburn

    11. Soothe a sunburn with a clean rag dipped in it, it cools the warm hot sunburn and is so refreshing.

    12. Dandruff: mix equal parts and let set on your hair for one hour or less.

    13. Boosts your energy: relieves that tired feeling, one to two tablespoons in a glass of juice or water.

    14. You know those age-spots some of us get on our skin: rub a little on them every day, rinse off in the shower if desired. I leave it on all night.

    15. Natural hair conditioner that makes your hair shiny and healthy, and the price is very reasonable.

    16. Bad breath: mix 1/2 tablespoon in 1 cup water and gargle a little at a time.

    17. Deodorant: rub a little under the arm and ACV smell dissipates.

    18. Great for acne issues: dab a little on. Make a mixture of one part vinegar with 3-4 parts water. It has some antibacterial properties to help heal acne.

    19. Natural tooth whitener: rub some on a clean rag and rub on those teeth. It kills bacteria in your gums and mouth.

    Great For Meals

    20. Make your own salad dressings: so much healthier, and you know what is in your salad dressing.

    Cleaning Your Home

    21. Clean your tile with one cup ACV and a bucket of water, it makes cleaning a breeze.

    22. I make a spray bottle with 2 cups ACV and 1 cup water: it cleans windows, countertops, you name it.

    23. Natural room freshener: pour 1/8 cup in your toilet. It freshens the room almost immediately.

    Use On Pets

    24. I used to use it on my Shih Tzu’s “hot spots” to clean and heal them.

    25. Cats do not like the smell of vinegar. It should help from having “accidents” around the house.

    Final Word

    Please remember, I am not a doctor or medical professional. I just know I want to learn more natural ways to heal my body. We need to be prepared for the unexpected. Using apple cider vinegar is fairly inexpensive. It would go pretty far when mixed with water and be a natural healer when needed. You must decide what is right for you and your family. If regular medications are not available I must learn other types of healing. These are just a few of the benefits I know, if you have some, I would love to add them to this list. I love Epsom Salts as well!

    Last Updated on April 10, 2019 by Family Edventures Leave a Comment

    You may have heard that apple cider vinegar has some amazing health but is it palatable!? We’ve put together our favourite recipes in this “how to make apple cider vinegar drink guide”.

    Apple cider vinegar is made by fermenting apples.

    Not only is it awesome at softening hair (I’ve been using nothing but water and occasional Chamomile or ACV rinse for 6 months now!) it also has numerous health benefits when ingested.

    This includes weight loss, reduced cholesterol, lower blood sugar levels and improved symptoms of diabetes.

    Choosing the right Apple Cider Vinegar

    Most supermarket bought ACV has been distilled which meabs that the “mother” has been removed.

    The “mother” refers to the strands of proteins, enzymes and good bacteria that are present.

    How to store apple cider vinegarBuy ACV with the “mother”.

    It’s what gives the ACV a cloudy, appearance, sometimes with a few sediments.

    To ensure that you’re getting maximum from your ACV then opt for the most natural, raw, unfiltered and organic version anyway.So, how do you make a palatable drink with apple cider vinegar?

    It is also really simple to make your own apple cider vinegar and best of all it can be made with scraps from peeled amd cored apples.

    How to make apple cider vinegar drink that’s drinkable…

    There are a few different drinks that you could try.

    Here are our favourite apple cider vinegar drinks:

    Apple cider vinegar drink with lemon and honey

    A refreshing citrusy drink that you should enjoy if you like real lemonade.

    • 1 tablespoon of lemon juice (organic)
    • 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar
    • Soda water (we use our soda stream as we’re reducing our plastic waste.)
    • A drop of honey to taste.

    1. Juice your lemon. Add a tablespoon to your glass.

    2. Stir in 1 tablespoon of ACV.

    3. Top up as required with soda water.

    4. Add honey to taste. You can reduce the amount as you get used to the taste.

    Warm and spicy apple cider vinegar drink

    A cosy drink to sip on a chilly day. Use warm apple juice and it’ll taste like fresh apple pie.

    • 1 tablespoon of lemon juice (organic)
    • 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar
    • Hot water or warm apple juice.
    • Cinnamon stick or pinch of ground cinnamon.
    • A drop of honey to taste.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    1. Juice your lemon. Add a tablespoon to your mug.

    2. Stir in 1 tablespoon of ACV.

    3. Pop in a cinnamom stick.

    4. Pour in hot water to desired strength.

    5. Remove cinnamom stick.

    6. Add honey to taste. You can reduce the amount as you get used to the taste.

    Juicy apple cider vinegar drink

    A refreshing juice drink that’s perfect for a Summer’s day.

    • 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar
    • Apple juice or other clear juice.
    • A drop of honey to taste.

    1. Add 1 tablespoon of ACV to your glass.

    2. Pour over apple juice to required strength.

    3. Add honey to taste. You can reduce the amount as you get used to the taste.

    How to make apple cider vinegar drink shots?

    Let’s face it, you may not like the taste of ACV even using my delicious suggestions above!

    You might find it easier to drink an ACV shot (a small glass usually used gor spirits).

    However, please make sure your diluting your ACV. Undiluted ACV is not a good thing to drink. It’s acidity can damage your teeth and throat.

    Dilute ACV to a ratio of at least 10:1. So 10 parts water to 1 part ACV.

    How to store apple cider vinegarMaking your own ACV is a great way to use up apple peels and cores.

    Apple Cider Vinegar Shot Drink

    Great if you want to just get it over with!

    • 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar
    • Apple juice or other clear juice.
    • A drop of honey to taste.

    1. Add 1 teaspoon of ACV to your shot glass.

    2. Pour over water or juice.

    When is the best time to drink apple cider vinegar drink?

    Whenever you like really!

    I like to drink mine midday as it’s generally when I start flagging having run around with two toddlers all morning.

    It’s worth noting that some people advise using a straw to protect the enamel of your teeth when drinking ACV. If you do then please use a reusable straw.

    I hope our ‘how to make apple cider vinegar drink’ guide is useful…I’d love to know which is your favourite!

    You’ve been taking apple cider vinegar (ACV) for a while now. It’s not the most pleasant part of your day, but with possible weight-loss benefits, improved digestion, boosted immunity, and the fact that it’s rich in vitamins E, A, and P and minerals such as magnesium, iron, and calcium, you’re happily sipping it down. But are you taking it all wrong?

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Many people pour ACV into their tea or in hot water with lemon to cut the strong flavor, but does heating ACV ruin its benefits? We’ve enlisted the expertise of two nutritionists — Stephanie Clarke, RD, and Willow Jarosh, RD, of C&J Nutrition to answer this burning (pun intended!) question.

    They share that the helpful bacteria in ACV are known as acetobacter and lactic acid. Research shows that the acetobacter “thermal death point” is 125-129 °F (for reference, the temperature of boiling water is 212 °F). The good news is those bacterial strains need to be kept at the thermal death point temperature for longer periods of time to kill the bacteria (10 minutes).

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Stephanie and Willow say, “If you poured boiling water into a mug and stirred in apple cider vinegar, the temperature of the water would decrease pretty rapidly. So, there would probably still be live bacteria present, but the population would likely be greatly reduced. If you boiled water with ACV in it for longer than 10 minutes, you’d likely kill the bacteria, so you definitely want to avoid that. Both dietitians suggest preserving as many live/active bacteria as possible, by pouring ACV into cool or warm water, not in your boiling water when making tea. Here are some ACV drink recipes you can try.

    Apple Cider Vinegar, just another fad diet or the future? If you’re wondering about what ACV is, how you can take it and what “The Mother” is, you’ve come to the right place. Read below to find out more about Apple Cider Vinegar.


    Apple Cider Vinegar is made when yeast and bacteria are added to apple juice.

    Usually, this would start the fermentation process where the yeast turns the sugar in the fruit into alcohol. But don’t worry, there’s no alcohol in ACV.
    Eventually, bacteria turn the alcohol into acetic acid, which gives ACV it’s strong taste and smell. This is a natural process which doesn’t require heating or adding artificial additives.

    You can find out more about Apple Cider Vinegar here:

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    5 Common ACV Mistakes

    Reap the reward of adding ACV into your routine by avoiding these mistakes.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Apple Cider Vinegar Tablets, Gummies and Drink

    Learn about the different forms of apple cider vinegar.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Types & Use of ACV

    ACV is hugely versatile, we pull apart the different types to suit your needs.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Adding ACV to Your Diet

    We uncover holistic healthy habits to improve your eating habits.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    How to Take Apple Cider Vinegar

    Discover the different ways you can take apple cider vinegar.

    Different types of ACV

    There are a few different types of ACV. These include:

    • Filtered / Unfiltered – filtered means that “The Mother” is filtered out – you will notice that the liquid is clear compared to the unfiltered vinegars where she is still in!
    • Pasteurised / Unpasteurised – pasteurised means that the product is heat treated

    OSU Apple Cider Vinegar is unfiltered, unpasteurised and contains “The Mother”.

    Apple Cider Vinegar with “The Mother”

    Raw, unfiltered and unpasteurised Apple Cider Vinegar contains “The Mother”. She is a cloudy substance made from strands of protein which occur naturally during the fermentation.

    Unfiltered ACV has a cloudier appearance than filtered, because of “The Mother”. These natural enzymes settle to the bottom of the bottle, so be sure to give it a good shake before you use it.

    Apple Cider Vinegar Taste

    The taste of apple cider vinegar isn’t for everyone. This is the reason we blend our high-quality ACV with 100% natural fruit juices, to help with the sharp taste. At OSU, we sell two different flavours of ACV:

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    How to take Apple Cider Vinegar

    You can take Apple Cider Vinegar every day as part of a daily habit. At OSU, we believe in making small, actionable changes rather than fitness fads. As well as trying different flavours of Apple Cider Vinegar, you can add it into different foods and drink.

    When drinking ACV, it can be taken with water or added into hot drinks and smoothies. Try adding one part (20ml) OSU to nine parts of water. We wouldn’t recommend taking it straight.

    ACV can also be added to foods, like being used as marinade, salad dressing and added into cakes. Take a look at our recipes for some more inspiration.


    You can also buy OSU apple cider vinegar from the following UK retailers:

    You’ve heard of apple cider vinegar before but have you ever heard about “the mother”? Here’s why your ACV needs to have it and it’s incredible benefits!

    If the title of this blog post alone has you feeling confused, don’t worry. It isn’t a typo, and no one is getting fired. Apple cider vinegar with “the mother” is a type of apple cider vinegar (ACV). The mother ACV is a beneficial, nutrient-dense type of vinegar, but we’ll get to that soon.

    I remember growing up, my mom would make me tea with apple cider vinegar anytime I was feeling sick. Or, if my sister or friends got sick, my mom would make me a honey elixir with apple cider vinegar to help support my immune system in hopes I didn’t catch it too. She made sure it tasted good, and it usually worked, so I never really asked questions. Once I left the nest and had to make my own ACV drinks, I started to investigate exactly what apple cider vinegar benefits are.

    Apple cider vinegar benefits have become quite popular in the last few years, and shots of ACV are the norm. But what does it even do? Do you know why you take it? Today’s blog we’ll cover everything from apple cider vinegar benefits , to what the heck apple cider vinegar with “the mother” , or the mother ACV , is.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    What Is Apple Cider Vinegar With “The Mother”?

    Apple cider vinegar with “the mother” is an unrefined, unpasteurized, unfiltered version of apple cider vinegar. It’s full of gut-friendly probiotics called acetic acid bacteria. This particular bacteria is said to help act as a remedy from a wide range of things, which I dive into in more detail below.

    If you’ve ever bought the mother ACV , you know that it even looks different than filtered, or “regular”, apple cider vinegar. Apple cider vinegar with “the mother” is darker and looks like it has stuff floating around in it, which if you didn’t know what it was, you’d think it was expired or contaminated. When really, this is all the amazing bacteria and yeast that contribute to its healing powers!

    Apple cider vinegar with “the mother” is the premium of apple cider vinegars. It may not look as pretty, but it packs a punch of benefits. It isn’t as common to find on store shelves, but you can find it at some health food stores, and in good supplement brands.

    Apple Cider Vinegar Benefits

    It’s no secret apple cider vinegar is a great health supplement to have on hand. When you start purchasing unfiltered apple cider vinegar with “the mother” , you’ll start seeing those benefits come to life even more! Here are the top five benefits of apple cider vinegar.

    1. Immune Support

    One of the many apple cider vinegar benefits is that it supports immune function. It’s a great way to help ward off bacteria and infections. The antibacterial properties in apple cider vinegar, and especially the mother ACV , can help fight off harmful pathogens in our bodies. [ 1 ]

    2. Nail & Skin Benefits

    Not only did my mom know about using ACV for immunity, but she also always told me about the nail & skin benefits of apple cider vinegar. Apple cider vinegar with “the mother” is a great skin toner because it can help balance skin pH. Plus, it can act as an antifungal for nail infections, and smooth out cracked heels or fingers.[ 1 ]

    3. Healthy Weight Loss

    The apple cider vinegar shot tread started when people learned ACV can help aid in weight loss. While shots aren’t encouraged for their harshness on the esophagus, taking the mother ACV in drinks like teas and tonics, or digested in supplements, is a great way to support weight loss. [ 2 ]

    4. Lowers Blood Sugar

    Especially for diabetics, keeping track of blood sugar levels is very important. The particular acid found in apple cider vinegar is said to help prevent blood sugar spikes. [ 3 ] This can be especially useful information and could be a good reason to start supplementing with apple cider vinegar pre- or post-meal time.

    5. Anticancer Effects

    The same acid that helps prevent blood sugar spikes, may help contribute to cancer-fighting properties. One study found that apple cider vinegar can help to topically treat some types of cancers. [ 4 ]

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    How To Add The Mother ACV To Your Diet

    If you’re not loving the thought of drinking apple cider vinegar with “the mother” , then I have some AMAZING news for you. SkinnyFit is launching a new product…drumroll please. *Drumroll* SKINNY GUMMIES!

    There’s no way I’m the only one that’s been awaiting these bad boys. Skinny Gummies are not only delicious, but they contain the mother ACV . Skinny Fit knows all about apple cider vinegar benefits , and knew there had to be a way to add in the best of the best ACV into their gummies. Lo and behold, gummies with apple cider vinegar with “the mother”.

    Not only do SkinnyFit Skinny Gummies contain the mother ACV , but they also contain vitamin B12 and beetroot juice powder to support weight management, help reduce appetite, and promote glowing skin. Buy for the taste, subscribe for the benefits!

    It’s rare for a supplement to contain apple cider vinegar with “the mother” , so this is huge news! If you’re looking for a weight loss supplement in gummy-form, this is the one to get! It’s vegan, gluten-free, non-GMO, and comes in a delicious tropical berry flavor.

    It doesn’t just help with weight loss, though. It also aids in digestive support. If you tend to bloat or have upset stomachs, this is a great supplement to add to your diet.

    I can’t wait for you to get your hands on these Skinny Gummies. Let me know how you like them, and be sure to tag us if you track your health and fitness progress! And tell all your friends about the amazing benefits of apple cider vinegar with “the mother” in them.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    Originally published October 11, 2021 6:00:21 AM , updated October 22, 2021

    OPINION: Folk medicine has favoured apple cider vinegar for centuries and many claims are made for its supposed benefits.

    Apple cider vinegar is made by chopping apples, covering them with water and leaving them at room temperature until the natural sugars ferment and form ethanol. Bacteria then convert this alcohol into acetic acid.

    Strands of a “mother” will form in the cider. These are strained out of many products but left in others, and are often the target of health claims. The “mother” can also be used to start the production of the next batch of cider.

    But will apple cider vinegar really help you lose weight, fight heart disease, control blood sugar and prevent cancer? And what about claims it is rich in enzymes and nutrients such as potassium?

    Weight loss

    The evidence that apple cider vinegar helps fight fat is weak.

    A short-term study in Japan added two daily drinks of 15 millilitres of apple cider vinegar mixed with 250ml of water to the usual diet of overweight men and women. Their weight fell by about one kilogram over 12 weeks, but returned to usual levels within four weeks.

    According to a UK study, it may be that vinegar can suppress appetite. When offered a pleasant-tasting vinegar drink, one that was less palatable, or a non-vinegar drink with their breakfast, volunteers who downed both vinegar drinks felt slightly nauseated. Not surprisingly, this depressed their appetite, with the least palatable vinegar drink having the greatest effect.

    How to store apple cider vinegar
    The ‘mother’ is strained from some cider vinegars and left in others. Photo: Mike Mozart, CC BY

    Others claim taking apple cider vinegar with meals will help digest proteins faster and therefore generate higher levels of growth hormone. This is claimed to break down more fat cells. Unfortunately, there’s no evidence to support such ideas.

    Claims that pectin – a type of viscous dietary fibre – in cider vinegar will help weight loss by making you feel full for longer ignores the fact that the pectin in apples is not found in apple cider vinegar.

    Heart disease

    Pectin is again credited for cider vinegar’s supposed benefits for heart disease, with claims it “attracts bad LDL cholesterol”.

    However, the Japanese study referred to for weight loss found no difference in LDL cholesterol with either a low or higher amount of cider vinegar over a 12-week period.

    Others claim that cider vinegar works like a broom to clean toxic wastes out of the arteries. Sadly, there’s no evidence for that one either.

    Blood sugar and diabetes

    Several studies have reported on the effects cider vinegar can have on blood glucose levels. One small study of healthy volunteers found that adding vinegar to a meal reduced glucose and insulin levels – at least for 45 minutes – and increased satiety for up to two hours.

    Another small study of people with type 2 diabetes reported adding vinegar to a high carbohydrate meal reduced the subsequent rise in the blood glucose level.

    However, this effect was only apparent for a high glycaemic index carbohydrate, such as mashed potatoes. When the carbs came from a lower GI food such as wholegrain bread, the vinegar had no effect.

    A word of warning for those with type 1 diabetes who also have damage to the vagus nerve (a common co-problem): when taking apple cider vinegar in water before a carb-rich meal, the delay in the stomach contents passing to the small intestine may alter the quantity of insulin so the usual daily injection may be inappropriate.

    Other diseases

    As for allergies, acne, arthritis, hiccups and leg cramps, there is no evidence that apple cider vinegar prevents or cures any of these conditions.

    Nor is there evidence from any studies that cider vinegar has benefits for preventing or curing cancer. Unproven cancer cures can waste valuable time in seeking reliable treatments.

    So is it worth taking?

    Some sites promoting unrefined cider vinegar claim it is a good source of potassium. We certainly need potassium to help regulate the balance of water and acidity in the blood.

    But with apple cider manufacturers declaring their products have just 11 milligrams per 15 ml serve (and a recommendation for two serves a day) it is a negligible source. The recommended dietary intake of potassium is 2,800 mg/day for women and 3,800 mg/day for men. Bananas have around 400 mg.

    How to store apple cider vinegar
    An average banana has 400 mg of potassium. Photo: Scott Webb/Unsplash

    In Australia, products cannot claim to be a source of any nutrient unless a reasonable daily intake provides at least 10% of the recommended daily intake (RDI). A “good source” must have 25% of the RDI.

    There is also no evidence to support the idea that apple cider vinegar makes it easier to absorb calcium.

    On the good side, like all vinegars, it has virtually no kilojoules and, mixed with extra virgin olive oil, makes an excellent salad dressing.

    How to store apple cider vinegarFinally, a word of warning: don’t drink apple cider vinegar “neat”. It can damage the throat and oesophagus. Even diluted, its acidity can damage tooth enamel.

    Rosemary Stanton is a Nutritionist & Visiting Fellow at UNSW.

    This article was originally published on The Conversation. Read the original article.

    “Step by step procedure
    for making apple cider vinegar.”

    Homemade apple cider vinegar made the traditional way, starting from apple juice, is a two-step process. Both steps are easy to do and the process is completly natural.

    How to store apple cider vinegarFirst, the freshly pressed apple juice is fermented into hard apple cider using the natural yeasts already present in the juice. The only equipment you will need is an air lock for the fermentation and a hydrometer to determine the potential alcohol content of the finished cider (both are inexpensive and readily available at your local home brew shop).

    Once completed, the hard apple cider is then simply exposed to air to convert it into homemade apple cider vinegar as outlined in the Vinegar Making Procedure.

    Procedure for Making
    Traditional Hard Apple Cider
    Used to get homemade apple cider vinegar

    1) Use one gallon (3.8 Liters) of freshly pressed apple juice from your local apple orchard. The juice should be unfiltered, additive free, and non-pasteurized for maximum nutrition and flavor and to allow the natural yeasts in the juice to ferment the sugar to alcohol.

    2) Determine the amount of sugar in the apple juice by measuring its specific gravity or density with a simple hydrometer. The more sugar contained in the apple juice, the higher its density.

    (Click here for information on a hydrometer and how to use it to determine sugar content.)

    Juice made from North American dessert apples will have a specific gravity between 1.040 and 1.050 and if allowed to ferment fully, will result in a hard cider with around 5.5 to 6.5 percent alcohol content.
    If, on the off chance you find the apple juice specific gravity less than 1.040, then add some plain old granulated white sugar (sucrose) directly to the juice as follows:
    Add 2.25 ounces (67.5 grams) of sugar to raise the specific gravity of one gallon of juice by 5 points (for example from 1.035 to 1.040).

    3) Unscrew the top of the one gallon juice container, screw on a How to store apple cider vinegarfermentation air lock, and allow the container to stand at room temperature for 6 to 8 weeks. The air lock will allow the carbon dioxide gas, produced during the fermentation, to escape while at the same time preventing the oxygen in the air from getting into the cider and interfering with the reaction.

    (This hard apple cider and homemade apple cider vinegar fermentation equipment can be purchased online at

    4) After 6 to 8 weeks the fermentation will be complete. There will be no more carbon dioxide gas escaping through the air lock and there will be a thick deposit of lees at the bottom of the container.
    To make sure all the sugar has been converted to alcohol, check the cider’s specific gravity, which should be less than 1.005.
    If the reading is still too high, wait another week and test again.

    How to store apple cider vinegar

    (Click here for information on a hydrometer and how to use it to determine potential alcohol content.)

    To compute the alcohol content of the completed apple cider, take a hydrometer reading (using the potential alcohol scale) after fermentation and subtract it from the value you obtained before fermentation.

    5) Separate the cider from the lees by siphoning the liquid into clean storage bottles using a section of plastic tubing. (Tubing with a 0.5 inch inside diameter will do fine.)

    You are now ready to make your own homemade apple cider vinegar, just follow the procedure outlined in the Vinegar Making Procedure Starting from Hard Apple Cider.

    This stuff is liquid gold.

    Lucy Carlisle

    By adding your email you agree to get updates about Spoon University Healthier

    Taking an apple cider vinegar shot (aka ACV) has become a part of my morning routine. The benefits of it were clear soon after I began religiously taking a shot a day, and I suggest everyone add this to their diet to kickstart a healthy lifestyle. Keep reading to hear some of my tips for drinking this pungent vinegar.

    What’s ACV?

    More literally, apple cider vinegar is made out of the liquid of crushed apples. Bacteria and yeast are added to it to start fermentation and then—bam!—you’ve got ACV. It’s sold at grocery stores and drugstores, and my personal favorite is the brand pictured above (Bragg Organic). It may be a bit more expensive than the store brand, but it’s raw, unfiltered, unpasteurized, and organic.

    ACV is rich in acetic acid, probiotics, magnesium, potassium, and enzymes, all of which have many healing qualities for the body.

    Why Should I Take a Shot of This Stuff?

    AVC is liquid gold. The internal and external benefits of drinking it on the daily are seemingly endless. According to CNN, this vinegar has been shown to help lower blood sugar in type 2 diabetics, may aid weight loss, and helps prevent mosquito bites from itching.

    #SpoonTip: If you’re a diabetic taking ACV, let you doctor know. Nutritionist Lisa Drayer told CNN that ACV may amplify the effect of certain diabetes medications, so definitely chat with your doctor first.

    The acetic acid in this kind of vinegar is a huge component in its miracle working. It kills “bad” bacteria and fosters the growth of “good” bacteria, meaning that ACV can benefit skin, digestion, and immunity health with no side effects.

    The Month-Long Experiment

    Before starting this experiment, my thoughts were simple. My mom cooks with ACV, I love apples, and I like vinegar on my salad. How bad could it be? Well, just as bad as taking a regular shot is my answer.

    The first week and a half I had to get used to taking a pungent shot of vinegar every morning. In the beginning it felt like I was getting my day started with a shot of alcohol and I wasn’t into it.

    #SpoonTip: Take the shot before you brush your teeth, so you can brush the taste out after.

    At the end of week two, I was finally used to the taste and not gagging anymore. This was when I finally started feeling and seeing the results. The small shot would actually fill me up so I didn’t need to eat as much. My skin also got significantly “glowier.”

    #SpoonTip: Don’t take the ACV out of a shot glass. Take it out of the bottle or pour a bit in a cup, so it feels less like pregaming your day.

    Weeks three and four were simple. It became part of my morning routine and the taste became familiar. Also, when you start seeing positive results from something, it becomes easier to do.

    The Results

    After a month, I decided that ACV was not something I wanted to take out of my diet. I lost four pounds during the month, noticed healthier skin, less stomachaches, and just overall felt like it started me on the right track in the morning.

    #SpoonTip: Leave the bottle of ACV wherever you get ready in the morning, so you don’t forget to take it. The bottle can be stored in room temperature, it doesn’t need to be refrigerated.

    With this in mind, I live a healthy lifestyle already. I exercise regularly and have a healthy diet. So while ACV will not miraculously fix all your problems if you still eat McDonald’s for every meal, it can help set you on the right track for making healthier choices.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Friday, October 25, 2013

    How to Organize an iPod Touch: 5 Steps (with Pictures) – wikiHow

    An unorganized iPod Touch can look really sloppy and unprofessional. Organizing your iPod Touch can make it much easier to find a specific song, app, or other piece of data that you’ve stored on it, as well as making your use of the device much more enjoyable.

    How to organize an ipod touch


    How to organize an ipod touch

    ORGANIZE YOUR MUSIC PLAYLIST FIRST. When you go through your iPod, you usually look at your music before anything else. A cluttered playlist is unpleasant to the eye and can be frustrating if you’re in a hurry to get the music started, such as before taking a walk or when getting on a crowded bus.
    Make sure all songs are under the same artist. Place the featuring artist in brackets in front of the song name, not with the artist. This groups the song with other songs by that artist; otherwise, it would be considered a separate artist.
    For example, it should be “Airplanes (feat. Hayley Williams)” by B.o.B, not “Airplanes” by B.o.B feat. Hayley Williams.
    Find the correct album and album artwork that goes along with it. Wikipedia is a helpful website to use for finding the correct artwork.
    Get the correct song information, such as year and genre. Again, Wikipedia can help. If you buy music from iTunes, they will usually provide everything, including the album artwork.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    ORGANIZE YOUR APPS. This can be done both on iTunes, while your iPod is connected, by going to the Apps screen under your device. You can drag the apps to rearrange them. Alternately, you can do it directly on your device by tapping and holding an app until they start shaking and have a circled X on the top left-hand corner (Wiggle mode).
    Drag an app over another to create a folder within those two apps. This can only be done if your iPod is using IOS 4.2 or higher. The folder name depends on the type of app inside (for example, two social networking apps will make the folder name “Social Networking”), but the name can be manually changed to something else. Each folder can hold up to twelve apps.
    Group similar apps with folders. A common method is to place all games into folders and then arrange them into alphabetical order. For example, since one folder holds twelve apps, one could name the first folder “Games A-G” and put games starting with A-G into it, and so forth.
    Arrange your apps into alphabetical order.
    Install any app updates as soon as you check the App Store. A small update can fix a crashing issue and save you from further irritation.
    Buy one of those 90-in-1 apps. These apps have several apps bundled into one. Most contain unit converters, document viewers, battery monitor, among others. After you install the app, you can delete any individual app of the same purpose. They are usually $0.99 or $1.99, but it’s a small price to pay to keeping both your iPod and personal life organized.
    Arrange your four most used apps onto the dock. This can be done by dragging the apps already on it onto a home screen and replacing them with other apps.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    DELETE ANYTHING YOU DON\’T NEED ANYMORE. Remove anything you don’t need, use or like anymore, whether it’s apps, songs, videos or photos, etc. This helps to maintain good organization and will also free up disk space for things you do want.
    Delete e-mail you’ve read already. If you need to keep a specific e-mail, create a folder and move that e-mail into it.
    Delete notes you don’t need anymore. The Notes app comes pre-installed with the iPod and is great for taking short notes, but it can quickly become cluttered if you have too many notes.
    Make it a rule to immediately delete lists once the tasks are completed or items purchased.
    Save photos onto your computer and delete them off your iPod.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    FINALLY, SAVE YOUR CHANGES BY SYNCING YOUR IPOD. You should also create a backup in case something happens in the future and you need to restore the entire iPod.
    You can reset the home screen layout to default settings by going to Settings > General > Reset > Reset Home Screen Layout. This gets rid of created folders and arranges all apps alphabetically.
    You can arrange your apps based on the category and move them to its own separate page. For example, all games can be on one page; all social networking on the next page, etc.
    If you’re concerned about privacy and/or security, set a passcode by going to Settings > General > Passcode Lock. For maximum security, make a long passcode instead of a 4-digit number and set it to lock it immediately.
    While on iTunes, arrange your playlist by name, artist, or time and delete any duplicate songs.
    Creating playlists can keep you organized and increase battery life as well. Make individual playlists for different tasks/events. For example, you could create a “Workout” playlist with upbeat songs. Oppositely, a playlist called “Relaxing songs” with slow, relaxing songs can be made.
    These steps can also be used for organizing an iPhone.
    To delete apps, go into Wiggle mode and tap the X at the corner. This will remove the app from your iPod and delete any data associated with it, but it will not be permanently deleted. In case you accidentally delete an app, you can get it back by re-syncing it to your iPod via iTunes.
    A single cover can be used if album artwork is unavailable.
    Owners of devices with iOS 4.2 or higher are advised to make folders. However, iOS 4.2.1 is the final release for iPhone 3G and 2nd generation iPod Touch.
    Try to have at least two songs per album. It looks pretty ugly if an album only has one song.
    Make the important apps that you always use like Instagram, iMessage and Music go on the bottom so you don’t have to swipe the pages to find the app.

    Mostly people use iPod today to listen to their favorite track because of good sound quality. Updating it is possible using iTunes. Like adding songs or videos is possible using iTunes only according to the apple but while using iTunes to add new songs to iPod or organize music library it’s really frustrating sometime. Because it takes a lot of time to add songs using iTunes and it replaces old songs as well, so you will not able to add new songs with old songs also. For that condition you can go for other solution which enables you to organize music on iPod without using iTunes. We are going to tell you 2 solutions to organize your iPod music through this article.

    Part 1. Best Way to Organize Music on iPod

    Wondershare TunesGo is a best way to organize music on your iPod. While using Wondershare TunesGo you don’t need to use iTunes to organize music on iPod. You can do all your operations directly from the TunesGo user interface. Like adding or deleting songs or exporting them to computer or your iTunes library as well. This software allows you to connect your all ios and android devices to and organize all types of data from both types of devices. You can download it for windows or mac. It is available for both operating systems on the official page of Wondershare TunesGo.

  • TunesGo enables you to organize music on iPod without using iTunes or any other requirement.
  • Enables to transfer your iPod music to iTunes library as well.
  • Enable you to export or add from to your computer or from your computer in few clicks.
  • It supports all ios devices so you can connect any idevice such as iPhone, iPad or iPod.
  • It enables you to transfer music files from your android devices in few clicks only. You can connect any android device with TunesGo.
  • It automatically fixes incomplete id3 information while transferring music files to other devices.
  • It is able to unsupported formats to supported one automatically when you transfer any music file to other device.
  • Toolkit of TunesGo enables you to rebuild iTunes library in one click.
  • Android users can root their device easily using TunesGo.
  • Support iPod Shuffle/iPod Nano/iPod Classic/iPod Touch
  • Fully compatible with iOS 11

    How to organize music on iPod using TunesGo

    Step 1 If you want to use TunesGo to manage your iPod library then you need to download it on your computer or mac. After downloading you will see a user interface like the below picture. Here you need to connect your iPod with computer using a USB cable.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Step 2 Now connect your iPod using your USB cable. TunesGo will automatically detect your device once you have connected it to computer.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Step 3 Now you can anything with your music files once it is connected to computer.

    Export iPod music to pc

    If you are looking to export your music files to pc, click on Music tab on the top after connecting your device with TunesGo. Select the music files which you want to export to pc. After selecting your files click on Export button. Then click on Export to PC. Select your destination folder and click ok. You have successfully exported your music files to computer.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Add Music to iPod

    Adding music files is possible with TunesGo to add music to iPod go in the music section and click on “Add” button. Select Add File or Add Folder. It will ask you to browse your file. Now locate the resource music file which you want to add and click on Open button. TunesGo will add music to iPod automatically.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Delete music from iPod

    You can also delete music from iPod using TunesGo. To delete music files, go to Music and select the files which you want to delete and click on “Delete” option on the top. Which is able to clickable after selecting the files only, once click on delete on the next screen click on yes to confirm deletion.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Part 2. Organize Music on iPod with iTunes

    User can organize music on iPod with iTunes also but this is not easy way it takes time to add or delete songs using iTunes. You need to do some changes in iTunes and must have some technical knowledge about iTunes as well.

    Step 1 First of all, launch iTunes on your computer. You need to do some changes in the iTunes to start the process of organize music on iPod with iTunes. Now connect your iPod using its USB cable and click on your device

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Step 2 Click on your iPod which is available on the top or in the device list. Now you need to go to Summary section and scroll down your cursor here and you will see option “Manually manage music and videos” check this option and click on done option.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Step 3 Once you have checked this option now you can easily add music to iPod. Go to file and click on Add File to library.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Step 4 Once you have clicked on “Add File to Library” it will ask you to browse your music files. Now locate the music files which you want to add to iPod. Select music files and finally click on open button. After clicking on open button it will add song to your iTunes library.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Step 5 Still your song is not added to iPod, and it is there in the iTunes library. To add it to iPod you need to go to Recently Added items. In this section you can see you recently added song. Find the song here and right click on it. When you right click on song one pop window will open. Select “Add to Device” option here and move cursor on your device name and click on it. Now your music file will be added to iPod successfully.

    You can organize the apps on your Home Screen, put them in folders, and move them to other pages, or screens. You can also reorder your pages.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    How to organize your apps

    1. Touch and hold any app on the screen, then tap Edit Home Screen .
    2. Drag the app to another spot, like the Dock at the bottom of the screen.
    3. On iPhone X and later, tap Done to save. On iPhone 8 and earlier, press the Home button.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    How to organize an ipod touch

    How to put apps in a folder

    If you have a lot of apps, you can put your related apps in folders. Here’s how:

    1. To make a folder, drag an app onto another app.
    2. To rename the folder, tap the name field or the Close button , then enter the new name.
    3. Drag apps into the folder. Folders can have more than one page.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    How to organize an ipod touch

    How to move an app to a different page

    You start with one page of apps. To make a new page, touch and hold an app until the apps jiggle, then drag an app to the right edge of the screen. You might need to wait a second for the new page to appear. To delete a page, consolidate all of your apps to another Home Screen. When there are no apps present the page will delete.

    When you have more than one page, a bright dot in a row of dots above the Dock shows you which page you’re on. You can move an app to a different page and create new pages:

    How to organize an ipod touch

    If there are dots to the left or right of the bright dot, you can drag an app to the right side of the screen to move the app to the next page in that direction. Or swipe left to see the apps on that page.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    If there are no dots to the right of the bright dot, dragging an app to that side of the screen makes a new page.

    When you think of iTunes, you might think of clunky, slow, and bloated software that isn’t always the easiest to use. If you’re looking for something that allows you to manage iPod content easier, today we look at some free and commercial alternatives.

    Even with the recent release of iTunes 10, speed and performance hasn’t been addressed in any meaningful way. We have covered some tips to make iTunes run faster, but if you’re a geek who wants as as little to do with iTunes as possible, we’ll look at some quality alternatives.

    CopyTrans Manager

    This is a free app that will let you transfer your songs from your computer to an iPod, iPod Touch, or iPhone out of the box. After a quick and easy install, it will launch and is ready for you to connect your iPod, iPod Touch / iPhone.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    We were then able to add playlists to CopyTrans Manager and sync them with the iPod. You can add and delete music, videos, podcasts, and more. It’s lightweight and works nice for managing your music collection without iTunes. You can also listen to the music through your computer with your iPod or iOS device plugged in.

    They also offer a standalone version that you can use on your iPod and listen to your music on any computer without having to authorize it via iTunes.

    How to organize an ipod touch


    Foobar2000 is a personal favorite because it’s light on system resources and is a fully customizable player. To get it working with your iPod you’ll need to install a couple of free components to get it to sync up, but once you do it works very well. The two components you need are the iPod Manager and Nero AAC Codec.

    For a full step-by-step…check out our article on how to use your iPod with Foobar2000.

    How to organize an ipod touch


    Another good alternative is either the free Standard version of MediaMonkey or the Gold version which requires a license. It allows you to manage your iPod out of the box without any additional addons and will play a large number of music formats including FLAC, MP3, APE, AAC, and more.

    How to organize an ipod touch


    Songbird has actually come a long way in its evolution, and if you leave the defaults while installing, it will also work with your iPod out of the box. During setup make sure to import your iTunes library.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Now you can select to automatically sync all music or sync selected playlists manually.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    You can simply drag and drop songs from your music collection over to your iPod too.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    It also includes a lot of other cool features including different skins or “feathers” as Songbird calls them. Along with many plugins for enhancing your music experience.

    How to organize an ipod touch


    SharePod is a useful tool that lets you transfer music and video from your iPod, iPod Touch, or iPhone to you PC and vice versa.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Highlight the songs you want to copy to your PC and click Copy to computer on the navigation bar. Then choose a location on your hard drive, decide how you want the music to look like, and you can import tracks to iTunes if you want.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    How to organize an ipod touch

    SharePod doesn’t require installation so you can run it from a thumb drive which is always useful. After your tunes are copied over, you can move them where you want.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    It has a simple media player so you can play your songs from your iPod as well.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    One caveat we noticed is when we tried to copy media to an iPod Touch running iOS 4.1 we received the following error. This is a project that is in constant development, so the issue will likely be fixed in future releases. We didn’t have a non-iOS iPod to test out, but if you’ve had success with the Nano, Shuffle, or older generation device let us know in the comments.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Commercial Software

    We have also covered a couple of commercial apps that will help you manage your iPod data without iTunes. Starting with TouchCopy 09 that works on Mac and PC and let’s you use your iPod as a hard drive.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Another handy utility for managing and cleaning it up a messy iTunes collection is TuneUp Media, which does have a free limited version and also an Annual and Gold service.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    It’s really unfortunate we need to find other alternatives to iTunes to better manage music on our iPods. With the introduction of iTunes 10, we were hoping there would be wireless sync capability and a streamlined interface. That wasn’t the case though, and one could call iTunes 10 the same old piece of bloated software it’s always been. If you’d like to make iTunes 10 a bit lighter, check out our step-by-step guide to installing iTunes without extra bloatware.

    If you want to stick with iTunes for accessing the iTunes store and other features like Home Sharing, check out our article on Ways to Make iTunes Run Faster. By using different alternatives, you can get by with using iTunes as little as possible for things like updates, and the iTunes Store. Of course if you have an iOS device, you can access a lot of it directly from your device.

    While the apps we covered here do a good job of managing your iPod, there are a lot of other apps out there we didn’t cover here. What is your take? Are you sick of iTunes and looking for an alternative? Leave us a comment and let us know what you use.

    GarageBand For Dummies

    If your entire library is too big for your iPod, you may want to copy individual items manually. By setting your iPod to manually manage music and videos, you can add content to the device directly via iTunes. You can even copy some songs or videos from another computer’s iTunes library without deleting any content from your iPod.

    To set your iPod to manually manage music and videos, first connect it to your computer. Then follow these steps:

    Click the iPod button.

    The Summary sync page appears, displaying sync options.

    Select the Manually Manage Music and Videos check box (on an iPod shuffle, select Manually Manage Music; if the iPod touch is synced to iTunes Match, select Manually Manage Videos).

    iTunes displays a message for iPod nano and iPod classic models (and older models), warning you that manually managing music and videos also requires manually ejecting the iPod before each disconnect.

    Click the OK button for the warning and click the Apply button to apply the change.

    How to autofill your iPod

    After setting your iPod to manually manage music and videos, you can automatically fill your iPod without syncing. Autofill either randomly picks songs from your entire iTunes library or picks songs from a playlist you specify.

    Autofill is especially useful for copying random songs to an iPod shuffle every time you connect it to your computer. Eventually, you can shuffle through everything in your library if you so wish by randomly autofilling your iPod shuffle every time you sync.

    To autofill your iPod, connect it to your computer, click the iPod button, and set the option to manage music and videos (or to manually manage music on the iPod shuffle) on the Summary sync page — if you haven’t done this already. Then follow these steps:

    Click the On This iPod tab.

    The music on your iPod appears, along with the Autofill From pop-up menu at the bottom.

    Choose your source of music from the Autofill From pop-up menu.

    Choose either one of your playlists, or choose Purchased (for all purchased music) or Music for the entire music library. If you choose a playlist, Autofill uses only the playlist as the source to pick random songs. After choosing your source of music, iTunes creates a playlist and displays it.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    (Optional) Click the Settings button to set options, and then click the OK button.

    After clicking the Settings button, the Autofill Settings dialog appears. You can choose to replace all the items on the iPod, to choose items randomly, or to choose higher rated items more often.

    Click the Autofill button to start copying songs.

    iTunes copies the contents of the Autofill playlist to your iPod.

    Wait for the copy operation to finish, and then click Done.

    Always wait until the iTunes status pane tells you that the copying is finished.

    How to copy items to your iPod manually

    To copy items manually to your iPod, connect the iPod to your computer, click the iPod button, and set the option to manage music and videos (or to manually manage music on the iPod shuffle) on the Summary sync page — if you haven’t done this already. Then follow these steps:

    Click the On This iPod tab.

    The music on your iPod appears.

    Click the Add To button in the upper-right corner of the view under the Done button.

    Your iTunes library shifts over to the left to make room for the iPod column showing the content types and playlists on the iPod.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Drag items (such as one or more songs or an album) directly from your iTunes library to the iPod column.

    You can drag individually selected songs or selected albums — the number of items you are copying appears over the pointer as you drag the items. When you drag an album cover or album title, all the songs in the album are copied. If you drag a playlist name from your library to the iPod column, all the songs associated with the playlist copy along with the playlist itself.

    You can also copy albums into a playlist on the iPod by dragging them over the playlist name in the iPod column.

    Wait for the copying to finish and then click Done.

    Click the eject button and disconnect your iPod from your computer.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Recent Posts

    • It’s About Time March 18, 2022
    • It’s Time to Blog Again July 19, 2021
    • Guess What? July 5, 2021
    • A list of things I am waiting for January 4, 2021
    • (no title) December 18, 2020
    • Call It a Win October 20, 2020
    • People Do Weird Things When I Am Walking May 10, 2020
  • Goodreads

    How to organize an ipod touch > Internet > Tutorials > How to Make Playlists on your iPod Use the Same Sort as iTunes

    How to Make Playlists on your iPod Use the Same Sort as iTunes

    I’ve been loving my brand-new iPod Nano except for one thing: it refused to show my “Top Rated” playlist in the same order as in iTunes. In fact, on iTunes showed the playlist as ordered by dated added on for both my library and iPod, but my iPod kept showing the playlist by play count. A quick Google search for “ipod playlist sort order” told me that I just had to right-click the playlist and select the option to copy by sort option. In fact, I had the same problem with my iPod Touch, and that did fix the problem, but it wasn’t going to work this time around.

    The next result suggested that I should edit the information for all tracks to remember position. This also did not help. I finally set the iPod to manually edit and dragged my correctly-sorted playlist onto it, but that was to no avail. I resorted to a complete restore, and the sort finally did change… to another wrong order. According to iTunes, my iPod already should be sorted how I want it.

    Then I figured out how to fix it.

    How to Fix iPod Playlist Sort Order

    1. Click the name of your iPod. Check to manually edit.
    2. Click “Apply.”
    3. Select the playlist from beneath your iPod.
    4. Change the sort order, if it’s not the order that you want.
    5. Click in the number column just to activate it.
    6. Sync your iPod.

    This is a super annoying bug. Apple should get on the ball. Apparently, iTunes recognized the playlist but clicking the number column registered that I actually want to, you know, use this order. Of course, you can’t activate the columns if your iPod is set to automatically sync, but you can return it to this mode after performing this.

    Good night and good luck, folks.

    2 comments on “How to Make Playlists on your iPod Use the Same Sort as iTunes”

    I can totally feel the frustration you’re feeling. I’ve had quite a few problems with my iPod Nano as well (I think mine’s 4th gen). For the loooooongest time, I could not for the life of me figure out how to make it fill up with random songs. It always picked the exact same songs, over and over again, unless I picked the songs out myself. -_-; Finally, in one of the most recent updates to iTunes, it started letting me random fill again. But now it doesn’t add to the play count on iTunes anymore. Stupid, stupid Apple. I think they do it on purpose just to laugh at us.

    Is the whole iPod library so large for you with thousands of files that it is not convenient to manage and edit individual items manually? Instead of complicated operations with iTunes to arrange your iPod library, you may prefer to manage iPod without iTunes. Then in this article, we would like to recommend FoneTrans, a professional and flexible iPod manager tool for you.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    How to organize and edit iPod files without iTunes

    Whether you want to manage iPod music, videos, photos, contacts and so on, FoneTrans is your best iPod management assistant, supporting different iPod types like iPod touch, iPod nano, iPod Shuffle and more. Besides, it can also transfer data from iPod to computer, computer to iPod as well as even iPod to iPod. Apart from iPod, FoneTrans is also compatible with any iPhone and iPad. First, download and install the brilliant iPod data manager on your PC or Mac.

    1 Launch the iPhone data manager

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Launch this iPod files manager on PC or Mac. Plug your iPod to computer with via USB cable. The program will detect your device automatically and show the main info of that in the interface.

    2 Delete iPod contacts, photos, music or videos

    How to organize an ipod touch

    You can also use FoneTrans to delete unnecessary iPod files to free up more storage. Tick the target files, simply click choose “Delete” button or right click the files and choose to delete them.

    3 Edit and de-duplicate contacts

    How to organize an ipod touch

    It also enables you to add/edit iPod contacts (contact name, phone number, email address and more) on your computer. Moreover, you can de-duplicate contacts. Click the button of “De-duplicate”, the program is able to automatically scan all contacts and show the duplicate contacts for you. You are enabled to choose the match type, “Exactly matched” or “Name, email or phone matched”. Then you can choose “Merge” option to merge the duplicate contacts, or choose “Ignore” to keep them on your iPod.

    4 Convert audio and video format

    How to organize an ipod touch

    When you import unsupported audio or video, FoneTran is able to automatically convert the incompatible video/audio format to the iPod supported one.

    5 Create iPod playlist

    How to organize an ipod touch

    You are allowed to create a new iPod playlist by clicking “Playlist” button and import songs to iPod. And for the existing iPod music playlists, you can manage them within several clicks.

    6 Edit ID3 music info

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Want to edit the information of the individual song? FoneTrans can also do that for you. Highlight and right click the song, and choose to edit info. And here, you can edit the song name, artist, album, genre, etc.

    7 Transfer iPod files

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Choose the files you want to copy and transfer. Here we take music as an example. After you select and mark the target music items, click “Export to” from the upper menu, and you can choose to export music to PC, transfer to iTunes Library, or even move them to another iOS device.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    FoneTrans can be your best iPod Manager to manage iPod without iTunes. More features can surprise you as long as you download this outstanding iOS management tool.

    What do you think of this post?

    • 1
    • 2
    • 3
    • 4
    • 5

    Rating: 4.8 / 5 (based on 267 votes)

    How to organize an ipod touch

    December 15, 2020 10:24 / Updated by Louisa White to iTunes

    This article mainly describes how to manage iPhone files.

    How to manage iPod data on Mac? This article can tell you.

    You can easily transfer music from computer to iPod without iTunes.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    When songs on your iPod get sorted into the wrong albums, it makes listening to complete albums difficult. Find out how to fix this common problem.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Vice President of Content / CNET

    Sharon Profis is Vice President of Content CNET.

    If you’ve noticed that some albums in your iPod, iPad, or iPhone’s library are missing tracks, you’re not alone. iTunes often places tracks (especially those from movie soundtraks) in the wrong albums, making the search for the song you crave a frustrating task.

    Sorting by artist can also be buggy–if an album includes songs with featured artists, iTunes will treat those artists (i.e., Britney Spears ft. Will.I.Am) as unique.

    This is a common problem, but luckily there’s an easy way to keep your iPod songs organized in the right albums.

    To fix broken albums:
    Go to iTunes and sort by album. Then, highlight all the songs in the album you need to fix. Right-click your selection and select “Get info.” Click yes when it asks if you’re sure want to edit multiple items.

    Head to the Options tab, and check the box next to “Part of a compilation” and change the drop-down to “Yes.” Click “OK.”

    To fix misplaced artists:
    Select all the songs in the album you want to fix. Right-click the selection and click “Get info.”

    In this window, check the box next to “Artist” and enter the name of the artist. Press “OK.”

    Hardware, software, models, and more

    How to organize an ipod touch

    • Tweet
    • Share
    • Email
    • Tweet
    • Share
    • Email

    In This Article

    Jump to a Section

    The iPod Touch was popular because it’s a lot more than just a way to play digital music. Since it runs iOS, the same operating system used by the iPhone, the iPod Touch is also a web browsing device, a communications tool, a portable game system, and a video player.

    Apple ended production of the iPod Touch in 2022.

    What Was the iPod Touch?

    The iPod Touch, sometimes incorrectly called the “iTouch,” was the top-of-the-line iPod. In fact, it’s missing just a few features that make it different from an iPhone. The iPod Touch has long been referred to as “an iPhone without the phone,” and that’s basically correct.

    The hardware and software features of both devices are fairly similar (though the iPod touch isn’t updated as often as the iPhone, so the closest relative to the latest iPod touch is the slightly old iPhone 6 series).

    How to Set up and Use the iPod touch

    Once you’ve gotten an iPod Touch, you’ll need to set it up. The setup process is pretty easy and quick, and once you’ve completed it, you can get the good stuff, like:

    • Adding your own music
    • Buying music from iTunes
    • Using the Music app
    • Getting apps from the App Store
    • Setting up FaceTime.

    Once you start to learn the basic features of your iPod touch, it’s time to boost your skills by tackling some of these more advanced topics:

    • Creating folders to store apps
    • Using AirPlay
    • Discovering the many uses of the Home button
    • Rearranging home screen icons
    • Setting and changing your wallpaper.

    Hardware Features of the iPod Touch

    While the early models of the iPod Touch all featured roughly the same set of hardware features, the options on the 6th generation (listed below) are modern and powerful, making the device a near alternative to the iPhone.

    • Screen: The 4-inch high-resolution, multi-touch, Retina Display screen is the same as the one used in the iPhone 5 and includes the same features, like zooming in and out by pinching. The 4th generation touch and earlier used a 3.5-inch screen. The Retina Display screen was introduced with the 4th gen. model and is now standard.
    • Home button: The button on the bottom center of the face of the iPod Touch is used in many functions, including quitting programs and multitasking.
    • Hold button: This button on the top right corner of the Touch locks the screen and puts the device to sleep.
    • Volume control: On the left side of the Touch is a button that can be pressed in two directions, one each to raise or lower the volume.
    • Wi-Fi: The Touch accesses the Internet via Wi-Fi, with all later models using 802.11b/g standards. The 6th gen. model includes support for both the 2.5 GHz and 5 GHz Wi-Fi bands and adds support for 802.11a/n/ac.
    • Camera: The 6th generation touch sports two cameras, a higher resolution unit on the back for photography and a lower-resolution, user-facing camera for FaceTime video chats and selfies.
    • Dock Connector: This slot on the bottom of the Touch is used to sync content between a computer and the device, and to connect some accessories. The 5th and 6th gen. models use the smaller Lightning connector, while all earlier models used the older, bigger 30-pin version.
    • Accelerometer: A sensor that allows the Touch to respond to how the device is held and moved. This feature is most often used in games and gives players more immersive and interesting ways to control onscreen action.

    iPod Touch Help

    While the iPod Touch was a great device, it’s not completely trouble-free. In your early days of using it, you may run into situations where it freezes. If so, you should be familiar with how to restart it.

    When you’re using the Touch, there are a number of precautions you should take the protect yourself and your device, including:

    • Avoiding hearing loss
    • Guarding against theft
    • Improving security
    • Dealing with a wet iPod touch
    • What to do when deleted text messages are still showing up.

    Eventually, you may start to notice some reduced capacity in the Touch’s battery. Squeeze more juice out of it with tips to improve its battery life. Eventually, you’ll need to decide whether to buy a new MP3 player or look into battery replacement services.

    Want help with your touch directly from Apple? Check out Apple’s selection of iPod touch manuals.

    All iPod Touch Models Explained

    The iPod Touch debuted in Sept. 2007 and saw a few updates. The models are:

    • 7th Generation: This model was the first update to the Touch in almost four years. It’s similar to the iPhone 7 series thanks to its Apple A10 Fusion processor and up to 256 GB of storage.
    • 6th Generation: This model brings many of the hardware features of the iPhone 6 series — the A8 processor and M8 motion coprocessor, an 8-megapixel camera, 128 GB storage capacity — to the touch lineup while maintaining the same size and weight.
    • 5th Generation: This model of the Touch is very similar to the iPhone 5. It includes a 4-inch screen, the speedy A5 processor, support for Siri, and is very light and thin. Available in 16GB, 32GB, and 64GB models.
    • 4th Generation: This model gained the high-resolution Retina Display screen, two cameras including one that records video at 720p HD, and support for FaceTime.
    • 3rd Generation: Storage capacity bumped up here to 16GB, 32GB, and 64GB, and the device gained greater performance thanks to a faster chip and more powerful graphics hardware.
    • 2nd Generation: This model offered a better battery and added additional hardware features such as an accelerometer, updated shape, and Nike+ integration. Capacity and networking features were the same.
    • 1st Generation: The original model. Offered 8GB, 16GB, and 32GB of storage and an Internet connection via Wi-Fi.

    The primary difference between an iPad and an iPod is how you use them. The iPod is a music player, although it has other features such as video and photo capabilities. An iPad can do everything an iPod can do, plus many more things, effectively making it capable of replacing your PC.

    Jailbreaking a device means that you are bypassing any restrictions placed by the manufacturer. Jailbreaking has pros and cons, such as enabling the ability to use non-Apple apps (a pro) and running the risk of “bricking” the device, essentially rendering it useless.

    iTunes creates a folder named iPod Photo Cache when you use iTunes to sync photos to your iPod, iPad, and iPhone. This folder is used to store optimized photos so that they will properly display on your different Apple devices.

    I set iTunes to synchornize the photos on my iPod Touch to a folder on my Mac. So when I dump photos into that folder, they appear on my iPod Touch the next time I sync it.

    In the folder, the photos are seperated into subfolders. In the iPod Touch, they’re dumped into one big folder that makes it hard to pick out the photos I want to view. Is there an easier way to handle this?

    Please don’t suggest iPhoto. I already use Lightroom to organize my photos.

    I’ll second dropbox. I’m a recent user and am just now starting to utilize it. I’m totally smitten with it though!

    Except you’re already doing this:

    So you’re not just using Lightroom; you’re also using “a folder” — in other words, you’re using Finder for organization.

    What’s the difference between sorting photos with Finder (which is what you’re currently doing) and sorting them with iPhoto . except that iPhoto has a UI specifically for that purpose, and iTunes can make full use of iPhoto’s organizing abilities?

    In fact, it’s easy to prepare content for iPhoto with Lightroom. What you do is:

    1. set up an export option with “Resize to fit” for long edge at something reasonable (say, 1800 px or less);

    2. export a batch of photos that’s to be together to a directory (“folder”) with an appropriate name;

    3. drop that directory on iTunes’s Dock icon, at which point iTunes automatically creates a new “Event” using the name of the directory;

    4. in iTunes’s interface grab hold of the new “Event” with the mouse and drag it to the sidebar, at which point iTunes will create a new album using the name of the “Event” (which is already the name of the directory).

    5. Synch. with the device, using iTunes, which can use the “Album” names in iphoto to create “Albums” on the device.

    The really no difference to using Finder as the front end to a little photo collection for the iPod and using iPhoto as a front end to a little photo collection for the iPod . except that iPhoto does the job better.

    It will take a little more room, since iPhoto will create thumbnails and XML files and a lot of other things inside the

    /Pictures/iPhoto Library directory. But with current disk sizes, so what?

    How to organize an ipod touchSource: Rene Ritchie

    The public beta of iOS 14 and iPadOS 14 have launched, and they’re open to anyone and everyone willing to take a chance on an unfinished software update. If you’re one of those brave souls ready to try out iOS 14 or iPadOS 14 before the general public does, make sure to check out this guide on how to prepare your iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch for the public beta.

    We’ve got a comprehensive guide to iOS 14 and iPadOS 14 if you’re wondering what big changes are coming your way.

    When you’re ready to go, here’s how to prepare for the iOS 14 and iPadOS 14 beta.

    Does your iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch support iOS 14 or iPadOS 14?

    iOS 14 supports iPhones dating all the way back to the iPhone 6s, and the 7th-generation iPod touch. The full list of supported iOS devices is below.


    • iPhone 11
    • iPhone 11 Pro
    • iPhone 11 Pro Max
    • iPhone XS
    • iPhone XS Max
    • iPhone XR
    • iPhone X
    • iPhone 8
    • iPhone 8 Plus
    • iPhone 7
    • iPhone 7 Plus
    • iPhone 6s
    • iPhone 6s Plus
    • iPhone SE (1st generation)
    • iPhone SE (2nd generation)

    iPod touch

    • iPod touch (7th generation)

    Meanwhile, iPadOS 14 supports iPads dating back to the second-generation iPad Air and fourth-generation iPad mini, all iPad Pro models, the 5th-generation iPad and newer.

    • iPad Pro 12.9-inch (4th generation)
    • iPad Pro 11-inch (2nd generation)
    • iPad Pro 12.9-inch (3rd generation)
    • iPad Pro 11-inch (1st generation)
    • iPad Pro 12.9-inch (2nd generation)
    • iPad Pro 12.9-inch (1st generation)
    • iPad Pro 10.5-inch
    • iPad Pro 9.7-inch
    • iPad (7th generation)
    • iPad (6th generation)
    • iPad (5th generation)
    • iPad mini (5th generation)
    • iPad mini 4
    • iPad Air (3rd generation)
    • iPad Air 2

    Clean up your iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch

    How to organize an ipod touchSource: iMore

    After years of using the same device, you might have a lot of unnecessary apps, files, and data just sitting around collecting dust on your chips. To ensure the smoothest transition to the public beta, make sure it’s cleaned up by offloading unused apps, deleting old iMessages, removing large attachments, getting rid of music you don’t need stored on your iOS device, and otherwise freeing up space.

    Back up your iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch

    How to organize an ipod touchSource: Joseph Keller/iMore

    I can’t stress enough how important it is to back up your device before jumping into a beta. If anything should go wrong, it’s important to be prepared to go back to square one and start over. If you don’t back up your device and you lose all of your contacts or other important data, you only have yourself to blame.

    When it comes to installing betas, it’s a very good idea to make an archived copy of your iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch that has the current iOS or iPadOS. This will make it possible for you to later downgrade back to the public version if you decide you no longer want to test the beta.

    Decide how you’re going to install the beta of iOS or iPadOS

    How to organize an ipod touchSource: iMore

    You can download and install an iOS or iPadOS beta over-the-air, but the strength of your Wi-Fi connection could have an effect on how well that works. If you’re confident that you can download 3GB or more in the beta update wirelessly, chase your bliss.

    If, however, you’re not as confident of your Wi-Fi’s performance, or if you have an issue when trying to download the iOS beta wirelessly and you’d like to retry it via Finder, you can get the beta onto your Mac and directly connect your device for a hardwired transfer.

    File a radar when something goes wrong

    How to organize an ipod touchSource: iMore

    If you’re testing a beta, it’s important to let Apple know if something goes wrong. If the screen doesn’t look right, if a built-in app crashes, if you can’t find your favorite accessibility setting, file a radar to let the team know so they can address it before the software update goes live to the public. You’re the superhero of iOS that makes it safe for the rest of us.

    I changed my mind, how do I get out of the beta?

    How to organize an ipod touchSource: iMore

    Remember when I told you to make an archived backup of your iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch? If you did that, you’re totally fine. All you have to do is downgrade to the current operating system using your archived backup. You just have to erase the beta and reinstall the archive.

    Updated July 2020: Updated for iOS 14 public beta.

    Running out of space? Here’s the easiest way to get photos and videos off your iOS device and the best way to organize them.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    How to organize an ipod touch

    My partner recently asked me to share my digital photo albums so that we both have access to them. Before I shared them, I wanted to make sure all the photos were saved to the same location and clearly labeled. It had been about two years since I thoroughly organized my collection. A big part of the job would be getting images off my iPhone, saving them to the same file-syncing and storage service I use for the rest of my images and making sure they were clearly labeled.

    I had put off the task for a few weeks, when suddenly my iPhone and Mac began shoving notifications in my face about nearing the cap on my iCloud storage. All signs were pointing me toward a photo cleanup project, and the first step would be to deal with the pictures on my iPhone.

    I went through the process and distilled it down to this guide for how to get photos off your iPhone and organize them.

    How to Get Photos off an iPhone (or Any iOS Device)

    Depending on where you store and organize photos, you have a few options for how to get images off your device.

    Option 1: Use iCloud

    If you use iCloud as the main place where you store photos, all you really need to do is make sure your iCloud account is backing up and syncing your data.

    For an iOS device, go to Settings > Photos > iCloud Photos and enable the setting.

    Now, your device will upload all your photos to iCloud any time your device connects to Wi-Fi and the battery is charged. With iOS 11 or later, the sync can happen over a cellular connection, too.

    When you create an iCloud account, you get 5GB of storage to start. If you need more, Apple sells it in increments starting at 50GB for $0.99 per month, which is very reasonable. You can share storage with others by using Apple’s Family Sharing plan.

    Option 2: Use a Backup and Syncing Service

    Option 2 is effectively the same as Option 1, only using a different online service. So, instead of using iCloud, we’ll discuss other file syncing and storage options, such as Dropbox, Google Drive and OneDrive.

    1. Choose a file-syncing and storage service, create an account, and download the service’s iOS app.
    2. Sign in and look for a setting called something like Camera Upload, Automatic Upload, or Backup & Sync. This setting automatically uploads photos from your device to the service. Turn it on.
    3. Once the setting is on and your images have been backed up, you can delete them from your iPhone.
    4. To delete pictures from your iPhone, open the Apple Photos app and choose Photos from the bottom menu. Tap Select at the top right. Tap each image you want to delete, then tap the trash can icon in the bottom right corner. Now go to Albums > Recently Deleted. Choose Select and then Delete All.

    Option 3: Download Photos to a Computer and Back Up

    The third and final option I want to offer involves uploading your photos and videos to a computer first and then moving them to a backup and storage service. It’s the best solution for people who prefer a hands-on approach.

    It’s the method I used, because I like seeing my pictures on a larger computer and deciding which ones to keep or throw away before I move them to a backup service. It also lets me make quick edits, such as cropping and color correction during the process.

    1. Connect your phone to your computer with your Lightning-to-USB charging cable. Note that while you can transfer images wirelessly with AirDrop, the cable is faster and gives you the option to delete the photos from your phone automatically once they move over to the computer.
    2. Launch your preferred image-editing program. If you’re a Mac user, the default here would be the Photos app that came with your Mac. Windows includes a similar Photos app, and more-pro-minded photography buffs may want to use Adobe Lightroom on either platform.
    3. Import the image. Most software that supports importing photos offers an option to delete all pictures from your phone once the transfer is complete. This can be a little dangerous, however, in case the import doesn’t complete successfully. I prefer importing, and then only deleting the image files from the phone after I’m sure the import completed.
    4. Now that you have your photos in your image-editing program, you can easily see them and decide whether you want to delete or edit any.
    5. The last step is to drag and drop the images into the backup solution of your choice, whether it’s Box, Flickr, IDrive, or something else. An alternative to cloud storage is to use a local, cloud-connected storage device such as the Western Digital My Cloud or the SanDisk ibi.

    Depending on what service you use and which utilities you’ve installed on the computer, you may find that a photo importer tool pops up automatically to help you bring photos from your phone to somewhere else. For example, if you’ve installed Google Drive’s Backup and Sync utility, that can be set to automatically save image files onto the cloud.

    Tips for Organizing Photos

    Here are some tips for organizing your images, plus an important question to ask yourself about what kind of tools and services best meet your photo-storage needs.

    Photo Hosting or More-General Cloud Storage?

    When organizing photos, the biggest question to ask yourself may be whether to store and back them up using a general cloud storage service or a photo-specific hosting site.

    There are several excellent photo hosting services, including Flickr, ImageShack, Lightroom and SmugMug. These types of services generally come with tools specific to organizing and finding images. For example, you arrange images into “albums” rather than folders and subfolders, and some services recommend albums automatically based on the date or location where you shot the pictures.

    Photo-hosting services often have facial recognition, so the next time you need to search for photos of a particular person, you can find them quickly without having to remember where they are. And it’s not just faces: Flickr and others can detect and tag specific object types, such as tree, mountain, building, or dog, and show you all images that include those objects. You can also add your own identifying keyword tags for organization. Google Photos has some neat automatic suggestions for color correction and stitching together photos taken in quick succession to make a video that resembles stop-motion animation.

    Before you can transfer borrowed audiobooks to an iPod on a Windows computer, you need to turn on the “Manually manage music” option in iTunes.

    If you have an iPod shuffle, you’ll need to enable disk use in iTunes instead.

    Note: Make sure you have the latest version of iTunes installed before trying these steps.

    How to apply the “Manually manage music” option

    1. Open iTunes.
    2. Connect your iPod to your computer.
    3. Select the Device button near the top-left corner of iTunes.
    4. On the “Summary” screen, check the Manually manage music and videos box (under “Options”).
    5. Click Apply.

    Note: If you disable the “Manually manage music” setting and then sync your device with iTunes, you may lose any items you’ve manually transferred.


    • Getting started
    • Ebooks
    • Audiobooks
    • OverDrive app
    • Troubleshooting
    • Libby app
    • Sora app

    Using OverDrive

    • Meet Libby
    • Getting started
    • Troubleshooting
    • Support

    About us

    • Company
    • Libraries
    • Education
    • Resource Center
    • Marketplace
    • Careers with OverDrive


    • Privacy policy
    • Cookie Settings
    • Terms and conditions
    • Attributions

    This site uses cookies

    OverDrive uses cookies and similar technologies to improve your experience, monitor our performance, and understand overall usage trends for OverDrive services (including OverDrive websites and apps). We use this information to create a better experience for all users. Please review the types of cookies we use below.

    These cookies allow you to explore OverDrive services and use our core features. Without these cookies, we can’t provide services to you.

    These cookies allow us to monitor OverDrive’s performance and reliability. They alert us when OverDrive services are not working as expected. Without these cookies, we won’t know if you have any performance-related issues that we may be able to address.

    These cookies help us understand user behavior within our services. For example, they let us know which features and sections are most popular. This information helps us design a better experience for all users.

    To learn more about cookies, please see our Cookie policy.
    To learn more about how we use and protect your data, please see our Privacy policy.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    There are over two million apps in Apple’s App Store. You may not have every single one installed on your iPhone, but it can feel like it! If your home screen is starting to look cluttered, here we show you how you can better organize your iPhone apps. We show how to organize your apps based on how you use your smartphone. This ensures that your favorite applications are always within easy reach.

    Also read: How to organize an ipod touchHow to Replace Your Home Button on the iPhone X, iPhone XS, and iPhone XS Max

    1. Arrange your apps into folders

    Organizing your applications into folders can reduce the clutter on your home screen. By grouping related apps together, you can also make it easier to access the application you need. For example, you might create a folder for all your social media apps and a folder for all your productivity applications. Alternatively, you can create a “Most Frequently Used” folder.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    To create a folder:

    • Press and hold any application on your homescreen.
    • When prompted, tap “Edit Home Screen.” All of your app icons should now start to shake.
    • Drag and drop an application onto another application. This creates a folder containing both applications.
    • Drag and drop any other relevant applications into this folder. You can have multiple pages of apps within a single folder.
    • By default, iOS will try to assign your folder a name that represents its contents. To rename a folder, press and hold until a “Rename” option appears.
    • Once you’ve finished, press the physical Home button or Done button.

    Rinse and repeat these steps to organize your applications into multiple folders. To delete a folder, simply drag all the applications out of that folder, and the folder will disappear automatically.

    Also read: How to organize an ipod touchHow to Delete Hidden Apps From Your iPhone

    2. Use the App Library

    Introduced in iOS 14, the App Library organizes your applications into folders automatically, based on usage. This makes the App Library a great way to access your most frequently-used apps. You can find the App Library by swiping left through all your home screen pages.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    By default, new applications appear on both your home screen and App Library. However, you can tell iOS to add these applications to the App Library only. To make this change, navigate to “Settings -> Home Screen.”

    How to organize an ipod touch

    You can now choose between “Add to Home Screen” and “App Library Only.”

    3. Consider how you hold your phone

    It’s worth thinking about how you hold your phone. You may want to try strategically placing your most frequently-used applications at the point where your thumb naturally rests on the home screen.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    For example, if you naturally place your thumb along the perimeter of your iPhone, you may benefit from positioning your favorite apps around the edges of your home screen.

    3. App usage frequency

    When it comes to organizing your home screen, it’s always a good idea to prioritize your most frequently-used applications.

    Your iPhone records how much time you spend in each application. This can help you identify which applications deserve prime position on your home screen.

    To see how much of your life you’re devoting to each app, navigate to “Settings -> Battery” and select the “Last 10 Days” tab. This will display a breakdown of battery usage for each application.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    To see how much time you’re spending in each app, select “Show Activity.” You can use this information to identify your most frequently-used application. You can then place these applications prominently on your home screen (and perhaps look into ways to reduce your screen time if you’re horrified by just how much time you’re spending on Twitter!).

    Also read: How to organize an ipod touchHow to Get Google’s Best Features on Your iPhone

    4. Color Codes

    You can organize your applications based on color. Although this is a more unusual technique, it can be useful if you have a more visual memory. This technique involves creating folders and then placing applications inside these folders, based on the color of their icons.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    For multicolored icons, we recommend organizing the apps based on their dominant colors. It may also help to name these folder using emojis with the same color scheme as the applications. For example, you may use a star emoji for yellow apps, a water droplet for blue, and a heart for your red applications. This can be an opportunity to get creative and add some fun to your home screen!

    5. Alphabetize your apps

    This is a tried and tested method of organizing your iPhone apps. The built-in iOS applications will remain in their default locations, but you can arrange all your other applications alphabetically.

    To arrange your apps, launch the “Settings” application. Navigate to “General -> Reset” and tap “Reset Home Screen Layout.” Navigate back to your home screen, and all your applications should now be organized alphabetically.

    6. Use Spotlight Search

    If your home screen is cluttered, then why not avoid it completely? You can launch any application by typing its name into Spotlight search.

    To access Spotlight search, either swipe downwards from the middle of your home screen, or keep swiping left until you see the search bar.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    You can then type the name of the application you want to launch and select it when it appears – all without having to trawl through your home screen.

    Wrapping Up

    Now that you have organized your iPhone apps, if you need more ways to get more productive on your phone, try out Siri shortcuts. Here are some of the best Siri shortcuts you should try.

    Also read: How to organize an ipod touchHow to Transfer Data to a New iPhone or iPad

    Our latest tutorials delivered straight to your inbox

    I use email folders to keep my email organized. This article explains how to add and use folders within your email accounts on your iPhone or iPod Touch.

    I use email folders for everything. I have personal folders, work folders, tech-recipes folders, shopping folders, and a ton of other stuff. Folders help to keep my inbox happy and clean. It’s only logical to do the same with your iPhone email accounts.

    Most people use POP to access mail from the email server. To use email folders and to keep them in sync, you will have to switch to IMAP instead.

    Unfortuantely I cannot give you detailed directions for your specific email service. (Gmail’s directions are here, for example.) You will have to find your server’s IMAP address in the documenation. Most email servers have IMAP access.

    I will suggest that you leave any existing POP accounts until the IMAP is working perfectly. Most web services (and the iPhone) will allow you to use both.

    Once you have your IMAP server information, you can create the new IMAP account on your iPhone just like any other email account:

    Settings -> Mail -> New Account

    You will not actually be able to create the folders directly on your iPhone. You will have to create them in your mail client or through your webmail. The folders created here will then appear and sync correctly.

    If you have IMAP setup correctly and you are still not seeing your folders, you may need to set your IMAP path prefix. This will be found in your IMAP server documentation. You set this on the mobile device through the following menus:

    Settings > Mail > Account > Advanced > IMAP Path Prefix

    David Kirk is one of the original founders of tech-recipes and is currently serving as editor-in-chief. Not only has he been crafting tutorials for over ten years, but in his other life he also enjoys taking care of critically ill patients as an ICU physician.

    VP Marketing at Converus, makers of EyeDetect, innovative solution for deception detection

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Apple has sold well over 600 Million iOS devices so far. That figure includes the iPod Touch, iPhone and iPad combined.

    These devices are used by kids for socializing, videos, games, music, reading, studying and much more. Although each of these things is positive, there is one potential danger area for kids — unlimited Internet access through Wi-Fi or a carrier network.

    A study by the Kaiser Family Foundation revealed that children typically use digital devices over 7.5 hours a day (that includes TV). With so much time spent on devices and with open Wi-Fi access almost everywhere you go, kids and teens are able to easily access harmful content.

    Good News and Bad News

    The good news is that Apple took the initiative and included a few parental control features on these devices. We’ll discuss those here.

    The bad news is that these built-in parental controls features don’t fully apply when a child is browsing the web. For this reason, parents should consider installing a safe browser app such as Net Nanny, Mobicip or Ranger (found on the iTunes Store). These safe browsers are used as a replacement for Safari, the default browser. Safari doesn’t filter Internet content.

    To use a safe browser, follow the steps below. (Note: the configuration of Apple devices requires these steps.)

    • First, choose the safe browser you would like to use. Download it from the iTunes Store onto the iPhone, iPad or iPod you want protected.
    • Next, “Enable” Restrictions in order to make sure the safe web browser is functioning as the default browser. To do that, locate the “Settings” icon on the main screen of the device on which you downloaded the safe browser.
    • Tap “Settings,” then tap “General,” then scroll down the screen and tap “Restrictions.”
    • Create a four-digit passcode that your child won’t know — this will initiate the “Restrictions” menu.
    • Once inside the “Restrictions” menu, you can disable the Safari browser. To do that, select “off” next to Safari. In the future, if you wish to re-enable Safari, simply do the previous steps in reverse order.

    Next, you will need to prevent the installation of other Browsers (because other browsers may not filter Internet content.) To take this preventative step and block your child from viewing inappropriate web content, go back to the “Restrictions” menu and tap “off” next to the option “Installing Apps.” By doing so, this will protect the device from your child downloading other browsers than do not filter Internet content.

    And when you disable the installation of apps, your child will have to ask permission to install all other apps. The pass code will need to be entered by you before anything can be installed. It is recommended that if you have older children, you may not wish to turn on this feature, but I recommend you use a password for your iTunes Store account so your child will have to ask permission to install apps.

    Other Protective Measures from Apple

    If your child’s device is connected to your iTunes Store account, you may wish to consider the following. In most cases, your credit card is probably on file for your iTunes Store account. Thus, if there are any in-app purchases done, you will be paying the cost.

    To disable the ability for apps to do an in-app purchase, go back to “Restrictions” and tap “Off” for “In-app Purchases.” These in-app purchases are often done by games to add a new life, to gain access to a new level or other related things.

    There are other options found in the “Restrictions” menu including the following: disable the camera, disable Siri and disable iTunes Store. You may choose to limit access for those things.

    And, you can enable the Apple ratings system to filter the types of TV shows, movies and apps accessed on the device. For example, you can set the types of movies accessed to be PG or PG-13 only. You can also turn off explicit music.

    There is an option to blacklist or whitelist web sites as well. If, for example, you have a young child, you could create a list of 10 or 20 child-friendly websites and only give you child access to those ‘safe’ webpages.

    These parental controls features are provided by Apple to protect children. With as much time as children and teens spend on their Apple devices, parents should consider taking a few minutes to make the experience as safe as possible!

    Note: This article and the opinions expressed here are from Russ Warner, Internet safety expert and CEO of ContentWatch, makers of parental control software Net Nanny.

    Load your iPod Classic, Nano, Mini, and Shuffle with music

    How to organize an ipod touch

    • Tweet
    • Share
    • Email
    • Tweet
    • Share
    • Email

    What to Know

    • iTunes: Go to the Music tab, select the Sync Music check box, choose the songs you want, then select Apply.
    • Newer Macs: Your iTunes music library is located in the Music app, and you can transfer music to your iPod using the Finder.
    • iPod touch: Sync music from iCloud and download music apps for iOS like Pandora, Spotify, and Apple Music.

    This article explains how to put music on an iPod that doesn’t connect to the internet, including the iPod Classic, iPod Mini, iPod Nano, and iPod Shuffle.

    How to Put Music on an iPod Classic, Mini, Nano, and Shuffle

    Make sure you have iTunes installed on your computer and have added music to your iTunes library. You can get music by ripping songs from CDs, downloading it from the internet, and buying it at online stores like the iTunes Store, among other means.

    Apple replaced iTunes for Mac in 2019 with the release of macOS Catalina. Your iTunes music library is now located in the Music app, but you transfer music to your iPod using the Finder. When you connect your iPod to the Mac, it appears in the Finder. Just drag and drop files onto the device. Windows PC users can still use iTunes for Windows.

    Connect your iPod to your computer using the USB cable that came with it. You can’t use just any cable; you need one that fits Apple’s Dock Connector or Lightning port, depending on your model. If iTunes isn’t already open on your computer, it opens now. If you haven’t set up your iPod yet, iTunes walks you through the setup process.

    After you go through the setup process or if your iPod has already been set up, you see the main iPod management screen. If you don’t see it, click the iPod icon in iTunes to get to this screen. The screen shows a picture of your iPod and has a set of tabs along the side or across the top, depending on the version of iTunes you have. The first tab menu is Music. Select it.

    The first option in the Music tab is Sync Music. Check the box next to it. If you don’t, you won’t be able to download songs.

    The options that become available are:

    • Entire Music Library does what it says. It syncs all the music in your iTunes library to your iPod (space permitting).
    • Sync Selected playlists, artists, and genres allows you to choose the music that goes on your iPod using those categories. Check the boxes next to the items you want to sync.
    • Include music videos syncs any music videos in your iTunes library to your iPod (assuming it can play video).

    For more precise control over the songs that sync to your iPod, make a playlist and sync only that playlist or uncheck songs to prevent them from being added to your iPod.

    Select Apply at the bottom of the iTunes window after you change the settings and determine which songs you want to download.

    This begins the process of syncing songs to your iPod. How long it takes depends on how many songs you’re downloading. When syncing is complete, you have successfully added music to your iPod.

    To add other content, such as audiobooks or podcasts (if your iPod supports these), look for other tabs in iTunes, near the Music tab. Click the appropriate tabs and choose your options on those screens. Sync again, and that content is transferred to your iPod, too.

    Some older versions of iTunes allowed you to sync music to MP3 players that were made by companies other than Apple. Learn about all the non-Apple MP3 players that were compatible with iTunes.

    How to Put Music on an iPhone or iPod Touch

    The early iPods were all limited to syncing with iTunes, but that’s not the case with the iPhone and iPod touch. Because those devices can connect to the internet and can run apps, they have many more options for adding music.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    iPods Sync With iTunes, Not iCloud

    The iPod Classic, iPod Mini, iPod Nano, and iPod Shuffle don’t have an internet connection of their own. When you want to put media on them, you use the iTunes program on your desktop or laptop computer to download songs to the iPod, using a process called syncing, not iCloud. These iPods don’t support streaming music services like Spotify or Apple Music.

    When you connect your iPod to a computer running iTunes, you can add almost any music and—depending on the model you have—other content such as video, podcasts, photos, and audiobooks that’s on that computer to the iPod.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    How to organize an ipod touch

    How to organize an ipod touch How to organize an ipod touch How to organize an ipod touch

    If you already have an iPod, then you might know how user-friendly the device is. While iPods are mostly used to listen to our favorite songs, sometimes users wish to transfer music from iPod to computer. In this way, they can take a backup of their music and make it available on their computers as well. The good news is that learning how to transfer music from iPod to computer is pretty easy. In this guide, I’m going to discuss two surefire ways to transfer music from iPod to computer for free that anyone can implement.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Part 1: How to Transfer Music from iPod to Computer with iTunes: A Stepwise Solution

    You might already know that iTunes is a freely available desktop application that is developed by Apple. Therefore, using it, you can simply sync your iPod music to your iTunes Music Library. Once you have synced your iPod with iTunes, you can access your music on your computer. This won’t directly transfer music from iPod to computer, but would rather “sync” it with iTunes Library. To learn how to transfer music from iPod to computer in Windows 10 or Mac, follow these steps:

    Step 1: Connect your iPod to the computer

    At first, just connect your iPod to your computer using a working cable and launch iTunes on it. If you have an iPod Touch, then you will get a security prompt on the screen. You can tap on the “Trust” button to continue and let your computer access the connected device.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Step 2: Sync iPod music with iTunes

    Once your iPod is connected, you can go to the devices icon on iTunes and select it. Afterward, go to the sidebar to visit the Music section. From here, you can just turn on the option to sync your music. You can choose to sync the entire library or select the playlist, artists, or albums of your choice. In the end, just click on the “Apply” button and wait as it would transfer music from iPod to computer for free.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Bonus: Backup iPod to iTunes

    If you want, you can take a backup of your iPod to iTunes as well. For this, connect your iPod to the system and launch iTunes on it. Now, go to the Summary section of iTunes and click on the “Back up Now” button under the Backups section. Just make sure that you take the backup on the local computer instead of iCloud.

    How to organize an ipod touch


    • • The entire process can be a bit complicated
    • • Your music won’t be transferred to your computer, but will only be synced with the iTunes library
    • • You would find it hard to later copy the transferred music and move it anywhere else.

    Part 2: How to Transfer Music from iPod to Computer without iTunes [using MobileTrans – Backup]

    Since iTunes has so many limitations, users often look for other ways to transfer music from iPod to computer. In this case, I would suggest using MobileTrans – Backup which is an extremely user-friendly desktop application. Since it is available for both Windows and macOS versions, you won’t encounter any compatibility issues using it on the platform of your choice.

    • • With MobileTrans – Backup, you can directly move the music files from your iPod and save them to your computer’s local storage instead.
    • • Apart from music, you can transfer any other data type (like photos or documents) stored on your iPod.
    • • You can also use MobileTrans – Backup to transfer data from other Android and iOS devices since it works with 8000+ different models out there.
    • • You can easily locate the transferred backup on your computer and can later use MobileTrans – Restore to move it to the same or any other device.
    • • The application is extremely easy to use, works pretty fast, and does not harm your device in any way.

    To get things started, you can just go to the official website of MobileTrans and download the application on your system. Later, you can follow these steps to learn how to transfer music from iPod to computer.

    Step 1: Connect your iPod and launch the application

    Firstly, connect your iPod to your computer using the right cable and simply launch MobileTrans on it. From all the provided options on the home screen of MobileTrans, just click on the “Backup” feature.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Step 2: Select what you wish to backup

    Once your iPod is connected, it will be detected by MobileTrans and its snapshot would also be provided. In the middle, you can see different types of data that you can save. From here, you can enable “Music” or any other kind of data and click on the “Start” button.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Step 3: Complete the backup

    This will start the process and the application will automatically transfer music from iPod to computer in no time. Once the data transfer process is over, MobileTrans will let you know, so that you can safely remove your iPod from the computer.


    • • Extremely fast and easy to use
    • • Can also backup other types of data (apart from music)
    • • Besides iPod, it can back up other Android and iOS devices too

    There you go! Who knew it would be so easy to transfer music from iPod to computer for free. As you can see, I have come up with two different iPod music transfer solutions in this guide that anyone can implement. Since iTunes can be a bit complicated and you might encounter compatibility issues using it, why not prefer using MobileTrans – Backup. The application is super easy to use and supports every other kind of data. Feel free to give it a try and share this guide with others to teach them how to transfer music from iPod to computer on Windows 10/8/7 or Mac systems like a pro.

    Have you ever troubled by iTunes can’t read iPod music, iTunes can’t recognize your iPod or even can’t sync iPod music to iTunes?

    When you want to manage your iPod music but unexpectedly get stuck in one of the conditions mentioned above, you may be disappointed vastly. If now an iPod music manager or iTunes alternative comes out, it could be the life saver for you. All to be good, to help you be free from iPod music management issue, the post will recommend the top 6 iPod music manager for Windows/Mac OS for your reference. With one of these tool, you can get rid of the complicated iTunes and avoid erasing music by iTunes sync. Blow are the best 6 iTunes alternatives for you to easily manage iPod music without iTunes restriction.

    Top 1: Tenorshare iCareFone

    With its powerful features and the advantages of convenience, Tenoreshare iCareFone tops our lists of the best 6 iPod music manager. It fully supports all iPod touch, including iPod touch (7/6/5/4 generation),iPod nano (7/6 generation), iPod shuffle (4/3 generation), iPod classic, iPod mini, etc. and is fully compatible with even the latest iOS 15 and iTunes 12.12.

    With this tool, you can easily manage your iPod music on PC and Mac as you want and transfer music between iDevice and iTunes without limitation. In addition, you are also provided with the following features:

    How to organize an ipod touch How to organize an ipod touch

    How to organize an ipod touch How to organize an ipod touch

    • Free backup everything you need on iPhone/iPad/iPod
    • Transfer music, photos, videos, contacts, SMS without limitation
    • Selectively restore files without erasing current data

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Top 2: Yamipod

    YamiPod is a freeware application to efficiently manage your iPod under Mac OS X and Windows. It can be run directly from your iPod and needs no installation. YamiPod brings more freedom to use an iPod. Work with the latest iTunes 12.2.

    • No installation is required; your iPod is automatically recognized.
    • Mp3 and AAC files can be copied to/from iPod.
    • Support playlist and built in music player.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Top 3: Senuti for Mac

    Senuti is an iPod music transfer App for Mac OS X. It is well-known as iPod, iPhone music backup tool which can save your music collection from suddenly breakdown. Although Senuti default settings are less than ideal, it is still good for transferring music back from your iPod to your Mac which you can’t do so with iTunes.

    However, Senuti can merely work on Mac as so far, it’s not available Windows PC.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Top 4: Sharepod

    SharePod is a transfer tool for Mac and Windows users to transfer music to iPod, iPad, iPhone without iTunes. You also can use SharePod to play and mange your music. It also has the ability to organize music and build playlist or library. When you launch SharePod and connect your iPod to computer, you can just select “Copy to iPod” and choose the music files you like to add music to iPod without iTunes.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Top 5: CopyTrans Manager

    CopyTrans Manager is an ease-to-use iOS manager that allows you to manage music files on your iPod or other iDevices without needing to go through iTunes. You can transfer music from the PC to your iPod, browse through folders or simply drag and drop the files. Besides, you are able to customize your library including editing song names, genres, albums, covers. CopyTrans Manager also lets you manage your playlists like adding, deleting or changing the order of the songs.

    It’s easy to transfer through this straightforward and convenient tool.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Top 6: Anytrans

    AnyTrans is the software for PC and Mac to offer iPod management all in one program. It comes with a feature called iWizard to help manage transfers of iPod music. You can put the desired music into your iPod though this program. AnyTrans iWizard can automatically save personal music and fills up an iPod from iTunes on several desktop as well as computers. Users no longer need to think of lost songs that previously were kept on your iPod.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Since here listed the best 6 iPod music manager, just select the desired one according to your need. And then enjoy the music on iPod touch as your wishes.

    How to organize an ipod touch How to organize an ipod touch

    How to organize an ipod touch How to organize an ipod touch

    Updated on 2021-11-19 / Update for iOS File Transfer

    Productivity expert Jill Duffy shows you how to use the complicated but powerful parental control tools built into iOS so that your kids can safely play games, use apps, and watch videos on your iPhone or iPad.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    How to organize an ipod touch

    When you let children play with an iPhone or iPad, you can take a few steps to make sure it will be a safe experience for both of you. Children should be able to play games and watch videos, but not accidentally wipe out all your emails, land on a site with adult content, or charge your credit card for App Store purchases. You also want to protect the phone or tablet itself from accidental dings, scratches, and cracks.

    When you kid-proof your iPhone or iPad, everyone can have a little more peace of mind about the experience. The settings and options are not in the most logical places in iOS, however, so you’ll definitely need some help finding them. Our instructions and recommendations for making your iPhone or iPad safer for children to use can help.

    How to Use Guided Access to Lock Kids Out of iPad and iPhone Features and Navigation

    My favorite iOS feature for parents is called Guided Access. It’s not exactly a one-touch setting, but it’s the most thorough option for locking most of your phone while still allowing someone to access what’s on the screen.

    When you use Guided Access, you disable parts of your phone and parts of the screen. For example, if you want your kids to be able to watch a video, but you don’t want them to be able to search for new videos, you can block off access to the part of the screen with the search bar.

    Here’s how to set it up and use it.

    1. Go to Settings > General > Accessibility > Guided Access. It’s way down at the bottom under the Learning heading.

    2. Tap to enter the Guided Access settings. Turn on Guided Access.

    3. Next, tap Passcode Settings. Either create a passcode or enable Touch ID. There may also be a Face ID option on supported devices. This passcode or fingerprint lock ensures that only you can turn Guided Access on and off.

    4. Now, go back one screen and turn on Accessibility Shortcut, which lets you enter Guided Access mode by triple-tapping the home button.

    You’re now ready to use Guided Access.

    5. Open the app you want to let your kid use.

    6. Triple-tap the home button to launch the screen that lets you customize Guided Access for the particular app or screen that you have open.

    7. The instructions tell you to circle the areas of the screen you’d like to disable. Use your finger to draw circles or rectangles around any on-screen buttons that you want to render off-limits. For example, on YouTube, you might disable the search and share buttons, the ability to skip ahead to the next video, and the related videos at the bottom of the screen. As you draw circles and rectangles around those areas, they become grayed out. (Screenshots are disabled in this mode, which is why I had to use a photo of the screen above.)

    8. Press Options in the bottom left. Now you can disable physical buttons, such as the volume and the sleep/wake button. You can also set a time limit. With a time limit in place, the device fully locks once the time runs out. Back in the main settings for Guided Access (Settings > General > Accessibility > Guided Access), you can enable an audio notification that will alert you about 30 seconds before the phone locks. It locks on a screen that says Time Expired.

    9. To end Guided Access, triple-tap the home button and enter the passcode or use Touch/Face ID. In the upper left corner, tap End.

    How to Block App Store Purchases and Adult Content

    Next, you can consider restricting purchases and types of content, such as adult websites and R-rated movies. Here’s where to find those options.

    1. Go to Settings > Screen Time > Content & Privacy Restrictions. Does it make sense that these options live under Screen Time? No, but that’s where they are.

    2. Tap Enable Restrictions. The next three entries are where you should focus your attention:

    • iTunes & App Store Purchases
    • Allowed Apps
    • Content Restrictions

    Each option is self-explanatory as you go through them. The first one lets you disable the ability to install apps, delete apps, and make in-app purchases. It also contains an option to require a password before purchasing or downloading something.

    The second section, called Allowed Apps, lets you disable some apps entirely, such as Wallet, Airdrop, FaceTime, and others.

    Finally, in Content Restrictions, you get the bulk of the options for restricting adult content. There’s quite a bit of information to wade through here, including internet content filters; tv, movie, and book restrictions; app restrictions; and gaming restrictions such as blocking kids from adding friend and playing multiplayer games.

    On the one hand, Apple gives you a fine level of details for all these controls, which is useful when giving permissions to older children in particular. On the other hand, it would be helpful to have a one-touch option to cut down on all the decisions you have to make. Choose what’s right for you and your child.

    If you need even more control, consider installing a parental control app on your device. Note, however, that as is common with many such utility apps, parental control apps give you less direct control on iOS than you would get on Android. It’s just part of the trade-off you make when you choose to live in Apple’s walled garden, which tends to be a bit safer.

    Recommended Cases and Screen Protectors

    Having a good case and screen protector is not just valuable when you let children handle your mobile; it’s always a good idea. PCMag has articles recommending the best cases for a variety of iPhone and iPad models. You can look up your exact model, or just browse our lists of the best cases for iPhone 8 and the best cases for the iPhone X. If you have an older phone, most of the manufacturers in these roundups probably make cases for your model, too.

    You can also take a look at PCMag’s favorite iPad cases with the same advice in mind.

    Finally, don’t overlook a screen protector. They prevent scratches and cracks on the touchscreen, lengthening the life of your iPhone or iPad and keeping the trade-in value high for when you’re ready to upgrade. There are a few schools of thought on what kind of screen protection is best, whether it’s a PET, TPU, or tempered glass protector. Pick the one that’s right for you and your device.

    If you follow all this advice, you should be able to hand over your phone to any toddler or teenager without too much worry.

    Like What You’re Reading?

    Sign up for SecurityWatch newsletter for our top privacy and security stories delivered right to your inbox.

    This newsletter may contain advertising, deals, or affiliate links. Subscribing to a newsletter indicates your consent to our Terms of Use and Privacy Policy. You may unsubscribe from the newsletters at any time.

    Your subscription has been confirmed. Keep an eye on your inbox!

    I just recently got a Samsung Galaxy S9. My problem is how can I get music on it from my unused iPod, which holds over 300 songs. It that even possible and how can I do that?

    With the fast-paced growth and development of mobile devices, people replace their old device more frequently than ever before. Transfer of important files from one device to another is necessary at some point so that you can take them with you. If you have an old iPod (Touch, Classic, Shuffle, Nano)—a device solely for music, it seems to be wise switch over from it to your feature-rich Android device. However, it’s always a big pain to share files including the songs on an iPod with an Android device — we cannot just connect them and transfer the music via the USB cable or Bluetooth.

    Well, It’s not a problem anymore. In this article we’ll show you how to transfer music from an iPod to Android, no matter if you have an Android phone or tablet. There are a plethora of programs out there that claims themselves to get iPod music transfer done and make the process easy and painless, but I finally found most of them to be clunky and not user-friendly. If you want to seamlessly copy your iPod songs right onto Android for just play on, the lightweight yet intelligent iPhone Data Transfer should have your back.

    As a flexible iOS device manager, iTransfer is often used to sync music as well as other media files from iPod right into Android mobile phones and tablets without incompatibility issues. It’s able to quickly scan your iPod then gives you a full list of music collection, allowing you to select all of the tunes or just the certain ones to upload on the Android device. It’s universally compatible with all iOS & Android devices and available on all laptops and desktop computers running on Windows OS or Mac OS, which make it a exactly convenient replacement for iTunes.

    To move the music files off iPod and save them in Android phone & tablet — whatever brand or model it might be, you need to first download the program and install it on a working computer, then go through a few steps below to set up the transfer of tracks from iPod to Android and you’ll be good to go. Let’s begin on a Windows 10 machine while the process is the same on a Mac.

    Simple Guide: Syncing iPod Songs to Android Phone & Tablet

    Step 1: Plug iPod into computer

    Open up the program and attach your both iPod and Android mobile device with computer via separate USB cables. You’ll have to check if they’re all present and correct by clicking the device’s name in the upper left corner of the interface.

    Since you’re going to copy songs from iPod over to the Android device, click the down arrow on the upper left corner of the program window to select your iPod as the original device, and it should be automatically recognized by the software.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Step 2: Click Music button on navigation bar

    Locate and click the Music button located on the navigation bar near Home button and you should then see a list of navigable categories on the left side bar as well as a list of music tracks of your iPod on the right pane.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Click Music option from left side bar, then select individual tune(s) you want to migrate onto Android gadget. The selected items will have checkmarks filled in the checkboxes in front of names.

    Step 3: Commence music syncing process

    Once all the desired tracks have been selected, the final step is to get the songs loaded in Android device’s internal storage.

    To do so, just click the Export button under the navigation bar and from its drop-down, choose Export to [your Android name] for saving the exported songs of iPod.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Tip: You can also choose the iPod music by playlist then upload it right onto Android device.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Wait while the songs on iPod get transferred over to your Android phone & tablet. Once it’s done, disconnect your iPod as well as Android device and the music on iPod is waiting for you in the storage space of your Android device.

    Enjoy your music.

    iTransfer: Your Best Bet?

    As you see, the smart iTransfer software offers a completely direct and automate solution whenever you want to back up music files on an Android smartphone & tablet from Apple’s iPod (Classic, Nano, Touch, Shuffle) and make the process effortless — connect devices, highlight the tunes, choose Android devices as the output location and you’re all set.

    However, if you have tried other iPod-music-to-Android transferring utilities, whether it’s free or paid, you would find out that most of these programs do a good job in copying the iPod tracks back into computer, rather than directly to Android device. As a result, you need to drag and drop the exporting songs of iPod from your computer to the device — it’s time-consuming though.

    Single App Mode (also known as kiosk mode) locks your business’ iPhone, iPad or iPod touch devices to display a unique app. It is a very powerful iOS feature which enables using Apple’s mobile devices as single purpose digital tools in your business or institution. Use cases include:

    • Lock iPad to a point of sales (POS) app like Square for cashiers
    • Lock iPod touch to a restaurant management app like TouchBistro to manage bookings and orders
    • Use Apple’s Photos app on an iPad to showcase a photography or art portfolio
    • And more.

    Starting with version 2.12, iMazing features straightforward tools to help you put your devices in Single App Mode without any prior IT knowledge. Whether you’re managing your iOS and iPadOS devices from a Mac or a Windows PC, follow the guide and start making the most of your devices right now.

    Here’s how to put iPhone, iPad or iPod touch in Single App Mode:

    1. Launch iMazing and connect your device to your computer
    2. If your device isn’t supervised yet, use iMazing’s Supervision wizard to supervise it now
    3. Open the Supervision wizard and click on Enable Single App Mode
    4. Select the app of your choice and confirm

    Check out the following video to see the entire supervision and single app mode process:

    Before you begin

    Download and install iMazing on your Mac or PC computer

    Make sure that the iPhone, iPad or iPod touch is supervised. To check, you can launch the Settings app on the device itself and look for the disclaimer: How to organize an ipod touch

    Alternatively, connect the device to iMazing and look for the supervising organization field under Device details: How to organize an ipod touch

    If the Apple mobile device you want to put in Single App Mode isn’t supervised yet, follow our How to supervise iPhone, iPad and iPod touch guide first.

    In-Depth Tutorial

    1. Launch iMazing and connect your device

    If you’ve already connected your device to iMazing previously, you can use Wi-Fi connectivity to enable Single App Mode – no need to plug the cable.

    2. Scroll down in the Actions list and click Supervision

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Single App Mode is a setting available on supervised devices only. Supervised device settings are found in the Supervision wizard: How to organize an ipod touch

    Scroll down to the bottom of that screen to reveal the Enable Single App Mode checkbox: How to organize an ipod touch

    3. Check the Enable Single App Mode checkbox

    iMazing will display a list of apps currently installed on the device: How to organize an ipod touch

    4. Choose an app and confirm

    Select the application of your choice (including Apple apps such as Photos, Books or Music) and click Choose to confirm. Scroll down a little to reveal additional options: How to organize an ipod touch

    5. Configure Single App Mode options

    Single App Mode options let you disable touch and hardware inputs, as well as prevent the device from locking. The following options are available:

    Disable touch input: fully disables all touch interactions on the screen.
    Disable interface rotation: locks the interface in its current portrait or landscape orientation.
    Disable volume buttons: self-explanatory.
    Disable mute switch: self-explanatory.
    Disable sleep-wake button: prevents users from manually locking the device (and hence turning off the display).
    Disable auto-lock: overrides the auto-lock interval temporarily, setting it to never.

    The last 2 options enabled together ensure that the device’s screen will always be on, locked to your chosen app until the device runs out of battery or you exit Single App Mode.

    6. Click Apply

    Once you’ve chosen an app and configured Single App Mode options, click the Apply button at the bottom right of the wizard and iMazing will put your iOS device in Single App Mode.

    7. Exit Single App Mode

    If the device is already in Single App Mode, iMazing will display an Exit Single App Mode button: How to organize an ipod touch

    Simply click the button and wait a few seconds. You can now access the home screen of your device again, and launch any app.

    💡 Advanced users: behind the scenes, iMazing installs a configuration profile in order to enable Single App Mode. Because it is impossible to read the contents of an installed profile straight from the device, iMazing uses a specific profile naming scheme so that it can identify which profile to remove from the device in order to exit Single App Mode. Consequently, the Exit Single App Mode button is only available if iMazing was used to enable the mode in the first place. You can use the Profiles section of iMazing to manually remove Single App Mode profiles installed by other means.

    Going Further

    The Supervised device settings wizard contains quite a few other options besides Single App Mode. Please refer to our Managing Supervised Devices guide for more information.

    For managing iOS devices in bulk, iMazing Configurator features powerful automation tools that will suit more advanced workflows.

    Global Champions

    Разработано для iPad

      • Бесплатно

    Снимки экрана

    How to organize an ipod touch

    How to organize an ipod touch

    How to organize an ipod touch

    How to organize an ipod touch

    How to organize an ipod touch


    Organize an amazing concert! So satisfying!

    It is fun, easy to learn, and hard to master. We hope you enjoy our game as much as we do!

    Что нового

    Performance improvements and bug fixes

    Конфиденциальность приложения

    Разработчик Global Champions указал, что в соответствии с политикой конфиденциальности приложения данные могут обрабатываться так, как описано ниже. Подробные сведения доступны в политике конфиденциальности разработчика.

    Данные, используе­мые для отслежи­вания информации

    Следующие данные могут использоваться для отслеживания информации о пользователе в приложениях и на сайтах, принадлежащих другим компаниям:

    Данные об использова­нии

    Не связанные с пользова­телем данные

    Может вестись сбор следующих данных, которые не связаны с личностью пользователя:

    Данные об использова­нии

    Конфиденциальные данные могут использоваться по-разному в зависимости от вашего возраста, задействованных функций или других факторов. Подробнее

    How to organize an ipod touchHave multiple inboxes and different mail accounts set up on your iPhone or iPad? Changing the order of your mailboxes is easier than ever in iOS, you don’t even have to go into Settings with new versions of the software. Instead, if you want to arrange the order of mail accounts and mailboxes in Mail app, you can just use the following quick tutorial right from the Mail app to have them appear however you’d like.

    How to Change the Order of eMail Accounts & Mailboxes in iOS Mail

    This works the same on all iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch devices, as long as the iOS version is even somewhat modern it will allow this arranging feature:

    1. Open the Mail app if you haven’t done so yet, then tap back into “Mailboxes”
    2. Tap “Edit” to enable the ability to change the mailboxes
    3. Now tap and hold on a mailbox, then then drag mailboxes as desired into the order you wish them to appear in
    4. Tap “Done” when finished

    Here’s what this looks like in modern versions of Mail app, notice the little handlebars on the side of the inbox and mailbox names, those indicate they can be dragged up or down to change the order in which they appear:

    How to organize an ipod touch

    This is a great change for those of us who manage multiple inboxes, since it allows you to keep your most important mailboxes on top.

    Indeed this feature exists on prior releases of iOS too, and this is what the rearrangement of mailboxes looks like in the pre-redesigned iOS Mail app, it may look a little different nowadays but the function is identical.

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Managing a ton of email is never fun, combine this with VIP lists in OS X and iOS and it gets quite a bit better though. As long as the same mail accounts are used with iCloud, the VIP lists will sync from the Mac out to iPad, iPhone, and iPod touch, and vice versa.

    Updated 2 years ago by Satish Shetty

    Here are the steps to remove MDM profile from the iPhone, iPad and iPod touch devices.


    1. Open “Settings” App.
    2. Scroll down and then tap on “General” section from the left menu
    3. Scroll down all the way and then tap on “Device Management”
    4. Then tap on “MDM Profile”
    5. Then tap on “Remove Management”
    6. If it ask for a passcode, Please enter your passcode
    7. From now on device will no longer controlled by a remote person

    The above steps will remove the remote management control from the device.

    Below are the image illustrations.

    Open “Settings” App and then got to “General Section”

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Scroll down all the way and then tap on “Device Management”

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Now tap on “MDM Profile”

    How to organize an ipod touch

    Now tap on “Remove Management”

    How to organize an ipod touch

    To Remove MDM from Android based devices, Please refer to this article.

  • How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    A simple guide to making your own versatile vegan cheese, to enjoy as a spread, in pasta dishes and sprinkled over your favourite savoury dishes.

    Interested in trying our FREE 7-day healthy diet plan? Click here and choose between our meat eaters, vegetarian or vegan meal plans.

    Vegans don’t need to miss out on the flavour and texture that cheese adds to a dish. We’ve created two fabulous recipes that are easy to make at home. There’s no cooking required, just nuts, a food processor and a desire to try something different.

    Vegan and vegetarian cheese

    Many cheeses contain animal rennet, an enzyme that helps coagulation and separates the curds and whey. This means they don’t fall into the category of vegetarian or vegan.

    A vegan cheese needs to be free of rennet and dairy too. You can buy substitutes which use vegetable oils, nutritional yeasts, nuts, tofu and soy proteins to create the flavour and texture of cheese, and they range from soft and spreadable to hard and sliceable.

    However, it’s not always easy to get your hands on these products, so making your own using readily available ingredients is a delicious and useful skill to have at hand. The easiest way to test the waters is with a simple nutty spread. We’ve used cashews and chives in our recipe but why not mix herby combinations to your liking?

    What you need

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    A simple vegan soft cheese can be made with nuts, herbs and a squeeze of lemon juice or splash of water. Nuts are a great base for these spreads as they pack in the protein and flavour, while adding texture.

    To make our vegan cashew cream cheese, it helps if the nuts have been pre-soaked in water for about 4 hours beforehand to soften them. Then all your ingredients are blended together to the desired texture in a food processor. All it needs is firming up in the fridge for an hour or so before serving. Trust us when we say, it’s great on toast, seedy crackers or stirred into pasta.


    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    You can choose any number of herb and nut combos to create your cheeses. Almonds, pine nuts and macadamias all lend themselves well to blending. Throw in chives, garlic, basil or parsley for extra flavour. If you’re looking for something special to impress, give your cheese an indulgent twist with a drizzle of truffle oil. You can also add a jar of sundried tomatoes, peppers or a few chilli flakes for a Mediterranean hit.

    Make sweeter nut spreads that follow the same method, by adding a couple of drops of vanilla essence, brown rice syrup or maple syrup.

    For a sprinkling of flavour to finish a dish, why not try this super-simple vegan Parmesan? No cooking involved means this cheese is ready in five minutes.

    Recipes to try

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Try substituting vegan cheeses in these tasty recipes.

    Stir vegan cashew cream cheese into this courgette & ricotta pasta and finish with a sprinkling of vegan Parmesan. For a quick and easy lunch, try using cashew cream cheese instead of cottage cheese in this open cheese & red pepper sourdough sandwich.

    If you’re feeling adventurous, whip up vegan pancakes or crispy potato skins and add a sprinkling of vegan Parmesan to take them up a notch.

    Do you have any favourite vegan cheese suggestions? Let us know in the comments section below.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Meltable, shreddable, grateable vegan cheese with a beautifully delicate flavour. Lightly tangy, creamy and super smooth like you wouldn’t believe.

    OH what a bloody challenge it’s been to make this grateable vegan cheese for y’all. You WOULD NOT BELIEVE the lengths I’ve gone to to figure this bad boy out. It’s obvs a bit of a vegan holy grail; grateable vegan cheese which ACTUALLY melts and has a delicious cheesy vibe and sharp tang. But guess what, I’VE CRACKED IT!

    I’ve basically built upon my original vegan mozzarella recipe (which you guys went a bit bonkers over). But I set myself a few new challenges:

    1. This cheese MUST be firm and grateable (unlike my original mozz which was soft). We’re not talking parmesan firm, but something close to cheddar or firm mozzarella.
    2. It MUST still melt to a delicious stretchy, gooey cheese (perfect for in grilled cheese sandwiches, on pasta etc)
    3. It MUST be creamy and smooth but with a sharp tang (so slightly closer to a cheddar than a mozzarella in flavour).

    Stick around to see if I manage it…

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Did the grateable vegan cheese work??

    HECK YES IT DID! I’ve absolutely slayed this one – no brag! HEre’s how I killed those three challenges I set myself.

    Firm and Grateable: This one was tricky. I used a bunch of different things in recipe trials (such as agar agar, guar gum, xanthan gum) to help make sure the cheese sets firm and grateable. But almost always, they meant that the cheese wouldn’t melt properly. Finally I tried an ingredient called “kappa carrageenan” which is a thickening agent made from red seaweed. It worked beautifully. It sets up nicely when cool but melts and stretches when heated – just like dairy cheese. I buy kappa carrageenan online. It’s useful for loads of stuff, so it’s worth having for other vegan cooking!

    Melty and Stretchy: As above, this was a tricky one to balance with the whole firm and grateable vibe. The solution was a mix of tapioca starch and psyllium husk powder. Tapioca starch helps make the cheese super stretchy like mozzarella when melted, while the psyllium husk powder adds fibre to the recipe – making the cheese deliciously stringy! I find all of these ingredients either at health food stores or my local Asian supermarket.

    Creamy and Tangy: The creaminess comes from a blend of soaked cashews and coconut oil. The tang comes from rice vinegar and vegan lactic acid powder. If you can’t get hold of lactic acid powder, don’t worry – I get that this is a specialist ingredient. Use double the rice vinegar instead.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Grateable Vegan Cheese in FOUR Steps!

    Four steps away from melty, grated shredded goodness! CAN YOU BELIEVE IT!? You’d BETTER believe it! Here goes nothing! Full recipe at the bottom of the page, but here’s a lil breakdown of the four main steps!

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    1. Make a cashew milk

    Sounds harder than it is. You just need to soak some cashews until soft and blend em up! I like to add my psyllium husks at this stage as they can be tricky to blend until smooth. Add them now and you’re guaranteed a super duper smooth cheese.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    2. Add the flavour bringers!

    By flavour bringers, I mean all the ingredients that bring the FLAVA! I’m talking nutritional yeast, miso paste, rice vinegar, salt etc etc. Give these a really good blend in with the cashew milk. You’ll notice a change in the colour because of the nooch, but don’t worry. It won’t be this yellow when you’re done!

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    3. Add the kappa carrageenan

    Final ingredient is the carrageenan along with some boiling water. This is going to start the thickening process super quickly, but it’s not enough to take it all the way there (that’s step 4). For now, blend everything together one last time.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    4. Thicken, form and chill!

    OK last step is the most crucial. Now everything is blended together we need to work quickly and thicken the mixture up. Transfer it to a saucepan and whisk while you heat. It’ll become stringy and stretchy and will start to set. Pour the mixture into a tub and leave it to cool. Once cooled, chill in the fridge until set.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    EXTRA NOTE: This cheese is absolutely destined to be melted. Although it’s totally great sliced in a sandwich, it’s 100% tastier when heated. So consider turning that sandwich into a grilled cheese sandwich?!

    Also, keep in mind that this vegan cheese EVEN BROWNS. So if you’re making a pasta bake or cheese on toast, whack that grill/broiler on and use liberally! It’ll bubble and melt and then brown and crisp. It really does melt just like real cheese! Just without the guilt and animal abuse!

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Need more CHEESY recipes??

    Then you came to the right place! Why not give these bad boys a try!?

    I must suck at Googling things. I didn’t find that. just kept finding things saying “THERE IS NO SUBSTITUTE”. which we all know is bunk! 😉

    The recipe you posted is for a sauce (as I’m sure you noticed), but since vegan cheese doesn’t become cheese-like until you add agar flakes, I have a feeling I could achieve the same effect by adding agar to the sauce recipe.

    I’ve got a good three weeks of free time ahead of me over the holidays, I’m going to try this out. I’ll report back if it works and tastes good. Thank you for the help!

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Sure! I actually find a few listings, but I’m not sure if they are all the same recipe. Look pretty similar, though.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    What type of recipes are you looking at adding the “cheese” to? For a salad, for example, maybe some marinated and/or baked tofu would work, if you could find a suitable marinade? I think there are some recipes for tofu “feta” floating around – maybe something like this would work: FatFree Vegan tofu feta.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    I like this very quick and easy gruyere-style sauce, which I found in the comments on the “Yummy French Onion Soup” here on vegweb ( Someone else said it’s from Jo Stephaniak’s Uncheese Cookbook. I know you’re not looking for a sauce but you could see what happens with the agar. The sauce is great for fondue though!

    1 cup water
    2 tbsp lemon juice (I use a little less)
    2 tbsp tahini
    2 tbsp nutritional yeast
    2 tbsp flour
    4 tsp arrowroot
    1 1/2 tsp onion powder
    1/4 tsp salt

    blend all these ingredients for several minutes until smooth. pour into a small saucepan and cook and stir over medium heat for 5-8 minutes. it should thicken up quite a bit in this time keep it on the heat and continue stirring until it thickens up.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    The INSIDER Summary:

    • Parmesan cheese uses rennet, an enzyme that’s found in the lining of a goat or calf’s stomach.
    • Because cheeses like Parmesan, Pecorino Romano, Manchengo, Gruyère, Gorgonzola, and others use it, they aren’t technically vegetarian.
    • Some brands make and sell these cheeses using vegetarian-friendly alternatives, but you need to look for them.

    There’s usually only one thing that separates a vegetarian from a vegan: cheese.

    Well, eggs and dairy, of course, but cheese is something that few people voluntarily cut from their diet. It can spruce up a plate of pasta, it’s the perfect companion to a cracker, and a sprinkle of it will take any dish to the next level.

    Unfortunately for the many vegetarians that probably eat cheese regularly, not all cheeses are vegetarian.

    Some cheeses, like basic Parmesan, use an enzyme called rennet that is found in the stomach lining of goats and calves.

    This enzyme aids coagulation, which helps separate milk into solid curds, turning it into the delicious cheese you know and love.

    But Parmesan is not the only cheese that uses it. Gorgonzola, Pecorino Romano, Grana Padano, Camembert, Vacherin, Emmenthaler, Gruyère, and Spain’s delicious Manchego all traditionally use rennet as well.

    There are some vegetarian-friendly versions of these cheeses available at grocery stores. T he y use vegetable rennet or microbial enzymes, making them safe for vegetarians to consume. Popular brands like Kraft claim to use microbial enzymes, as do many mass produced brands, and there are usually cheese “flavored” items that taste like the real deal in the vegan section. When in doubt, read the label.

    Vegetarians, the choice is yours. You can pretend you never read this and continue to eat all the glorious cheese you want, or you can say goodbye to your beloved.

    Vegan cheese for pizza that actually tastes good, is quick and easy to make at home, and doesn’t use nuts or cashews? Yes!

    I told you on my Easy Vegan Cheese Sauce recipe that it could be used to make a million and one different cheesy applications, and I wasn’t kidding! From my crave-worthy Choriqueso to nachos to vegan or dairy-free Philly cheesesteaks and more – it’s a great recipe to have in your arsenal.

    This recipe transforms it into the perfect topping for all your homemade pizzas (and anything else you’d love pizza cheese on!). It browns in the oven, has some stretch to it, and even re-melts when you heat the leftovers back up.

    Here are some of the reasons you’ll love this recipe:

    It’s vegan! Whether you’re lactose-intolerant, allergic to dairy, or just choose not to consume animal products, now you have a great cheese for your pizzas.

    It’s easy! This recipe uses easy-to-find ingredients and no expensive equipment – not even a blender.

    It’s fast! No need to worry about setting overnight or even for an hour. If you decide last minute to make pizza for dinner, that’s fine! This recipe comes together in less than ten.

    It’s delicious! Not only does it check the boxes of vegan, fast, and easy – it also tastes great. It can be hard to find a recipe like that!

    It’s allergy-friendly! Dairy is just the tip of the iceberg here. This cheese sauce also boasts being nut-free. Since most vegan cheeses contain cashews or other nuts, this is pretty impressive and inclusive.

    Equipment Needed

    A stovetop or burner. You’re going to be cooking this sauce over a stove. You could use a fancy heating blender if you have one, but the stove works just fine.

    A small saucepan. I prefer non-stick, but if you don’t have one that’s ok. A one-quart is plenty big enough.

    A silicone spatula. A wooden spoon, a plastic heatproof spoon, or a metal spoon will work fine too (just don’t scratch your non-stick pan with the metal!), but silicone works the best.

    Ingredients Needed

    Two batches of my cheese sauce base recipe. It should be more than enough to cover two medium or large pizzas with some left over. This will definitely depend on how thick you pour it on, though.

    If you’re only making one pizza, feel free to make only one batch of the cheese sauce and halve the additional ingredients.

    Miso. Miso is a fermented soy bean paste, and the more mild white miso works well here. It’s used for its tangy fermented flavor (similar to the lactic acid in dairy cheese).

    If you’re soy-free or can’t find it, you can omit it or substitute it for two times the amount of fermented sauerkraut brine. Yes, I just said that. Thanks to I’ve learned how wonderfully cheesy it can make vegan cheeses taste!

    Vegan Mayonnaise. Yes, mayo.

    Mayo adds some cheesy tang to the recipe, as well as adds some fat – which is lacking in the base, but definitely needed on pizza! If you’re oil-free though, you can omit this and add extra miso or sauerkraut brine instead.

    Check the ingredients and look for a soy-free variety if you need one!

    Mmm Garlic. Pizza is Italian and garlic is a requirement. It just is. Granulated or paste work best here, or it’ll make your cheese chunky. That doesn’t sound good at all.

    Salt. Pizza cheese is salty! Please don’t forget to salt your sauce. Table salt, pink salt, whatever salt – just not black salt unless you’re making an “egg” pizza!

    How to Make It:

    It really couldn’t be easier!

    Just whip up the vegan cheese sauce base, then stir in the rest of the ingredients (except the salt). Then, salt at the end to taste!

    How to Use It:

    I pour it hot directly on the pizza. That’s the easiest way! Once it starts to cool, it’ll start to get kind of gloopy and slime-like, and it makes it harder to get an even ‘coat’ of your vegan cheese on the pizza.

    If you’re using leftover, cooled cheese sauce, it’ll be gelatinous and pretty off-putting as is (this is what happens when the heat-activated tapioca starch gets chilled). No worries, though! Just use a spoon or ice cream scoop to put it on the pizza and it’ll melt beautifully.

    Bake your cheesed pizza at 480F for 15 minutes to get it to bubble and brown nicely. Five to ten minutes longer if you’re like me and like it to be a bit extra or if you’re using cold cheese sauce from the fridge.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    How to Store Leftover Vegan Cheese for Pizza:

    If you happen to have any sauce left over, just pop it into a sealed container and put it in the fridge.

    It’ll keep for three to five days.

    Leftovers will turn semi-solid and gelatinous, but will melt beautifully once heated again.

    Video to Make the Base Cheese Sauce:

    Follow the video above to make the sauce – just remember to add in all your other ingredients except the salt after the cheese is done. Salt to taste at the end, and enjoy!

    We continue our exploration of cheese from around the world with a look at Gruyere today.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    What is Gruyere Cheese?

    Gruyere Cheese is a hard, yellow cow’s milk cheese. It is named after the town of Gruyere, in Switzerland, although some do maintain that it is a French cheese. It has a sweet but slightly salty flavor and often has a creamy texture. When fully aged, it has small cracks and a slightly grainy texture. It can have quite a strong smell because of the process that creates its rind.

    It is one of our favorite imported cheeses and we know that many of our customers love being able to get hold of this Alpine cheese right here in Ohio.

    How is Gruyere Cheese made?

    It is made by heating raw milk in a copper vat, adding rennet and separating the curds and whey. The curds are placed into molds, salted in brine and smeared with bacteria. The cheese is then ripened for at least two months at room temperature, generally on wooden boards. The cheese is turned every couple of days to ensure even moisture distribution. It can be cured for up to 10 months and develops a more intense, almost earthy, flavor as it ages.

    How should I eat Gruyere Cheese?

    Gruyere Cheese melts very well. This makes it a great cheese for a fondue with white wine and garlic. Serve it with crusty bread, crudites and simply roasted potatoes alongside dipping forks for a fun sharing dinner with friends.

    Because it melts so well, it is also an excellent cheese to incorporate into baking. Try it in your next quiche for extra flavor. Melt it onto small pieces of toast to eat with French Onion Soup or put it into a grilled cheese sandwich. Even better, make a Croque Monsieur by using gruyere and ham in a toasted sandwich. You could even incorporate it into bread dough before baking to create a cheesy bread for lunch or a picnic.

    You could grate it to serve with pasta or salads, as it is not too overpowering. If you are serving it as part of a cheeseboard, try to include fruits such as pears, apples, and grapes. The sweetness of these fruits is excellent against the nuttiness of the cheese. Cut it into thin slices that your guests can enjoy.

    It is also excellent for adding comfort to a dish of mac and cheese. Gratin dishes such as potato dauphinoise will benefit from some slices of the cheese, as would butternut squash or sweet potato dishes.

    What should I drink with Gruyere Cheese?

    Gruyere goes best with slightly sweet white wines like Chardonnay, Riesling, or dessert wines. These complement creamy, nutty nature of the cheese. You could also enjoy it with an apple cider or a glass of Bock beer. All of these will enhance the flavor of the cheese without overpowering its more delicate elements.

    How do you like to eat Gruyere Cheese? Let us know in the comments!

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    As our culture evolves and continuously develops more knowledge about the ways in which we walk through the world, it is important that our thoughts align with our actions. Many choose a vegan lifestyle for a variety of reasons, yet there is no doubt that eliminating animal products from one’s life is better for the earth, the animals and your body.

    Yet, one of the main components holding many back to take the initial plunge, is the addictive culprit of dairy products, but mostly cheese. Many Americans grew up with cheese on pizza, in gooey mozzarella sticks, cheddar loaded nachos, and other classic foods. Cheese has been a staple in different cultural cuisines for centuries, and therefore our addiction to it has considerably grown.

    Cheese from all different animal sources contain one commonality — the presence of “casein” proteins in their makeup. For young animals receiving milk from their mother’s this is an important nutrient to receive in developmental stages. However, in the human health system and through digestion, the protein is broken down into compounds called “casomorphins” that have significant effects on our minds. According to Healthline, “Casomorphins can cross the blood-brain barrier and attach to dopamine receptors in your brain. This causes your brain to release dopamine, a neurotransmitter related to feelings of pleasure and reward.” And the more cheese and casomorphins our bodies absorb, the more likely our brain is able to create an unnatural craving for this ingredient.

    So first things first, if you are trying to go vegan, and just cannot seem to cut out cheese — it’s not entirely your fault. Learning about casomorphins and how our bodies become addicted to them is something you should consider in slowly trying to transition these products out of your diet. Secondly, take it slow! In comparison to people adopting a vegan lifestyle twenty years ago, we have the technology to try so many different alternatives to cheese. Whereas “back in the day” brands like “tofutti” and “vegan rella” were the only options, tasting like play-doh and plastic. Now there is an infinity of brands, kinds of vegan cheeses, and even restaurants offering or dedicated to having their own vegan cheeses. So instead of quitting cheese or dairy products all together overnight, we definitely recommend exploring the different vegan cheese substitutes that the market has to offer first, finding your favorites, and slowly making the transition!

    In this round up, we’ll go through not only our top favorite vegan cheese substitutes, but also the best ways to use them and some suggested recipes for tried and tested favorites! Don’t worry, these vegan cheeses are surely going to become your favorites in no time.

    1) So Delicious Dairy Free Mozzarella Style Shreds

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    A vegan cheese substitute that can be found in almost every food market, the So Delicious Dairy Free Mozzarella Style Shreds are made from a coconut base, which may sound a bit surprising for a cheese alternative, yet, we can attest that these shreds are not sweet in the slightest. So Delicious has perfected a “mozzarella-inspired” flavor that is delicious for topping on homemade vegan pizzas, on pastas, or even in panini’s. When you want a little extra cheesiness for your meal, this alternative doesn’t skip on melting. This alternative is also gluten-free, and is definitely a great option for newer vegans who are looking to dabble in plant-based cheeses.

    Recipe We’d Recommend: Moderna Margherita Pizza from So Delicious

    Easy for after work, after school, or to slice up as party appetizers this margherita style pizza is soooo delicious, no pun intended!

    2) Kite Hill Dairy Free Cream Cheese Alternative

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    If bagels and cream cheese were your thing, do not fret, Kite Hill’s Dairy Free Cream Cheese Alternative will have you never looking back to the full-fat milk cream cheeses of the past. It’s flavor is classic made from almonds, texture creamy and smooth, and is incredibly spreadable. Plus, Kite Hill has made more than just a plain flavor if that’s not your thing. It is available in “Chive,” “Everything,” and “Garden Veggie” for endless combinations of bagels (or recipe) of choice!

    Best For: Toasted Bagels with Everything Seasoning

    Recipe We’d Recommend: Vegan Cream Cheese Swirl Brownies by The Conscientious Eater

    “With a fudgy brownie base, and sweet cream cheese swirl, these Vegan Cream Cheese Swirl Brownies are a decadent treat that won’t last long!” We’re sold.

    If you’re a cheese lover, probably tried Gruyère before (perhaps in a decadent croque monsieur, an ooey gooey fondue, or atop a cozy bowl of French onion soup). But do you know what Gruyère cheese — or what makes it so delicious and versatile? Here’s what you need to know about the fancy-sounding, yet surprisingly approachable, cheese:

    What Is Gruyère Cheese?

    Gruyère is a firm yellow Swiss cheese. It is named after the town of Gruyères in Switzerland. Gruyère is generally aged for six months or longer and is made from whole cow’s milk. It features very few small eyes (or holes), an unusual characteristic for Swiss cheese. Most Swiss varieties have a lot of large holes, which are created by gas bubbles during the cheesemaking process.

    What Does Gruyère Taste Like?

    Gruyère is known for its rich, creamy, salty, and nutty flavor. However, its flavor does vary depending on age: Young Gruyère has pronounced creaminess and nuttiness, while older Gruyère has developed an earthiness that is a bit more complex.

    How to Pronounce Gruyère

    The correct pronunciation is “groo-YAIR.” If you’re still not sure, visit Merriam-Webster to listen to an audio recording.

    How to Use Gruyère

    Its pleasant, but not overwhelming, flavor makes Gruyère the perfect cheese for baking. It adds a distinct creamy texture and subtle sweetness to cheese-infused comfort foods, like quiches and gratins. A wonderful melting cheese, Gruyère is also ideal for fondues and dips. Why does it melt so beautifully? Gruyère has a high water-to-oil ratio. This extra water ensures that cheese melts evenly instead of separating into pools of fat. This quality makes it the perfect choice for classic cheesy French dishes like the croque monsieur and French onion soup.

    If you’re making a cheese board for your next event, you may want to consider adding Gruyère to the mix — not only is it an attractive cheese, but the salty-nutty flavor is universally appealing.

    You can also add shredded Gruyère to mozzarella-topped pizza or mix it into mashed potatoes or grits instead of Cheddar. Really, when it comes to Gruyère, the options are limitless.

    Best Wine Pairings for Gruyère

    A firm, delicate, nutty cheese like Gruyère pairs well with a medium-bodied white or a fruity red. Try it with your favorite Chardonnay, Riesling, or a fruit-forward Pinot Noir.

    Gruyère Substitute

    You shouldn’t have much trouble finding Gruyère at your local supermarket, as it’s widely available these days. If you must use a substitute, though, opt for another semi-hard, yellow, Swiss option like Emmental. Other good choices include Jarlsberg, raclette, or Beaufort. You can substitute all these cheeses for Gruyère using a 1:1 ratio (if your recipe calls for a cup of shredded Gruyère, use a cup of your alternative).

    The INSIDER Summary:

    • Parmesan cheese uses rennet, an enzyme that’s found in the lining of a goat or calf’s stomach.
    • Because cheeses like Parmesan, Pecorino Romano, Manchengo, Gruyère, Gorgonzola, and others use it, they aren’t technically vegetarian.
    • Some brands make and sell these cheeses using vegetarian-friendly alternatives, but you need to look for them.

    There’s usually only one thing that separates a vegetarian from a vegan: cheese.

    Well, eggs and dairy, of course, but cheese is something that few people voluntarily cut from their diet. It can spruce up a plate of pasta, it’s the perfect companion to a cracker, and a sprinkle of it will take any dish to the next level.

    Unfortunately for the many vegetarians that probably eat cheese regularly, not all cheeses are vegetarian.

    Some cheeses, like basic Parmesan, use an enzyme called rennet that is found in the stomach lining of goats and calves.

    This enzyme aids coagulation, which helps separate milk into solid curds, turning it into the delicious cheese you know and love.

    But Parmesan is not the only cheese that uses it. Gorgonzola, Pecorino Romano, Grana Padano, Camembert, Vacherin, Emmenthaler, Gruyère, and Spain’s delicious Manchego all traditionally use rennet as well.

    There are some vegetarian-friendly versions of these cheeses available at grocery stores. T he y use vegetable rennet or microbial enzymes, making them safe for vegetarians to consume. Popular brands like Kraft claim to use microbial enzymes, as do many mass produced brands, and there are usually cheese “flavored” items that taste like the real deal in the vegan section. When in doubt, read the label.

    Vegetarians, the choice is yours. You can pretend you never read this and continue to eat all the glorious cheese you want, or you can say goodbye to your beloved.

    by Faith McGee / in Style

    Originating from the countryside of Switzerland, Gruyere cheese is well-known for its nutty flavour and wonderful melting capabilities. Though it’s found in many cheese speciality shops and supermarkets, many home chefs do not keep Gruyere cheese on hand. Fortunately, several alternative cheeses can replicate its taste.


    In order to find a proper alternative to this cheese, it is important to understand its flavour composition. Similar to Emmental cheese, Gruyere is made from raw cow’s milk. In the past there were small holes in Gruyere, but today, the process of making this cheese is so controlled that there is not enough raw milk bacteria to make these holes. The majority of Gruyere cheese has been aged for 8 to 10 months. These long ageing time benefits the melting capabilities of Gruyere. The cheese’s high cream content and dense texture makes it the perfect cheese to use for onion soup and gratins. Traditionally speaking, real fondue is made with Gruyere cheese. It has a nutty, salty taste with undertones of fruits like apples and pears. The high butterfat-to-moisture ratio makes this one of the most popular cheeses for cooking.

    • In order to find a proper alternative to this cheese, it is important to understand its flavour composition.
    • Traditionally speaking, real fondue is made with Gruyere cheese.


    When Gruyere is not available, use an alternative like its closest cousin, Swiss Emmental. These cheeses are made similarly from nearby regions. It is often used in Reuben and croque-monsieur sandwiches. The one drawback is that it has a lower butterfat that Gruyere and will not melt cohesively. Likewise, Jarlsberg Swiss is a good Norwegian cheese to use as a substitute. For those who may be put off by the pungent flavour of Gruyere, Jarlsberg is a good alternative for melting. Some people swear they can replicate the flavour of Gruyere by melting fontina and Parmesan together. Fontina is a mild Italian cheese that has good melting capabilities. To get that nutty flavour of Gruyere, it’s best to use some Parmesan for that nutty flavour. Avoid purchasing cheese that is labelled “Italian hard cheese”; this is not the Parmesan that is made in Italy.

    • When Gruyere is not available, use an alternative like its closest cousin, Swiss Emmental.
    • For those who may be put off by the pungent flavour of Gruyere, Jarlsberg is a good alternative for melting.

    Vegan Cheeses

    It can be frustrating to find a great recipe that includes cheese if you are a vegan, are lactose or gluten intolerant, or watching your weight. Fortunately, there are a wide variety of cheeses you can use. Galaxy Foods offers a cheese made out of rice milk. Their cheeses contain no casein, lactose, soy or gluten. This company also has a soy cheese that comes in mozzarella and Parmesan. Another popular brand is Follow Your Heart. This company is located in Los Angeles, but their cheese can be found in speciality food stores around the country. Their mozzarella is completely vegan and contains no casein. Always look at the label when buying soy cheese. A lot of products contain the milk derivative, casein. Certain brands of cheeses are more difficult to melt than others, so always experiment to find a brand you like.

    Posted on Published: February 12, 2014 – Last updated: February 8, 2020 By: Author Becca @ Easy Cheesy Vegetarian

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    I made this recipe aaaages ago. Like, December. Then came vegan January and I wasn’t able to post it. Then my life became one big chaotic mess of about a million different things, and now here we are. Finally you get my mushroom and gruyère tart.

    Let me tell you – it’s worth the wait. This thing was delish.

    (side note: automatic spell check on a Mac is the most annoying thing ever. The number of times I’ve described something as ‘relish’ instead of ‘delish’ because of the stupid autocorrect is possibly now in triple digits. Aside from pointing out the fact that I use this kind-of-made-up word far too often, can anyone offer any advice?)

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    So. Tart. Rich mushroom tart with mushroom pâté and gruyère cheese. And pastry. Do you need more italics to convince you that this was the most incredible, decadent tart ever?

    Yeah, there was a reason I made this at Christmas time, when we all know that calories don’t exist. Everyone’s given up on their New Year’s Resolutions by now though, right? We’re back to eating pastry again? Wonderful.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Although the tart looks fancy, it’s actually really easy to construct. I used shop-bought pastry because I’m a big cheat like that, and then topped it with a thick layer of mushroom pâté (you can make your own mushroom pâté really easily… sorry about the photos…), sautéed mushrooms and then a good handful of grated gruyère.

    All these accents are making me dizzy. It’s really not as posh as it seems, I swear.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    I love how versatile this tart is. It’s incredible hot or cold, so it makes a great option for either lunch or dinner (or, you know, breakfast or a midnight snack). My favourite way was to serve it cold with a massive heap of salad, a dollop of coleslaw and a chunk of fresh bread and butter. Let me know if you come up with any other amazing combinations!

    What is Gruyere?

    A landscape entrenched in meadows and grasslands, the canton of Fribourg serves as the ideal birthplace of Gruyere. A palate of vast complexity, Gruyere enjoys ever evolving nuances. Opening with full-bodied, fruity tones, the flavors slowly journey towards earthy and nutty with a soft finale to finish. Covered by a natural rind, the texture of the body is dense during its youth, becoming flaky and somewhat granular as it ages.

    No silage enters the diet of the cows providing the milk. Instead, the alpine cows roam freely on pastures cushioned between freshwater streams and hillsides in the Fribourg Prealps. This natural forage is key to imparting the signature flavors of the Gruyere, making it impossible to replicate fully in other regions.

    A cheese plastered in experience and tradition, Gruyere upholds a standard of uninhibited quality, an approach that has helped characterize it through generations.

    How Gruyere is made

    Endeared for its intricate layers of flavor, the process of making Gruyere calls for expertise in technique combined with experience in instinct.

    Unblemished by sileage, wholesome milk from pasture is delivered to local cheese dairies daily. The process is begun by pouring the milk in large copper cauldrons where it is added natural culture and rennet. This encourages coagulation, and eventually creates a firm curd. Rarely seen among other cheeses, the milk is not heated before being curdled, allowing it to maintain its aromatic, full body. After being cut and separated, the curd is let to drain, followed by a close monitoring of the texture. The curd is then poured into its signature molds inscribed with the designation of the cheese. Compressed for 20 hours, with a weight of almost a ton, the wheels are removed from their molds and soaked in brine, making them ready for aging.

    During the initial storing, workers tend the cheeses daily for three months, after which they are moved to more humid cellars. Careful brushing and turning prevents any unwanted bacterial growth. At least five months in the cellars are needed for the cheese to don the flavors of the Gruyere cheese, with some spending up to 18 months maturing.

    With the milk directly from dairy farm, it is unsaturated and unpasteurized, key to the full-bodied flavor of the Gruyere. No additives or fillers are present, meaning the cheese is completely free of gluten. However, the addition of animal rennet makes it unsuited for vegetarians.

    Substitutes for Gruyere

    Though unique in its character and complexion of flavors, Gruyere stands in close relation to other cheeses that share similar qualities.

    Finding close traits to those of Gruyere, Comté is a milder iteration, similar especially in texture. Dense with undertones of butter and salt, this cheese deserves mention, when looking to find a substitute for Gruyere.

    A different take on a Swiss cheese, Emmentaler brings a firm, yet softer consistency, while mild nuances of hazelnut and soft butter makes for an able-bodied stand-in.

    By Ela on 17. February, 2018 | 781 Comments . This post may contain affiliate links*. As an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases.

    Easy vegan cheese sauce with minimal ingredients and ready in 3 minutes! A super simple and nut-free plant-based recipe which requires only a handful of ingredients. This vegan queso is perfect for pizza, nachos, Mac and Cheese, burgers, pasta bake, toast, and more savory recipes. The sauce doesn’t contain cashews!

    How to make vegan gruyere cheeseEasy Vegan Cheese Sauce Without Cashews!

    This is probably the easiest homemade vegan cheese sauce ever! It might change your life, it changed mine, I am not kidding. Coconut milk, tapioca flour, nutritional yeast flakes, water, and salt – these are the ingredients which you will need to make this delicious sauce.

    Since most people have water and salt at home, all you need to buy is coconut milk, tapioca flour, and nutritional yeast flakes. But maybe you already have these ingredients at home as well. So let’s start to make this easy recipe, it will be done in 3 minutes!

    How to make vegan gruyere cheeseOnly A Few Ingredients

    I know there are tons of vegan cheese sauce recipes out there, but most of them contain cashews + many more ingredients and require longer preparation time. This cashew-free cheese sauce contains only a handful of ingredients and is ready in 3 minutes.

    How To Make Vegan Cheese Sauce

    You just need to put all the ingredients into a saucepan, bring the mixture to a boil and that’s it! You don’t even need a blender or food processor. No cooking of veggies, no soaking of cashews. It seriously couldn’t be easier than that.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheeseNot Only For Vegans

    This recipe is not only amazing for vegans. I served it also to vegetarians and meat eaters and everyone loved the taste AND texture of this vegan cheese sauce. The tapioca flour (which is also called tapioca starch) makes this recipe so special because it adds the amazing elasticity to the sauce. It makes the sauce stretchy and even reminds of real cheese. Nutritional yeast is an important ingredient for the taste because it adds a cheesy flavor. The spices are up to you, but I love to add some garlic and onion powder, and also a pinch of smoked paprika.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheesePerfect For Nachos, Pizza, Gratin And More

    You can use this vegan sauce for any savory recipe which requires cheese. Whether it is pizza, nachos, gratin, pasta, or any other plant-based recipe. Sometimes when I am too lazy to make my Mac and Cheese recipe I will simply make this 3-minute cheese sauce and pour it over my cooked pasta and my dinner is served in just a few minutes. I have included some pictures of different dishes which I made using this cheese sauce recipe.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheeseThis easy vegan cheese sauce is:

    • Plant-based
    • Gluten free
    • Oil-free
    • Dairy-free
    • Nut-free (no Cashews!)
    • Paleo-friendly
    • Easy to make in a few minutes

    How to make vegan gruyere cheeseMake This Vegan Cheese Sauce Today

    I made this cheeze sauce probably 100 times already because I use it in almost all of my savory recipes lol. I just love simple recipes which require only a few ingredients and this easy sauce recipe is one of them. So don’t wait any longer and make it NOW. I am sure you will love it as well.

    Tapioca flour can be bought in every Asia shop or big supermarkets or simply ordered online . Same goes for nutritional yeast flakes . Check the Recipe Notes for a tapioca flour substitute.

    Should you recreate this vegan nacho cheese sauce, please leave a comment below and don’t forget to tag me in your Instagram or Facebook post with @elavegan and #elavegan because I love to see your recreations.

    Vegan Cashew Cheese – Thick and creamy, this versatile cashew ricotta cheese is ready in as little as 10 minutes and tastes fantastic! It’s the best vegan ricotta ever and can be used anywhere ricotta is called for!

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    As vegans and those eating a plant-based diet, you will be thrilled to have this easy, vegan cheese in your culinary library! I absolutely love this stuff and so does everyone else who tries it, vegan or not!

    Vegan cashew ricotta cheese tastes just like the ricotta I was accustomed to for many years before becoming vegan. It’s soy-free (no tofu) for those limiting their soy intake, and is a simple recipe with lots of possibilities. Add your own tastes to this basic cheese by adding herbs and spices to suit your taste.

    Use this vegan ricotta in Lasagna, Manicotti, or Stuffed Shells, as a topper for crackers or as a spread for sandwiches. I’ve even used it in a Persimmon Ricotta Scone recipe that came out wonderful (I omitted the pepper, onion powder and garlic for the recipe). You can use this with a few adjustments for any recipe that calls for ricotta.

    The ingredients for this vegan ricotta cheese are very common making this a great basic recipe for anyone starting out experimenting with vegan nut cheeses. Make yourself some fresh cashew ricotta cheese. Taste and feel the difference compared to processed cheese products. You will not be disappointed!

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    How To Make Cashew Ricotta Cheese

    Step 1: It’s best to soak your cashews in water before starting. There are 2 ways to soak:

    1. Soak cashew in cool water for 2 – 3 hours, drain and rinse (this method is best for digestion).
    2. For a quick method of soaking, let cashews sit in hot water for 5 minutes, drain, rinse and continue with recipe.

    Why soak cashews? Soaking will help soften the cashews by plumping them up with water and helps the cashews blend easily. Soaking is also said to be beneficial for digestion and mineral & vitamin absorption. If you’re in a hurry, you can still make this cashew ricotta cheese successfully without soaking. You just may need to add a bit more water while blending.

    Step 2: Next, place cashews, water, lemon juice/apple cider vinegar, garlic, onion powder, salt, and pepper in a food processor/blender and blend until creamy. Place in a covered container and place in the fridge until ready to use. Or use right away in any recipe calling for ricotta cheese.

    And that’s it, vegan cashew ricotta cheese made easy and delicious!

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    How To Use Vegan Ricotta

    You may find yourself eating it right out to the bowl. Enjoy everywhere you would use ricotta cheese!

    • Served as is, vegan ricotta is great smeared on crackers with fruit.
    • Use it in Vegetable Vegan Lasagna or Simple Lasagna and Asparagus
    • Use it for stuffing, like these Cheese Manicotti, Spinach Vegan Stuffed Shells or Butternut Squash Stuffed Shells
    • It’s wonderful in this Zucchini Ricotta Pasta with Basil + Mint
    • Use in baking for these Ricotta Persimmon Scones

    How To Store Leftovers

    • Refrigerator: Leftovers can be stored in refrigerator for up to 5 days in a covered container.
    • Freezer: Cashew ricotta is freezer friendly and can stored in freezer safe containers for up to to 2 months.

    I hope you LOVE this vegan ricotta as much we do! It’s:

    • Clean eating
    • WFPB
    • Quick and easy to make
    • Healthy, dairy-free option
    • & So delicious!

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    If you try this vegan ricotta, please let me know! Leave a comment and rate it below. I love to hear what you think, or any changes you make.

    Le Gruyère AOP is famous for its essential part in Swiss fondue, but the cheese is a wonderful all-rounder that melts beautifully into all sorts of family-friendly dishes. Here are a few of our favourite ways to use this fantastic Swiss cheese when feeding a crowd.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Great British Chefs is a team of passionate food lovers dedicated to bringing you the latest food stories, news and reviews.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Great British Chefs is a team of passionate food lovers dedicated to bringing you the latest food stories, news and reviews as well as access to some of Britain’s greatest chefs. Our posts cover everything we are excited about from the latest openings and hottest food trends to brilliant new producers and exclusive chef interviews.

    Famous all over the world as the primary ingredient in Swiss fondue, Le Gruyère AOP is a wonderful alpine cheese with a mild, sweet, nutty flavour. Swiss affineurs (the people responsible for producing and ageing cheese) have been making Le Gruyère AOP for nearly 1,000 years; the earliest records of this cheese can be traced way back to 1115, and cheesemakers today in the area around Fribourg, Vaud, Neuchâtel and Jura still make it using the same traditional methods as their forefathers did centuries ago.

    When we think of Le Gruyère AOP, we usually think of the younger version of the cheese – creamy and mild, with a hint of nuttiness. It is a famously excellent cooking cheese, with a beautiful smooth, silky texture when melted into a fondue, a French onion soup or onto a croque monsieur. As Le Gruyère AOP ages, however, the flavour asserts itself as something more complex – those rich, nutty notes come to the fore, along with deep, earthy tones. The texture changes, going from smooth and soft to grainy and crumbly. Le Gruyère AOP Premier Cru – aged for fourteen months in humid cellars in Fribourg – has won best cheese at the World Cheese Awards a record four times (1992, 2002, 2005 and 2015).

    Long story short, Gruyère is a fabulous cheese to cook with, and its well-rounded flavour means it’s able to be used in all sorts of dishes. Read on for a few of our favourite ways to use this glorious cheese when you have a crowd to feed.

    These Mini Gruyère Quiches are perfect for a weekend or holiday buffet party table. They are easy to make, perfect to prepare ahead and freeze and they are simply a delicious, easy snack.

    This post may contain affiliate links. For further details please read our disclosure page.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    1. The perfect finger food:
    2. Ingredients for Mini Gruyère Quiches
    3. How to make Mini Gruyère Quiches with Mushrooms
      • How to lighten up the recipe
      • How much filling to use in each?
      • Variations of Additions
      • What kind of cheese is good for quiche?
    4. More delicious appetizers:

    The perfect finger food:

    • Mini quiches are bite-sized, just small enough to eat with one hand when juggling a party plate!
    • They can be made 2 to 3 days ahead and then kept in the fridge or frozen and reheated.
    • Make them plain or customise them with tasty additions like mushrooms, spinach, caramelised onions, etc. All tastes can be catered for!

    Ingredients for Mini Gruyère Quiches

    • Shortcrust pastry, use ready rolled or make your own.
    • crème fraîche or double/heavy cream
    • 2 medium-sized eggs
    • whole or semi-skimmed milk
    • Gruyère cheese, grated
    • Herbs of your choice
    • Salt and black pepper
    • Extras for variations: Mushrooms, garlic, red onions, etc
    • Shallow bun/patty tin

    How to make Mini Gruyère Quiches with Mushrooms

    • First pre-heat your oven to 180°C/350F°C/Gas 4.
    • Unroll the ready rolled shortcrust pastry and cut 12 rounds of the pastry and line a 12 hole shallow bun/patty tin. I use a glass that makes the perfect size round for my tin, around 7.5cm.
    • Refrigerate the pastry while you make the filling.
    • Gently fry the chopped mushrooms with the garlic until soft. Drain on a paper towel and let cool.
    • Add the crème fraîche or double/heavy cream, milk, whole egg and egg yolk in a bowl and whisk together until well combined, season to taste.
    • Divide the mushrooms and garlic between the pastry cases, then sprinkle on some of the grated Gruyère, a big pinch should suffice.
    • Spoon the crème fraîche or double/heavy cream and eggs carefully and evenly over the mushrooms, etc. Don’t overfill.
    • Bake for 15-20 minutes or until golden and the filling has risen. Leave to cool for a few minutes before removing from the tin.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    How to lighten up the recipe

    To lighten up these mini Gruyère quiches use semi-skimmed milk and lighter crème fraîche in place of the whole milk and cream.

    How much filling to use in each?

    You’ll need to judge how much filling to use, you won’t need much as the portions are so small. This is why I prefer to place the extras fillings in first and then the egg mixture, this way you won’t over fill the pastry cases.

    Variations of Additions

    • Spinach – lightly sauté finely chopped fresh spinach in a little butter with some garlic
    • Sun-dried Tomato, finely chop and gently warm in its own oil.
    • Red onion and red pepper, finely chop and gently sauté until softened.
    • Vegetarian bacon, finely chopped and gently fried.

    What kind of cheese is good for quiche?

    Gruyere is our cheese of choice, but Cheddar or Emmenthal are equally great in a quiche. Also sometimes a combination of cheeses works well. Try Blue cheese or Parmesan combined with Cheddar.

    • And don’t forget the herbs. Thyme, Herbes De Provence, our favourites with eggs.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Gruyère is named after the town in Switzerland where it was orginally produced. It is a hard cheese that becomes a wonderfully smooth and melting type cheese, made from cow’s milk.

    Gruyère cheese can be used in a number of ways. As it melts easily it can be great in a toasted or grilled sandwich or croque monsieur. It is absolutely delicious in French Onion soup, grated into mashed potato and a wonderful addition to savoury scones.

    Yes, the egg mixture alone will make lovely crustless quiches! Just remember to grease the shallow bun/patty tin or use a deeper muffin tin to make more substantial mini crustless quiches. Place your cheese and extras e.g. mushrooms etc into the greased tin and pour over the egg mixture. Bake for around 10-15 minutes.

    You can, of course, but if you do remember to prick the bases with a fork to prevent the pastry from puffing up. I don’t blind bake these mini quiches as they work well without if baked correctly.

    More delicious appetizers:

    • Easy Mushroom and Nut Vegetarian Sausage Rolls
    • Healthy 4-seed Crackers

    Mini Gruyère Quiches are delicious warm or cold. Make lots, they don’t seem to last very long!

    First published in 2012, republished with updated content.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    I hope you’re all well and staying safe in these difficult times. I hope this pandemic will soon be in our past and we’ll be able to return to normal life. If you’re self quarantining as I am and looking for something to do to pass the time and relieve some stress, baking is always a good idea. I made this herb and Gruyere cheese artisan bread earlier this week. This bread is perfect for beginners. It requires no kneading and the dough is very forgiving. The only catch is that you’ll need to give the dough 16 hours to rise and form gluten. If you don’t have herbs or Gruyere cheese, you can make a plain version of this bread. I’ve provided instructions for that at the end of the post.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    How to Make Herb and Gruyere Cheese Artisan Bread

    To make this herb and Gruyere cheese artisan bread, you will need 3 cups of all-purpose flour (plus more for flouring), 1 teaspoon of instant yeast, ¾ cup of Gruyere cheese (grated), 4 stalks of fresh thyme (de-stemmed), 3 stalks of fresh rosemary (chopped), 1¼ teaspoons of salt, ½ teaspoon of garlic powder, and 1⅔ c ups of warm water.

    • How to make vegan gruyere cheese
    • How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Pour 3 cups of flour into a large mixing bowl. Add and mix the yeast to the flour. Add the garlic powder, herbs, cheese, and salt to the flour and mix everything together. Pour the water into the flour mixture and use a spoon to mix the flour into a dough. Put the dough into a clean mixing bowl. Cover the bowl and place it in a warm, draft free area for 16 hours.

    • How to make vegan gruyere cheese
    • How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Lightly flour a clean surface and pour the dough onto the floured surface (you can flour your hands lightly and use it to push the dough onto the surface). Pull the outer edges of the dough into the center to form a circle (see first picture above). Lightly flour the top of the dough and flip it over so that the folded side is at the bottom. Turn the dough into circles to help seal the bottom. Flour a bowl lightly and put the dough into the bowl. Cover the bowl and place it in a warm, draft free area to let the dough rise for 1 hour.

    • How to make vegan gruyere cheese
    • How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    About 30 minutes before the hour is up, place a large Dutch oven with the lid into an oven and preheat the oven at 400°F for 30 minutes. Carefully take out the Dutch oven with oven mitts and set it on the stove. Place the dough onto a large parchment paper and place the parchment paper with the dough into the Dutch oven. Cover the Dutch oven with the lid and place it in the oven (use oven mitts!). Bake the bread for 30 minutes.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Take out the Dutch oven and remove the lid. Place the Dutch oven with the bread back into the oven without the lid on. Let the bread bake for 20 minutes or until golden brown. Carefully remove the parchment paper with the bread from the Dutch oven. Place the bread on a cooling rack. Let the bread cool for 30 minutes before serving. This bread can last for up to a week when tightly wrapped and stored in a fridge. Stay safe and enjoy!

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Table Of Contents

    Gruyere is a Swiss cheese that melts smoothly. It is made from cow milk and can be preserved for more than six months. It a great cheese for the table as its taste is not very aggressive. It can be used in cheese latter as well as a slice on a sandwich due to its enjoyable taste. Being an excellent melting cheese it is also used for making traditional recipe of Fondue as well as classic grilled cheese sandwich of France, Croque Monsieur. Its taste changes slightly depending upon its age. Its taste at a younger age can be a bit sweet and salty but as it ages it tastes a bit assertive and nutty.

    Though Gruyere is known for its creaminess and distinctive but non-empowering taste but you may not get it every time. In such condition, either you will have to search for cheese making kits for beginners to make different types of cheese or find out what kind of cheese is similar to Gruyere. The information provided in this write-up will help you to know some of the substitutes of gruyere so that you can replace it while making a dish similar to the dish with Gruyere.

    Cheese Is Similar To Gruyere?

    Cheese Is Similar To Gruyere?

    Types of cheese similar to gruyere

    Jarlsberg from Norway :

    This cheese is primarily made in Norway from cow milk. But today Norway has licensed many people to produce it in several other countries. Though the internal texture of this cheese is semi-creamy and has big holes still it has a mildly tangy and nutty taste similar to Gruyere. It is an all-purpose cheese and can be used on the sandwich and melted to use on other recipes.

    Comte from France :

    It is one of the most popular cheese options of France. It is also known for its strict and harsh manufacturing system and long storage ability. Its flavor is somewhat stronger than Gruyere but not so harsh. Internally it has a compact, flexible and creamy texture with a yellowish color. It can be retained even after melting it. It can be used in recipes that can be baked.

    Emmentaler from Switzerland :

    This variety of cheese is known for the regularity of its holes. Its name has been taken from the Canton of Emmental where it was traditionally made. Tiny hay particles in the milk used for making this cheese cause holes in it. It is very much similar to Gruyere in texture and taste. Though it is more flexible and yellowish than Comte still it can be used in gratins and fondue.

    Raclette from Switzerland :

    It is one of the oldest Swiss cheese options. Primarily it was used in various recipes after melting it. It is very pleasant to eat due to its mild taste.

    Mozzarella from Italy :

    It is one of the famous Italian cheese options. It was traditionally made from the milk of water buffaloes but now any milk can be used for making this cheese. Though it has a mild, clean and salty taste but its taste may change slightly every time as different manufacturers make it differently. It has semi-firm texture and white color still if can be used as topping with pasta and pizza.

    Thus you can find several cheese options that are similar to Gruyere.

    Creamed Spinach with Gruyère Cheese is a delicious and versatile side dish. You can enjoy this as a side dish for two, or double it and serve as an easy vegetarian meal for two, or side dish for four.

    I have posted creamed spinach recipes before, once using Gouda and another with Parmesan. This version uses Gruyère cheese and of the three, it is my favorite version. So much so, that Creamed Spinach with Gruyère Cheese is the only version I kept on the blog. I like the nutty flavor of the Gruyère and how it melts nicely without being grainy. I also tweaked and adjusted the recipe to make two servings, so it has really been adapted and improved! If you need more servings, one click i n the recipe card will convert it to 4 or 6 servings!

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Ingredients for Creamed Spinach with Gruyère Cheese:

    • Fresh spinach
    • Shallot
    • Garlic
    • Butter
    • Salt
    • Pepper
    • Flour
    • Milk
    • Heavy cream
    • Nutmeg
    • Gruyere cheese (if you need a substitute, read The Best Five Substitutes for Gruyere.)

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    When I cook fresh spinach I am always amazed at how little I have left. Because spinach is 92% water, it makes sense. For this recipe it is important that all the water be squeezed out of the spinach after wilting. If you don’t do this, your cooked dish will be very watery. According to the experts, a full pound of spinach is equal to about one cup cooked spinach. I end up with closer to 1 ¼ cups.

    You could use frozen spinach but you would need to thaw it completely and remove all the excess water. You can skip the step that calls for wilting the spinach if using frozen.

    I think shallots add that little extra flavor that this recipe for Creamed Spinach with Gruyère Cheese needed to take it over the top. In a pinch you can certainly use onion in its place. I would use half of a small onion for two servings.

    Cheesemakers aren’t required to specifically label animal rennet in the U.S. – but we can tell you how to shop smart

    Share this

    Join Vegetarian Times

    Create a personalized feed and bookmark your favorites.

    Already have an account?

    Join Vegetarian Times

    Create a personalized feed and bookmark your favorites.

    Already have an account?

    Photo: Shana Novak / Getty Images

    Get access to everything we publish when you sign up for Outside+ >”,”name”:”in-content-cta”,”type”:”link”>>’>Join today!.

    Many cheeses contain the animal rennet — an enzyme that helps milk separate into curds and whey. That enzyme is typically derived from the stomach of calves killed for veal, so most vegetarians see it as off-limits. Cheesemakers aren’t required to specify on their packages if they’re using animal or vegetable rennet, so you might want to do a little research before buying that next wedge. Here’s what you’ll need to know.

    Decode the Label

    “Most cheeses are just labeled with ‘milk, salt, and enzymes,’” says Brian Ralph, cavemaster at Murray’s Cheese Shop in New York City. The problem? Those “enzymes” may or may not refer to animal rennet, a traditional cheese-making ingredient extracted from the stomach lining of slaughtered cows, goats, sheep, and even pigs. When in doubt, ask a knowledgeable cheesemonger for cheeses made with veg-friendly alternatives such as vegetable rennet, which typically comes from thistle plants, and microbial rennet derived from fungus, yeast, or mold. (You can safely buy fresh cheeses that don’t contain rennet at all: think cream cheese and paneer.) At the supermarket? Trader Joe’s and Whole Foods both label the source of rennet used in their generic-brand cheeses, many of which are vegetarian. A good cheese shop will also mark it on signs beside the cheese, notes Ralph.

    Rethink Romano

    As a rule of thumb, be wary of fromage from across the pond. “Most European cheeses are made with animal rennet because these are age-old recipes that have always used animal rennet,” explains Ralph. In fact, according to European Union law, Parmigiano-Reggiano must contain animal rennet in order to use the name. Luckily, you can still find veg versions of Parmesan (and other European-style cheeses) made Stateside. We love Organic Valley Shredded Parmesan and BelGioioso Vegetarian Parmesan, a grate-it-yourself wedge. Into English Cheddar? More and more British cheeses are being made — and labeled — vegetarian. Also, a handful of traditional Spanish and Portuguese sheep’s cheeses, including La Serena and Zimbro, use vegetarian thistle rennet, which has a distinctly briny flavor.

    Aim for Organic

    Concerned about cheese coming from animals treated inhumanely? Choose organic, when possible: “The bulk of conventional milk production comes from farms that confine their cows to buildings or feedlots during virtually all their productive lives,” says Mark Kastel, co-founder of the Cornucopia Institute. “These cows don’t have the opportunity to exhibit their natural, instinctive behavior, such as grazing on fresh grass.” Read the Cornucopia Institute’s Dairy Scorecard to see which organic cheese makers provide the most pasture time, prohibit the use of hormones, and more. “Most ‘farmstead’ cheese producers, who have a small processing plant right on the farm, go far beyond the minimum required by the USDA organic program,” notes Kastel. Check out the farmstead cheeses at your local farmers’ market, where you can ask directly about farming practices.

    Consider the Alternatives

    There’s no shortage of easy-to-find cheese substitutes these days, with artisanal nut-based goodies such as Treeline, Dr-Cow, and Kite Hill appealing to vegans and omnivores alike. “The team at Kite Hill did an amazing thing by getting its cheeses into the regular dairy case at Whole Foods,” says Elizabeth Castoria, author of How to Be Vegan. “It really shows that dairy-free cheeses are new options for any kind of diner.” To make quesadillas, grab melty Go Veggie!, Daiya, or Follow Your Heart. Craving Parmesan? Castoria prefers Parmela, a topping made from almonds, cashews, and nutritional yeast. “And there’s pretty much no point to making nachos without Teese,” she adds. Be sure to check the ingredients: some soy cheeses contain casein, a milk protein.

    Quick Trick: Check the type of rennet used in scores of artisanal cheeses at and FYI: While most certified-kosher cheeses are vegetarian, they can be made with animal rennet as long as the rennet itself is also certified kosher. Read the label to be safe.

    Get more of what you love from VT. Follow us on Instagram, Facebook, and Twitter, and sign up for our email newsletters.

    I remember the very first time I made the connection that not all cheese is vegetarian. I was a senior in high school working my first job as a cashier at Panera Bread. A customer asked me a question about the macaroni and cheese. I pulled out the (very detailed) ingredient binder and flipped to the page—and there it was. Listed in parenthesis next to cheddar cheese was microbial and animal enzymes.

    I thought, “Wait… animal enzymes?” At that point I had been a vegetarian for around eight years. I had ordered that macaroni and cheese many times before, and easily consumed hundreds of other meals containing cheese at restaurants. And now I was seeing an ingredient called animal enzymes?

    Since then, I’ve seen articles pop up on plenty of food-related websites claiming cheese isn’t vegetarian and we’ve all been lied to. That’s a bit dramatic. I’ve learned with a little research that this is only sometimes true, and there’s really no need to panic. Let’s start with the basics.

    What makes cheese not vegetarian?

    The short answer is exactly what I found in the macaroni and cheese—enzymes. Many cheeses, especially European cheeses, use an enzyme called rennet (RIHN-niht) to help curdle the cheese. This enzyme commonly comes from the fourth stomach of young animals (typically cows, but sometimes sheep, goats, or pigs), according to The New Food Lover’s Companion.

    In recent years, as more vegetarian-friendly products have expanded in mainstream popularity and cows are being expected to live longer to provide milk and meat, producers (specifically, American producers) have replaced animal rennet with vegetarian or microbial rennet. These are made from plants, bacteria, and fungi without the use of animal cells, according to The New Food Lover’s Companion.

    So, how do you know what cheeses are vegetarian-friendly?

    The first step is to ask yourself what you’re willing to consume. I made the personal decision to check cheeses when possible (like at the supermarket) and assume acceptable when an ingredient list isn’t readily available (like at a restaurant). That means I’ll still take a slice of pizza from the local pizzeria, but you won’t catch me eating Panera’s macaroni and cheese again, because I know for a fact this isn’t a vegetarian choice. It’s a compromise that essentially allows me to do the best I can—in most meal situations, I’ll be able to make an informed choice, but when that’s out of my control, I’m not going to create an unproportional level of drama about it.

    If you want to avoid rennet at all costs, you’ll most likely have to avoid cheese in places you can’t check the ingredient list (say goodbye to a spoonful of Parmesan at the local Italian joint). Then, when you head to the supermarket or have access to ingredients, you’ll simply want to keep a close eye out for rennet.

    Now, not all cheese contains animal rennet. Soft dairy products that contain whey (like paneer, ricotta, yogurt, and cream cheese) practically never have rennet, because of how they’re traditionally made. Many cheeses at specialty cheese shops, or even at Whole Foods or Trader Joe’s, will typically list suitable for vegetarians, vegetarian rennet, or microbial rennet on the ingredient list. This indicates it’s acceptable for meat-free consumers. Occasionally the term enzymes is used, and unfortunately this is a toss up, according to The Vegetarian Times. You’ll have to check with the manufacturer to determine if the enzymes are derived from animals.

    Cheeses vegetarians can eat

    Despite commonplace wisdom that Parmesan isn’t vegetarian, there are definitely brands out there that now make all kind of cheeses veg-friendly. Some popular brands that sell vegetarian-friendly cheeses include Organic Valley, Bel Gioioso, Cabot, Applegate, Tillamook, Amy’s, Laughing Cow, and Horizon. Most importantly, just check the ingredient list of any cheese you can.

    Lastly, if you want a guarantee of vegetarian-friendly cheese, shop for certified kosher cheeses. This is usually indicated by a K or OU symbol on the container. Due to the Jewish religious ruling that milk and meat products cannot be consumed together, kosher cheeses are made without any animal products. Many supermarkets have a small kosher section, usually in the International aisle, selling brands like Miller’s and Haolam which are certified kosher and safe for vegetarians.

    So, the next time your friend sends you a Facebook message with an article exclaiming CHEESE ISN’T VEGETARIAN for the nineteenth time, just send this one right back. Yes, some cheeses aren’t vegetarian—but tons are.

    November 20, 2019 (last updated January 27, 2022)

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Mushroom Bruschetta is a super easy, warm, and comforting appetizer. Not only is it perfect for the holidays, but you’ll enjoy the caramelized onions and gruyere cheese for any occasion! It’s rich, savory, and comes together in about 15 minutes!

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Thank you Decoy for sponsoring this post. Find your own bottle here.

    There’s no denying it: the holidays are upon us. While that means busy schedules, and dark nights, and long to-do lists.

    It means aligning schedules, and gift-giving, and planning menus. It means stocking up on wine, and it means attempting to clean your house.

    More than anything though, this time of year means gathering with loved ones and your favorite bottle of Decoy wine, it means coming together to celebrate and laugh, even if the floor hasn’t been cleaned.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    And it means delicious food, made even better when it’s quick and easy to make. Insert: another crostini appetizer recipe. Easy appetizer recipes so you can get back to the wine and laughs, of course.

    First up this holiday season: the easiest Mushroom Bruschetta you can imagine. It’s going to be your new go-to for an easy Friendsgiving, potluck party, or holiday appetizer.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Seriously! Give yourself about 15 minutes and you’ll have a savory, indulgent appetizer that will blow your friends and family away! It’s going to change the way you celebrate in the best kind of way.

    How to Host an Easy Friendsgiving

    The best way to celebrate, IMO? A Friendsgiving that’s filled with easy appetizers.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Step 1: make sure your bar is stocked. You’ve got to toast to the holidays, and grabbing bottles of your favorite Decoy wines is the best way to do so!

    Step 2: determine who is bringing what. Assign your friends to an easy-appetizer genre. Cheese plate? Check. Dips? Check. Crostini appetizers? Check and check.

    Step 3: pour the wine, set out the appetizers, gather around, laugh, tell stories, and let the night linger on.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    How to Make Mushroom Bruschetta

    First thing you’ll need to do: prepare to let the scent of butter, garlic, and thyme waft through your kitchen.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Once you’re prepared, this is how it’s gonna go:

    1. Sautee the chopped mushrooms ALONE. Yes, alone. No butter, not yet. You want them to release all of the excess water they have before you add the rest of the ingredients. More intense mushroom flavor, no icky excess water. WIN.
    2. Add in the butter. Lots of it. This appetizer is rich, buttery, and savory and we are not skimping on it.
    3. In goes the shallot and garlic. Some red pepper flakes. Some more thyme. And it comes together to create the perfect melody.
    4. While all this is happening, you’ll toast the crostini up in the oven, broil them with the gruyere, and then…
    5. Top the cheesy crostini with the mushroom mixture. Et voila, time to devour – with another glass of wine in hand, of course.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    What is Gruyere cheese?

    Just so we’re all clear, the gruyere cheese that gets melted on top of those toasty crostini slices is KEY.

    It’s a slightly sweet cheese yet salty cheese that’s creamy and nutty. The older it gets, the more earthy and flavorful it becomes. It’s mild enough to let the mushroom mixture shine through, yet holds its own for a kick of flavor.

    Can you substitute another cheese?

    You can, I’d just highly recommend using a similar cheese to keep the depth of the bruschetta. I’d recommend using a fontina cheese for a similar creamy, nuttiness. An Emmental would also be a good substitute.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Other Easy Appetizers for Friendsgiving

    If you’re looking for some more options for your easy Friendsgiving, look no further! Check out these recipes to add some seasonal variety to your table without too much work. Cheers to that!

    • Whipped Ricotta with Herbs & Honey
    • Scalloped Corn Arancini
    • Creamy Artichoke Kale and Leek Dip
    • Sweet Potato Goat Cheese Bites

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    But wait! Want to make it a crostini and bruschetta appetizer party? I’ve got you COVERED – because crostini is my favorite go-to appetizer.

    • Roasted Grape and Honey Goat Cheese Crostini
    • Traditional Bruschetta
    • Butternut Squash and Pear Crostini
    • Broccolini and White Bean Crostini
    • Fig Compote, Bacon, and Goat Cheese Crostini

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    I’d been dealing with a cranky client all week and was exhausted. I wanted a nice gourmet meal, but at the same time I didnt want to leave the house (ever felt that way?). So I used what I had on hand to make this gourmet tasting, gourmet looking, cheesy tart…just what I needed after a stressful day! The gorgeous wedge of french comte cheese Sanjeev picked up a few days ago was simply spectacular in this savory tart.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Comte is a Gruyere type French cheese made from cows milk. Comte is made only with spring and summer milk. I absolutely love this cheese. Actually, I love all cheeses, but I have extra love for Comte. Its slightly sweet, somewhat soft, and melts beautifully.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    If you dont like or cant find Comte cheese..

    Substitutes for Comte cheese: use Gruyere or fontina instead of Comte. Or if you want to spend less, try a mix of mozzarella and parmesan.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    The tarts smelled sooo good in the oven, we were getting hungry quickly! We snacked on the ingredients while waiting for the tarts to bake.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    This is a rather heavy, cheesy tart, so I made it in individual mini tart/pie pans. A mini tart along with a salad was a good portion size. If you dont have mini tart/pie tins, you can make this as one large tart and cut it into wedges.

    We absolutely loved the saltine cracker crust – it was easy, smelled heavenly, and very yummy!

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Broccoli, Baby Potato and Comte (Gruyere) Cheese Tarts in Saltine Cracker Crust: Recipe

    makes 6 mini tarts

    4oz or 5 small baby potatoes (or use a medium baking potato instead)
    1/2 cup low fat milk
    1 teaspoon flour
    1 teaspoon dijon mustard
    3/4 cup comte or gruyere cheese, cut into tiny cubes
    1 cup broccoli florets, chopped
    2 tablespoons parsley
    salt and pepper (keep in mind the cheese, mustard, saltines are all already salty!)

    for saltine cracker crust

    4oz or 1 sleeve of saltine crackers
    4 tablespoons butter, melted
    1/2-3/4 cup hot water

    Pre-heat oven to 375f.

    Wrap the potatoes in a paper towel and micrrowave for 2 minutes or till half cooked. Set aside.

    In a bowl, whisk together the milk, flour, and dijon mustard. Then add the cheese, broccoli florets, potatoes, parsley, salt and freshly cracked black pepper and mix well.

    To make the saltine cracker crust, place the saltine crackers in a food processor and crush them to a powder. You should get about 1 1/2 cups of crushed saltines. Place this in a bowl, add melted butter and hot water and stir till it comes together like a dough. Now press the saltine cracker crust dough into a non-stick pie or tart pan. Press down on the crust to compact it and also push it up the edges of the pan.

    Pour the cheese, broccoli and potato mixture into the tart/pie pan with the saltine crust. Place the pan on a foil lined baking sheet and bake on 375 degrees for about 20 minutes or just till the top of the tart starts to turn golden. Cool tarts a little, then gently lift them off the mould using a knife. Serve tart warm with a salad of your choice.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Gruyere cheese has a history as rich and nutty as its flavor. This is a cheese so good and so fascinating that countries went to war over it! Yes, you read that right… war.

    Gruyere’s identity crisis

    Is Gruyere a Swiss cheese? Is it French? Is it Austrian? It is hard to know. Medieval peasants developed this variety of cow’s milk cheese as a means of survival. It was developed in the mountainous town of Gruyeres, Switzerland (making it Swiss Cheese by its geographic origins). However, since the town is so close to the Franco-Swiss border, there are many similar varieties of cheese, including Comte and Beaufort, that are made in France that still fall under the umbrella term of Gruyere. To complicate matters even further, there is yet another variety of Gruyere cheese that originates on the Austrian side of the Alps. The Austrian variety is similar to the Swiss variety in taste, color, and texture. Regardless of the country of origin, there is no doubting that this creamy, sweet, and nutty cheese is nothing short of spectacularly delicious. Cheese this good is worthy of a distinction all its own; perhaps it is best to simply refer to Gruyere as an Alpine cheese.

    The Gruyere War

    Few things bring about international disharmony more than cheese. This was one time when the Swiss absolutely did not remain neutral. Cheese makers in France and Switzerland went to battle for three years over which country made the best Gruyere cheese. Both countries claimed to have exclusive rights to the “Controlled Designation of Origin” for Gruyere. Since both varieties of cheese have distinctly different taste and appearance, this caused a problem. The French believed they deserved the distinction since their cheese was more widely recognized. The Swiss argued that the cheese is named after a region on their side of the border, and they had been making the cheese longer. The debate was so heated the European Union (EU) had to step in to mediate. The EU decided in favor of the Swiss since the origination of the cheese came from Switzerland.

    The Gruyere timeline

    Gruyere cheese has a long and storied history dating back many centuries. Here are but a few of the highlights of this storied cheese.

    The 12th Century

    The region of Gruyere has been producing their namesake cheese since the early twelfth century. The inhabitants of the area during that time found a way to produce the cheese from the excess milk that was produced by their cows. They were eventually able to sell their cheese to people in France and Italy.

    The 17th Century

    The seventeenth century brought with it official recognition of the regional name of the cheese. It was around this time that the exportation of the cheese began to take off. Since its popularity was beginning to grow, the concern for the protection of its origin also began to take root. But, not until the 1762 was the word that specified its origin entered into the dictionary of the Académie Francaise.

    The 18th and 19th Centuries

    During the late eighteenth and early nineteenth centuries, many people from the town of Fribourg, Switzerland immigrated to the Gruyere region. This movement extended the geographic production zone of Gruyere cheese to the neighboring villages of Vaud, Neuchatel, Jura, and some areas of France. However, there was no trade protection in place, and the cheese was often imitated. By the mid-nineteenth century, a campaign toward structuring trade and a fight for recognizing designation of origin was begun.

    The 20th and 21st Centuries

    Discussions regarding Gruyere cheese took place in Madrid in 1891, Paris in 1926, and Rome in 1930. The result of these meetings was an agreement to protect the denominations of goods and their origins. However, it was not until 2001 that Gruyere cheese was awarded “Controlled Designation of Origin” protection, which regulates the methods of locations of the production of the product in Switzerland. In 2011, it received the same designation for the entire continent of Europe.

    Interesting miscellaneous facts about Gruyere cheese

    A food with such a long and storied history must have some interesting facts about it, and Gruyere does not disappoint in that area. Here are a few interesting Gruyere tidbits to chew on:

    The hole controversy

    There is some international controversy regarding the presence of holes in Gruyere cheese. According to French agricultural law, French-style Gruyere cheese must have holes in it. However, in the Swiss varieties of Gruyere, no holes are present.

    A cheesy faux pas

    An old legend states that way back in AD 161 Emperor Antonin the Pious actually died of indigestion after eating too much Gruyere cheese. At least he went happy and satisfied!

    Thankfully, today Gruyere does not carry with it so much controversy. All you have to do is enjoy it and Shisler’s Cheese House can bring the Gruyere experience to your taste buds with our own supply of the famed Gruyere Cheese. Stop in and pick some up today or order online here!

    December 15, 2020 (last updated March 8, 2022)

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Potato Egg Casserole is an easy, elegant, frittata-like dish to serve at breakfast or brunch. Layers of gruyere cheese, herbs, garlic, and shallot burst with flavor in this vegetarian egg bake. Top with arugula for added texture, color, and bright, peppery freshness.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    You should probably go ahead and block out Saturday morning, making sure it’s free of any plans (ha, #2020) because you’ve got a date with a hot cup of coffee, a puzzle, and a slice – or two – of this easy egg bake for the ultimate weekend breakfast.

    Then you’re going to want to have another slice for lunch because there’s arugula here and it’s basically a salad and brunch all rolled into one. Making dreams come true.

    And then there’s breakfast-for-dinner because you can’t get enough of gruyere cheese combined with warm herbs and life is just SO DANG DELICIOUS RIGHT NOW.

    Before we get too carried away, let’s take a look at just how easy it really is, with a few steps and minimal ingredients, you’ll be a brunch Queen in no time (as if you already aren’t, my bad).

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Speaking of Ingredients…

    Simplicity at its finest. The best of aromatics and herbs, coming together to create a flavorful medley that’s anything but basic.

    There’s yellow onion and shallot, and of course, you cannot forget the garlic (never!) and maybe a pinch of red pepper flakes because I always like to add a pinch for good measure.

    There are fresh herbs: rosemary and thyme. Oh me, oh my, these herbs are my FAVORITE for savory, cozy, winter recipes!

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Naturally, there are eggs for the custardy egg base, along with half-and-half for the velvety texture.

    We can’t forget the potatoes. This recipe uses Yukon Gold potatoes for their creaminess. Use a mandoline to thinly slice the potatoes. In order for them to cook through, they must be thin. Alternatively, if you need to cut them by hand I’d recommend par-cooking them in boiling water for 2-3 minutes before layering them in the casserole.

    Then there’s the cheese. Oh you know we cannot, will not, have an egg casserole without CHEESE. Gruyere is the main star here, but you know we couldn’t complete it without a little parmesan too.

    How to Make This Easy Casserole

    The base of flavor starts by sauteeing yellow onion and shallot in butter. The fat from the butter adds richness to the onion, and adding in a shallot brings more depth of flavor, with a slight sweetness. Perfection.

    Also sautéed are the garlic, red pepper flakes (if using), and herbs. All the flavors meld together so, so beautifully and will be incorporated throughout the casserole.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    In another bowl, you’ll combine the eggs, half-and-half, and salt and pepper. Whisk, whisk, whisk until combined and fluffy-ish. Once the sauteed mixture has cooled slightly, you’ll stir it into the eggs.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Next, layer the thinly sliced potatoes in the tart or pie pan (or an 8×8 glass baking dish will work, too). If you’re concerned your potatoes aren’t thin enough – we’re looking for about 1/16 of an inch – then I’d recommend parboiling them for 2-3 minutes before layering to ensure they’ll cook through.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    I’ll say it again: using a mandoline really helps this process of making the thin slices, and in turn that will eliminate the extra step of boiling!

    Once the potatoes are layered, evenly spread about 2/3rds of the cheese across the top, reserving the rest for the very very top of the casserole.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Then, pour the egg mixture on top of the potatoes. You may need to go slowly as it finds its way around the potato slices. Top with the remaining cheese and bake away!

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Once the edges are golden brown and the center is set, your egg bake is ready to enjoy!

    Let it cool for at least 15 minutes before serving so it has time to set up and you can get those perfect slices out.

    I love topping it with fresh arugula for added freshness and texture.

    If you’re a bacon lover, that would work too. That saltiness combined with the warm, eggy, casserole? That would be a win.

    In this recipe, asparagus is encased in very thin, crisp parcels of puff pastry with melted cheese.

    A lovely main course for a summer’s lunch or supper party or you could make 8 small ones for a first course. Vegetarians may like to know there is a Parmesan ‘style’ cheese available from Bookham and Harrison Farms Ltd.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    This recipe is from Delia’s Vegetarian Collection. Serves 8 as a first course

    • Vegetarian recipes
    • , Summer
    • , Asparagus
    • , Easy meat-free recipes
    • , Easy Entertaining
    • method
    • Ingredients


    First remove the pastry from the fridge and let it come to room temperature (about 10 minutes).

    Meanwhile, wash the asparagus in cold water, then take each stalk in both hands, and bend and snap off the woody end. Then, arrange the stalks in an opened fan steamer. Place the steamer in a frying pan or saucepan, pour in about 1 in (2.5 cm) of boiling water from the kettle, then add some salt, put a lid on and steam for 2-3 minutes, or until they feel tender when tested with a skewer.

    After that, remove them from the steamer and allow them to cool. Then dry the stalks with kitchen paper and cut each one into 3, on the diagonal. Next, using a small sharp knife, remove the rind from the Fontina or Gruyère and cut it into ½ in (1 cm) cubes.

    Then, in a small bowl, mix the Parmesan and crème fraîche and add some salt and freshly milled black pepper. Now carefully unroll the sheet of pastry onto a lightly floured work surface and cut it in half. Roll out one half until it measures 12 x 12 in (30 x 30 cm) and then cut that into 4 squares measuring 6 x 6 in (15 x 15 cm) . Then repeat the rolling and cutting with the other piece of pastry, so you end up with 8 squares in all. Beat the egg yolks with the milk. Next, you need to carefully brush the edges of 4 of the pastry squares with this mixture. Then divide half of the crème fraîche filling between these 4 pieces of pastry, spooning about a level dessertspoon into the centre of each square.

    Next, lay about half the quantity of asparagus on top of the crème fraîche, with several cubes of cheese tucked in-between. Now pull up the opposite corners of each square to meet in the centre like an envelope. Carefully pinch the seams together to seal them, and make a small hole in the centre of each one to allow the steam to escape. Then, using a fish slice, transfer the parcels to the baking tray and now make the other 4.

    Once you have made 8 parcels, cover them with clingfilm and chill until you are ready to cook them.

    Preheat the oven to gas mark 6, 400°F (200°C). Then, brush each one with some of the remaining beaten-egg mix and lightly sprinkle each one with some Parmesan. Bake on a high shelf in the oven for 20-25 minutes or until they are golden brown, and serve them straightaway, garnished with a few sprigs of watercress.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    These sticky, gooey, cheesy mashed potatoes will be the highlight of your meal! With just 4 ingredients, they are easy to put together and are packed with delicious gruyere and caramelized onions for an amazing luxurious flavor.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    This is my 61st recipe, and the 4th mashed potato one.

    I guess it’s clear where I stand on the eternal question of how one likes their potatoes.

    Mashed, with lots of butter and gruyere cheese for me.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    It’s October and this feels right for the coming months.

    Cooler days, darker nights, lots of comfort food. Thanksgiving (not celebrated here in the UK but impossible to ignore in the food world, also being half American), and basically a lot of reasons to eat carbs.

    I am totally ready for this to start.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    The beauty of this blog is that there is a printable recipe card coming up in a minute that will tell you how to make this and then this will be YOUR fork.

    About these gruyere mashed potatoes

    These potatoes will kick carb season off right. They are super soft, gooey and sticky, the mash is transformed by the amazing texture of melted gruyere.

    Between the nutty, intense gruyere and melty caramelized onions, the flavor is deep and rich. I believe umami is the word of the day here.

    I don’t feel the need to add gravy, but some extra onions on top will add moisture to this mash. They would be delicious with a pie or as part of a roast dinner.

    I ate them all on their own, because I do that.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    How to make them

    You will caramelize your onions, then add riced potatoes, butter and cheese. Stir, let the cheese melt and transform into this mass of carby, cheesy goodness you see above. It’s really quite simple.

    Do I need a potato ricer?

    I think you do, yes! To get this super smooth, luxurious texture, you will need a ricer. It is a sage investment.

    Which onions to use?

    I love using red onions for this. When caramelized, they are a little bit sweeter and more jammy. But white or brown onions will do the job nicely too, is that is all you have. Or a mix of the two.

    June 12, 2019 | By Dave Mattingly

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Gruyere Cheese is often thought of as a type of Swiss. This grand cheese originated in the village of Gruyères, Switzerland, a region filled with lush pastures located in the alpine foothills. Gruyere Cheese has been made in the Alps since ancient times. Legend says that in 161 AD Emperor Antonin the Pious died of indigestion after eating too much cheese from the Gruyere area. While Swiss Gruyere Cheese is perhaps the most famous, Gruyere de Comte, the French variety from the other side of the Alps, is equally compelling and alluring. In 2001 Swiss Gruyere Cheese was awarded AOC Appellation d’Origine Contrôlée, or “Controlled Designation of Origin” protection, which regulates the methods of locations of production of Gruyere.

    Gruyere is a nutty, fruity raw cow’s milk cheese, aged for a minimum of five months. Swiss Gruyere Cheese is ideal for melting and a necessary ingredient in the classic cheese fondue recipe. Gruyere Cheese is also called for as the preferred topping for French onion soup, quiche and chicken cordon bleu. This multi-purpose cheese may also be eaten as a table cheese, julienned into a Chef’s Salad, or shredded over salad or pasta. Gruyere Cheese pairs well with white wines that accentuate its rich nutty flavor such as Pinot Gris or a fruity Cabernet Sauvignon or Merlot.

    Gruyere de Comte is the French version of Gruyere Cheese. Similar to the Swiss variety, the wheel of Gruyere de Comte is a bit less high than that of its Swiss counterpart. Known as Comte for short, this French Gruyere has a pale ivory interior and a semi-hard texture from its aging period of over 10 months. Gruyere de Comte Cheese is sweet and nutty. A versatile cheese, Gruyere de Comte is excellent in fondue and as a table cheese or added to soufflés or gratins.

    Austrian Alps Gruyere is another Gruyere type, made in Austria. The Austrian Alps are very similar to the Swiss Alps from a terroir perspective, making the Austrian Gruyere very similar to the Swiss. Equalling its nuttiness and spiciness. Austrian Alps Gruyere Cheese may be melted onto sandwiches, enjoyed as a table cheese, or as a component in the classic cheese fondue.

    Just don’t overdo it.

    Charlotte Close

    By adding your email you agree to get updates about Spoon University Healthier

    Maybe you were born with it, maybe you had it thrust upon you, but either way lactose intolerance is a BFD if there ever was one. Not only are you being personally betrayed by your own body, but you are living in the dairy version of the Garden of Eden. I don’t know about you, but a wheel of brie sounds a whole lot more tempting than an apple right about now.

    So, here I am, calling out to all my fellow cheese lovers and all my fellow victims of lactose intolerance. Despite the fact that some of us can’t digest a pesky dissachadaride doesn’t mean we all can’t love cheese. Let us come together over the one thing that pulls us furthest apart—a cheese plate—and find out how we can all enjoy this dairy delicacy.

    The Cheese Plate: Lactose’s Worst Nightmare

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Photo by Becca Buchanan

    First things first. For those of you who aren’t aware, cheese plates are a gift from the heavens above. They are central pieces to all relevant social gatherings (obvi) and hello, every cheese has a wine soulmate ready to slide in. Here is the backbone of a cheese plate designed for your specific lactose intolerant needs. All of these cheeses are easy on a lactose intolerant stomach so make sure you add them to your next grocery list.


    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Photo courtesy of Brent Hofacker

    You know this hotshot. The Beyonce of the dairy world, cheddar has the rep as the most popular and most loved cheese out there. Not only is it sharp and can be paired with almost anything, but it is one of the most friendly of cheeses for your not-so-accepting stomach. The longer it’s aged the less lactose content it has, so go wild and chase after those dinosaurs.


    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Photo courtesy of

    If you’re feeling a little more sophisticated, gruyere is your go-to-guy. Originating in Switzerland, gruyere provides that semi-firm, fruity yet nutty flavor sought for by a real cheese connoisseur. It can spice up any evening with it’s distinct aura of elegance, while not wreaking havoc on your body because of its lactose intolerant-friendly nature.


    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Photo courtesy of Brent Hofacker

    Okay, I see you over there. You think this cheese plate is a little too tame for your dare-devil life. Here is your thrill ride. Parmigiano-Reggiano, Parmesan, Parm-Parm or whatever you’d like to call this bad boy is here to satisfy all of your adventurous needs. Made only from cows who consume grass or hay, this cheese has a gritty texture and earthy taste. Most eat it crumbled over pasta or fries, but since you’re so bold feel free to enjoy it in all its glory.


    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Photo courtesy of Ali Barrett

    Bigger is better amirite? At least that’s what they say about the holes in Swiss cheese. Larger holes are associated with stronger flavor in this typically mild, smooth and sweet cheese. This flavor may contribute to the fact that this cheese is a crowd pleaser. Easy on the stomach due to low lactose content and a favorite among humans and mice alike. You cannot go wrong with Swiss.

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Photo courtesy of

    Some people are a little scared of this beauty. I mean, look at it. It’s almost too pretty to eat, key world almost. However my lactose intolerant friends, you have nothing to be scared of. Unless are you extremely sensitive to lactose, this semi-soft cheese is the one for you. It often takes a mature palate to properly appreciate the fragrant, buttery flavors that consume your senses with a bite of bleu, but take the leap of faith cause I promise it’ll be worth it.

    The Rest of The Wide World of Cheese

    How to make vegan gruyere cheese

    Photo courtesy of

    It’s a hard knock life out there and I know it. Nevertheless, don’t let the infamous sugar dubbed lactose kill your vibe. Most soft, creamy cheeses which are fresh, such as Mozzarella, are your arch enemy when it comes to digestive comfort. However you can whip out your Lactaid when necessary and dig in. Don’t hold back, treat yo self my friend.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    1. How to Unclump Eyelashes
    2. Instructions for the Functions of an Omega Sea Master Watch
    3. How to Open a Rolex Hidden Clasp Bracelet
    4. How to Replace the Battery in a Movado
    5. How to Determine the Width of Faces

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    One common thought is that a liar won’t be able to look you in the eye. Unfortunately, most liars have been tipped off to this idea, and you may now find that someone maintains a bit too much eye contact when lying to you. Scientists at the University of Utah have found that in some cases tracking eye movements can be more effective than using a traditional lie detector, which measures emotional response. Still, trying to tell if someone is lying based on the direction of his eyes isn’t a foolproof method.

    Watch the person’s eyes as he tells you the story. If he’s telling the truth, he’s probably maintaining eye contact and occasionally looking to his left — your right — and up. If he’s lying, he’s more likely to glance to his right — your left — and up.

    Ask a question about the possible lie.

    Watch the eye movements after your question. If he needs to make up an answer, you’ll probably see his eyes toggle back and forth, as he accesses different parts of his brain to come up with the answer. If he simply looks up and to his left, he’s remembering something that really happened.

    Interesting Info -> Lying Index -> Eye Direction & Visual Accessing Cues

    Eye Direction and Lying

    Eye Movement and Direction & How it Can Reveal Truth or Lies

    This is a continuation of our previous article Detecting Lies. Many comments by our visitors asked about how eye direction can indicate the presence of a lie.

    Can the direction a person’s eyes reveal whether or not they are making a truthful statement? Short answer: sort of. But, it isn’t as simple as some recent television shows or movies make it seem.

    In these shows a detective will deduce if a person is being untruthful simply because they looked to the left or right while making a statement.

    In reality, it would be foolish to make such a snap judgment without further investigation… but the technique does have some merit.

    So, here it is… read, ponder and test it on your friends and family to see how reliable it is for yourself.

    Visual Accessing Cues – “Lying Eyes”

    The first time “Visual Accessing Cues” were discussed (at least to my knowledge), was by Richard Bandler and John Grinder in their book “Frogs into Princes: Neuro Linguistic Programming (NLP) ” From their experiments this is what they found.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    When asked a question a “normally organized” right-handed person looks (from your viewpoint, looking at them):

    Up and to the Left Indicates: Visually Constructed Images (Vc)If you asked someone to “Imagine a purple buffalo”, this would be the direction their eyes moved in while thinking about the question as they “Visually Constructed” a purple buffalo in their mind.

    Up and to the Right Indicates: Visually Remembered Images (Vr)If you asked someone to “What color was the first house you lived in?”, this would be the direction their eyes moved in while thinking about the question as they “Visually Remembered” the color of their childhood home.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    To the Left Indicates: Auditory Constructed (Ac)If you asked someone to “Try and create the highest the sound of the pitch possible in your head”, this would be the direction their eyes moved in while thinking about the question as they “Auditorily Constructed” this this sound that they have never heard of.How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    To the Right Indicates: Auditory Remembered (Ar)If you asked someone to “Remember what their mother’s voice sounds like “, this would be the direction their eyes moved in while thinking about the question as they “Auditorily Remembered ” this sound.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    Down and to the Left Indicates: Feeling / Kinesthetic (F)If you asked someone to “Can you remember the smell of a campfire? “, this would be the direction their eyes moved in while thinking about the question as they used recalled a smell, feeling, or taste.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    Down and To the Right Indicates: Internal Dialog (Ai)This is the direction of someone eyes as they “talk to themselves”.

    How this information is used to detect lies:

    Example: Let’s say your child asks you for a cookie, and you ask: “Well, what did your mother say?” As they reply “Mom said… yes.”, they look to the left. This would indicate a made up answer as their eyes are showing a “constructed image or sound. Looking to the right would indicated a “remembered” voice or image, and thus would be telling the truth.

    Final Notes:

    *** Looking straight ahead or with eyes that are defocused/unmoving is also considered a sign of visual accessing.

    *** A typical left-handed person would have the opposite meanings for their eye-directions.

    *** As with other signs of lying, you should first establish and understand a persons base-behavior before concluding they are lying by the direction of their eyes.

    *** Many critics believe the above is a bunch of bull***t. In my own experiments I have found these techniques to be more true than not. But, why not find out for yourself? Make up a list of questions that like the sample ones, and give them to your friends/family anyone who would be your guinea pig, observe their eye movements and record the results.

    *** This guide is hardly in-depth, I recommend getting the book “Frogs into Princes: Neuro Linguistic Programming” by Richard Bandler and John Grinder for a more thorough explanation if the subject interests you.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movementsContinue Reading Part 3 – Micro Expressions, Subtle Emotions & Lie DetectionContinue Reading:

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    Micro Expressions and Lying (part 3) Micro Expressions betray us when we lie. We can try to cover our feelings with fake smiles, but involuntary face muscles reveal this hidden emotions. Good introduction with plenty of links and resources.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    Submit a Comment Cancel reply

    This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    Little white lies, big ol’ whoppers of deception…they’re everywhere in our lives whether we like it or not. While you may not be able to stop them, you might be able to tell when they’re happening and act accordingly. As it turns out, there are several telltale signs that the average liar throws out there, so keep an eye open and detect deception for yourself:

    Facial Signs

    People may think they can conceal their emotions, but studies have proven they can’t hide everything! Experts advise paying close attention to hard-to-hide micro-expressions; these clues are often so difficult to detect that even trained experts have trouble discerning them. But you may be able to spot the more obvious ones, like reddening on the person’s cheeks, since anxiety can cause people to blush. Other indicators of lying? Flared nostrils, lip nibbling, deep breathing, and rapid blinking, which hint that the brain is working overtime.

    Eye Movement

    Generally, if people are thinking of visual information to answer a question, their eyes will move up. This is how they retrieve mental pictures. Most right handed people will look up and right when remembering and up and left when creating or visualizing. This is an unconscious habit, but it’s also a reliable one. Looking up and to the left doesn’t necessarily mean that the person is making something up, however. It simply means she’s searching for a mental picture.

    The key in reading eye movements is the same as reading other clues. You look for what’s different. Notice when they don’t look up in the same way, or when they look up but perhaps to the other side, or when they maintain eye contact with you when they would normally do otherwise.

    This bit last is an interesting point. Most people imagine that we maintain eye contact when we tell the truth and break it when we lie. Not true. The majority of people will maintain eye contact when lying, because they don’t need to retrieve information from their minds and, therefore, don’t need to move their eyes. At another level, they are eager to appear sincere, and so consciously decide to keep looking at you. The eyes are the window!

    Body Language

    When discerning a person’s truthfulness, it’s important to examine the person’s overall status, as there’s no one feature that’s guaranteed to give her away. Honesty is characterized by features that are in sync with one another—so besides posture, notice the fit between face, body, voice, and speech. Like an animal avoiding detection, a liar may pull his arms and legs inward or keep his movements to a minimum—anything to appear smaller. Liars often shove their hands behind their back because those fidgety fingers might give them away.


    Is she just happy? Or is she lying? A smile can sometimes mask a person’s true feelings. Pay close attention to how a person smiles as well as other facial movements. You may be able to detect the emotions he or she is trying to hide—such as fear, anger, and disgust. A true smile will incorporate both a person’s lips and eyes.

    Voice Pattern Cues

    Although a change in voice can be the tip-off to spot a liar, experts say that to be sure, you should also pay attention to a person’s speech rate and breathing pattern—if either speeds up or slows down, chances are you’re not hearing the whole truth.

    Word Cues

    Liars tend to avoid exclusionary words like “but,” “nor,” “except,” and “whereas,” because they have trouble with complex thought processes. Also, they are less likely to use the words “I,” “me,” and “mine.” In their attempts to distance themselves psychologically from their tall tales, liars will tend to communicate using fewer personal pronouns. Instead, they’ll speak about themselves in the third person (“This is a girl who doesn’t like to commit”) or even truncate their language (“Nice to be here today”)—anything to give themselves psychological distance from the lie.

    The Question

    It’s normal for someone to look away when asked a difficult question. But when someone avoids your gaze when asked a simple question, you should probably think twice.

    Sworn Statements

    To sell us on the integrity of their answers, liars often use phrases emphasizing the validity of their statements, like “To tell the truth” and “To be perfectly honest.” Guess what? More often than not, these verbal tip-offs frequently invoke religion. Think of expressions like “I swear on a stack of Bibles” and “As God is my witness.” Most truthful people don’t need to go that far.

    Can your eye movements reveal whether you are telling the truth or not? Some body language experts believe a person exhibits certain eye movements when lying, but others disagree.

    This association between eye movements and lying first came about with the emergence of Neuro-Linguistic Programming (NLP) in 1972. NLP founders John Grinder and Richard Bandler mapped out a ‘standard eye movement’ chart (Eye Accessing Cues). This chart depicted where our eyes move in relation to our thoughts.

    It is generally accepted that the left side of our brain is associated with logic and our right side with creativity. Therefore, according to NLP experts, anyone who looks left is using their logical side and those who look right are accessing a creative side. This premise has translated into logic = truth whereas creativity = lying.

    They claim that when we are thinking, our eyes move as the brain accesses information. Information is stored in the brain in four different ways:

    1. Visually
    2. Auditorally
    3. Kinaesthetically
    4. Internal dialogue

    According to Grinder and Bandler, depending on which of these four ways we access this information will dictate where our eyes move.

    • Up and Left: Visually remembering
    • Up and Right: Visually constructing
    • Left: Auditorally remembering
    • Right: Auditorally constructing
    • Down and Left: Internal dialogue
    • Down and Right: Kinaesthetic remembering

    Eye movements when lying in more detail:

    Up and Left

    If someone asked you to remember your wedding dress or the first house you purchased, moving your eyes up and to the right accesses the visual remembering part of the brain.

    Up and to the Right

    Imagine a pig flying across the sky or cows with pink spots on them. Then your eyes would move up and to the left as you are visually constructing these images.

    In order to remember your favourite song, your eyes should move to the right as it accesses the auditory remembering part of your brain.


    If you were asked to imagine the lowest bass note you can think of, your eyes would move to the left as it tried to auditorily construct this sound.

    Down and Left

    Asked if you can remember the smell of cut grass or a bonfire, or the taste of their favourite beer, people’s eyes will typically move down and right as they recall that smell.

    Down and Right

    This is the direction your eyes move when you are talking to yourself or engaging in internal dialogue.

    So how does this knowledge of eye movement help us in detecting someone who is lying, according to NLP experts?

    Now we know what NLP experts believe regarding eye movements when lying. They say that if you ask someone a question, you can follow their eye movements and tell if someone is lying or not.

    So a typically normal right-handed person should look to the left if they are recalling actual events, memories, sounds, and feelings. If they are lying, their eyes will look to the right, the creative side.

    For example, you asked your partner if they stayed late at the office the previous night. If they answered “Yes, of course, I did,” and looked up and to the left, you would know they were telling the truth.

    According to Grinder and Bandler, these eye movements and lying work with a normal right-handed person. Left-handed people will have opposite meanings for their eye movements.

    Can you really tell if a person is lying simply by their eye movements?

    Most experts, however, do not think eye movements and lying are connected. A study was conducted at the University of Hertfordshire. Volunteers were filmed and their eye movements were recorded as they either told the truth or lied.

    Another group of volunteers then watched the film of the first and was asked to see if they could detect who was lying and who was telling the truth. Simply by watching their eye movements.

    Prof Wiseman, a psychologist who ran the study said: “The results of the first study revealed no relationship between lying and eye movements, and the second showed that telling people about the claims made by NLP practitioners did not improve their lie detection skills.”

    Further studies into eye movements and lying involved reviewing press conferences where people appealed for help with regard to missing relatives. They also studied the films of press releases where people claimed to be the victims of crimes. In some of the films, the person was lying and in other they were telling the truth. After analysing both films, no evidence of an association between eye movements and lying was detected.

    Co-author of the study – Dr. Caroline Watt, from the University of Edinburgh, said: “A large percentage of the public believes that certain eye movements are a sign of lying, and this idea is even taught in organisational training courses.”

    Dr. Watt believes that now is the time to discard this method of thinking and focus attention on other means of detecting liars.

    Closing thoughts

    Despite the above-described study debunked this method, many still believe that a person has certain eye movements when lying. However, most experts think that detecting lying is far more complicated than eye movement.

    Wiseman agrees: “There are some actual cues that might indicate lying—such as being static or talking less or dropping in terms of emotionality, but I don’t think there’s any reason to keep holding onto this idea about eye movement.”

    A ll human beings possess the ability to lie. And many of us do — multiple studies have suggested that, on average, Americans tell one or two lies a day. Fortunately, experts say there are ways to spot signs of untruthfulness.

    To identify a fib, you first have to have a baseline for how someone acts when they’re being honest, says Traci Brown, body language expert and author of How to Detect Lies, Fraud and Identity Theft: Field Guide. For example, watch how someone responds to a basic question such as, “Where are you from?” Where do their eyes go? How does their voice sound?

    Once you’ve established that baseline, look for shifts in behavior in four different categories: bodily movements, facial expressions, tone of voice and content of speech, says Dr. Lillian Glass, author of The Body Language of Liars. “Those are the codes of communication,” she says.

    The signs however, aren’t foolproof — if someone is uncomfortable in their seat, they may fidget; if someone is nervous, their voice may crack.

    “There is debate within the healthcare community, and certainly in the area of mental health, about what are reliable body language tips that can possibly indicate that someone is lying,” says Dr. Gary Brown, a licensed family and marriage therapist based in Los Angeles. Our own perceptions can impede our ability to correctly interpret the signs, adds Dr. Jenny Taitz, a Los Angeles-based clinical psychologist. “It can be tough to accurately interpret someone through their body language since someone may feel tense or look uneasy for so many reasons,” she says. “For example, it’s easy to imagine shirking eye contact, as people often associate with lying, for any number of reasons from feeling socially anxious to bored to ashamed because you know you’re lying. We’re not always as adept at reading others as we assume.”

    Still, there are signals that vetted body language experts suggest keeping an eye out for.

    Body Cues

    The hands: Liars tend to use gestures with their hands after they speak as opposed to during or before a conversation, says Traci Brown, who has participated in a deception training program with members of the FBI and occasionally helps work on investigations. “The mind is doing too many things including making up the story, figuring out if they’re being believed and adding to the story accordingly,” she says. “So normal gesturing that might normally happen just before a statement happens after the statement.”

    A 2015 study conducted by the University of Michigan looked at 120 media clips of high-stakes court cases in order to understand how people behave when lying versus when they’re being truthful. The study found that those who lie are more likely to gesture with both of their hands than those who are telling the truth — people gestured with both of their hands in 40% of the lying clips, compared to 25% of the truthful clips.

    When people are being dishonest, they also tend to face their palms away from you, says Traci Brown, who regularly gives keynote speeches at financial institutions to help them detect and prevent fraud. It’s an unconscious signal that they’re holding back information, emotions or even lying, she says. “They may put them in their pockets or even slide them under the table.”

    Itching and fidgeting: Rocking the body back and forth, cocking the head to the side or shuffling the feet can also be signs of deception, says Glass, who completed a post-doctoral fellowship at UCLA focusing on Psychology and Verbal and Non-Verbal Communication. Fluctuations in the autonomic nervous system, which regulates bodily functions, can also have an effect, she says. When people are nervous, these fluctuations in the nervous system can prompt people to feel itches or tingles in their body, which in turn can cause more fidgeting, she explains.

    Research conducted by UCLA psychology professor R. Edward Geiselman drew a similar conclusion, finding that people tend to display “grooming behaviors,” such as playing with their hair, when being dishonest.

    Facial Cues

    The eyes: Someone who is lying might stare or look away at a crucial moment, says Glass — a possible sign they’re moving their eyes around as they try to think about what to say next.

    The research conducted by Geiselman at UCLA corroborated this, finding that people sometimes look away briefly when lying. The 2015 study conducted by the University of Michigan also found that those who lied were more likely to stare than those who were truthful — so much so that 70% of the clips of people lying showed them staring directly at the people they were lying to.

    There is still some debate over this, however. A 2012 study published in Plos One debunked the concept that people look in a specific direction when they are dishonest. And while there is a possibility of reading too much into someone’s mannerisms, Glass maintains that there is some truth to be gleamed from the eyes.

    The mouth: Rolling the lips back to the point where they almost disappear could be a sign someone is lying by omission, according to Traci Brown. “It’s been my experience that, when people do that, they’re holding back emotions or facts,” she says.

    The research conducted at UCLA found that people who lie are more likely to purse their lips when asked sensitive questions. Pursing the lips could also mean someone doesn’t want to engage in the conversation at hand, says Glass. “It’s an instinctive reflex meaning you don’t want to speak,” she says.

    Change in complexion: Ever notice someone go white as a ghost when speaking? That could be a sign of untruthfulness, says Glass, who says this signals blood rushing out of the face.

    Sweating or dryness: Autonomic nervous system changes can trigger liars to sweat in the T-area of the face (upper lip, forehead, chin and around the mouth) or have dryness in the mouth and eyes — the person might excessively blink or squint, lick or bite their lips or swallow hard, according to Glass.

    Tone of Voice

    A high-pitched voice: When people are nervous, the muscles in the vocal cords might tighten up (an instinctive response to stress), leading the voice to sound very high-pitched, says Glass. You might also notice a creak in someone’s voice. Clearing the throat, a means of coping with the discomfort of the tightened muscles, can also at times signal dishonesty, she says.

    A sudden change of volume: People who fib also tend to raise their voices, says Glass. “Sometimes you’ll get louder because you’ll get defensive,” she adds.

    Content of Speech

    Phrases such as ‘I want to be honest with you,’ ‘honestly’ or ‘let me tell you the truth’: These can be signs someone may be trying a little too hard to convince you of their honesty, according to Glass.

    Using words such as, ‘uh,’ ‘like’ and ‘um’: The research conducted at the University of Michigan found “speaking with more vocal fill” to be a common indicator of deception. Glass says that people tend to use these words more when they’re trying to buy time to figure out what they’re going to say next.

    Slip-ups: Most of us are not natural-born liars, Glass notes. So sometimes, we let the truth slip out. Notice someone saying things like, “I was fired — no, wait, I mean I quit” or “I was out to dinner with So-and-So — wait actually, I was working late.” You might have a liar on your hands, she says.

    By Natalie Wolchover published 11 July 12

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    Conventional wisdom has it that when people talk, the direction of their eye movements reveals whether or not they’re lying. A glance up and to the left supposedly means a person is telling the truth, whereas a glance to the upper right signals deceit. However, new research thoroughly debunks these notions. As it turns out, you can’t smell a liar by where he looks.

    Researchers in the United Kingdom investigated the alleged correlation between eye direction and lying after realizing it was being taught in behavioral training courses, seminars and on the Web without the support of a shred of scientific evidence. The idea has its roots in a largely discredited 1970s theory called Neuro-Linguistic Programming (NLP), a set of techniques intended to help people master social interactions.

    In one experiment, the scientists monitored the leftward and rightward glances of 32 study participants as they told a mix of truths and falsehoods. The participants — all of whom were right-handed, in case eye movements are reversed in lefties — were equally likely to glance upward and to the right and upward and to the left, regardless of whether they were lying or telling the truth.

    In a second experiment, the researchers found that a group of 25 participants who were informed of the alleged relationship between eye movements and lying were no better at detecting lies than a second group of 25 participants who were not taught the rule of thumb. [How to Pass a Lie Detector Test]

    Finally, in a third experiment, the researchers investigated a video archive of 52 individuals making public pleas on behalf of missing relatives, half of whom are known to have been lying (based on the outcomes of the cases) and the other half, found to have been telling the truth. When the researchers tallied the number of upper-left and upper-right glances among the speakers, there was, again, no difference between the directions of the liars’ and truth-tellers’ eye movements.

    “Our research provides no support for the idea [that certain eye movements are a sign of lying] and so suggests that it is time to abandon this approach to detecting deceit,” said study co-author Caroline Watt of the University of Edinburgh in a press release.

    The researchers have detailed their findings in a new paper published today (July 11) in the journal PLoS ONE.

    Follow Natalie Wolchover on Twitter @nattyover. Follow Life’s Little Mysteries on Twitter @llmysteries, then join us on Facebook.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    Natalie Wolchover was a staff writer for Live Science from 2010 to 2012 and is currently a senior physics writer and editor for Quanta Magazine. She holds a bachelor’s degree in physics from Tufts University and has studied physics at the University of California, Berkeley. Along with the staff of Quanta, Wolchover won the 2022 Pulitzer Prize for explanatory writing for her work on the building of the James Webb Space Telescope. Her work has also appeared in the The Best American Science and Nature Writing and The Best Writing on Mathematics, Nature, The New Yorker and Popular Science. She was the 2016 winner of the Evert Clark/Seth Payne Award, an annual prize for young science journalists, as well as the winner of the 2017 Science Communication Award for the American Institute of Physics.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    You might expect a liar to struggle with eye contact, when lying through his teeth. But a study by University of Michigan researchers suggests that liars may look their questioners in the eye more often than people telling the truth. People who are lying also wave both hands around far more than those who are being honest.

    The researchers studied 118 video clips to establish the language and gestures used by people being dishonest, including testimonies from the Innocence Project, a non-profit that the handles legal cases of innocent people falsely imprisoned. Around half the clips came from trial footage, while the other half focused on YouTube videos asking interviewees their opinion on films. Researchers established who was lying by the trial verdict (with the exception of the Innocence Project clips), and when interviewees were asked their opinions on films that didn’t exist.

    Those who were lying were found more likely to have animated hand movements, make strong eye contact, nod their heads, and scowl.

    When researchers transcribed the audio, they also found that liars were more likely to say “um” and to use pronouns that distanced themselves from the action, such as “he” or “she” rather than “I” or “we.”

    The same gestures were also used by some people telling the truth, but to a lesser extent: 25% of truthful people gestured with both hands, compared to 40% of liars. Sixty percent of truthful people looked directly at the questioner, compared to 70% of liars.

    The real world nature of the footage was important to the study said Rada Mihalcea, professor of computer science and engineering who co-led the project, in a statement. She added:

    “In laboratory experiments, it’s difficult to create a setting that motivates people to truly lie. The stakes are not high enough. We can offer a reward if people can lie well—pay them to convince another person that something false is true. But in the real world there is true motivation to deceive.”

    When the researchers compiled all the data into machine-learning software, the computer was 75% accurate at identifying who was lying. Humans only guessed right 50% of the time.

    The paper was presented at the International Conference on Multimodal Interaction, which has a peer-reviewed selection process, in November and is published in the 2015 conference proceedings.

    The researchers believe their work could be useful for security agents and juries, but of course it’s far from foolproof. It’s also impossible to know for sure whether the courtroom verdicts are right, and if the “liars” being examined are definitely being dishonest. This is a problem for all lie detection; Polygraph tests, which measure stress in response to questions, have similarly variable results. Though they have roughly 85% accuracy when testing guilty people, some polygraph tests have just 56% accuracy for innocent people.

    The truth is, we all behave slightly differently when we’re dishonest, and there’s no definitive telltale sign that unmasks all liars. But the University of Michigan research can help build a picture of dishonesty. And, as Mihalcea points out, the software is certainly better than humans at picking up on falsehoods.

    Just about everyone you know tells low-stakes lies, but some people even go so far as to lie about important matters that could forever change their relationships, end their employment, or even send them to jail.

    Detecting high-stakes liars is often the work of the FBI, and they frequently look to facial expressions, body language, and verbal indicators as signals, or “tells,” that someone is lying.

    Mark Bouton, an FBI agent for 30 years and author of “How to Spot Lies Like the FBI,” tells Business Insider that he used certain tells to help identify Timothy McVeigh as a suspect in the Oklahoma City bombing. But being able to read facial expressions to detect lies can be beneficial even if you’re not conducting criminal investigations, he says.

    “There are a number of facial expressions and associated reactions that could indicate someone is lying to you,” he says. “Some are caused by nervousness, some by chemical reactions, and others by physical reactions.”

    To start, he says it’s important to understand how the person in question normally acts.

    “It’s best to observe someone for a while as you make small talk or ask innocuous questions, in order to see what his usual reactions are, including tics he may have,” he says. “Then if he exhibits several lying indicators when you ask more pointed or suggestive questions, and these are not ones he previously performed, you can be confident that he’s likely lying.”

    Here are some things you can do to tell if someone’s lying:

    Look away from this screen and try to remember the sound of your childhood hero’s voice. Did you do it? Do it again, and this time pay attention to your eyes.

    There’s a good chance your eyes stayed centered as you decided on who your hero was, moved slightly up and to your left when you visualized them, and then moved slightly down and to your right when you imagined their voice.

    I know this not because I’ve hacked your webcam, but because your eye movements are intimately tied to certain areas of your brain. Let’s use this fact, along with our previous tips on spotting liars, to access other people’s thoughts.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    Practice on Yourself First

    Before going into any details, test your own eyes and get an understanding of how they’re connected to your thoughts. Address the following and take note of even the slightest eye movements up, down, or to the side.

    1. What did your worst haircut look like?
    2. What will your city look like in twenty years?
    3. What’s the most annoying ’80s song and how does it sound?
    4. Write a jingle in your head.
    5. Have a short conversation with yourself.
    6. Imagine the feeling of a warm bed on a cold day.

    The first two questions likely sent your eyes upwards, while questions three and four moved them to the side, and the last two cast your eyes downward.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    #1. Upper Left – Visual Memory

    Unless the memory is immediately available, someone’s eyes looking to their upper left tells you that they are accessing an image of something from the past. This is a familiar position for those who are visual learners and rely on a visual memory.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    #2. Upper Right – Visual Construction

    Eyes looking up and to the right indicate that the person is constructing a visual image in their mind. People who are lying will look in this direction as they fabricate mental images. Of course, Samuel L. Jackson explains it best.

    #3. Lateral Left – Sound Memory

    When your dad tries to remember the punchline of a terrible joke, his eyes are probably looking to his lateral right. This direction indicates that a person is trying to recall a sound from the past.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    You can use this to assess whether or not someone is reciting lines when they claim to be sincere. Children often look in this direction, for example, when they’re repeating the political and religious rhetoric of their parents.

    #4. Lateral Right – Sound Construction

    If someone is lying about a conversation they claim to have had, they’ll look to their lateral left. This direction indicates the creation of sound.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    #5. Lower Left – Inner Dialogue

    The devil isn’t really on your shoulder, he’s on your left collarbone. If someone is having an internal debate, they’ll likely glance to their lower left. This area indicates a person is deep in thought or questioning.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    #6. Lower Right – Kinesthetic/Feeling

    Remembering the feeling of something will push our eyes to our right. Don’t believe me? While your eyes are closed, move them to the upper left and try to imagine the feeling of fur. The try it with your eyes to the lower right. Which one feels less awkward?

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    The Potential Complications

    Obviously this method of prediction is not foolproof. Eyes are rarely held static in one position. Environmental stimuli like noise and light will influence the direction of eye movement, as will the pressure to maintain steady eye contact in a conversation. Instead, look for repeated “flickering” to any side.

    Preferred Representational Systems

    Every individual has a preferred way of representing information in their mind, which will influence the direction of their eyes. Some prefer visual images and others prefer sound.

    If you ask someone to describe what they saw, for example, they will access their memory of the image (eyes to their upper left), but may also construct a description of the image in their head (eyes to the lateral right).

    Want to master Microsoft Excel and take your work-from-home job prospects to the next level? Jump-start your career with our Premium A-to-Z Microsoft Excel Training Bundle from the new Gadget Hacks Shop and get lifetime access to more than 40 hours of Basic to Advanced instruction on functions, formula, tools, and more.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    Samantha Lee/Business Insider

    Detecting high-stakes liars is often the work of the FBI, and they frequently look to facial expressions, body language, and verbal indicators as signals, or “tells,” that someone is lying.

    Mark Bouton, an FBI agent for 30 years and author of “How to Spot Lies Like the FBI,” tells Business Insider that he used certain tells to help identify Timothy McVeigh as a suspect in the Oklahoma City bombing. But being able to read facial expressions to detect lies can be beneficial even if you’re not conducting criminal investigations, he says.

    “There are a number of facial expressions and associated reactions that could indicate someone is lying to you,” he says. “Some are caused by nervousness, some by chemical reactions, and others by physical reactions.”

    To start, he says it’s important to understand how the person in question normally acts.

    “It’s best to observe someone for a while as you make small talk or ask innocuous questions, in order to see what his usual reactions are, including tics he may have,” he says. “Then if he exhibits several lying indicators when you ask more pointed or suggestive questions, and these are not ones he previously performed, you can be confident that he’s likely lying.”

    Here are some of the facial expressions Bouton suggests looking out for:

    How to spot a liar by their eye movementsWhen interpreting the body language of a liar, you should rely on signs that are not under his cautious control, for example, gestures and signs that happen automatically. In the liar’s case, the least reliable signs are the those that he has the most control over, like his words or exposing his palms; exposing palms generally means openness, but in this case can be easily faked.

    A small child will instinctively cover her mouth when lying. If she hears something she doesn’t like to hear, she will just cover her ears as if she is trying to block out the sound. If she sees something she doesn’t want to see, she would cover her eyes. As she gets older, the face touching gestures become quicker and subtler but do not disappear altogether.

    Face touching gestures will still be there when lying, covering up for someone, exaggerating, doubting or even being uncertain. Increased swallowing of saliva is another automatic gesture that is often displayed when lying, but it is usually more noticeable with men than with women.

    In addition, separate gesture should not be interpreted without considering other signs that are displayed at the same time, and circumstances under which it is happening taken into consideration. The reason for that, is that one and the same gesture could mean different things at different times. For example, scratching the head can mean forgetfulness or lying, but it could also mean dandruff.

    Similarly to that, the face touching gesture is not always associated with the body language of a liar; it could simply mean that the person is just holding back some information. Observing subsequent movements and signs could confirm or deny your suspicions.

    What makes you the way you are? Take THIS TEST to discover your personality type.

    Despite the fact that we use our faces to cover up lies and our genuine emotions more than any other body part, they still continuously reveal our true feelings and attitudes without us being aware of it. If you are trying to conceal a lie, or a certain unpleasant thought flashes into your mind, the evidence will be displayed on your face even if just for a split second.

    One perfect example – if you are at a job interview and you are asked about your relationship with the previous boss, one that you truly hated, but you still insist that the relationship was great, and you only left the job just because you wanted to have better options for your future, your face will likely display a sneer, if only for a split second.

    This kind of body language happens unconsciously and usually goes unnoticed unless the person who is talking to you is highly perceptive to body language. If he is, he will see the contradiction between your verbal and non-verbal signals, and since non-verbal signals have five times more impact than the verbal ones, he is unlikely to believe you.

    Lying is not an easy thing to do, because your subconscious mind automatically sends signals that are perceived as the body language of a liar. They contradict what you are saying, and make your words hard to believe to whoever may be listening. These signals include dilation and contraction of the pupils, sweating, increased swallowing of saliva, twitching of facial muscles, flushes and increased eye-blinking. It could take a split second only, but professional interviewers, sales people and simply perceptive individuals can and do notice these contradictions.

    This fact of the matter is, this is most obvious with those who do not usually lie because they didn’t refine their body language as “professional” liars do, like actors for example. Professional liars pay attention to how it feels when they say a lie, then work on reducing gesturing altogether. The movements become so refined that it becomes extremely difficult to detect lies in these people.

    How to Detect Lies

    Become a Human Lie Detector (Part 1)

    Warning: sometimes ignorance is bliss. After gaining this knowledge, you may be hurt when it is obvious that someone is lying to you. The following deception detection techniques are used by police, forensic psychologists, security experts and other investigators.

    Introduction to Detecting Lies:

    This knowledge is also useful for managers, employers, and for anyone to use in everyday situations where telling the truth from a lie can help prevent you from being a victim of fraud/scams and other deceptions.

    This is just a basic run down of physical (body language) gestures and verbal cues that may indicate someone is being untruthful. Remember: these signs don’t indicate someone is lying, just that they are more likely to be lying.

    If you got here from somewhere else, be sure to check out our Lie Detection index page for more info including new research in the field of forensic psychology. Last update: April 10th, 2013.

    Signs of Deception:

    Body Language of Lies:

    • Physical expression will be limited and stiff, with few arm and hand movements. Hand, arm and leg movement are toward their own body the liar takes up less space.

    • A person who is lying to you will avoid making eye contact.

    • Hands touching their face, throat & mouth. Touching or scratching the nose or behind their ear. Not likely to touch his chest/heart with an open hand.

    Emotional Gestures & Contradiction

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    • Timing and duration of emotional gestures and emotions are off a normal pace. The display of emotion is delayed, stays longer it would naturally, then stops suddenly.

    • Timing is off between emotions gestures/expressions and words. Example: Someone says “I love it!” when receiving a gift, and then smile after making that statement, rather then at the same time the statement is made.

    • Gestures/expressions don’t match the verbal statement, such as frowning when saying “I love you.”

    • Expressions are limited to mouth movements when someone is faking emotions (like happy, surprised, sad, awe, )instead of the whole face. For example; when someone smiles naturally their whole face is involved: jaw/cheek movement, eyes and forehead push down, etc.

    Interactions and Reactions

    • A guilty person gets defensive. An innocent person will often go on the offensive.

    • A liar is uncomfortable facing his questioner/accuser and may turn his head or body away.

    • A liar might unconsciously place objects (book, coffee cup, etc.) between themselves and you.

    Verbal Context and Content

    • A liar will use your words to make answer a question. When asked, “Did you eat the last cookie?” The liar answers, “No, I did not eat the last cookie.”

    •A statement with a contraction is more likely to be truthful: “ I didn’t do it” instead of “I did not do it”

    • Liars sometimes avoid “lying” by not making direct statements. They imply answers instead of denying something directly.

    • The guilty person may speak more than natural, adding unnecessary details to convince you… they are not comfortable with silence or pauses in the conversation. • A liar may leave out pronouns and speak in a monotonous tone. When a truthful statement is made the pronoun is emphasized as much or more than the rest of the words in a statement.

    • Words may be garbled and spoken softly, and syntax and grammar may be off. In other words, his sentences will likely be muddled rather than emphasized.

    • The use of distancing language. How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    Also see our article on Statement Analysis for a more in-depth look at word analysis techniques used by interrogators.

    Other signs of a lie:

    • If you believe someone is lying, then change subject of a conversation quickly, a liar follows along willingly and becomes more relaxed. The guilty wants the subject changed; an innocent person may be confused by the sudden change in topics and will want to back to the previous subject.

    • Using humor or sarcasm to avoid a subject.

    Final Notes:

    Obviously, just because someone exhibits one or more of these signs does not make them a liar. The above behaviors should be compared to a persons base (normal) behavior whenever possible.

    Most lie detecting experts agree that a combination of body language and other cues must be used to make an educated guess on whether someone is telling the truth or a lie.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movementsContinue Reading Part 2 – Eye Direction & LiesContinue Reading:

    Eye Movement and Lying (Lie Detection Part 2) How to tell if someone is lying based on the movements of their eyes. Read the research behind this theory of eye direction and what it can reveal about our inner state of mind.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    Lying Resources, Books & Links (Lie Detection Index Page) Index to all of our lying resource pages, along with additional links, research, videos and books. Start here if you are new to this site. New: Why Do People Lie?

    Comments on Detecting Lies

    User Comment Archive: Page 1 | 2 | 3

    Recommended Reading & Related Products:

    You may also want to check out my lying index page for many more book recommendations.

    Puzzle3: It is double pleasure to deceive the deceiver. – Niccolo _____________ is temporary boredom relief & knowledge for the curious mind. | Proudly Hosted by DreamHost

    Submit a Comment Cancel reply

    This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    If only we could just enter somebody’s mind and read his thoughts, life would have been much more easier. There would have been no lies and deceit in this world. Though entering somebody’s mind and reading his thoughts is restricted to fantasies as of now, you can very well read a person’s body language in order to determine if the person is lying. Understanding how to spot a liar on the basis of his body language can turn out to be a boon for you in various walks of life, including relationships and business. Read more on why do people lie.

    How to Spot a Liar: Body Language
    Liars are insecure, and that is exactly what their body language shows. These people are threatened by the simple fact that their lie can be caught by people with whom they are interacting. The key to spot a liar is the combination of good observational skills with equally good analytical skills.

    • Confident people sport an upright posture, with shoulders at the back, while those not so confident are more often seen in a hunched position, with their hands in their pocket or behind. Most of the times, their movements seem to be restricted and artificial. A liar seldom uses his hand to create gestures.
    • Like artificial movements of various parts of the body, the person will also display a range of ‘fake’ expressions. It is easy to identify these fake expressions when observed properly. Studies have revealed that more muscles in the face are used when smiling genuinely, than the number of muscles used when giving a fake smile.
    • These people tend to avoid eye contact as much as possible. It’s the feeling of insecurity in them which makes them avoid a gaze. When a person lies, his pupils tend to dilate owing to the adrenaline rush in the body. This may not be observed in terms of minor lies, but when it comes to some major instance this is quite an effective method to spot a liar.
    • When a person is lying, he touches his face time and again, especially the area around his mouth. Psychiatrists believe that touching your face in a bid to hide your mouth when lying is a common trait which children develop at an early age, and continue in their adulthood, though with minor variations.
    • The liar may even use some objects in his hand to hide his face, either totally or partially. For instance, when sitting across the table the person who is lying will use the cup of coffee to hide his mouth by holding it in front of his face while talking.
    • A liar will often resort to indirect answers to save himself from being caught. His body language as well as vocabulary skills will be full of mistakes. There would be multiple thoughts running across his mind at a given point of time, which will in turn make him more vulnerable to mistakes.
    • A clean person, when accused, is bound to retaliate and prove his innocence, while a person who is lying will be quite happy with the fact that the topic has been changed. When on the verge of being caught, lairs suddenly become sarcastic, basically with the intention of laughing the subject off before it becomes serious.

    One should also make a note of the fact that some of these signs of lying mentioned here are similar to signs of confusion, and therefore there are significant chances that one may misunderstand a confused person for being a liar. Owing to this one has to be a bit careful with the proceedings, especially when there is lack of evidence.

    How to Spot a Liar on the Phone
    The above mentioned information about how to identify a liar on the basis of his body language can be useful when the person is physically present in front of you, but what if the person is lying while talking on the phone. It is not at all difficult to determine whether a person is lying while being in conversation on the phone. In fact, some of the points mentioned above will come to your rescue on the phone as well. To spot a liar on the phone you will have to keep a track of changes in the person’s pattern of speech. Most of the times, the speech of a person lying will be characterized by long pauses, grammatical mistakes, silly confusions etc. Change of the topic will be welcomed by a liar as this will help him in escaping. Even the pattern of speech will ease down from nervousness when you change the topic. The normal tendency of a liar is to blame his misdeeds on someone else, and this will itself show in his conversation.

    You should also go through:

    These were some of the most prominent characteristic traits of a liar, which were provided with the intention of making you well versed about how to spot a liar on the basis of body language. In the course of time however, pathological liars have become well versed with their expressions, thus making these ways to spot a liar even more difficult. These people have adapted themselves to lying, while ensuring that their body language reveals the least about their intentions. For instance, some people look right into your eyes when lying, contrary to the popular belief that people avoid your gaze when lying. In such circumstances, practice and identifying the combination of signs demonstrated by the individual can come to your rescue in terms of spotting a liar.

    By Abhijit Naik
    Published: 3/3/2010How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    Lie detection and eye movements: How to spot a liar with this in-depth analysis of eye movement

    Kaizen, Philippe

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    This specific ISBN edition is currently not available.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    Lie detection and eye-movements by Philippe Kaizen

    Learn how to spot a liar with this in-depth analysis of eye-movements.

    Author’s note: This book is preferentially directed towards those who already possess a certain expertise in lie detection.

    This is not an obligation but this book explores the subject of eye movement in lie detection more intensively.

    This book will benefit you with a precise awareness in eye movement, directly ensued from my professional experience acquired during numerous interrogations.

    Here’s what you will get in this e-book:

    • The fundamentals of eye-movements in the field of lie detection
    • The inverted eye-movement
    • Lowering or fixing the gaze when lying
    • How to Fake eye-movement deliberately. Yes it is possible.

    As you will see in this e-book, eye-movements and lie detection are far from what we may find in TV series where the hero would evidently declare: “look, he is looking to his right, therefore he is a liar!”

    So, you want to know more ? Scroll to the top and click the Buy button for instant download

    I wish you an nice reading.

    Philippe Kaizen.

    “synopsis” may belong to another edition of this title.

    (No Available Copies)

    • Advanced Search
    • AbeBooks Home

    Search Books:Create a Want

    If you know the book but cannot find it on AbeBooks, we can automatically search for it on your behalf as new inventory is added. If it is added to AbeBooks by one of our member booksellers, we will notify you!

    It’s important to know when someone is lying to you, especially in relationships.

    Unfortunately, there isn’t a magic trick you can use to figure out when a person is lying. But if you pay attention to certain body language clues, you can come pretty close.

    To find out what those clues are, INSIDER spoke to body language experts Tonya Reiman and Patti Wood.

    Although no one tip will work in every instance — as Wood put it, “body language just isn’t as simple as some people would like it to be” — there are some consistent clues that indicate someone is lying.

    Here are 10 signs someone could be lying based solely on their body language.

    1. A departure from their normal body language.

    If you’re trying to analyze a person’s body language, you first need to acquaint yourself with their typical mannerisms. This is called “baselining,” and it’s essential to determining if someone is lying.

    “Everything from the handshake to the way someone stands reveals who he is. In other words, when you baseline someone, you detect their deceit signals by first detecting their truth signals,” Reiman told INSIDER.

    “Everyone has a baseline of what their norm is,” Wood told INSIDER. “Some people are constantly adjusting their clothing, and fidgeting, and for them, that’s their normal. So what you’re looking for is switches from somebody’s normal behavior.”

    Obviously, there are a few reasons why someone might be acting slightly different than usual, and they don’t all necessarily indicate that a person is lying. Still, it can’t hurt to unleash your inner Sherlock and pay close attention to how someone’s behavior might differ from their “baseline.”

    The direction of eye movements may not indicate lying, says new research.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    July 12, 2012— — Your eyes may not say it all when it comes to lying, according to a new study.

    Despite the common belief that shifty eyes — moving up and to the right — indicate deception, researchers found no connection between where the eyes move and whether a person is telling the truth.

    In three separate experiments, they tested whether people who lied tended to move their eyes up and to the right, more than people who were not lying. They found no association between which direction the eyes moved and whether participants were telling the truth.

    “This is in line with findings from a considerable amount of previous work showing that facial clues (including eye movements) are poor indicators of deception,” wrote the authors, led by Richard Wiseman of the University of Hertfordshire in the United Kingdom. The study is published in the online journal PLoS ONE.

    Howard Ehrlichman, a professor emeritus of psychology at Queens College of the City University of New York, has done considerable research on eye movements, and said he also never found any link between the direction of eye movements and lying.

    “This does not mean that the eyes don’t tell us anything about what people are thinking,” he said. “I found that while the direction of eye movements wasn’t related to anything, whether people actually made eye movements or not was related to aspects of things going on in their mind.”

    He said that people tend to make eye movements — about one per second on average — when they are retrieving information from their long-term memory.

    “If there’s no eye movement during a television interview, I’m convinced that the person has rehearsed or repeated what they are going to say many times and don’t have to search for the answer in their long-term memories.”

    He said he’s not sure where the notion about directionality of eye movement and lying came from, but said it has spread despite little scientific evidence for it.

    The study authors attribute part of the popularity of the belief that looking up to the right indicates lying while looking up to the left indicates truthfulness to many practitioners of neuro-linguistic programming (NLP). NLP — controversial among scientists — is a therapy approach that revolves around the connection between neurological processes, language and behavior.

    “Many NLP practitioners claim that a person’s eye movements can reveal a useful insight into whether they are lying or telling the truth,” they wrote.

    Some NLP practitioners dispute this assertion.

    “We don’t believe that eye movements are an indication of lying and have never taught it as such. I believe that someone started the idea as a marketing ploy. Perhaps they really believed it,” said Steven Leeds, a co-director of the NLP Training Center of New York. “Eye movements, as we teach it, indicate how a person is processing information, whether it be visual, auditory, or kinesthetic, and whether is remembered or created.”

    Others say they believe that the direction of eye movements can give away a liar.

    Donald Sanborn is president of Credibility Assessment Technologies, a company that specializes in lie detection technology, recently licensed new technology — called ocular-motor detection testing — based on research done by psychologists from the University of Utah that utilizes a combination of eye tracking and other variables to determine whether a person is lying.

    “When a person is lying, their emotional load goes up, which causes changes in pupil diameter and gaze position,” said Sanborn. The device also measures how long it takes to read and answer certain questions. Pupil size, gaze position and the length of time it takes to respond to questions reflect that the brain is working harder, which the psychologists determined is a sign of lying.

    This device is designed to be used for pre-employment screening, but it is not legal for use by private companies, so the company is working with the U.S. government and with foreign firms. He estimates its accuracy to be around 85 to 87 percent.

    But the authors of the new study said their work offers proof that no relationship exists between the direction of eye movements and truthfulness.

    “Future research could focus on why the belief has become so widespread,” they wrote.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    Do you want to spot a lie of your boy-friend or girl-friend or do you want to catch mischievous lies of your employers? Spotting a lie sometimes becomes difficult. Some people are natural liars. They can fake it up genuinely and con you in believing them. However, it is not impossible to spot a liar. The simple technique is to understand few basic methodologies of human psychology. According to research performed by forensic psychologists in California, the trick to detect a liar is to understand psychology of people. Their behavioural patterns and body language helps to do the job. Every liar has certain form of changes in their behaviour. If these are noticed, then it is much an easy task.

    How do you spot a liar?

    The first thing we notice when we talk to a person is eye contact. If the person does not make a confident eye contact, then there are chances of person lying. Confidence symbolises truth and person who refuses to have direct eye contact, has something to hide. Our golden age poets have always referred “eyes as windows to soul”. Hence, the first indication of a person speaking a lie is absence of eye contact.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    Secondly, when a person is lying, they tend to remember something or make up the stories. You can easily notice the eye expressions of a person.

    The other important observation related to eyes is that eye flutter; this happens more rapidly than usual or a person who is lying closes eye lids for more time than normal blinking of eyes. Although these patterns may change from person to person and with situations, these are few of the noticeable changes which can be made related to spotting liars through eye movements. These symbols may act handy as a lie detector tests.

    Another important behavioural pattern which we can notice while speaking to a person is head movement. A person’s head movement symbolises many things. Head movement symbols are considered as a serious mode of expressions in many countries. Hence, if a person is not able to answer a direct question without proper head movement, then that person is probably lying to you.

    The other behaviour which can be detected easily isthe breathing pattern of a person changes. If a person is not a usual liar, then the breathing pattern of a person changes randomly. The breathing might be heavy or unusual. It is said to be caused by the reflex action of the body. As an effect to this change in breathing pattern, the voice of the person may turn shallow and change in posture of shoulders. These are the signs which are often observed when an individual gets nervous or anxious. Although there are many more psychological patterns, these are few of them.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    Unless you’re dealing with a pro, spotting a liar could be a lot easier than you think. They say the eyes are the window to the soul; they’re also a window to the lying soul. Our body language says about us much more than we can ever imagine. No matter how hard you try to master a lie, someone is bound to spot it eventually and you deservedly earn yourself the title of a “Big Fat Liar”!! As the popular Egyptian proverb advocates: “el kezb maloosh reglein”! Here are some tips on how to nail that pathetic liar in the room:

    -Too much or too little eye contact

    Liars can’t make direct eye contact when they lie; they either keep looking around, or look at your third eye (the place between your eye). It’s easier for them to read your facial expressions without actually staring at your eyes so you don’t notice that they’re lying. No eye contact or forced eye contact probably means the person before you could be lying.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    -Where the eye is pointing

    The eye movement is very uncontrollable, unless well practiced. Looking up and left usually means they’re thinking of a virtual lie; sideway to the left means they’re thinking of a verbal lie.

    -Leaving the big picture and focusing on details

    Details are important in storytelling, but too much details might be a problem. This usually happens when someone is making up a story. They think if they mention a lot of details that adds nothing to the story, it makes them more credible. They’ll also talk over you if you try to skip the details.


    Lying makes us nervous; fidgeting and moving restlessly is very common. Some other common body movements include overusing the hands while explaining, touching the head, hiding the eyes, moving the feet, blinking a lot, touching the nose and breathing through the mouth.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    -Mention that they’re saying the truth

    Saying things like Walahy, makdebsh 3aleek, sada2ny, hagdeb 3aleek leh?, etc.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    -Getting defensive when asked questions

    This is purely the saying of “el 3ala raso bat7a”. They think you’re doubting them when you ask questions and immediately start getting defensive.

    -Can’t retell a small part of the story

    They can’t say the lie backwards; they have to repeat the whole story over again. “7afez msh fahem”. And they’ll start talking over you and affirm everything again when you ask.

    • Home
    • News
    • U.S.
    • Sport
    • TV&Showbiz
    • Australia
    • Femail
    • Health
    • Science
    • Money
    • Video
    • Travel
    • Best Buys
    • Discounts
    • Argos
    • River Island
    • Groupon
    • Debenhams
    • Wayfair
    • Very
    • eBay
    • Boohoo
    • Nike
    • Currys
    • Virgin Media
    • ASOS
    • TUI
    • My Profile
    • Logout
    • Login
    • Latest Headlines
    • Blue Origin
    • SpaceX
    • NASA
    • Apple
    • Google
    • Twitter
    • My Profile
    • Logout
    • Login

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    How do you spot a lie? It’s all to do with the ‘blinking’ obvious .

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    Clinton denied that he had an affair with White House intern Monica Lewinksy – but did his blinking betray him?

    If you want to know if someone is telling the truth, keep an eye on the eyes.

    Liars blink in different ways during and after a falsehood, researchers claim.

    They blink less than normal during the lie, and then have a flurry up to eight times faster than usual afterwards.

    ‘It is striking what different patterns in eye blinks emerged for liars and truth tellers,’ said Dr Sharon Leal, co-author of the study at Portsmouth University.

    ‘Such striking differences in behaviour between liars and truth tellers are rarely seen in deception research.’

    The psychologists say that the discovery, reported in the Journal of Non-verbal Behaviour, means that blink rates could be used by professionals to catch liars.

    In the study, a group of volunteers were told to go about their normal business for ten minutes but not to do anything that they might later have to lie about.

    A second group were asked to steal an exam paper from an office, then to deny having taken it.

    Experimenters, unaware of which group each individual was attached to, then asked each to recall exactly what they had been doing.

    While they were being asked questions, their blink rates, which had all been the same at the start, were monitored with electrodes placed above and below and at the sides of the eyes to monitor all movements.

    Results show that when the questions were being asked and the answers given, the blink rate in the liars went down.

    The truth tellers’ rate went up, possibly because of test anxiety.

    Afterwards, the blink rate of the liars increased rapidly in a sudden flurry of activity, while that of the truth tellers remained the same.

    The researchers say that the increased mental effort involved in telling fibs could be the reason why liars do not blink during the act of lying.

    Dr Leal said: ‘Liars must need to make up their stories and must monitor their fabrication so that they are plausible and adhere to everything the observer knows or might find out.

    ‘In addition, liars must remember their earlier statements, so that they appear consistent when re-telling their story, and know what they told to whom. Liars will be more inclined than truth tellers to monitor and control their demeanour so they will appear honest.

    ‘The reasons why there is a flurry of blinks after the lie is not really clear. It may be that this flurry is a kind of safety valve, like a release of energy after the tension of lying.’

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    10 Body Language Tips to Tell if Someone is Lying

    Honesty is always the best policy but not everyone uses it. People lie often for personal gain, cheat someone, or to simply play a prank on friends. Our body language speaks about us, and no matter how hard we try to hide the truth it will come out one day. Positive med has signs and body language indicators that can help you figure out truth from lies.

    1. Lack of or too much eye contact

    The biggest indicator someone is telling a lie is lack of or too much eye contact. Its a common belief that when people lie they avoid eye contact and look elsewhere. While this is often true, some liars make too much eye contact just to make you believe they are speaking the truth.

    2. Foot movement

    When people lie they often exhibit signs of nervousness or anxiety. Foot movement is the biggest indicator of anxiety and nervousness. Liars often shake their legs or make regular leg movements to avoid tension and run away. This can be used as a clear-cut clue to catch a liar.

    3. Shorter responses

    This is a verbal clue displayed when people lie. When lying people often stay silent during the conversation or offer shorter responses. They also use more ums, ers, and ahs to fill in the gaps. If a person is making more speech errors its an indication of lack of truth.

    4. Change in pitch

    If you observe someone communicating in higher pitch than normal it can be a sign of lying. Some people also maintain lower than normal pitch. High or low pitch indicates there is something off.

    5. Shoulder shrugs

    People often shrug their shoulders when they don’t know or agree to something. If someone is shrugging while speaking it may indicate they don’t agree with what is coming out of their own mouth.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    6. Too much sweating

    Some sweat excessively when they lie. This abnormal sweating happens because of the adrenalin rush from anxiety and nervousness.

    7. Changing the Subject

    The thought process required to support a lie should be fast. Not everyone has fast thought processes so they change the subject to something completely different.

    8. Fidgeting

    When people lie they often touch objects lying around to relieve stress. Some people might act as if they are more interested in the object than the conversation to avoid confrontation.

    9. Face touching

    Studies have found that when people lie, they often rub their nose. It’s a scientific observation, experts believe the adrenaline rush opens the capillaries of the nose making it itchy. Some people also cover their mouth and eyes while lying, this is an uncommon observation.

    10. Excessive lip licking

    Lying puts stress on our body and the biggest indicator of body stress is a dry mouth. In order to rectify the dry mouth, liars are often observed licking their lips often.
    Unless the liar very staunchly believes in his/her lie, the above mentioned points should easily help you in spotting a liar.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    10 Body Language Tips to Tell if Someone is Lying
    By PositiveMed-Team
    Edited By Stephanie Dawson
    [Last Updated: February 7th 2014]

    London: Want to spot a liar? Forget eye movements. Instead, take the ‘write’ way, says a new study.

    Psychologists have long suggested that lying changes handwriting as it forces the brain to work harder to invent facts, interfering with the normal writing process.

    Now, a team at Haifa University in Israel has found that the real sign of a liar is in how he or she writes – in fact, they have discovered a series of tell-tale clues in the handwriting of fibbers, the ‘Daily Mail’ reported.

    The study found that those who write lies press harder on the paper have longer strokes of pen and produce taller letters than those telling the truth. The differences are too subtle to see with the naked eye but can be detected using a computer and a touch-sensitive pad, the researchers said.

    For the study, the researchers asked 34 volunteers to write two short paragraphs, one recalling a real memory, the other a fictitious event. The volunteers used a wireless pen
    with a pressure-sensitive tip to write their memories and lies on paper placed on a computer tablet, which monitored and analysed their writing style.

    “In the false writing condition, the average pressure, stroke length and height were significantly higher than in the true writing condition,” said the researchers, whose study has been published the ‘Journal of Applied Cognitive Psychology’.

    Experts have welcomed the research. Professor Richard Wiseman of Hertfordshire University said the technique was promising, but needed more testing. “We know people hesitate more when they lie and some companies already use this fact to see how long it takes people to tick boxes when filling in surveys online.”

    Flipkart search

    7 Ways To Spot A Liar By Their Body Language

    7 Ways To Spot A Liar By Their Body Language

    Children often will attempt to cover their mouths when they lie in an attempt to stop the naughty worlds coming out. If they do not wish to listen to a parent telling them off, they may well cover their ears to block out the noise and of course, if there is something they do not want to acknowledge seeing, they may cover their eyes.

    As children get older, these hand to face gestures become quicker and more subtle, however, they still occur when they are lying, covering up or even witnessing deceit.

    In a book by Desmond Morris that I read called “People Watching” and in it he cites some research in which nurses were instructed to lie to their patients. The nurses who lied showed a higher usage of hand to face gestures.

    Let me get something straight here; when someone uses a hand to face gesture, it does not necessarily mean that they are lying. It does indicate that the person could be holding back information or you may want to consider looking at the grander scheme of their posture and manner rather than just the simple hand to face gesture.

    Today, I want to give you 7 of the most common gestures that indicate deceit:

    1. Covering the mouth: The hand covers the mouth as your brain unconsciously asks it to try to suppress that deceitful message being communicated. On occasions, this gesture may just be a few fingers over the mouth, or the fist closed, the meaning generally is the same though.

    Some people attempt to misguide the covering of the mouth with a cough or even a fake yawn, it can be funny to see it happening. One of my favourite films, the Godfather, you can observe that when the actors playing gangsters are discussing criminal activities, they often use this gesture to show they are being secretive and it is very much observed in the wonderful TV series “The Sopranos”, another real favourite of mine.

    If this gesture is used, it shows that they might be lying. If they cover their mouth when you are speaking, it might indicate that they feel you are hiding something. At my speaking events, if I see members of my audience using this gesture, then I get worried! I may well interrupt proceedings and ask if anyone has questions so that they can voice their concern. Can’t say this has happened often though!

    2. Touching the nose: Touching the nose can include several rubs of the nose or it may be a single quick one, or one that is hardly noticed.

    This gesture should be read in the general scheme of things. If you are like me and you clip your nasal hair (eeewwww!) then if it is growing back you may get an itchy nose! Or they may have a cold.

    There is much research to show that the nose engorges when we lie. In Chicago , scientists at the Smell and Taste Treatment and Research Foundation found that when you lie chemicals are released, causing tissue inside the nose to engorge. They also showed that blood pressure rises and the nose does actually get bigger when we lie! There is truth in the Pinocchio story!

    Increased blood pressure inflates the nose and causes the nerve endings in the nose to tingle, which you have to give a brisk rub to satisfy. There you go.

    3. Rubbing your eye: I mention kids covering their eyes earlier, and when an adult does not want to see something upsetting, the eye rub often happens. Rubbing the eye is often the brains way of blocking our deceit or avoiding having to look at the person that is being lied to.

    Men usually rub their eyes vigorously or even look away of they tell a great big lie. Women are far less likely to rub their eyes, they instead elect to use a more subtle, smaller touch beneath the eye.

    No doubt you have heard that well-used phrase “lying through their teeth.” When someone is lying, often they clench their teeth, put on a fake smile and rub their eye is a collection of gestures.

    4. Grabbing of the ear: Now I am not talking about something my school P.E. teacher used to do to me when he caught me getting up to mischief!!

    If a sales person said to a client that “it only costs £150 for our services” if the person then grabs their own ear, looks away maybe and says “that sounds like a great deal.” This may well be an attempt by the listener to “hear no evil.”

    Attempting to block out the words they are hearing by tugging the ear lobe or grabbing their ear. This is the grown up version of a child covering their ears as I mentioned earlier.

    Grabbing the ear can often be a sign that the person has heard enough or would like to communicate themselves. It is often experienced if someone is anxious.

    5. Scratching the neck: Using the index finger mainly of the dominant hand and scratches the neck. We usually scratch 5 times or so when we do so. This gesture shows doubt and is often present when someone is thinking that they do not agree with what they just heard. Watch for this gesture alongside verbal communication, it usually goes with someone attempting to get out of something or politely disagreeing.

    6. Pulling at your collar: You have heard the expression “getting hot under the collar” of course.

    Again, Desmond Morris pointed out that lying often causes a tingle in the delicate neck tissues which needs a rub or a scratch to satisfy it. Increased blood pressure from the deceit causes sweat to form on the neck often, especially if the person lying suspects that the other person knows!

    7. Putting fingers in your mouth: This tends to happen unconsciously and is seen by many as an attempt to revert to the security of suckling the mother’s breast and this often occurs when we are pressurized. Children often suck their thumbs or carry a blanket to substitute their mothers breast, then as an adult, they tend to put their fingers to their mouth or such on cigarettes, pens, their glasses or chew gum frequently.

    Fingers in the mouth tend to indicate a need for reassurance.

    So there you go, see what you can detect in others when you are out there in the world. Be sure to remember that these things need to be noticed in the grander scheme of behaviour and manner, they are not black and white. If someone scratches their nose in front of you, look at the context, their other gestures and manner before you scream “liar” in their direction.

    • How to spot a liar by their eye movements
    • How to spot a liar by their eye movements
    • How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    Just about everyone you know tells low-stakes lies, but some people even go so far as to lie about important matters that could forever change their relationships, end their employment, or even send them to jail.

    Detecting high-stakes liars is often the work of the FBI, and they frequently look to facial expressions, body language, and verbal indicators as signals, or “tells,” that someone is lying.

    Mark Bouton, an FBI agent for 30 years and author of “How to Spot Lies Like the FBI,” tells Business Insider that he used certain tells to help identify Timothy McVeigh as a suspect in the Oklahoma City bombing. But being able to read facial expressions to detect lies can be beneficial even if you’re not conducting criminal investigations, he says.

    “There are a number of facial expressions and associated reactions that could indicate someone is lying to you,” he says. “Some are caused by nervousness, some by chemical reactions, and others by physical reactions.”

    To start, he says it’s important to understand how the person in question normally acts.

    “It’s best to observe someone for a while as you make small talk or ask innocuous questions, in order to see what his usual reactions are, including tics he may have,” he says. “Then if he exhibits several lying indicators when you ask more pointed or suggestive questions, and these are not ones he previously performed, you can be confident that he’s likely lying.”

    Here are some things you can do to tell if someone’s lying:

    Watch their eyes

    “This is a physiological reaction to him feeling uncomfortable or trapped by your questions that he doesn’t want to answer,” Bouton says. “It’s a throwback to when people had to seek an escape route when they feared they were in a dangerous situation, such as facing a human or animal adversary.”

    Keep an eye out for rapid blinking

    “A person will ordinarily blink about five or six times a minute, or once every 10 or 12 seconds,” Bouton says. “When stressed – for instance, when someone knows he’s lying – he may blink five or six times in rapid succession.”

    Bouton says exceptions to the usual blink rate mostly have to do with production of dopamine in the body. For example, a person with Parkinson’s disease will have a noticeably slower blink rate than what is usual, while a person with schizophrenia will blink more rapidly than normal.

    Count how long someone closes their eyes

    Bouton says that when a person closes his eyes for a second or two, this may indicate he’s lied to you, since this is a type of defense mechanism. Normally, he explains, a person will blink at a speed of 100 to 400 milliseconds, or 0.10 to 0.40 of a second.

    Pay attention to the direction they look

    “When you ask a normal, right-handed person about something he’s supposed to have seen, if he looks upward and to his left, he’s truly accessing his memory of the incident,” Bouton says. “However, if he looks upward and to his right, he’s accessing his imagination, and he’s inventing an answer.”

    Bouton says that left-handed people will usually have just the opposite reactions.

    And some people will stare straight ahead when trying to recall a visual memory, he says.

    Take note of what you’re asking them

    “If you ask about what a person heard, his eyes will shift toward his left ear to recollect the sound he heard, but if his eyes shift toward his right, he’s about to fib,” Bouton says.

    The key is in what they’re trying to recall

    “His eyes will shift downward and to his left if he’s going to tell you his memory of a smell or touch or sensation, such as a cold draft or a terrible odor,” Bouton explains. “But his eyes will shift down and to his right if he’s going to lie.”

    Bunched skin beneath and wrinkles beside the eyes indicate a real smile

    Bouton says that when people genuinely smile, the skin around their eyes bunch and wrinkle.

    Watch their hands as well

    Bouton explains that a chemical reaction causes people’s faces to itch when they lie.

    And keep an eye on what they do with their mouth

    “A person’s mouth will often go dry as she’s lying,” Bouton says. “She may do a sucking motion, pursing her lips, to try to overcome this.”

    When their lips are so tightened that they appear pinched and white, this can indicate lying.

    Take note of any excessive sweating

    Bouton says sweat may appear on the forehead, cheeks, or back of the neck, and you’ll likely observe the person try to wipe it away.

    And in some instances, notice when the person blushes

    Blushing is an involuntary reflex caused by sympathetic nervous system (this activates your fight-or-flight response) and is a response to the release of adrenaline.

    Pay attention to which direction they shake their head

    Often when people tell the truth they will nod their heads simultaneously in agreement with what they’re saying. But if they shake their heads in disagreement with what they’ve said, their bodies are betraying their lie.

    Receive a single WhatsApp every morning with all our latest news: click here.

    Also from Business Insider South Africa:

    Posted by: Jo Banks

    One of the most useful things I’ve learned over the years is how to read body language. Knowing how to spot if someone is lying is a key skill. Learn how to do it here.

    I’ve studied it avidly over the years and it’s helped me immeasurably in my professional life.

    From the beginning of my career I have observed others’ body language. Not only have I found it fascinating, but it has allowed me to perform my job better. As I’ve always worked in people centric roles, understanding what others are really thinking rather than just taking what they say on face value, has been invaluable to me. Particular examples of this are:

    • When trying to ascertain the truth when conducting investigations in to disciplinary issues with staff
    • Gaining an understanding of what Union Representatives were really thinking rather than what they are telling me during complex union negotiations
    • Being able to immediately see whether my clients are ‘bought’ into what we are discussing
    • Being able to see where my clients are storing their memories and whether they are emotionally attached to them or not (honestly!) so that I can help them change negative ones to positive ones (these are some of the skills you learn through Neuro Linguistic Programming – NLP)

    Spotting deception

    There are number of ways of spotting deception and it’s a combination of these which makes identification more accurate. However, I have to say that the study of body language is not an exact science. Sometimes we may think someone is lying, but signs exhibited by deceit are virtually the same as those we exhibit when we’re stressed. Therefore, I’m going to put a huge warning on the what follows in this post – THIS IS A GUIDE ONLY and should not be used to make any life changing decisions!

    Spotting deception through eye cues

    In NLP, we learn eye cues (which direction a person’s eyes are looking when we ask them certain questions) in order to get a good idea of what someone is thinking. Here’s a quick diagram that illustrates it perfectly (the illustrations assume that you are facing the other person (so that their left is your right):

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    Eye Cue Summary

    Try this out on your friends – after each description, I’ve added questions you can use to test the theories out. When you’re facing the person.

    • Up and to the right usually means that a person is remembering something visually – ‘Do you remember the last time we went to the pub/cinema . What did we do/see?’
    • Up and to the left usually means that a person is imagining (constructing ie making something up – lying) something visually – ‘What does a dog look like with a cats head?’
    • Right side (horizontal) usually means a remembered sound – ‘What does your phone ring tone sound like?’
    • Left side (horizontal) usually means an imagined (constructed) sound – ‘What do you think you’d sound like if you were a man/woman?’
    • Down left usually means that a person is accessing a bodily feeling – ‘How did you feel about. ’
    • Down right usually means that a person is accessing internal dialogue – ‘What do you think about. ’

    A word of caution here, these eye cues cannot be relied upon 100%. Experienced NLP professionals use them in conjunction with observing what the person is saying together with their general body language. Also the eye cues may be reversed in some people for a number of reasons, including if the person is left handed.

    Spotting deception through body language

    We also need to be aware of other body language traits, which together with the eye movements, will give you a better idea of whether someone is being truthful or not. When we lie, no matter how accomplished we are, we usually can’t control our automatic or reflex body reactions. Our blood pressure and pulse tends to rise, our breathing patterns change and the blood drains from our faces (causing our noses to itch!).

    Deception traits to look out for:

    1. Touching the nose – very few people can resist touching their nose when they lie (during Bill Clinton’s interrogation over his relationship with his former ‘Aid’, he was seen to touch his nose more than 25 times).
    2. Blushing and sweating – this often occurs in less experienced liars.
    3. Posture – we like to put some space between ourselves and the person we’re lying to, so people tend to lean back in their chair or back away if they’re standing. People will avoid body contact if at all possible.
    4. Head positions – we don’t like to look a person in the eye if we’re lying to them, so a person may move their heads to the side and will avoid your gaze.
    5. Facial expressions – we often grimace involuntarily.
    6. Mouth expressions – Children often cover their mouths when they’re lying and we take that trait (albeit not always as overtly) into adult life. We’ll often take our hand toward the mouth but touch the chin, cheek or side of the mouth.
    7. Hand gestures – a common gesture is the palms turned out and a sharp shrug of the shoulders. This can indicate a feeling of helplessness and is almost an apology for lying.


    As I said with a HUGE caveat – this information is for guidance only and shouldn’t be relied up for making big decisions. What I will say is that your ‘gut’ feeling is usually the most reliable indicator of who’s telling you the truth. That ‘gut’ feeling is there for a reason and usually right, however, we do tend to override it quite frequently. Start tuning into that feeling more often and act on what it’s telling you – nature created that feeling for a reason, to keep us out of danger. You decisions will turn out to be much better for it.

    In the next post, I’ll talk a bit more about general body language in the workplace, including how to tell who is and who wants to be ‘top dog’.

    If you would like a free consultation on how we can help you, contact us now with no obligation.

    1. How to Know if your partner is lying
    2. How Do Girls Tell If a Guy Is Confident?
    3. Male Gestures That Indicate He Is Attracted
    4. How to Tell if a Person Is Telling the Truth
    5. How to Recognize the Signs of a Man’s Attraction

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    Body language should be read through a scientific and unemotional eye, report researchers at the Harvard Business School. Whether in business or romance, many people use body language to convey false messages and to manipulate others. Cons are masters at recognizing the nonverbal communications of others and preying on the needs they perceive. It can be very useful to learn a few concepts about how to read body language lies.

    Keep a close watch on the eyes. It is very difficult for a liar to look you straight in the eye. At the same time, pathological liars and those practiced in the art of lying may hold your eyes for longer than a few seconds to make you feel uncomfortable and unable to rely on your instincts.

    Watch the hands of the person speaking. While keeping the hands held behind the back may be thought of as a power stance, it is more likely to mean the person is hiding something. Truthful people use open palms, while liars usually will keep their palms hidden in the pockets or turned over.

    Consider how the person touches his face. Taekwondo instructors at TKD Tutor report that people often will cover their mouths when they are lying. They will place the thumb on their cheeks and splay two or more fingers across their mouths in an effort to “cover up” their lies. They may institute a fake cough to cover up the signal.

    Be on guard around people who touch their faces in any form. Rubbing the nose often indicates the person is a skilled liar and is merely diverting his hand from his mouth on purpose. A person who rubs his eyes often is trying to avoid eye contact while lying.

    Pay attention to nervous gestures that could give away a liar. No matter how accomplished liars are, they often develop twitches in their feet or legs. They may fidget with their clothing by picking at lint or straightening their pants leg. Slouching, shrugging and other gestures that are abnormal for the person also can be signs of an impending lie.

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    Everyone has been lied to at some point in their life. The thought of being betrayed by the people close to us can hurt, but sometimes it happens. As with a lot of situations, there are red flags to watch out for when you suspect someone is lying to you. Along with verbal cues that someone might not be telling the truth, there are multiple physical signs that can do the same.

    1. Difficulty Making Eye Contact

    The biggest way to tell if someone is being untruthful is to watch their eyes. You’ve probably heard that the eyes are the window to the soul and in a lot of cases, it’s true. According to E. E. Smith, liars avoid eye contact, look down when they’re speaking, or angle their bodies away from whoever they’re speaking to. In a maneuver called “eye pointing”, retired FBI Agent Jack Schafer says, “Liars often look toward the nearest exit, telegraphing their desire to physically and psychologically escape the anxiety caused by lying.”

    2. Self-Soothing

    Self-soothing is the act of touching oneself to try and find a sense of comfort. Dr. Diana Raab says actions like ear tugging, neck touching, collar pulling, or mouth covering may indicate that someone is telling a lie. There is no sure way to tell whether a person who is self-soothing is coming up with a lie or trying to recover from one. However, Smith says that body language is a dead giveaway.

    3. Change in Voice

    A change in voice can come from a change in emotion, internal state, or just change in pitch. When liars feel threatened, they may get super defensive, their heart may start to race and an outpour of emotions may cause an unintentional change in the way they speak. Raab says even if they’re good at controlling their emotions, a change in pitch may tell when someone is lying and uncomfortable.

    4. Throat Clearing

    According to Schafer, a liar’s “fight or flight” response can make the throat really dry. Throat clearing, hard swallowing, and jaw manipulation are signs that a person is trying to create more saliva. The lack of moisture in the mouth makes it difficult for them to speak a lot without stimulating those salivary glands in the throat. You just might be having a conversation with a truthful person with a dry throat but it’s unlikely if there’s a lot of mouth movement going on.

    5. Sweat

    Where does that moisture from the mouth go when it disappears? It turns into sweat! Schafer says moisture from the throat usually reroutes itself to the skin to escape as sweat. A lot of people sweat when they get nervous and this is no different. Depending on the level of duress the body is under and the amount of stress the liar feels, they could sweat anywhere from a few drops to a whole cup full.

    6. Unusual Fidgeting

    A fidgety person is always suspicious to most people. When someone can’t sit or stand still, people usually take notice and watch carefully. This should be the same response in the presence of a liar. “When pressed for details, they may get fidgety or agitated,” says Smith. Twitching or making movements they wouldn’t usually make (like folding the arms) indicate that a person may be lying or feel as if they’re about to be caught.

    7. Backward Movement

    A lot of people don’t really notice but liars sometimes make backward movements to put more space in between them and the person they’re speaking to. Schafer says that moving the head back, leaning backward or physically taking a step back can be signs of untruthfulness. “People tend to lean toward the people and things they like, and distance themselves from people and things they dislike,” Schafer says.

    How to spot a Liar

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    However much we may abhor it, deception comes naturally to all living things. Birds do it by feigning injury to lead hungry predators away from nesting young. Spider crabs do it by disguise: adorning themselves with strips of kelp and other debris, they pretend to be something they are not – and so escape their enemies. Nature amply rewards successful deceivers by allowing them to survive long enough to mate and reproduce. So it may come as no surprise to learn that human beings- who, according to psychologist Gerald Johnson of the University of South California, or lied to about 200 times a day, roughly one untruth every 5 minutes- often deceive for exactly the same reasons: to save their own skins or to get something they can’t get by other means.

    But knowing how to catch deceit can be just as important a survival skill as knowing how to tell a lie and get away with it. A person able to spot falsehood quickly is unlikely to be swindled by an unscrupulous business associate or hoodwinked by a devious spouse. Luckily, nature provides more than enough clues to trap dissemblers in their own tangled webs- if you know where to look. By closely observing facial expressions, body language and tone of voice, practically anyone can recognise the tell-tale signs of lying. Researchers are even programming computers – like those used on Lie Detector -to get at the truth by analysing the same physical cues available to the naked eye and ear. “With the proper training, many people can learn to reliably detect lies,” says Paul Ekman, professor of psychology at the University of California, San Francisco, who has spent the past 15 years studying the secret art of deception.

    In order to know what kind of Lies work best, successful liars need to accurately assess other people’s emotional states. Ackman’s research shows that this same emotional intelligence is essential for good lie detectors, too. The emotional state to watch out for is stress, the conflict most liars feel between the truth and what they actually say and do.
    Even high-tech lie detectors don’t detect lies as such; they merely detect the physical cues of emotions, which may or may not correspond to what the person being tested is saying. Polygraphs, for instance, measure respiration, heart rate and skin conductivity, which tend to increase when people are nervous – as they usually are when lying. Nervous people typically perspire, and the salts contained in perspiration conducts electricity. That’s why sudden leap in skin conductivity indicates nervousness -about getting caught, perhaps -which makes, in turn, suggest that someone is being economical with the truth. On the other hand, it might also mean that the lights in the television Studio are too hot- which is one reason polygraph tests are inadmissible in court. “Good lie detectors don’t rely on a single thing” says Ekma ,but interpret clusters of verbal and non-verbal clues that suggest someone might be lying.”

    The clues are written all over the face. Because the musculature of the face is directly connected to the areas of the brain that processes emotion, the countenance can be a window to the soul. Neurological studies even suggest that genuine emotions travel different pathways through the brain than insincere ones. If a patient paralyzed by stroke on one side of the face, for example, is asked to smile deliberately, only the mobile side of the mouth is raised. But tell that same person a funny joke, and the patient breaks into a full and spontaneous smile. Very few people -most notably, actors and politicians- are able to consciously control all of their facial expressions. Lies can often be caught when the liars true feelings briefly leak through the mask of deception. We don’t think before we feel, Ekman says. “Expressions tend to show up on the face before we’re even conscious of experiencing an emotion.”

    One of the most difficult facial expressions to fake- or conceal, if it’s genuinely felt – is sadness. When someone is truly sad, the forehead wrinkles with grief and the inner corners of the eyebrows are pulled up. Fewer than 15% of the people Ekman tested were able to produce this eyebrow movement voluntarily. By contrast, the lowering of the eyebrows associated with an angry scowl can be replicated at will but almost everybody. “ If someone claims they are sad and the inner corners of their eyebrows don’t go up, Ekmam says, the sadness is probably false.”

    The smile, on the other hand, is one of the easiest facial expressions to counterfeit. It takes just two muscles -the zygomaticus major muscles that extend from the cheekbones to the corners of the lips- to produce a grin. But there’s a catch. A genuine smile affects not only the corners of the lips but also the orbicularis oculi, the muscle around the eye that produces the distinctive “crow’s feet” associated with people who laugh a lot. A counterfeit grin can be unmasked if the corners of the lips go up, the eyes crinkle, but the inner corners of the eyebrows are not lowered, a movement controlled by the orbicularis oculi that is difficult to fake. The absence of lowered eyebrows is one reason why the smile looks so strained and stiff.

    What is deception detection?

    Deception detection refers to the investigative practices used to determine a person’s truthfulness and credibility. This is largely determined through the consideration of certain behavioral and physiological cues as well as larger contextual and situational information.

    What methods are used to detect deception?

    While historians are not entirely sure where or when deception detection practices originated, it is clear that humans have been trying to figure out how to tell if someone is lying for centuries.

    Fortunately, the methodologies have evolved drastically over time, shifting first from non-scientific testing (i.e., Salem Witch Trials) to more biologically-oriented ones (i.e., phrenology and graphology). Today’s deception detection generally combines behavioral psychology (i.e., human observation) and technology (i.e. polygraphs and artificial intelligence).

    How to spot a liar by their eye movements

    Dr. Ekman’s work in the field of deception detection largely focuses on nonverbal communication of emotion observed in the face and body.

    The challenges of deception detection

    There is no single, definitive sign of deceit itself; no muscle twitch, facial expression, or gesture proves that a person is lying with absolute certainty. Therefore, most modern-day methods of deception detection heavily rely on a variety of methods to collect, analyze and interpret emotional and physiological data.

    However, any data collected merely expose emotional clues that may or may not be related to deception. For example, sweaty palms during a job interview could indicate an interviewee’s fear of being caught in a lie about their qualifications. Or , sweaty palms could be illustrating their fear that the interviewer won’t believe their qualifications despite being totally honest on their resume. Or, their palms could be sweaty because they’re worried about something else entirely, like a sick child at home.

    There are still many more possible reasons why a person might experience sweating palms, especially during high stakes scenarios. To determine the actual cause, further investigation and analysis is needed. Jumping to conclusions, while easy to do, can be harmful to everyone involved and must be avoided.

    Do lie detectors actually work?

    The polygraph lie detector works on the same principles as detecting behavioral betrayals of deceit, and it is vulnerable to the same problems. The polygraph exam does not detect lies, just signs of emotion and requires further investigation.

    When people think they move their eyes

    The relationship between thinking and eye movements was one of the first observations made when NLP began around in the early 1970’s. This relationship can provide valuable information on how best to communicate with someone.

    (Note: A lot of claims, studies and articles for how the NLP Eye Movements are supposed to work are flawed and untrustworthy so do take the time to read how they work – and the skills needed to use them reliably.)

    What they show us

    Developing skill in using the NLP Eye Movements will enable you to recognise how a person may be thinking – though not what they are thinking about!

    Some people think mainly in images. Others in self talk. Others in feelings and still others, though a minority, in sounds.

    The ‘Standard’ Eye Directions

    The ‘standard’ eye movement directions as mapped out by NLP co-developers John Grinder, Frank Pucelik and Richard Bandler are shown in the diagram.

    (Imagine this diagram superimposed on the person’s face. So that as you face them their Kinaesthetic direction is to YOUR left.)

    The NLP eye directions are not true!

    These standard NLP eye directions are simply not ‘true’.

    They are not true because

    1. Not everyone follows ‘the rules’ i.e. looks up and to the left or right to visualise or down to their right when thinking in feelings. Many do. And many do not.
    2. When people are thinking about recent events or information with which they are very familiar they may not move their eyes at all.

    That’s why ‘scientific’ studies going back to the late 70’s have been able to prove that NLP ‘does not work’ or that is scientifically unsound. It’s also why the original developers of NLP have been warning that these standard directions are unreliable.

    They simply offer a starting point – a hypothesis-to-be-checked. And they have been telling people about this since the early 70’s – over 45 years ago.

    Why pay attention to the NLP eye movements?

    So if they are not ‘true’ why pay attention to them?

    Being able to notice a person’s eye direction movements – and to recognise what these coudl be indicating, provides useful information about how they are thinking.

    Let’s say, you are explaining to a colleague how to do something and they say they cannot follow your description. And, as they say this, they are looking UP to either the left or the right (indicating that they may be visualising or trying to visualise).

    This can indicate that they need you to demonstrate, rather than verbally explain, so they will be able to see how to do it.

    Let’s say, on the other hand, the person is looking down and to their right. This can indicate they are thinking in feelings. In this case it’s better for them if you get them actively doing it rather than passively listening or imagining.

    Incidentally the person will rarely be consciously aware of how they are thinking – yet this information is available for the sharp-eyed and skilled observer.

    Treat the Eye Patterns as a beginning – only!

    These standard eye directions are likely to apply in a majority of people. (Note the word ‘likely’.) But, as we explain in our own NLP training courses it is important to treat this above diagram only as a starting point. It would be great and much more simple if we could take this map and know instantly what a person is doing internally – but in real life things are a little more complicated.

    People differ and not everyone will have the same pattern. We recommend that you treat this diagram as an educated guess – and then use your NLP observation skills to establish how the person in front of you does it.

    So when your friend looks up to their left or to their right this doesn’t necessarily mean that they are thinking in pictures – it simply means they are looking in this direction and doing something internally.

    You have to establish what they mean using your ‘sensory acuity and calibration skills’. (Another Practitioner skill – it is the highly developed ability to recognise these very subtle behaviours and to ‘calibrate’ or recognise what they indicate for the particular individual with whom we are communicating.) In other words when they look in this direction do they make pictures or do they do something else?

    Left or right?

    So does it make a difference whether they look up to their left or up to their right?

    Not for practical purposes. Yes, most NLP courses do teach that when a person looks up to their left they are remembering pictures and when they look up to their right they are ‘constructing’ pictures.

    Now while this could be true for some or even many people, it’s a highly unreliable process. And this is why we don’t bother with this distinction in our own courses – if you want to know whether they are making up an image or remembering one it’s easier just to ask the person.

    Better to keep things simple, recognise they are looking in one of the likely Visual Thinking directions, and then use the content of what they are saying and how they are saying it to gauge whether they are making up pictures are actually remember them.

    The Great NLP Lie Detection myth

    This distinction between whether a person is looking up to the left and up to the right has given rise to the Great NLP Lie Detector myth. In this myth people claim NLP enables you to tell if a person is lying merely by watching their eyes.

    This claim is untrue.

    And was first refuted by two or the originators of NLP in the book Frogs into Princes (1979). In it Bandler and Grinder said that in the case of some people their eyes could indicate whether or not they might be lying – but that this was not reliable.

    Since the mid 90’s we have been passing along this message in our own Pegasus NLP courses – and providing a more measured and considered style of NLP.

    One final tip.

    The eye movements – when used with skill – are a great addition to your toolkit for communicating effectively with others. This skill is best learned on a live workshop where you are coached in the subtleties of observing and understanding eye movements.

    However, there is a especially valuable tip which everyone can use without attending a training programme: if a person’s eyes are moving it indicates they are thinking – so you need to remain quiet until the eyes stop moving and look at you once again.

    How to have fun with your dad

    How to have fun with your dad

    If you’re looking for things you can do with your dad, don’t look any further. As a daughter, your relationship with your dad is special. It’s different from the relationship you have with your mom, even though you love them both equally. Dads tend to be very protective of their young daughters and they feel proud to see you grow up to be a young and strong woman, often wishing you were still a little girl. Even when you’re coupled up or married, it can be so much fun to spend quality time with the man who raised you to be who you are today. Here are 7 fun things you can do with your dad.

    1 Go Fishing Together

    Many men love to go fishing. If your dad is one of them, then why not join him on his next fishing trip? Fishing is a very relaxing sport, yet a concentrated eye is necessary to succeed. If you’re not familiar with fishing, ask your dad to teach you how to fish or you could simply accompany him while he does most of the hard work. Bring some beverages and some picnic foods and you’ll both have a great time. Going fishing is one of the best things you can do with your dad, because it will show him you’re interested in his hobby.

    2 Go Shopping

    This sounds weird, I know, but I don’t mean you should take your dad on your next hunt for a new handbag. But there comes a time when you need to buy something that your dad knows more about than you, like electronics or a car. Ask him for his advice and if he cares to join you at the store or dealer. Chances are that your dad asks the questions that you didn’t even think about, and maybe he can even do some bargaining to get you a good deal. You get what you need, he gets to feel knowledgeable and you get to spend time together. It’s a win-win situation!

    How to have fun with your dad9 Fabulous Commandments of Skin Care to Religiously Follow .

    How to have fun with your dadFab Tips to Making Your Man Feel Included if Youre an Independent Woman .

    3 Play Sports

    All dads love to play sports, no matter how busy their schedules are. Planning an afternoon to play sports with your dad is a fun way to spend quality time together. You could play a sport that you’re both familiar with, but you could also try something new. If you choose the latter, find a coach who can teach the two of you the basics. If you both enjoy it, you might have found a sport that you can play together every week or every 2 weeks. Playing sports with your dad is a great way to have a fun, casual time together while still being competitive (in a healthy way, I hope). And the exercise makes it even better.

    4 Cook Together

    Some dads really enjoy cooking, but often find they don’t get enough opportunities to do it. If it’s common for you and your family to get together every now and then, then plan a family dinner and serve a meal that’s cooked by you and your dad. Prior to the day, discuss what the two of you will be cooking and you could even do groceries together if time allows it. Cooking with your dad can be a lot of fun, especially because you can learn from each other. An alternative is to take cooking classes together.

    5 DIY Projects

    If you dad likes to take up DIY projects in and around the house, offer him your help. Believe it or not, painting a shed or a room can be very relaxing sometimes. When you help your dad with his DIY project, make sure to simply follow his instructions and take things the way he wants them to go. Remember, it’s his project and being as handy as he is, he probably knows best when it comes to this. Let him take charge in the process and just do the best you can. Helping your dad with a DIY project allows the two of you to entirely focus on one thing, with limited opportunities to talk about other things in life. It’s calming, fun and it’s teamwork.

    6 Go for a Walk

    Whenever you visit your parents and you have a little spare time, ask your dad if he feels like going for a walk. You could drive to the woods, a park, the coast or walk through the center of a bustling city, if that’s where you happen to be. Going for a walk gives you time to talk, to find out how your dad is doing and to talk about things that have been on your minds. At the same time, it’s a great way to encourage your dad to stay active, if he’s getting a little older. The nature and the fresh air will do you both good and it can also be a great way for your dad to show off his daughter to anyone passing by.

    7 Take Him out for Man Food

    You and your mom are probably on an everlasting diet and in a constant fight with the scale. But let’s be honest, every woman loves the occasional hamburger, hot dog or meat fest. At least, if you’re not a vegetarian… So why not treat your dad to some real man food? Take him to a new hamburger place or join him on his trip to his favorite place and ask him for recommendations. And if you’re up for something fancier, you can surprise your dad with a dinner at the best steakhouse in town. Dads who have daughters put up with a lot of girl talk about diets and weight maintenance as well as rejections when he offers you a second sausage while barbecuing. He deserves to enjoy a real man meal every now and then, without the girl talk.

    A father and daughter relationship is unique. I hope the list gave you some ideas on what fun things you can do with your dad and I hope he will like it, if you decide to put any of my suggestions into practice. If you think your dad isn’t really up for any of these things, I’m very curious to know what will work for him. What do you think would be a fun thing to do with your dad?

    Becky and I have 18 years with each of these kids before they leave for college. 18 years. That isn’t very long. We have a few jobs while they are here with us and today I am partnering with Chiquita as part of the Mom it Forward Network to share them with you.

    Our jobs, as their parents are to:
    1- Raise them to be responsible.
    2- Raise them to be kind.
    3- Raise them to be the best that they can be.
    4- Raise them to be HAPPY.

    As a Dad, it can be hard to find that balance – the balance between being strict Dad & fun Dad, but we have the responsibility to teach our kids, to protect our kids and to love our kids. To have a bond with our kids, I know that I have to find that balance.

    In all of these things, it is my job to assist them… to lead them. Being a fun Dad is one way that I can do that. Yes, I can be strict Dad when I need to be. Yes, I can be responsible Dad when I have to. Yes, I can even be mean Dad when the situation calls for it. Then there are those times when I get to be FUN Dad. Those are my favorite times.

    How to have fun with your dad

    Becky’s friend has a great article about being a fun mom, so today I want to share 10 ways to be a fun Dad.

    1. Make them laugh by stepping outside of your comfort zone. Do I normally walk around with a Chiquita banana hat? No. Do you know what happens when I do? Our kids act silly, too! The kids even wanted to do silly things so they could be entered this picture into the Chiquita Banana Smile Contest!

    How to have fun with your dad

    2. Listen to your kids.
    Take the time to listen. Stop what you are doing and truly listen to what they are saying. You are not just listening, but you are instilling in them a confidence that comes from feeling important.

    3. Play outside with them.
    Tag, tickle monster, football… whatever it is, play with them. Becky took this picture a week or so ago…

    How to have fun with your dad

    4. Teach them.
    Do you know the old saying “Give a man a fish and you feed him for a day. Teach a man to fish and you feed him for a lifetime.” How true it is… talk to your kids about what you are doing. If you are building something, let them watch you or help you. Teach them.

    How to have fun with your dad
    5. Take them places.
    Our kids love to go to new places. Last year, we took them to Disney. It was such a great trip and the kids were in awe at how big it was and how much there was to do. (Fun fact: Did you know that the Walt Disney World® Resort is so big that it takes nearly 70,000 cast members to keep it running, 13 million bottles of water a year to keep it hydrated, and 285,000 pounds of laundry every day to keep it clean. Wow! Read more Disney Fun Facts.)

    6. Learn together.
    Pick up a book about something that you are both interested in and learn about it. Ethan loves to learn about animals, so before we went on the Kilimanjaro Safaris ® Expedition last year, we learned about the animals. (Fun fact: While the biggest animal in height might be the giraffe, the biggest all-round creature you’ll see, by far, is the elephant. African elephants are the largest land animals on the Earth, in fact! They can weigh between 5,000 and 14,000 pounds.)

    7. Play games.
    The kids & I like to play funny games like “What’s in the bag?” Or “Can you get it?” (Ps- let them win sometimes!)

    How to have fun with your dad
    Your turn! How can you be a fun dad or mom? Take a picture & share it! Better yet- Share your Chiquita smile and you could win a Walt Disney World® vacation from Chiquita!

    Are you targeted by your family and friends on April Fool’s Day? It’s time to take revenge by playing pranks on them! Plentifun loads you with 15 easy and harmless pranks to play on your parents.

    How to have fun with your dad

    Are you targeted by your family and friends on April Fool’s Day? It’s time to take revenge by playing pranks on them! Plentifun loads you with 15 easy and harmless pranks to play on your parents.

    You’d better watch out!

    If you’re planning on playing pranks with your parents, keep a check on their mood. Things might work wrongly for you if they are not in a sporting mood.

    We kids love to prank with friends and teachers at school. But how about joking around with mum and dad?! It helps in keeping the home atmosphere light and joyful. A well-planned and successfully executed prank can boost up everything, and there’s no harm in having a little fun. But we need to be very careful, as not to hurt our parents, physically or mentally, or cross our lines in the context of playing pranks.

    Gone are the days when moms used to scare the hell out of everything if you jump in front of her and scream ‘boo’. Yeah, may be it still works for some. But get crazier this time, with a logistic touch to your idea.

    Read these funny pranks, and plan some shocking surprises for your parents.

    Party Fun!

    In a family gathering or party, convince your cousins and jolly aunts to make calls on one of your parents’ cell numbers, and tell them to ask for “Bubba”. Make them block their numbers with *67. After the party, call your parents yourself and say “Hey, it’s Bubba here, are there any messages for me?

    Tring Tring!

    If you have those non-wireless phones, wrap the button you press to hang up the phone on the receiver with tape so that when they pick up the phone, it keeps ringing.

    Thrilling Breakfast!

    Do your parents love having cereal for breakfast? We have an idea for you. Add drops of food coloring into the bottom of a cereal bowl, probably the same color as the bowl itself. When they would pour milk into a bowl, he/she would get shocked seeing the milk turn into a strange color.

    Apple Twin

    Who doesn’t like caramelized apples? But who knows if it’s apple or something else, after it has been caramelized? Make them yummy caramelized onions!

    Snow-white Hair

    This one’s for your mum. Fill the front section of the blow dryer with baby powder. The moment she turns it on, there will be a splash of snow on her hair!

    Faux Coke!

    Have those empty coke bottles at home? Take one and fill it with Sprite. To make it look Cola-like, add soy sauce till it appears like Coke. Don’t forget to refrigerate it to give a natural feel.

    Foiled Pillow

    If it’s sleep time, you can play around with pillows. Unwrap a pillow off its pillowcase, and wrap it with a sheet of aluminum foil. Put the pillow back into its cover. Wait for your parents to lie down. Watch them make strong metallic sounds, as if cracking their heads to the pillow.

    Saucy Murder

    For this one, promise me you’ll enact nicely? This should be done in presence of your parent. Grab a bottle of ketchup and go for taking a shower. Sprinkle sauce everywhere; you can use water too. Shout “Murder Murder”, and let the door open. See them tremble. Don’t forget to put your clothes on!

    Cheesy Plastic Wrap

    If it’s Sunday, pamper your parents. Make them a cheese wrap or a sandwich, but don’t remove the plastic wrap on the cheese! See them take the first bite. Note: Do keep real cheese wraps for them to calm them.

    Swap it Up!

    This one’s a classic, but still works. Late in the evening, swap the salt container with that of sugar. Next morning, watch your parents start the day with salty coffee (or tea).

    Creamy Face

    Most people tend to wipe their face after waking up. Late in the night, spray some shaving cream on your victim’s hand. If you are excited to see the reaction live, then wake them up by tickling their nose, may be with a feather.

    Lingo Jumble

    Grab one of your parents’ phone. Jump to language settings, and shift to a foreign language. Chinese seems cool, ain’t it? Watch them struggle with a new language!

    Fiery Prank

    Chillies remain to be the-forever-kinda ingredient of pranks. Make some cookies by yourself, stuffing in some finely chopped hot chilies. Serve the cookies, but don’t forget to add a note that says “Do Not Eat – Very Hot!”

    Minty Cookies

    Grab any cream-filled cookies and scrape out the vanilla (or any other) filling. Replace it with white toothpaste, and allow the cookies to dry. A funny surprise for someone who is sweet-toothed!

    Brewing Trouble

    Coffee lovers at your home? Get some decaf and replace their coffee with the new coffee in the same container, for about a week. Then, switch back to espresso. Watch the fun!

    Like it? Share it!

    • Share
    • Tweet
    • Pin
    • LinkedIn
    • Email

    How to have fun with your dadUncategorized

    This Father’s Day why not snatch away some time from your busy schedule and turn them into cherished moments? Plan a short trip with your dad and enjoy every bit of the precious time spent with him.

    WelcomHeritage Elysium, Shimla: This place offers a whole new perspective on the legendary hill station of Shimla. Whereas the hill station is known for colonial architecture and influences, Elysium re-invents the quintessential Shimla experience through the lens of modern luxury and contemporary comforts. Offering a 360o panoramic view of the entirety of Shimla, the lush green valley, and the sublime temples. Elysium has menu that perfectly blends local Himachali food with the Colonial culinary heritage of Shimla. From local specialities like Cha Gosht and Chana Madra to Continental favorites, it is an ideal place to explore delicious food.

    Visalam, Kanadukathan, Karaikudi: A 100-year-old heritage property, Visalam is an ideal place to enjoy the serenity of nature along with Chettinad food. Distinctly delicious and complex in flavours, the cuisine delicately combines a variety of native spices with hints of the south-east Asian zests. The property also happily takes guests to the village Murukku lady for a taste of the famous savoury snack from the region.

    Mantra Koodam, Tanjavur: Styled as a real village, Mantra Koodam is inspired by the Tamzih culture and offers an immersive opportunity to revel in Tanjore’s rich legacy of arts, crafts, architecture, music, philosophy, astronomy, religious and predictive sciences, that flourish even today. There are UNESCO world heritage Chola temples and monuments, precious bronze sculptures and castings, as well as the fascinating naadi shastra that can be explored as well. The rare Chola cuisine is a highlight here with locals whipping up ancient recipes.

    Jehan Numa Retreat, Bhopal: Located at the edge of the VanVihar Park, the 12.5 acre luxury retreat with its earthy cottage and lush foliage offers some of the choicest gems of Bhopali Cuisine. In‘Under the Jamun Tree’ one can indulge in signature royal dishes and ‘The Green House Bistro’ is a farm to fork concept restaurant where one can pick vegetables and ask the chef to cook it for you! The retreat also gives access to ‘The General’s Table’ a pre-reserved private dining experience at the Jehan Numa Palace that curates a 7 course meal from General Obaidullah’s celebratory menu.

    Fairmont Jaipur: If you think why go to Jaipur in summers, we tell you-to spend memorable time within the premises of Fairmont. Just laze around in the terrace/balcony looking at the hills nearby or wake up to the call of peacocks, sip tea while watching the sunset or enjoy a luxurious bath in the hammam in your room. The hotel can book a small village visit for you on the special day, where you can enjoy the traditional Rajasthani breakfast with some interesting activities like tractor or camel ride. You can also enjoy the traditional Rajasthani food here and celebrate the day like a true royal.

    Moksha Himalaya Spa Resort, Parvanoo: Located at the topmost point in Parvanoo, a hill station near Shimla, it can be reached both through a car and a cable car which is operated by the management of the resort from the past three decades. The 8-minute ride in itself is an experience. The resort is huge with beautiful rooms overlooking the hills and a well-cultivated garden and extremely attentive and courteous staff. The food at Moksha is something that you would remember for the rest of your life. It is pure, mostly made from organically sourced ingredients and full of earthly flavours. Executive Chef Gautam Kumar can always been seen around interacting with guests and in an attempt to make the dining experience special for each one of them. If he tells you to try out the Spa, trust him and book it for your dad as Moksha has one of the best Spa set ups in North India.

    Welcomhotel Sheraton New Delhi: Make it a memorable and delectable Father’s Day at Welcomhotel New Delhi and create stories you will retell for a lifetime. At Pavilion, enjoy a gourmet brunch experience and relish the taste of familiarity and comfort with the best of Indian and global cuisine – caringly selected and mindfully prepared by experienced chefs. Crafted with the utmost care, safety and hygiene, they are also presenting to you much loved culinary experiences from around the world – now in the comfort of home too. Topped with powdered cocoa and iced to perfection, treat dad to Nutmeg Roasted Almond & Chocolate Celebration Cake, a cake as special as him. They are also extending 10 percent discount on Father’s Day package and additional 20 percent savings on food and soft beverages, spa, salon and laundry services are included in this exclusive staycation package.

    The Roseate Ganges, Rishikesh: Tucked away in the hills of Rishikesh is the quaint Roseate Ganges-with individual cottages that give a feeling of peace and tranquilly amidst the constant murmur of the Ganga that flows nearby. The location is away from the hustle and bustle of the city and this is probably the USP of the place. The food is mostly organic with a menu which has a lot of healthy ingredients. One can enjoy the Father’s Day lunch overlooking the dense forests and the hills and the holy river flowing by.

    Looking for the perfect gift? There are a ton of creative and fun things to do together.

    As Father’s Day nears, we have no doubt that you have already taken the time to curate the perfect gift for dear old dad and have crafted just the right caption to accompany the photo of you two that you’ll share on Instagram. But, if you are running out of ideas for how to spend the special day with your number one guy, we have just the Father’s Day activities to help you create new experiences together.

    This year, you can add some extra pizazz to your Father’s Day plans by surprising dad with a unique activity that includes the entire family. Chilling at home and working on DIY crafts could be just the thing to make his day. Or, you could treat him to a day of relaxation by planning a spa day or allowing him to become one with nature on a fishing trip.

    Whatever it is Dad will like, we’ve got you covered. Our list is filled with creative ideas ranging from kid-friendly to adults-only! If the dad or father figure in your life has a knack for cars, loves a good steak or prides himself on his athlete heydays, we have just the game, outing or hobby to bring you all even closer. And yep, we’ve got a ton of great last-minute and free ideas, too! Once you’re done having fun all day, be sure to plan a special Father’s Day dinner or dessert, and finish the night off by watching a movie Dad will love.

    How to have fun with your dad

    How to Make Your Parents Happy: 10 Easy Things to Do for .

    As the saying goes, blood is thicker than water. You can’t really describe relations like blood relations. In today’s hectic life, it’s only getting harder to stay close to your parents. The Internet doesn’t necessarily help either, to some it gives a sense of false distance that isn’t the same as actually being both physically and emotionally close. How to make your parents happy? Understand what would content your parents, often times it’s the little things that bring light to their life and keep your relation with them strong.

    How to have fun with your dad

    How to Make Your Parents Happy: 10 Easy Things to Do for All Ages

    Understand them

    Parental love is timeless. Since you are young, they love you despite keeping them awake all night when you cried, your personal needs replace their weekend social parties, extra chores done to keep up with the mess you make and tolerate all your noisy rambling. They love you unconditionally. The only reason they often impose restrictions on how you led your life is to make sure your future of safety and happiness is secured. As you get more mature, you would better understand your parent’s point of view. Only then would you be thankful for their effort and unwavering love.

    Spend some time

    There is nothing that brings more joy to parents than spending meaningful time with their parents. As you grow up, you tend to end up avoiding them for your own clique of friends or school activities. As you start to leave, loneliness would start to hit them. In a way that fear of you leaving might often mean them being stricter to you, all in order to have you around longer. When you did leave one day, never forget to spend time with your parents. Visit them on a weekend or take them out for dinner. They will be happy as long as you are there for them.

    Show gratitude

    No doubt parents had done plenty for you, uncountable sweat and blood into raising. They are the reason you get to live carefree with a proper education and a well-deserved job after. For all the things they did for you, nothing was ever expected in return. Why not show your gratitude to them every now and then? Send them flowers, physically visit them, give them more memories worth cherishing in return.

    Share their problems

    If you notice that your parents look overly stressed, ask them about what’s wrong and if there’s anything you can help them with. Most likely they won’t share the problems with you since they would rather not spread the stress over to their children. But if they do decide to share it with you, listen carefully. If you are their main concern, listen to what they had to say and learn how you could improve yourself. While you could get irritated by the lectures, remember that this is all done for your own good. They aren’t reprimanding you in this case, but often more of complaining. Hey, parents have a need to complain about their life too. Whether they chose to share it with you or not, the fact that you are showing concern should cheer them up a bunch.

    Do little things for them

    Take note of the special events through the year. Birthdays, Mother’s or Father’s day, wedding anniversary, or even the day you are moving out of the old house. Make or get them a gift, which doesn’t have to be anything remarkable. It’s the thoughts that count. If you have no idea for the right gifts, then take them out for a nice lunch.

    If you are visiting them over for dinner, praise the cooking, help them wash the dishes after. Handmade gifts are excellent; such as scrapbooks or simply a thank you card. Little affectionate things like these convey your love and respect for your parents.

    Never argue

    You are bound to argue with your parents on the day. There is no denying it. Once you hit teenhood, you will actively retort your parents, since you think you know things better than them. But keep in mind that they are still much older than you, which means more life experience that you still have plenty of catching up to do. If you do need to argue, just keep in mind that you are not likely to win the big authority in the house and further pursuing the matter will only worsen your position and hurt their feelings. Remember, at the end of the day, whatever they are doing is for your own good.

    Do well in school

    The best way on how to make your parents happy is to do well in school. That’s your main job as a student anyway, to dedicate yourself to studying. Parents want to show off their children’s assignment too, so give them something they can be proud of for their effort. You don’t have to be on the honor roll, being active in school activities and caring about scoring relatively well is often sufficient.

    Skipping school is a big no. This creates a rift of mistrust between you and your parents. Why should they give you more freedom in return if they can’t even be sure you will be in school when expected?

    If you are struggling with a subject, be honest and get some assistance from your parents. This reflects well on your level of maturity and desire to perform at school.

    Lastly, be good not only at home but also in the class. Well-graded students do not warrant a lack of behavioral issues. Having teachers only have excellent things to say about you is certain to get your parents happy and proud of you.

    Apologies when you step out of line

    Do not let your ego get to you. Be mature about your mistakes and faults. Blood relations are built on tolerations and love. You are never equal to your parents, and they are still someone you are expected to look up to and respect. Your parents do not expect perfection from you, but being honest with yourself will make he them happy.

    Being stubborn about your reason for stepping out of line would get you nowhere. You could either be right or wrong, be defensive however would stop you from learning from your past mistakes.

    When you are truly sorry, be sincere apologizing it.This goes a long way in building back the relationship towards a closer, strongly bonded one.

    Send them letters

    Compared to emails, letters have a more personal feel to it, being handwritten and such. Especially if you do not live that close to your parents. Take your time to write a letter that reflects your emotions. It will be a nice surprise to them that they would certainly love. Attached a picture with the letters. So they could have something with your face on it to keep around. Maybe have a picture taken with your children and partner as well. Your parents will be delighted to see how well your family is doing.

    Give them your first month’s salary

    This one is an interesting idea that parents would certainly love. But of course, they would refuse it profusely. The point is not the money itself, but to show them that you have finally reached that point of independence. All of it thanks to your parents.

    Staying connected as kids approach the teen years and become more independent may become a challenge for parents, but it’s as important as ever — if not more so now.

    While activities at school, new interests, and a growing social life become more important to growing kids, parents are still the anchors, providing love, guidance, and support.

    And that connection provides a sense of security and helps build the resilience kids needs to roll with life’s ups and downs.

    What to Expect

    Your preteen may act as if your guidance isn’t welcome or needed, and even seem embarrassed by you at times. This is when kids start to confide more in peers and request their space and privacy — expect the bedroom door to be shut more often.

    As hard as it might be to swallow these changes, try not to take them personally. They’re all signs of growing independence. The best way to weather them is through balance: allow growing room by expanding boundaries, but continue to enforce important house rules and family values. For example, a child who asks for more privacy might be allowed to earn the privilege getting a bedroom door lock by doing some household chores for a set amount of time.

    But you don’t have to let go entirely. You’re still a powerful influence — it’s just that your preteen might be more responsive to the example you set rather than the instructions you give. So practice what you’d like to preach; just preach it a little less for now.

    Modeling the qualities that you want your preteen to learn and practice — respectful communication, kindness, healthy eating, and fulfilling everyday responsibilities without complaining — makes it more likely that your son or daughter will comply.

    page 2

    What You Can Do

    Small, simple things can reinforce connection. Make room in your schedule for special times, take advantage of the routines you already share, and show that you care.

    Here are some tips:

    • Family meals: It may seem like a chore to prepare a meal, particularly after a long day. But a shared family meal provides valuable together time. So schedule it and organize it just as you would any other activity. Even if you have to pick up something pre-made, sit down together to eat it. Turn off the TV and try to tune out the ringing phone. If it’s impossible to do every night, schedule a regular weekly family dinner night that accommodates kids’ schedules. Make it something fun, and get everyone involved in the preparation and the cleanup. Sharing an activity helps build closeness and connection, and everyone pitching in reinforces a sense of responsibility and teamwork.
    • Bedtime and goodnight: Your child may not need to be tucked in anymore, but maintaining a consistent bedtime routine helps preteens get the sleep needed to grow healthy and strong. So work in some winding-down time together before the lights go out. Read together. Go over the highlights of the day and talk about tomorrow. And even if your preteen has outgrown the tuck-in routine, there’s still a place for a goodnight kiss or hug. If it’s shrugged off, try a gentle hand on the shoulder or back as you wish your child a good night’s sleep.
    • Share ordinary time: Find little things that let you just hang out together. Invite your preteen to come with you to walk the dog. Invite yourself along on his or her run. Washing the car, baking cookies, renting movies, watching a favorite TV show — all are opportunities to enjoy each other’s company. And they’re chances for kids to talk about what’s on their mind. Even riding in the car is an opportunity to connect. When you’re driving, your preteen may be more inclined to mention a troubling issue. Since you’re focused on the road, he or she doesn’t have to make eye contact, which can ease any discomfort about opening up.
    • Create special time: Make a tradition out of celebrating family milestones beyond birthdays and holidays. Marking smaller occasions like a good report card or a winning soccer game helps reinforce family bonds.
    • Show affection: Don’t underestimate the value of saying and showing how much you love your preteen. Doing so ensures that kids feel secure and loved. And you’re demonstrating healthy ways to show affection. Still, preteens may start to feel self-conscious about big displays of affection from parents, especially in public. They may pull away from your hug and kiss, but it’s not about you. Just reserve this type of affection for times when friends aren’t around. And in public, find other ways to show that you care. A smile or a wave can convey a warm send-off while respecting boundaries. Recognize out loud your child’s wonderful qualities and developing skills when you see them. You might say, “That’s a beautiful drawing — you’re really very artistic” or “You were great at baseball practice today — I loved watching you out there.”
    • Stay involved: Stay involved in your preteen’s expanding pursuits. Getting involved gives you more time together and shared experiences. You don’t have to be the Scout leader, homeroom mom, or soccer coach to be involved. And your child may want to do more activities where you’re not in charge. That’s OK. Go to games and practices when you can; when you can’t, ask how things went and listen attentively. Help kids talk through the disappointments, and be sympathetic about the missed fly ball that won the game for the other team. Your attitude about setbacks will teach your preteen to accept and feel OK about them, and to summon the courage to try again.
    • Stay interested: Stay interested and curious about your preteen’s ideas, feelings, and experiences. If you listen to what he or she is saying, you’ll get a better sense of the guidance, perspective, and support needed. And responding in a nonjudgmental way means your child will be more likely to come to you anytime tough issues arise.
    • Manage electronic devices: As kids get older, they’re more likely to have (and increasingly use) their own tablets, laptops, or phones. While some electronics use is a helpful way for preteens to stay connected with their friends, excessive or unrestricted use can lead to challenges and reduce the quality and frequency of family time. Set limits consistent with your values while allowing freedom within those limits. For example, don’t spy on social media and text conversations unless it’s necessary for your child’s safety and well-being. Apps, programs, and modems (like Circle with Disney) can help you enforce boundaries. Finally, make sure that you model healthy electronics use.
    • Shift your communication style: Your preteen’s newfound independence will probably lead to some important changes in communication. While a young child might appreciate you solving a problem with his friend by calling their mother, a preteen will find this solution hard to swallow. For many preteens, the point of discussing a life challenge with a parent is no longer about parent problem-solving; it’s about listening and support. You might feel the urge to solve every problem your preteen mentions (or call their teachers or friends to deal with it directly), but for small problems, remember that they might be looking for a place to vent and the support to figure it out on their own. When you hear about a problem that doesn’t need an adult solution, try saying something like, “That sounds really tough, I can see why it would make you angry. I’m here for you if you need anything or want to talk about it a little more.” If they want help, they’ll ask you for it. But your support, listening, and empathy will help them feel empowered to find solutions on their own.
    1. How to Tell My Overprotective Parents That I Have a Boyfriend
    2. How to Tell Your Parents About a Long-Distance Relationship
    3. How to Deal With Strict Parents
    4. Funny Things to Do at a Fiftieth Wedding Anniversary for Your Parents
    5. How to Be More Comfortable With Affection

    How to have fun with your dad

    The relationship between parents and their sons and daughters can deteriorate due to a lack of proper communication. When children become adults, they often find they have stopped having meaningful conversations with their parents. Conflict often arises from parents thinking they know what is best for their offspring who often want something different in life. It is important to work on achieving healthy communication with your parents to maintain a strong relationship with them.

    Step 1

    Make time to have meaningful conversations with your parents. One of the biggest threats to parent-child communication is generational differences in communication. The newer generations often reach out to others through technology, such as text messages, online chats or email. There is much less face-to-face contact. Although the older generation is catching on, most still prefer a personal conversation or phone call. Consider that your parents’ generation has a stronger need for person-to-person conversation. Take the time to sit down and have a few minutes of conversation with them everyday. If you live some distance away, make it a goal to call them at least three times a week or video chat frequently. Keep in mind that text messages can often be misinterpreted by the receiver because there is no tone or facial expression to provide context.

    Step 2

    Be open and honest with your parents. Families often stop communicating because it is easier to ignore an issue than to have a conversation about it. If an issue is important to you, bring it up to your parents. Bottling up emotions or annoyances can deteriorate the relationship that you have with them. Always communicate your feelings in a calm and neutral tone. Avoid getting trapped in the blame game. Use “I” statements that talk about how you feel, and avoid “you” statements that point fingers at other people. Allow time for them to respond and share how they feel.

    Step 3

    Use the PEN method to facilitate difficult conversations with your parents. The PEN (pause, empathy, needs) method was developed to prevent conflict and violence when communicating. If a certain conversation with your parents is taking a turn for the worse, start by taking pause. Practice deep breathing, excuse yourself for a couple of minutes or drink a cold glass of water if you are becoming agitated. When you are ready to continue with the conversation, listen to your parents’ needs or wants and empathize with them. Inform them that although you understand their point of view, you also have your own needs and wants. The next step is to express your perspective and ask them to try and empathize with you as well.

    Step 4

    Don’t just talk about the difficult stuff. Talk to your parents about your everyday life, funny experiences and other trivial things. Encourage them to share how their day went or what they are working on. Most of your conversations with your parents should be light-hearted, humorous and spontaneous. You don’t want to talk to them only when you are faced with an issue. Regular communication about the less important things will make the difficult conversations much easier.

    How to be a Great Dad – 12 Awesome Tips

    Post written by Leo Babauta.

    I’m often asked about raising six kids, and being productive and achieving goals and changing habits in the midst of raising so many kids. But here’s the thing: I do all the other stuff, the productivity stuff, because of my kids.

    They, and my wife, are my reason for being.

    It is my lifelong goal to be the best dad possible, and while there are many ways I can still improve, I think I’m a pretty great dad already, when I sit back and think about it. I know there are some readers who are just starting out in their careers as dads, and this post is for you.

    How can you be a great dad? As always, my list of tips:

    1. Put their interests first, always. Do you enjoy drinking or smoking? Guess what — it’s not good for them, and you’re setting an example with everything you do. I quit smoking about 18 months ago not for my sake, but for my kids. Now, it is still important to take care of yourself (otherwise you can’t take care of them), but you should still have them in mind.
    2. Protect them. As a dad, one of your main roles is protector. There are many ways you need to do this. Safety is one: child-proof your home, teach them good safety habits, set a good example by using your seatbelt, make sure they use a car seat if below a certain age & weight, etc. But financial protection is also important: have life insurance, car insurance, an emergency fund, a will.
    3. Spend your spare time with them. When we get home from work, often we’re tired and just want to relax. But this is the only time we have with them during the weekdays, often, and you shouldn’t waste it. Take this time to find out about their day, lay on the couch with them. On weekends, devote as much time as possible to them. While work may be your passion, it won’t be long before they’re grown and no longer want to spend time with you. Take advantage of these years. The thing kids want most from their dads is their time.
    4. Give them hugs. Dads shouldn’t be afraid to show affection. Kids need physical contact, and not just from their moms. Snuggle with them, hug them, love them.
    5. Play with them. Go outside and play sports. Do a treasure hunt. Have a pillow fight. Play Transformers or Pokemon with them. Don’t just watch TV. Show them how to have fun. See 100 Ways to Have Fun with Your Kids for Free or Cheap.
    6. Do the “mom” stuff. Things that are traditionally considered “mom” duties are not just for moms anymore — changing diapers, feeding, bathing, rocking them to sleep in the middle of the night. Dads should help out as much as they can, sharing these types of duties equally if possible. And in fact, if you’re a dad of a baby, this is the perfect time to bond with your child. You should leap at the chance to do these things, because that’s how you start a life-long close relationship with your child.
    7. Read to them. This is one of the most important things you can do for your child. First of all, it’s so much fun. Kids books are really cool, and it’s great when you can share something this wonderful with your child. Second, you are teaching them one of the most fundamentally important skills (reading) that will pay off dividends for life. And third, you are spending time with them, you’re sitting or lying close together, and you are enjoying each other’s company. See the Best All-Time Children’s Books.
    8. Stand by mom. Don’t contradict their mother in front of them, don’t fight with her in front of them, and most definitely don’t ever abuse her. How you treat their mother affects their self-esteem, and the way they will treat themselves and women when they grow up. Be kind and respectful and loving of their mother. And always work as a team — never contradicting statements of the other.
    9. Teach them self-esteem. Maybe this should be No. 1. Well, these aren’t in any order, but this is one of the most important points. There is nothing you can do that is better than giving them high self-esteem. How do you do this? A million ways, but mainly by showing them (not telling them) that you value them, by spending time with them, by talking and listening to them, by praising things they do, by teaching them (not telling them) how to be competent. Praise and encourage, don’t reprimand and discourage.
    10. Teach them about finances. This is a point often missed in articles about dadhood. You might not need to teach your 1-year-old about index funds or portfolio diversity, but from an early age, you can teach them the value of money, how to save money to reach a goal, and later, how earn money and how to manage money properly. You don’t want your child to go into the world knowing as little as you did, do you?
    11. Be good to yourself. You shouldn’t give up your entire life when you become a dad. You need to take care of yourself, give yourself some alone time, and some time with your buddies, in order to be a great dad when you’re with your kids. Also take care of your health — eat healthy, exercise — because 1) you can’t take care of your kids if you’re sickly, 2) you are teaching your kids how to be healthy for life, and 3) you want to enjoy those grandkids someday.
    12. Be good to the mom. This isn’t the same as No. 8 — you should be good to their mom even when they’re not looking. Take her to dinner, give her a massage, do chores around the house for her, give her some time alone and babysit while she goes out, show affection to her, give her little surprises. Because when mom’s happy, the kids are happy. And dad will be happy too!

    As a parent, you want the best for your children so they have happy, healthy lives. But good health isn’t just about preventing sickness. It’s also about maintaining healthy relationships. The relationships that parents forge with their kids are just as important as proper nutrition for long-term, overall health. This is especially true of the unique bond between fathers and daughters. Often, as the first man present in a young girl’s life, fathers have a special responsibility to model respect, openness and appreciation toward their daughters. By letting your little girl know she’s valued and loved, you can establish a positive precedent for her subsequent male relationships, and one of the best ways to do that is by spending time with her. This is especially true as she enters adolescence, which can be a challenging time. Having special father-daughter activities can bridge communication gaps and build more meaningful bonds.

    Read the next page to learn how to teach your daughter about nature in the modern age.

    10: Explore Nature

    Yeah, we know — the only free time your daughter seems to be able to spend with you is during the 15- to 30-second increments she has between texts. So turn off the TV, leave your tablet computers at home, put the smartphones away and explore a different environment. Take your daughter outdoors and teach her how to appreciate the beauty of nature. In doing so, you may find that spending time away from the hubbub of the rest of the family and all your gadgets can help you broach and talk about difficult subjects.

    Go for a hike in the woods, spend time at a nature preserve or walk along your favorite beach. Teach your daughter how to identify trees or look for animals. If you need more structure, try the sport of orienteering, which can help teach your daughter map-reading and navigation skills, and is a sport you can do together as she grows older.

    Orienteering is like a scavenger hunt in the woods. Using a map and compass, you race to navigate through a course of checkpoints. Look for events in your area at Orienteering USA’s Web site.

    How to have fun with your dad

    • Share
    • Pin it
    • Tweet
    • Share
    • Email

    “My father is a man like no other. He gave me life, nurtured me, taught me, hugged me, dressed me, kissed me, shouted at me, but most importantly he loved me unconditionally.” – Anonymous

    Over the years I’ve come to realize just how much my dad has done for me and I’m extremely grateful for him. My dad is my hero.

    I truly believe that my father is an awesome man. Dad’s possess certain qualities that just make them outstanding. A good father makes all the difference in a child’s life!

    Do you think your dad is a truly awesome man? If so, here are some signs that you should be incredibly grateful to still have your father around!

    1. He is a handy man.

    He’s the person you go to when your bike tire needs to be patched or if your shower head has broken off. Your dad most likely has his own tool bag and can fix almost anything that you break!

    2. He is open minded.

    A good dad understands that the world is continuing to change and so are the people. He doesn’t try to keep the 1970’s in style, but instead he conforms to the new way of living and allows his children to be citizens in their day and age – use social media, use current lingo, etc.

    3. He has a good sense of humor.

    My dad is usually the one cracking the jokes and smiling all the time. You know when your dad is enjoying himself at a dinner party because you can hear his hearty laugh from across the kitchen!

    Awesome dads tend to have a great sense of humor and they don’t always take everything in life so seriously.

    4. He believes in you.

    Has your dad ever invested himself into something you wanted to do? Has he ever told you he’s confident in your ability to attain that certain goal?

    This is just a clear sign that your father believes in what you stand for, what you want to accomplish in life and ultimately, in you.

    5. He is one of your best friends.

    He’s one of the first people to know about something new happening in your life and you regularly chat and hang out with him. You can talk to him about whatever is on your mind and he always shares some of his stories and fatherly wisdom with you.

    6. He treats your mom like a queen.

    A great father respects, values and thinks highly of his children’s mother. You even know what true love looks like because your dad expresses it everyday to his wife.

    He’s always singing sweet songs to her, he goes out of his way to please her and he always treats her with tenderness and care.

    7. He is a good disciplinarian.

    Awesome dads love their children but they won’t let them get away with first degree murder.

    He uses tough love through the power of his words and actions to prove his point, but he’d never try to scar you internally or externally to teach you a lesson.

    8. He accepts your flaws and mistakes.

    I remember the only time I’ve ever been arrested, I expected my dad to beat the hell out of me. To my surprise I didn’t get a whooping, but instead he felt sympathetic to my position and accepted the circumstances of the situation.

    9. He is dependable.

    He’s one of the only people that can be counted on to be there for you and your family through thick and thin.

    10. You and your dad spend quality time together.

    He was always there on the bench watching and supporting you at your sporting events. Other times you’d need help with your homework and he’d always make the time to help you, every night if necessary.

    11. He is a role model.

    He has great character. He doesn’t just tell you how you should go about living your life, he shows you. He’s kind to your mom, patient with you, works hard at his job…

    He presents himself appropriately at all times and never does things he wouldn’t want you to do. He lives by the values he’d like his children to embody for themselves.

    12. He has an unselfish spirit.

    He’s always doing things in the best interest and needs of his spouse and children. If your dad is always giving to others this is just a clear sign that he is an unselfish person.

    Awesome dads tend to put the best interests of those close to him first, over their own.

    13. He gives great advice.

    If you have some sort of issue, you can go to your dad for his advice.

    He takes the time to listen to your problems with opens ears and an open heart, and then he always comes up with a possible solution for you to take away.

    14. He is loved by everyone.

    Everyone wants your dad to attend that special occasion and if he’s not there yet, they’re always wondering where he could be.

    Even your friends don’t mind having your dad hang around with them playing Call of Duty! He’s an enjoyable person to be around.

    15. He protects his family at all costs.

    Your dad is the man of the house. He’s a steady provider and works to see that his family has all the necessities of life. He will do whatever it takes to make sure his family is living comfortably.

    This means he might get two jobs just to pay off all of the bills, but he gets them because he wants you to sleep in an air conditioned room.

    Your dad has built a strong foundation from which to help raise you into the best person you can become.

    16. You can’t imagine how you would’ve turned out without your dad.

    I definitely know I can’t.

    My dad has been such a powerful and impactful force within my life that I have no clue how I would’ve turned out without him.

    I just wanted to say thank you dad for all that you’ve done, you are truly awesome.

    Go tell your dad today how much you appreciate him!

    Most of these ideas can be pulled together last minute and done at home.

    As June 19 rolls around, it’s that time of the year to show the dad in your life some extra love. While a thoughtful card, personalized gift, or a simple phone call can show how grateful you are for all that your dad does for you, there is something extra special about planning specific Father’s Day activities. Whether you are celebrating your grandpa, step-dad, father-in-law, uncle, or son who’s a dad himself, figuring out what to do for Father’s Day will be a breeze with these ideas — even if you are planning something at the last minute.

    These at home Father’s Day activities are fun for the whole family, no matter what kind of guy Dad is. You can surprise him with a hike at a nearby trail, or watch a Father’s Day movie so he can sit back and relax with his favorite people. After all, quality time with his family is about the best gift you can give him on Father’s Day. But if you want to get him a little something else, there are more than a few unique Father’s Day gifts, easy Father’s Day crafts, and even printable Father’s Day cards you can download at home to save time (and money). Pair with any of the following fun Father’s Day activities, and you’re sure to make Dad’s day this year.

    How to have fun with your dad

    Sure, Dad could probably scroll through Facebook or Instagram and marvel at his favorite family photos. And yes, digital picture frames are certainly a thing. But sometimes, there’s nothing better than putting together a one-of-a-kind scrapbook that highlights your family in all their hilarious, goofy, loving glory. Dad will no doubt love picking out his favorite pictures and writing descriptions of some of his favorite family memories.

    How to have fun with your dad

    Maybe your dad isn’t ready to leave his garage band playing days in the past. Or maybe he has always wanted to learn to play the piano or the guitar. Either way, if your dad is the musical type, he would no doubt love the opportunity to learn how to play a new inst